Beruflich Dokumente
Kultur Dokumente
SERVICE MANUAL
CODE: 00ZMX3500NS2E
MX-3500N/4500N
MX-3501N/4501N
MODEL
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1]
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
[7]
SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
[8]
[9]
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
[J]
Parts marked with " " are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.
SHARP CORPORATION
CONTENTS
NOTE FOR SERVICING
1. Precautions for servicing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
2. Warning for servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
3. Note for installing site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i
[1]
PRODUCT OUTLINE
1. Product features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
2. Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
[2]
SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2. Functional specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
3. Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
[3]
CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
2. Maintenance parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
3. Production number identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4
[5]
[6]
ADJUSTMENTS
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
2. Adjustment item list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
3. Details of adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-2
[7]
SIMULATION
1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
2. List of simulation codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
3. Details of simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
[8]
[9]
MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance system table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-1
2. Details of maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-4
3. Other related items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15
ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Actual wiring chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
3. Signal list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
[E]
[F]
F-1
F-2
F-2
F-4
[G]
DUPLEX SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . G-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . G-7
[H]
LSU SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . H-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-5
[i]
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . . i-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-6
[J]
[K]
DEVELOPING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . K-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-2
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . K-5
[L]
TRANSFER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . L-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . L-10
[M]
[N]
FUSING SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . . N-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-3
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N-9
[12] OTHERS
1. System settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
2. Paper JAM code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
DETAILS OF EACH SECTION
[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
[B]
OPERATION PANEL
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . . B-1
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
[O]
[C]
SCANNER SECTION
1. Electrical and mechanism relation diagram . . . . . . .
2. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-7
[P]
D-1
D-2
D-2
D-7
DRIVE SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-1
2. Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P-6
[Q]
PWB SECTION
1. Disassembly and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Q-1
[R]
[S]
[D]
MX3500N
Gas tube
Service
Manual
Lightning conductor
6)
2)
7)
4)
5)
6)
Place of high temperature, high humidity, low temperature, low humidity, place under an extreme change in temperature and humidity.
Paper may get damp and form dews inside the machine, causing paper jam or copy dirt.
For operating and storing conditions, refer to the specifications
described later.
With wet or oily hands, do not touch the power plug, do not
insert the telephone line jack, do not operate the machine, or
do not perform servicing.
It may cause an electric shock.
8)
9)
2)
10) When replacing the lithium battery of the PWB, use a specified
one only.
If a battery of different specification is used, it may be broken,
causing breakdown or malfunction of the machine.
11) When carrying a unit with PWB or electronic parts installed to
it, be sure to put it in an anti-static-electricity bag.
It may cause a breakdown or malfunctions.
2)
3)
4)
4)
5)
6)
7)
30 cm
30 cm
8)
45 cm
MX3500N
(2)
Environmental
Service
Manual features
Energy saving design by pre-heat mode/auto power shut-off
mode.
1. Product features
A. Features
(1) Features
1)
2)
The power consumption for FAX standby with the power OFF
is 1W or less, reducing energy expenses of nighttime and load
to the environment.
3)
4)
5)
6)
4 : May 15 2006
2. Configuration
A. Lineup (Main unit and option)
RSPF
8. Punch module
2-hole (MX-PNX1A)
3-hole (MX-PNX1B)
4-hole (MX-PNX1C)
4-hole (broad space)
(MX-PNX1D)
5. Paper pass unit
(MX-RBX1)
DSPF
*&&
Copier/Printer
/Scanner model
Copier/Printer
/Scanner model
(MX-3500N)
(MX-4500N)
(MX-3501N)
(MX-4501N)
1. Stand/1x500 sheet
paper drawer
(MX-DEX3)
13. Commercial
version
CD
HDD
9. Punch module
2-hole (AR-PN1A)
3-hole (AR-PN1B)
4-hole (AR-PN1C)
4-hole (broad space)
(AR-PN1D)
PCL5c/PCL6 Network
scanner
driver
(Sharpdesk 1 license)
14. CC authentication
version
2. Stand/2x500 sheet
paper drawer
(MX-DEX4)
15. PS3
expansion
kit
17. Sharpdesk
1 license kit
18. Sharpdesk
5 license kit
ROM
(AR-PF1)
CD
Security
ROM
Security
ROM
(MX-PKX1)
For document
control PWB
(MX-FRX2U)
For document
control PWB
CD
CD
(MX-FWX1)
(MX-USX1/
USX5)
19. Sharpdesk
10 license kit
20. Sharpdesk
50 license kit
21. Sharpdesk
100 license kit
CD
CD
CD
(MX-US10/
US50)
(MX-USA0)
(MX-AMX1)
22. Application
integration
module
(MX-FRX2)
4 : May 15 2006
B. Machine configuration
MX-3500N/MX-4500N
Copier memory (Local memory) (MB)
Printer memory (System memory) (MB)
Copier
GDI printer
PCL printer
PS printer
EFI printer
Main body LCD
FAX
Scanner
Filing
HDD
RSPF
DSPF
Automatic duplex
Security
Internet Fax
MX-3501N/MX-4501N
768
640
STD
STD
STD
OP*1
OP
MONOCHROME HVGA 8.9"
OP*2
STD
STD
STD
STD
STD
STD
OP*1
OP*1
Name
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Model name
MX-DEX3
MX-DEX4
MX-LCX1
MX-TRX2
MX-RBX1
MX-FNX2
MX-FNX1
MX-PNX1 A/B/C/D
AR-PN1 A/B/C/D
MX-SCX1
AR-SC2
AR-PF1
MX-FRX2U
MX-FRX2
MX-PKX1
MX-FWX1
MX-USX1
MX-USX5
MX-US10
MX-US50
MX-USA0
MX-AMX1
MX-FXX1
MX-3500N/3501N
MX-4500N/4501N
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT
OPT*1
Remarks
(A4)
(Inner finisher)
(Common in current models)
(Approx. 5000 x 3)
(Approx. 5000 x 3)
(Conventional model)
(Commercial version)
(Authentication version)
(Internet Fax)
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
MX3500N
(4) ShifterManual
Service
Type
Paper weight
Paper size
1. Basic specifications
A. Base engine
Shifter
55 209g/m2 (17 56 lbs)
Non offset
A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
mode
16K, 16KR,11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
(Normal
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
output)
5.5 x 8.5R, Envelope, Extra
Offset
A3, B4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, Postcard, 8K,
mode
16K, 16KR, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x
8.5R (Not Envelope, Extra)
Non-offset
MX-3500N
B/W
35cpm
(Normal
Color
35cpm
output)
MX-4500N
B/W
45cpm
Color
35cpm
Offset
MX-3500N
B/W
35cpm
mode
Color
35cpm
MX-4500N
B/W
45cpm
Color
35cpm
30mm
Horizontal
Vertical
Between
direction
direction
Jobs
Non-offset
Not drop from
the tray.
Offset
Within 50mm
Within
Min.10mm
mode
10mm
(1) Type
Type
Color support
Desk-top
Full color
Productivity
(A4, 8.5x11)
MX-4500N
MX-4501N
B/W
Color
20
17
22
20
32
25
45
35
30
25
19
16
MX-3500N
MX-3501N
B/W
Color
17
17
20
20
25
25
35
35
25
25
16
16
MX-4500N
MX-4501N
B/W
Color
19
15
20
16
22
18
41
29
41
31
30
20
30
21
30
22
32
25
15
14
12
10
19
15
16
15
15
14
15
8
8
14
8
8
MX-3500N
MX-3501N
B/W
Color
16
15
17
16
18
18
31
29
31
31
25
20
25
21
25
22
25
25
15
14
12
10
16
15
16
15
15
14
15
8
8
14
8
8
Copying method
Developing system
Charging system
Transfer system
Cleaning system
Fusing system
Waste toner disposal
(5)
Engine resolution
Resolution
Writing:
600 x 600dpi
1200 x 600dpi (Monochome printing only.)
* Rotation output not allowed at 1200dpi x 600dpi. PS
expansion kit needed.
None
Smoothing
function
Gradation
(6)
Warmup time
Pre-heat
(7)
(8)
Writing:
Monochrome: 2 levels (1bit) * 256 levels equivalent
Color: Each color 2 levels (1bit) / Each color 16 levels
(4bits) * 256 levels equivalent
Warmup
240 sec or less
* The value may be increased if process-control
processing is being executed.
Yes
Photoconductor kind
Offset range
Range of error
(In using the
recommended
paper, A4/8.5
x 11)
Approx.
60 sec
Printable area
A3
B4
A4
B5
A5
7.25 x 10.5
Postcard
293 x 413mm
253 x 357mm
206 x 290mm
178 x 250mm
144 x 203mm
180 x 260mm
96 x 141mm
12 x 18 *
11 x 17
8.5 x 14
8.5 x 13
8.5 x 11
5.5 x 8.5
8K
16K
279 x 432mm
275 x 425mm
212 x 349mm
212 x 323mm
212 x 272mm
136 x 209mm
266 x 383mm
191 x 263mm
(9)
Void area
Void area
Image loss
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 1
Top: 4 mm or less
Bottom: 3 mm or less
FR Total: 4 mm or less
Detection of
Remaining Paper
100V type
100 127V 12A
50/60Hz
Fixed type (direct)
Voltage / Current
Frequency
Power source
code
Power switch
200V type
220 240V 8A
(3)
Paper Size
Inlet type
200V type
1.84kW
Changing of
paper size
Paper type setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
(12) Noise
In action
Standby
B/W
Color
B/W
: 63dB or less
: 63dB or less
: 55dB or less
(13) Dimensions
Paper capacity
MX-3500N/MX-4500N
645 x 670 x 950mm
(25 25/64 x 26 3/8 x
37 26/64 inch)
645 x 670mm
(25 25/64 x 26 3/8 inch)
MX-3501N/MX-4501N
645 x 670 x 960mm
25 25/64 x 26 3/8 x
37 51/64 inch)
645 x 670mm
(25 25/64 x 26 3/8 inch)
MX-3500N/MX-4500N
Approx. 114kg (251lbs)
Approx. 119kg (262lbs)
MX-3501N/MX-4501N
Approx.123kg (271lbs)
Approx.128kg (282lbs)
Outer dimensions
(W x D x H)
Footprint (W x D)
(14) Weight
Main unit
Main unit +
Developer +
Toner cartridge
Paper Type
Paper size
detection
MX-3500N/MX-4500N
MX-3501N/MX-4501N
W1075 x D 670mm (W42 21/64 x D26 3/8 inch)
Feeding method
Heater (Engine part)
Changing of paper
size
Paper type setting
Default paper size
setting
Feedable paper
type/weight
Paper capacity
Paper Type
(4)
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x
11R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
Envelope (Monarch / Com-10 / DL / C5 / Rectangle 3 /
Western 2 / Western 4)
Extra Size (Tab paper is limited to A4; tab width
12mm-20mm / 8.5 x 11; tab width 6.1-17mm)
Guide adjustment by users
Yes
Thin paper: 55 59g/m2 (15 16 lbs)
Plain paper: 60 105g/m2 (16 28 lbs)
Heavy Paper: 106 209g/m2 (28 56 lbs)
Envelope: 75 90g/m2 (20 24 lbs)
OHP
Label paper
Tab paper
Gloss Paper
Standard paper: 100 sheets
Envelope: 20 sheets
OHP: 20 sheets
Heavy paper: 40 sheets
Tab paper: 20 sheets
Gloss paper: 20 sheets *
Other special paper: 1 sheet
* The gloss paper is sucked under a high
temperature environment to cause double feed or
misfeed. In such a case, manually supply paper
sheet by sheet (Select heavy paper).
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (Excluding back print
paper), recycled paper, letter head, pre-punched
paper, colored paper, heavy paper, thin paper, label
paper, OHP, tab paper, envelope.
* Users can set up all of these paper types.
Auto Detect
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8.5 x
Auto-AB
13, Postcard, 8.5 x 11, 11 x 17
Auto Detect
12 x 18, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11,
Auto-Inch
8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5R, 7.25 x 10.5R,
A3, B4, A4, B5
For China
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 11 x
17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8K, 16K
yes or no only
Double-sided
Method
Paper size
Paper type
Paper weight
(for duplex operation)
Logo paper support
(5)
Non-Stack
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, 8K, 16K, 16KR,
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R,
8.5 x 5.5R
Plain paper, pre-printed paper (not including
backing paper), recycled paper, letter head, prepunched paper, colored paper
Plain paper: 60-105g/m2 (16-28 lbs)
Heavy paper: 106-209g/m2 (28-56 lbs)
For paper such as letterhead paper with frontback attributes, the engine control must be cared
for printing side.
Exit location/method
Exit capacity
Exit paper size/type
Exit paper detection
Exit tray full
detection
Shifting function
Rotation sort
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 2
Document
weights
* Option (MX-TRX2)
Form
Transport standard
Ejecting location/
method
Tray capacity
Ejected paper size/
type
Full tray detection
Shifter
Dimensions
Weight
Installation/
maintenance
Optional detection
Packaged items
1-side
2-side
Document carrying
capacity
Types of document
that may not be
transported
Paper detection
Paper detection size
Fax
Scanner
Internet
Fax
Document setup
direction
Document standard
location
Document transport
method
Document sizes
Paper feeding
direction
Document inversion
Simultaneous doublesided scanning
(8)
Form
Scan speed
Copy
Fax
Scanner
Internet
Fax
Document standard
location
Document sizes
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 3
Document
weights
1-side
2-side
Document carrying
capacity
Types of document
that may not be
transported
Paper detection
Paper detection size
Paper feeding
direction
Document inversion
Simultaneous doublesided scanning
(2)
Original cover
Scan Range
Original Cover
Standard
Location
Detection
Detection Size
Heater
(Scanner part)
(1)
Type
System
C. Scanner section
(1) Resolution/Gradation (or Levels)
Original
Cover
RSPF/
DSPF
Copy mode
Monochrome
Color
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
(Default)
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
600 x 300dpi
(Default)
(Default)
(Scanner)
100 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 300 x 300dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(Internet Fax)
200 x 100dpi (Half tone not allowed) /
200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi /
400 x 400dpi / 600 x 600dpi
(FAX)
Standard (203.2 x 97.8dpi) (Half tone not
allowed) / Fine (203.2 x 195.6 dpi) /
Super fine (203.2 x 391dpi) /
Ultra fine (406.4 x 391 dpi)
200 x 100dpi / 200 x 200dpi / 200 x 400dpi
/ 400 x 400dpi
Transmission
resolution (dpi)
Image
process
Exposure lamp
Scan Levels
Output levels
PC-FAX/
PC-Internet
Fax
Network
75dpi / 100dpi / 150dpi / 200dpi / 300dpi /
TWAIN
400dpi / 600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
Xenon
10bits
FAX mode: 1bit
Internet Fax mode: 1bit
Scanner mode:
Black & White: 1bit
Gray Scale: 8bit
Full Color: Each color RGB 8bit
Yes
Auto Detect (One type of detection unit to be switched
for software destination)
Inch
<INCH-1>
11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
<INCH-2>
11 x 17, 8.5 x 13, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 11R, 5.5 x 8.5
AB
<AB-1>
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B4, B5, B5R
<AB-2>
A3, A4, A4R, A5, B5, B5R, 216 x 330
<AB-3>
8K, A4, A4R, A5, B4, 16K, 16KR
Service parts
D. Fuser section
Yes
Allowed
Scan
resolution (dpi)
297 x 432mm
Left back as standard
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 4
2. Functional specifications
A. Specifications of copy functions
(1) Copy speed (Continuous copy speed)
a. Tray 1 4, LCC
MX-4500N/MX-4501N
Model name
Color / B/W
Print / Copy
Paper size
Magnification
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, B5, 8.5 x 11, 16K
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
A4R, B5R, 8.5 x 11R, 16KR,
7.25 x 10.5R
Extra
Color
MX-3500N/MX-3501N
B/W
Color
B/W
Copy
Copy
Copy
Copy
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
17
20
35
25
25
17
20
35
25
25
20
22
45
32
30
20
22
45
32
30
17
20
35
25
25
17
20
35
25
25
17
20
35
25
25
17
20
35
25
25
16
16
19
19
16
16
16
16
b. Manual feed
MX-4500N/MX-4501N
Model name
Color / B/W
Print / Copy
Paper size
Magnification
A3W, 12 x 18
A3, 11 x 17, 8K
B4, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13
A4, 8.5 x 11, 16K
B5
A5R, 5.5 x 8.5R
B5R
8.5 x 11R
A4R, 7.25 x 10.5R, 16KR
OHP(A4, 8.5 x 11)
OHP(A4R, 8.5 x 11R)
Extra
Envelope
Heavy paper (B5, A4, A5R, 8.5 x
11, 8.5 x 5.5R, 16K)
Heavy paper (Postcard HIGH) *1
Heavy paper (Postcard LOW) *1
Heavy paper (Other sizes)
Color
MX-3500N/MX-3501N
B/W
Color
B/W
Copy
Copy
Copy
Copy
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
Normal
Reduction (25%)
Normal (100%)
Enlargement (400%)
15
16
18
29
31
25
22
21
20
14
10
15
15
14
15
16
18
29
31
25
22
21
20
14
10
15
15
14
19
20
22
41
41
32
30
30
30
15
12
19
16
15
19
20
22
41
41
32
30
30
30
15
12
19
16
15
15
16
18
29
31
25
22
21
20
14
10
15
15
14
15
16
18
29
31
25
22
21
20
14
10
15
15
14
16
17
20
31
31
25
25
25
25
15
12
16
16
15
16
17
20
31
31
25
25
25
25
15
12
16
16
15
14
8
8
14
8
8
15
8
8
15
8
8
14
8
8
14
8
8
15
8
8
15
8
8
(3)
MX-4500N (RSPF),
MX-4501N (DSPF)
B/W
Color
4.1 sec
6.9 sec
9.3 sec
14.2 sec
8.8 sec
15.2 sec
MX-3500N (RSPF),
MX-3501N (DSPF)
B/W
Color
4.7 sec
6.9 sec
10.1 sec
14.2 sec
9.5 sec
15.2 sec
[Measuring Conditions]
* Feeding A4/8.5x11paper from the main unit tray 1
Job speed
S to S
MX-4500N/MX-4501N
B/W
Color
45cpm
35cpm
(100%)
(100%)
MX-3500N/MX-3501N
B/W
Color
35cpm
35cpm
(100%)
(100%)
* The copy speed in combination of the main unit and the auto
document feed user is defined.
* S to S: A4/8.5 x 11 document, 11 pages and 1 copy (not including
the first copy)
* Polygon in rotation
* Auto Color Selection OFF/Auto Color for color OFF
(4)
Continuous copy
(5)
Scan resolution
Writing resolution
(6)
999 sheets
Resolution
600 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
Copy document
Document
Document type
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 5
Zoom
Preset
magnification ratio
XY zoom
Normal:
AB series:
1:10.8%
25%, 50%, 70%, 81%, 86%, 100%,
115%, 122%, 141%, 200%, 400%
Inch series: 25%, 50%, 64%, 77%, 100%, 121%,
129% , 200%, 400%
25 400% (25 200% for RSPF)
4
Function
Yes
Copy document
mode
Color emphasis
Manual steps
Toner save mode
Electronic sort
Rotated sort
Job reservation
Program call/
registration.
Preheat function
Auto power shutoff
Special
function
User authentication
Process control
Document paper size
input
Indeterminate paper
size input
2-sided copy direction
switch
Margin shift
Edge/center erase
Dual page copy
Cover/insertion
Tandem copy
Tab paper insertion
OHP insertion
Tab copy
Centering
2in1/4in1
Pamphlet
Card shot
Book copy
Large capacity
document mode
Black-white Inversion
Automatic paper
selection
Automatic
magnification selection
Paper type select
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Allowed by system setting
Allowed by system setting (automatic-manual)
Multi-Page
Enlargement
Mirror image
Photo repeat
Date print
Character print
Stamp
Page printing
Shading
Proof copy
Mixed document
feeder
Document Control
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 6
Mode
Density adjustment
(1) Mode
Scanner
Internet
Fax
IP-FAX
Scan to e-mail
Scan to Desktop
Scan to FTP
Scan to Folder(SMB)
Scan to USB memory
Scan to e-mail with Meta
Scan to Desktop with Meta
Scan to FTP with Meta
Scan to SMB with Meta
Fax to Fax (manual)
Fax to E-mail (inbound routing)
Fax to FTP/Desktop/SMB/E-mail (Document Admin)
Full mode supported (including Simple mode)
No
a. Support system
Scanner
SMTP
FTP(TCP/IP)
SMB
Internet Fax
POP server
SMTP server
ESMTP server
b. Support image
Mode
File format
Compression
method
Scanner
Monochrome: TIFF, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
Color: Gray scale, color
TIFF, JPEG, PDF,
Encrypted PDF
[Monochrome]
Non-compression
G3 (1-dimensional)
= MH (Modified
Huffman)
G4
= MMR (Modified MR)
[Color/Gray scale]
JPEG (High, middle,
low)
Yes
Internet Fax
Monochrome TIFF-FX
(TIFF-F, TIFF-S)
MH, MMR
Halftone
reproduction
Scanner
Full color, grayscale, B/W
[When Color start key
pressed.]
Auto (When judged as
Color : Full color, When
judged as B/W : B/W (2
value)/Gray scale)
[When B/W start key]
B/W (2 value)
Gray scale
Equivalent of 256 steps
---
Selection of image
quality
Resolution
(depends on file
format/transmission
method)
200 x 100dpi
(Half tone not allowed)
200 x 200dpi
200 x 400dpi
400 x 400dpi
600 x 600dpi
Moire reduction
mode
Notes' security
feature
Yes (Color/grayscale)
---
Yes
d. Specification of Addresses
Mode
Address
specification
---
c. Image processing
Mode
Original scanning
color
Auto color selection
Internet Fax
Auto + 5 steps
Mode
Corresponding
server
/protocol
Scanner
Auto + 5 steps
(The image quaity of
"Auto" is the same as that
of "Manual = 3" when
selecting full color/
grayscale.)
Black-white enabled
Auto
Manual
Internet Fax
B/W
---
Setting of default
address *1
Number of Onetouch address key
registration
Number of Group (1
key) address
registtation
Program
Direct entry of
addresses
Chain dial
Resend
Shortcut for address
selection (quick
key)
CC/BCC sending
Subjet
File name
Return mail address
Transmission
message (message
body)
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 7
Scanner
Internet Fax
Specification by one-touch/group/direct address
entry.
Entry from soft keyboard. (Scanner/Internet Fax)
Entry from 10-key. (Fax)
Selection from LDAP server
Input from the externally connected keyboard
Yes
--Total (number of key): Maximum 999
Mode
Other functions
Scanner
Internet Fax
Mail footer preset (*2), inhibition of address
registration from the main unit, inhibition of address
registration from a Web screen, inhibition of
registration from the network scanner tool,
inhibition of "Resend" in the FAX/image send
mode, inhibition of selection from an address book,
inhibition of direct input, inhibition of send from the
PC internet FAX, and inhibition of send of PC-Fax.
Scanner
Yes (500 destinations)
(e-mail/FTP/Desktop
allowed)
Internet Fax
Yes (500 destinations)
Memory transmission
Rotated transmission
Scaled transmission
Recall mode
Error
Busy
Long original
transmission
Change of the number
of pages for each file
Job partition through
recognition of white
paper.
Restriction on
transmission size
Large capacity original
mode
Scanning of thin paper
Mixed originals feeder
Default date sender
transmission
Scanner
Internet Fax
94 destinations in all
--Yes
Yes
Enlargement/reduction is allowed only from a
fixed size to another. Reduction may be done
on the receiver side with Fax/Internet Fax
sending.
--Yes
------Number/time to be
set up through
system setup
Yes
Maximum of 800mm (single side only/blackwhite 2 values only)
Yes
--No
Scanner
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
A3
Automatic reduction
setting upon receiving
letter
Address/Domainspecified reception
allowed
Address/Domainspecified reception not
allowed. (To be rejected)
Received data bypass
output
Reception confirmation
cycle setting
POP3 communications
timeout setting
Index printing
Body text print select
setting
Transfer function upon
disabling of output.
Rooting function
Internet Fax/Fax to email (Transfer of Internet
Fax/Fax reception data
to e-mail, inbound
routing)
Exit tray setting
Insertion of job
separator sheet
Setting of number of
copies of receive data
Staple function of
received data
Auto wake up print
Received data print hold
function
Fax response lamp
---
Yes
Yes
Yes (Random + MIX)
---
g. Reception function
Yes
---
Yes
---
---
---
Yes
---
-------------
-----
Yes
No
---
Yes
---
Yes
-----
Yes
Yes
---
Yes
h. Report/list function
---
Yes
Internet Fax
---
Transaction report
Address/phone number
table
Group table
Program table
Communication original
contents print
List of addresses
allowed or not allowed
for reception
Scanner
Internet Fax
Yes
Time-specified output
Output with memory full
* Maximum of 200 times including both
transmission and reception
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
Always print/Upon
error/no print
Yes
---
i. Other Functions
Scanner
Internet Fax
Automatic reception
Manual reception
Memory reception
Fixed size reduced
reception
Specified size scaled
reception
Rotated reception
Setting of received data
print condition
2-sided reception
---------
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
---
No
-----
Yes
No
---
2-in-1 reception
---
Condition setting
through system setting
No
Scanner
Time specification
Sender print
Page number print
Date print
Yes
-------
Page partition
transmission
Page connection
Edge erase
Center erase
Yes
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 8
No
Yes
Yes
Internet Fax
Yes
Yes
Yes (Date can be
expressed
alternatively)
2 in 1
Background removal
Card scan
Confirm transmission
Forward data
transmission/reception
(Document Admin)
Scanner
Internet Fax
No
Yes
(Allowed for Fax /
Internet Fax
broadcast)
Yes
--(Only color and gray
scale)
Yes (Equivalent or enlargement up to the paper
width. The maximum enlargement is not
allowed to exceed 400%)
--Yes
Timeout time Setting
for 1 minute 240
hours/each minute
Yes
Data transmission by PC-Fax/PC-Internet Fax
is allowed, too.
Scanner
-----
Internet Fax
293mm / 11-17/32
A3 A5/11 x 17 5.5 x 8.5
m. Others
Mode
PC-Internet Fax
Trial mode
Program
Scanner
Internet Fax
999 destinations
Use of LDAP allowed
Up to 500 registered addresses for each group
dial.
Registered name in 18 full-size character (36
half-size characters)
Yes
--Registration by using
Web or NST (network
scanner tool)
Registration of addresses (groups), settings
(density, image quality) and special functions in
one set is allowed. (48 of them)
200 (user registration
--from Web) *2
--1 (20 characters)
Yes (001 999)
(1)
OS
PC
CPU
Monitor
Memory
HDD
Interface
(2)
*2: The book for address selection is used when a scan sender is
selected.
*3: Quick key is the function to select an address based on the
registered number of each address within the book for address
selection. Users should be able to select a quick key number.
l. Sound settings
Item
Sound volume setting
Sound volume setting
Scanner
-----
Yes *1
Internet Fax
Yes *1
Yes *2
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT4.0 Workstation (Service Pack5)
IE4.0 or more
Windows 2000
Windows XP Home Edition
Windows XP Professional
Windows Server 2003
IBM PC/AT compatible machine
Pentium II 300MHz or more
640x480 Pixels or more of screen resolution
256 or more of colors
64MB or more
Free space of 50MB or more
USB2.0
10/100BASE-TX
LPR/lp
Port9100(RAW)
IPP
USB2.0
PC-Fax Send
Resolution
Transmission original
sizes
Compression method
Braodcast transmission
F code transmission
Mode
Reception sound
Communication
error sound
Sound setting for
end of original
reading (image
send)
Communications
protocol
Internet FAX
Yes
No
C. PC-Fax functions
k. Registration-related settings
Mode
One-touch/group *1
E-mail
FTP
Desktop
SMB
Internet Fax
Desktop registration
Scanner
--Yes
Scanner: No (Standard)
Meta data: Yes
Phone book
registration/
transmission function
Use of MFP phone book
Attach a cover sheet
Create cover sheets
function
Sender print
Preview function
Transmission
confirmation (Notice to
PC by NJR)
Document filing function
PC-Fax Transmission
log
User authentication
Timer
R-KEY (Germany/
France only)
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 9
No
Yes (Not allowed for bradcast transmission)
Yes
Yes (Editable by PC-Fax driver for only Japan.
Always printed for abroad.)
Yes
Yes
Filing
Yes
Quick File
Yes
Yes (Re-transmission not allowed)
Yes
No
Yes
Adobe PS3
Windows 98 / Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3, 10.3.9,
x 10.4
2-sided scan
Color modes
Resolutions
Scanning ranges
Preview function
Zoom preview function
Rotated scan
Brightness/contrast
adjustment
Gamma adjustment
Color matching
Edge emphasis
Black-white inversion
Selection of illuminant
color
Selection of threshold
value
Addition of void area
Save of setup contents
Save of preview image
Display unit of
scanning range
Notes's security
function
Image acquision
method from the main
unit
LAN
Yes
USB
No
Windows 98/Me/2000/XP/2003 Server
Windows 2000/XP
System: Must satisfy the operational conditions
for each OS.
HDD: 10MB or more: 100MB or more
recommended.
Monitor: 800 x 600 dots or more; 256 or more of
colors must be available.
Other: Network port
Yes
Mono 2 gradation/Mono Diffusion/Grayscale/Full
Color
75dpi/100dpi/150dpi/200dpi/300dpi/400dpi/
600dpi or custom: 50-9600dpi
A3/A4/A4-R/A5/A5-R/B4/B5/B5-R/11 x 17/
8.5 x 11/8.5 x 11-R/7.25 x 10.5/7.25 x 10.5-R/
8.5 x 13/5.5 x 8.5/5.5 x 8.5-R/8.5 x 14/Postcard/
8K/16K/16K-R/Auto/Auto(Mixed size)/Custom
* "Auto" includes the same width (Mix). "Auto
(Mixed size)" means random.
Yes
Yes
Yes (90-degree/ 180-degree/ 270-degree)
Auto/ manual (-100 +100)
Yes
None/For Printer/For CRT/For LCD/ICM
None/Normal/Sharp/Blur
Yes
Yes (Red/Green/Blue/White)
Auto/ manual (1 254)
Allowed (4 sides; 2.5mm for each)
Yes
Yes
Pixel/mm/inch
For PS3
(5)
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98/Me
Windows NT 4.0 SP5 or later
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
MacOS 9.0-9.2.2, x 10.1.5, x 10.2.8, x 10.3.3 10.3.9,
x 10.4
No
Option (PS3 expansion kit: MX-PKX1)
Option (EFI printer kit: MX-PEX1)
Standard
Option
Option
USB
PSERVER/
RPRINT for
NetWare
environment
LPR
IPP
PAP:
EtherTalk
(AppleTalk)
FTP
NetBEUI
Port9100
HTTP
POP3
Command Compatibility
PCL5c must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
4600.
PCL XL must be compatible with HP Color Laser Jet
4600.
Must be compatible with Adobe PS3.
Environmental settings
Setting item
Initial setting
(2) Support OS
MX-3500/4500 series
No
Standard
Installed fonts
For PCL5c/
PCL6
compatible
(7)
PPD
(4)
PCL5c
compatibility
PCL XL
compatibility
PostScript3
compatibility
Non-compression
(1) Platform
Custom
PCL5c/6
Command system
Command system
SPLC-c
PCL5c compatible
PCL6 compatible
BMLinkS
PS3 compatible
EFI controller
(6)
Yes
E. Printer function
Custom PS
(3)
PCL seting
PS setting
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 10
Overview
Basic settings for printer use such as number of
copies or printing direction.
Setting of PCL symbols and fonts
Whether or not printing is allowed upon PS error is to
be set up.
Content
Binds multiple pamphlet outputs into a single booklet.
JetCAPS BarDIMM emulation
Two units connected via network can be used simultaneously for a printout.
When a Windows server breaks down, a mirror server takes over and executes the suspended
print job.
* There may be color differences between machine types
PDF/TIFF/JPEG file can be printed without printer driver.
1) Printing of e-mail attachment file
2) Printing from FTP server
3) Printing from setup file on Web page
4) USB memory
Direct printing of an attached file upon receipt of the e-mail.
Browsing of FTP server from front panel and pull-printing of a specified file (direct printing).
Performs direct print by data transfer from the client PC to the MFP server.
Setting and direct printing of a file on network through Web page.
Encryption PDF/PDF/
TIFF/JPEG direct print
E-Mail To Print
Pull print from front panel
FTP PUSH print
Print by file setup on Web
page [Web Submit Print]
Continuous print function
ROPM
Multi-access
Paper direction setting for
2-sided printing of
letterhead paper and prepunched paper.
Enable selected paper
type in bypass tray
Setting environmental
control under terminal
server control
Driver delivery function
Form overlay
Planet Press
Improvement of
downloading method of
font form
Management of password
by hidden Web page
Expansion font list
Bonjour for Macintosh
environment
Document control
Object judgement (screen
change/color change)
CMYK Simulation
ICC Profile
Pantone color
PCL6/5c
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
PS (Option)
Yes
No
Yes (Windows
only)
Yes (Windows
only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
(5c only)
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
(5c only)
Yes
Yes
Yes
In self-print of a font list, ESC command information is needed for BITMAP font.
Yes
(5c only)
No
No
Yes
Yes (OPT)
Yes (OPT)
PCL6: Yes
PCL5: No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
The function executes multiple print jobs continuously as if they are one single job even if the
unit receives an end of job command, in order to support print from the application assuming
printout on continuous pages.
The function enables the printout of a multiple number of copies in one RIP processing.
RIP processing must be allowed during printing. Printing must also be allowed during scanning.
Pages with front-back attribute such letterhead or punch paper are to be printed correctly in
front-back page order for 2-sided printing.
For setting of bypass tray, even if the setup values on the main unit side do not match with those
on the driver side, the printing will be executed in the setting of the driver regardless of the setup
values on the main unit side.
Print setting of each client is memorized under meta frame environment (auto print create
environment). (Setup for each log-in can be skipped.)
This technology detects and connects peripheral equipment on the network automatically.
The dynamic network connection (computer, peripheral equipment and software) is possible
without user setting.
When printing, the unique pattern for prevention against unauthorized copy
is embedded in printing.
In the printer color mode output, object of image data (area of photograph/graphic text) is
judged. Print screen (resolution) and profile (color) are changed automatically.
Choice of CMYK simulation is as follows.
1) Default
2) Custom
Default is defined depending on the destination of service simulation.
1. Japan = Japan Color
2. North America / China / Other abroad inch type = SWOP
3. Europe / Other abroad AB type = Euroscale
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. Notation of driver is Custom.
Example: Use SWOP profile in Japan.
<Source Profile>
Choice of source profile is as follows.
sRGB
AppleRGB
Custom
Custom profile can upload by Web setting. (The attached ICC profile on devices is available.)
<Output Profile>
There is no user selection for output profile. Sharp provides Custom profile. Upload of profile
supports by service. The tool is set on the Web (service setting). The concrete method of profile
making is to be considered separately.
For Pantone color support, the profile upload can be made by Web setting.
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 11
Yes
PCL5-c/6: Standard
Function
Paper Size
PCL5-c/6
PS
PPD
Paper Selection
1-999
Different Paper
Portrait/Landscape
2-Sided (Book)
2-Sided (Tablet)
2-Up Pamphlet
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple 2-Up Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
Top/Left/Right
1-Up, 2-Up, 4-Up, 6-Up,
8-Up, 9-Up, 16-Up
Black N-Up
Border
N-Up Order
Yes/No
Transparency
Inserts
Tab Printing
N/A
N/A
(Windows NT: N/A)
(Windows 9x:
1-Up/2-Up/4-up)
N/A
PCL5-c/6
PS
PPD
A2 (Fit To Page)
N/A
N/A
(PCL6 only)
12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11, 8.5 x 14,
7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K, 16K, DL, C5,
COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Paper Source
Auto Selection/
Paper Type
Paper Source /
Paper Type
Cover Page
N/A
Last Page
N/A
Other Page
N/A
Blank/Printed
[2-Up]
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
Image Shift
Tab Paper
Printing
(PCL6 only)
Set Paper Size
Set Paper Type
Display Name
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
PCL5-c/6
PS
PPD
Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Stitch Tray
None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/MX-LCX1
None/Finisher/Saddle Stitch Finisher
None/2 Holes/3 Holes/4 Holes/4 Holes (Wide)
Yes/No
d. Exposure
Function
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
PCL5-c/6
600 x 600dpi
300 x 300dpi
PS
PPD
1200 x 600dpi
600 x 600dpi
(monochrome only)
600 x 600dpi
Auto/Color(CMYK)/Monochrome (K only)
N/A
OFF
OFF
System (Windows ICM). Effective only when Color Options is Custom.
Windows NT: N/A
Printer
Printer
N/A
N/A
When ICM Method is anything other than Custom: Default
Perceptual matching
When ICM Method is Custom:
Relative colorimetric
Perceptual matching
Saturation matching
Relative colorimetric
Absolute colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
Source Profile (Monitor Profile)
Source Profile (Monitor Profile)
When Windows ICM is off:
sRGB
None
Apple RGB
sRGB
Custom
Apple RGB
Custom
When Windows ICM is on:
Monitor Profile installed in PC
1 bit or 2 bit
1 bit or 2 bit
2 bit or 4 bit
2 bit or 4 bit
0-100
N/A
0-100
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 12
N/A
Function
Saturation (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
* Some OS may not allow onenumber-to-next specification for
setup values.
Color Balance (RGB)
(Cannot be specified with the
monochrome mode)
* Some OS may not allow onenumber-to-next specification for
setup values.
Text To Black (Can be specified only
with the monochrome mode)
Vector To Black (Can be specified
only with the monochrome mode)
Toner Save (1bit only)
Screen Setting (Cannot be specified
with the monochrome mode)
Pure Black Print (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
Black Overprint (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
CMYK Simulation (Cannot be
specified with the monochrome
mode)
Bitmap Compression
PCL5-c/6
PS
Poster
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
In case of Yes:
Default /Custom
None
Off/
Default/Custom
None
(PCL6 only)
PCL5-c/6
PS
Resident Font
Download Font
N/A
TrueType (Type 42)
Bitmap (Type 3)
N/A
Adobe (Type1)
As Graphics
N/A
PPD
N/A
Function
Margin Shift (Margin
Shift processing by
MFP/Printer
firmware
Zoom
Yes
Mirror Image
Graphics Mode
PCL5-c/6
N/A
Standard/Graphics/Photo/Custom
CAD
Black Only
4-Color
f. Other functions
Overlay
N/A
N/A
e. Font
Function
Watermark
0-100
Default
Photo
Text & Graphic
Yes/No
Font Substitution
Download Font Type
PPD
N/A
Yes/No
Image Type
Function
Font Source
0-100
PS
Transparent Text
Overwrite Text
Outline Text
Image Stamp
Yes
(PCL6 only)
Create Overlay
Load Overlay
Delete
Query Page Overlay
Yes/No
Yes/No
Top Copy
Carbon Copy
A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x
11,
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5/8.5 x 13/5.5
x 8.5, 8K, 16K, DL, C5, COM10,
Monarch
2 x 2/3 x 3/
2 x 2/3 x 3/4 x 4
4x4
(PCL6 only)
Yes/No
Yes/No
(PCL6 only)
Yes/No
Yes/No
(PCL6 only)
PPD
PS Pass Through
PS Error Printing
Job Compression
N/A
Retention
Yes/No
Document Filing
User Authentication
N/A
N/A
N/A
Job ID
Notify Job End
Auto Job Control
Review
Tandem Print
Set Tandem Print
Auto Configuration
N/A
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 13
CAD
Black Only
4-Color
PCL5-c/6
PS
PPD
None/10mm (0.4 inch)/20mm (0.8 inch)/30mm
(1.2 inch)
N/A
N/A
Vector /
Raster
N/A
N/A
N/A
25% 400%
X-Y Zoom
No Mirror Image
Vertical
Horizontal
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/Fastest/
Fast/Medium/
Best
Compression
Hold Only
Hold After Printd
Sample Print
Password
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom Folder
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
Yes/No
Yes/No
None
Vertical
Horizontal
Yes/No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
IP Address (Slave Machine)
Yes
N/A
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
1-999
Portrait/Landscape
2-Sided (Long)
2-Sided (Short)
Tiled Pamphlet
Multiple Tiled Pamphlet
(Only more than 10.2)
Top/Left/Right
N/A
Top/Left/Right
1-Up/2-Up/4-Up/6-Up/9-Up/16-Up
Yes/No
[2-Up]
Left to Right
Right to Left
[4, 6, 8, 9, 16-Up]
Right, and Down
Down, and Right
Left, and Down
Down, and Left
Paper Selection
Different Paper
Transparency Inserts
Tab Printing
Set Tray Status
Paper Type Name
(USER TYPE 1-7)
Input Tray Options
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
12 x 18, A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 11,
8.5 x 14, 7.25 x 10.5, 8.5 x 13, 5.5 x 8.5, 8K,
16K, DL, C5, COM10, Monarch, Custom Paper
Auto Select
Paper Source
Paper Type
Cover Page
Blank/Printed
N/A
N/A
Yes
Two Trays/
Three Trays/
Four Trays
N/A
Two Trays/
Three Trays/
Four Trays
Punch Module
Right Tray
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
Center Tray/Right Tray/Offset Tray/Saddle
Stitch Tray
None/1-Staple/2-Staples
Yes/No
Yes/No
None/MXN/A
None/MXLCX1
LCX1
None/
N/A
None /
Finisher/
Finisher/
Saddle Stitch
Saddle Stitch
Finisher
Finisher
None /
N/A
None /
2 Holes /
2 Holes /
3 Holes /
3 Holes /
4 Holes /
4 Holes /
4 Holes
4 Holes
(Wide)
(Wide)
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
d. Exposure
Function
Resolution
Color Mode
ICM Method ColorSync
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Specification
depending on OS
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
600 x 600dpi
Auto/Color (CMYK) /Monochrome (K only)
OFF
N/A
OFF
System
N/A
System
(10.3 only)
Printer
Function
Rendering Intent
* Specification
depending on OS
ICC Profile Selection
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Specification
depending on OS
Print Priority
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Contrast
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Brightnesst
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Saturationt
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Color Balance (RGB)
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
* Some OS may not
allow one-number-tonext specification for
setup values
Text To Black
Vector To Black
Toner Save (1bit only)
Screen Setting
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Pure Black Print
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Black Overprint
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
CMYK Simulation
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
Bitmap Compression
Image Type
Neutral Grays
(Cannot be specified
with the monochrome
mode)
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
Perceptual matching
Relative colorimetric
Saturation matching
Absolute colorimetric
Source
N/A
Source
Profile
Profile
(Monitor
(Monitor
Profile)
Profile)
sRGB
sRGB
Apple RGB
Apple RGB
Custom
Custom
(10.3 only)
1 bit or 2 bit
2 bit or 4 bit
N/A
N/A
0-100
N/A
0-100
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
Default
Photo
Test & Graphic
Yes/No
Yes/No
Off
Default
Custom
N/A
Standard/Graphic/Photo/CAD/Custom
Black Only
4-Color
e. Font
Function
Font Source (Resident
Font/Download Font)
Font Substitution
Download Font Type
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 14
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
N/A
OSX 10.2/3/4
N/A
Yes
N/A
(2)
f. Other functions
Function
Watermark
Overlay
Rotate 180 degrees
Collate
Carbon Copy
Fit To Page
Poster
Black Poster Border
Poster Overlap
Margin Shift
(Margin Shift
processing by MFP/
Printer firmware
Zoom
Mirror
Graphics Mode
PS Pass through
PS Error Printing
Job Compression
Retention
Document Filing
User Authentication
OS9 PPD
OSX 10.1
OSX 10.2/3/4
Transparent Text/Overwrite Text/Outline Text
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
Yes/No
Yes/No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
None/10mm/20mm/30mm (1.2inch)
25% 400%
None
Vertical
Horizontal
Hold Only,
Hold After
Print, Sample
Print, Pass
Code
N/A
Login Name
Password
Job ID
N/A
N/A
Yes/No
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Auto Configuration
N/A
Hold Only,
Hold After
Print, Sample
Print, Pass
Code
Quick File
Main Folder
Custom
Folder
Login Name
Password
User Name
Job Name
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Yes
N/A
Yes/No
IP Address
(Slave
Machine)
Yes
(10.3 only)
Copy
Printer
Direct print (FTP)
Direct print (e-mail)
Direct print (Web)
Scan to e-mail/FTP
Scan to SMB
Scan to USB
memory
Fax reception
Fax transmission
Internet Fax
reception
Internet Fax
transmission
PC-Fax/PC-Internet
Fax transmisson
Remote PC Scan
Scan to HDD
(1)
Maximum number of
user folder
Number of users
allowed for registration
RSPF
model
DSPF
model
10GB
No
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
--No
--Yes
--Yes
Safety standards
Safety standard
EMC
Main/Custom Folder
Shared Confidential
storage
storage
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
No
No
Yes
No
---------
10GB
100V type
Electrical safety law:
J60950(compliant)
UL60950, 21CFR
(Laser)
CSA C22.2 No.60950
CNS14336 (Taiwan)
VCCI Class A
FCC Part 15 Class A
Guideline for
suppression of higher
harmonic wave currents
ICES Class B (Canada)
CNS 13438 (Taiwan)
Validation of Technology
Standard Conformance
(Electrical
Communications Project
Law)
FCC part 68
ICCS-03
PSTN01 (Taiwan)
30GB
Quick file
folder
Main folder
10GB: 1,400 pages or 1,000 files
Custom
30GB: 4,200 pages or 3,000 files
folder
(SHARP standard document)
Quick file
1,400 pages or 1,000 files
folder
(SHARP standard document)
Maximum of 500 folders
(2)
Chinese ROHS
200V type
EN60950
IEC60825 (Laser)
GB4943 (China)
EN55022 Class A
CISPR22 Class A
EN61000-3-2
EN61000-3-3
GB9254, GB17625.1,
GB/T17618 (China)
TS 103 021, EG 201
120, EG 201 121
(Europe)
AS/ACIF S0002
(Australia)
GB/T 3382.1-2003, GB/T
3382.2-2003, YD/T 5141998, YD/T 589-1996,
YD/T 703-1993, YD/T
965-1998, YD/T 9931998 (China)
Environmental Readiness
MX3500N SPECIFICATIONS 2 15
3. Ambient conditions
A. Operating environmental conditions (Main
unit)
Temperature: 10C 35C, Humidity: 20 85%RH
Air pressure: 590 1013hPa (height: 0 2000m)
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
Humidity (RH)
90%
60%
20%
Humidity (RH)
85%
60%
20%
Photoconductor drum
2)
Developer
MX3500N
Service Manual
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 880g)
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Drum Unit
x1
Life
36K *1
Model Name
MX-45NTBA
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27NTYA
x1
150K
MX-27NVBA
x1
100K
MX-27NVSA
x1
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
MX-27NRSA
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 30K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27NUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 880g)
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Drum Unit
x1
Life
36K *1
Model Name
MX-45GTBA
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27GTYA
x1
150K
MX-27GVBA
x1
100K
MX-27GVSA
x1
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
MX-27GRSA
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 30K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27GUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
C. Asia-Subsidiary/Hong Kong
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 880g)
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Drum Unit
x1
Life
36K *1
Model Name
MX-45ATBA
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27ATYA
x1
150K
MX-27AVBA
x1
100K
MX-27AVSA
x1
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
MX-27ARSA
x1
x1
MX-27AUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 30K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
D. Middle East/Africa/Israel/Philippines/Taiwan
No.
1
Item
Toner Cartridge (Black)
Content
Toner Cartridge (Black) with IC Chip
(Black toner : Net 880g)
Developer (Black)
6
7
Developer
(Cyan/Magenta/Yellow)
Drum
Drum Unit
x1
Life
36K *1
Model Name
MX-45FTBA
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTCA
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTMA
x1
15K *1
MX-27FTYA
x1
150K
MX-27FVBA
x1
100K
MX-27FVSA
x1
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
150K (Black)
100K (Color)
MX-27FRSA
x1
x1
Remarks
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
(Reference: 30K for A4/Letter 6%)
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
* Life: A4/Letter size
at Area Coverage 5%
MX-27FUSA
*1: The toner life may vary depending on the document density and temperature and humidity.
Item
Heat roller kit
x1
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x2
x4
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x4
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x3
Life
300K
Model name
MX-450HK
150K
MX-450Y1
300K
MX-450Y2
150K
MX-450FL
150K
150K
MX-270FLN
MX-450WC
For Asia/Agencies
40K
MX-270HB
Black: 150K,
Color: 100K
MX-270DS
Black: 150K,
Color: 100K
MX-270MK
5000 times x 3
AR-SC2
Filter kit
DV seal kit
Staple cartridge
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Staple cartridge
10
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
x3
5000 times x 3
MX-SCX1
11
12
13
x1
x1
x1
x1
MX-450U1
MX-450U2
MX-450FU1
MX-450FU
7
7
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper separation pawl
Upper separation pawl SP-N
Upper thermistor sub
Upper thermistor side
Upper thermistor CJ
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller
Lower heat roller bearing
Lower separation pawl/spring
Lower thermistor
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer blade
Primary transfer conductive collar
PS paper dust removal cleaner
Bearing
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary transfer idle gear
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Ozone filter
Paper exit filter
Ozone filter
Web unit
Sub roller
Sub roller bearing
Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3)
Remarks
B. Europe/UK/Australia/New Zealand/Taiwan
No.
1
Item
Upper heat roller kit
Content
Upper heat roller
Fuser gear
Upper separation pawl
Upper separation pawl SP-N
Upper thermistor sub
Upper thermistor side
Upper thermistor CJ
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller
Lower heat roller bearing
Lower separation pawl/spring
Lower thermistor
Intermediate transfer belt
Primary transfer blade
Primary transfer conductive collar
PS paper dust removal cleaner
Bearing
Primary transfer roller
Belt drive gear
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary transfer idle gear
Ozone filter
Paper exit filter
Ozone filter
Web unit
Sub roller
Sub roller bearing
Waste toner box unit (with LSU cleaner x 3)
x1
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x2
x4
x1
x1
x1
x4
x1
x4
x4
x1
x1
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
x1
x1
x2
x1
5
6
Filter kit
10
DV seal kit
Staple cartridge
DV seal
DV side seal F/R
Toner filter
Main charger unit
Drum cleaning blade
Staple cartridge
x3
x3
x3
x1
x1
x3
11
12
13
Staple cartridge
Staple cartridge
14
15
16
7
7
Life
300K
Model name
MX-450UH
300K
MX-450LH
150K
MX-450B1
300K
MX-450X1
300K
300K
MX-270B2
MX-450X2
150K
MX-450FL
150K
150K
MX-270FLN
MX-450WC
For Taiwan
40K
MX-270HB
Black: 150K,
Color: 100K
MX-270DS
Black: 150K,
Color: 100K
MX-270MK
5000 times x 3
AR-SC2
x3
5000 times x 3
MX-SCX1
x1
x1
x1
x1
MX-450U1
MX-450U2
MX-450FU
MX-450FU2
Remarks
For Europe/Oceania
C. Toner cartridge
A. Drum cartridge
Part name
10
Toner color
The number is printed on the flange on the front side. The laser
print shows the production year and month.
Production
place
1:
2:
3:
4:
5/6:
7:
8/9:
10:
Number
For this model, this digit is 2.
Alphabet
Indicates the model conformity code. H for this model.
Number
Indicates the end digit of the production year.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number or X, Y, Z
Indicates the production month.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Indicates the day of the month of packing.
X stands for October, Y November, and Z December.
Number
Indicates the day of the day of packing.
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory. "C" for China.
Destination
Incompatibility
Production
year/month/day
Version
Serial No. in production day
Example: 134th of production on August 24, 2005
B. Developer
BK
C. M .Y
The lot number is of 8 digits. Each digit indicates the content as follows.
The number is printed on the right under side of the back surface of
the developer bag.
1:
2:
3/4:
5/6:
7:
8:
Alphabet
Indicates the production factory.
Number
Indicates the production year.
Number
Indicates the production month.
Number
Indicates the production day.
Hyphen
Number
Indicates the production lot.
Service Manual
[5] EXTERNAL VIEW AND INTERNAL STRUCTURE
MX3500N
3 4
9
No.
1
Name
Automatic document feeder
(Duplex single pass feeder)
Automatic document feeder
(Reversing single pass feeder)
Front cover
4
5
6
7
8
9
Interface unit *1
Operation panel
Paper exit tray unit (Right tray) *1
Paper exit tray (Center tray)
Finisher *1
Saddle stitch finisher *1
10
11
12
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3 (When the stand/1 x 500 sheet
paper drawer or the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
Tray 4 (When the stand/2 x 500 sheet
paper drawer is installed) *1
Tray 5 (When the large capacity paper
feed tray is installed) *1
13
14
10
11
12
13
14
Function/ Operation
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
This automatically feeds and scans multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals can be automatically scanned.
Open this cover when turning ON/OFF the main power switch or replacing the
toner cartridge.
Feeds the output paper to the saddle finisher.
Used to set the functions and enter the copy quantity.
Receives discharged paper if installed and set.
Copied or printed paper is discharged to this tray.
Staples paper, and makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
Staples and outputs paper. It is also provided with the center-stapling function.
Makes punch holes if the punch unit is installed.
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Stores paper. Max. 500 sheets (80g/m2, 21lbs)
Note
Installed standard on the
MX-3501N/4501N.
Installed standard on the
MX-3500N/4500N.
B. Internal structure
10
11
12
No.
1
Toner cartridge
Fusing section
Transfer belt
5
6
10
11
Handle
2-stage paper feed desk right side
cover (When the 2-stage paper feed
desk is installed)
Paper feed tray right side cover
Right side cover open lever
Press this button to release lock of the waste toner box when replacing
the waste toner box or cleaning the wiring unit.
Used to lift the machine for transit.
Open this cover to remove a paper jam in the tray 3 or 4.
12
13
Name
Function/ Operation
When the toner in a cartridge runs out, the cartridge must be replaced
with a new cartridge of the same color.
The shape of the toner cartridge varies slightly by model.
Fuses images transferred on paper by heat.
In full color copy, the transfer belt overlaps 4-color toner images on the
transfer belt. In black copy, black toner images are shifted to the
transfer belt.
This cover is opened to operate the fusing section pressure
adjustment lever or to remove a paper jam.
Used to reverse paper in duplex print or to remove a paper jam.
In manual paper feed, paper is inserted from this tray. When paper
greater than A4R or 8-1/2 x 11 R, be sure to pull out the auxiliary tray.
Turns on the power of the machine. When FAX or internet is used,
keep it ON.
13
Note
9
8
MX-3501N/4501N
No.
1
2
Name
Document feed roller
Document feed section cover
3
4
Document guide
Document set table
5
6
Function/ Operation
Transports a document automatically.
This cover is opened when removing a paper jam or cleaning the
document feed roller.
Guides to scan a document properly. Set to the set document size.
A document is set on this table. In the case of a single-surface
document, set it face up.
The scanned document is discharged to this section.
The document set on the document set table is scanned in this
section.
Detects the size of a document set on the document table (glass
surface).
When scanning a document, it is temporarily discharged to this
section to be reversed for scanning the back surface.
Used for thick documents or book documents which cannot be
entered to the auto document feeder.
NOTE: For the MX-3501N/4501N automatic document feeder (DSPF), refer to "00ZMX3501NS1E."
Note
D. Connectors
1
2
3
Service-only connector
No.
1
2
3
Name
USB connector (Type A)
USB connector (Type B)
LAN connector
Function/ Operation
Used to connect a USB hub or USB memory.
Used to connect a computer to use this machine as a printer.
Used to connect a LAN cable to use this machine in a network.
Note
E. Operation panel
PRINT
READY
DATA
DOCUMENT
FILING
LINE
DATA
IMAGE SEND
COPY
SYSTEM
JOB STATUS SETTINGS
LOGOUT
6
No.
1
Name
Touch panel
4
5
6
8
9
10
[CA] key
11
12
13
[STOP] key
[BLACK START] key
[COLOR START] key
14
15
[Power] key
16
10
11
Function/ Operation
A message or a key is displayed on the LCD screen. Touch the
displayed key with your finger to perform various operations. When the
displayed key is touched, a sound is generated and the selected item is
highlighted to confirm.
Used to switch the display mode of the touch panel. The lamp of the
selected key is lighted.
[Document Filing] key
Press this key to switch to the document filing mode in order to store
a document to the hard disk in the form of a image or to print or send
the image stored in the hard disk.
[FAX/Image send] key ([Image send] key for the models without the
FAX function)
Press this key to switch to the FAX mode/network scanner in order to
use the FAX function or the scanner function.
Communicating lamp
This lamp is lighted during sending or receiving in the FAX mode, and
lighted during sending in the scanner mode.
Data lamp
This lamp flashes when FAX data cannot be outputted due to paper
empty, etc. If there is data which has not been sent, the lamp is
lighted.
[COPY] key
Press this key to switch to the copy mode in order to use the copy
function. When this key is pressed continuously, the total copy
quantity and the toner remaining quantity can be checked.
Ready lamp
When this lamp is lighted, print data can be received.
Data lamp
This lamp flashes during reception of print data, and lights up during
printing.
Used to enter the copy quantity or the FAX number, etc.
Used to clear the set value of copy quantity, etc. to 0.
Press this key to display the job status. On the job status screen, the
details of the job can be checked and the job can be terminated.
When this key is pressed, the system setting menu screen is displayed
to allow the paper feed tray setting, destination registration, and other
setting for easy operations of this machine.
Used to logout after user authentication. Used to deliver the tone signal
in the dial line when the FAX function is used.
Used to use the job program when the copy function is used, and to dial
when the FAX function is used.
Press this key to reset the operation, cancel setting, and start from the
initial state.
Used to stop copying and scanning a document.
Used to scan a document in black.
Used to make a color copy in the copy mode and to scan a document in
colors. When the FAX or the internet FAX is used, this key cannot be
used.
Used to set the machine to the auto power shut off mode of power
saving. [Power save] key flashes in the auto power shut off mode.
Turns ON/OFF the power of the machine.
Used in the FAX nighttime mode when the FAX is installed.
This lamp lights up when the main power switch of the machine is ON.
12
13
Note
14 15 16
1
JOB QUEUE
STATUS
020 / 001
COPYING
COPY
020 / 000
PAPER EMPTY
BBB BBB
020 / 000
WAITING
PRIORITY
0312345678
002 / 000
WAITING
STOP/DELETE
4
Name
Paper empty display
Job list
5
6
[] [] keys
[STOP/DELETE] key
[PRIORITY] key
[DETAIL] key
[CALL] key
SCANNER
Complete job
status screen
SPOOL
SETS / PROGRESS
COPY
PRINT JOB
No.
1
FAX JOB
SPOOL
JOB QUEUE
JOB QUEUE
COMPLETE
COMPLETE
DETAIL
DETAIL
CALL
INTERNET-FAX
INTERNET-FAX
6 7 8
Function/ Operation
Supply paper. If the status display indicates Paper empty, the specified size paper is
empty. In this case, if paper is not supplied, the output is reserved and the job data in
standby state which can be outputted are outputted in priority. (When, however, paper is
exhausted during outputting, the priority output of another job data is not made.)
To select another paper size for outputting because the specified size paper cannot be
supplied immediately, touch the key of the job in the job list and touch 8. [DETAIL] key,
and the paper size specification can be changed.
The list of jobs reserved, during execution, or completed is displayed. When [PRINT] key
is touched with the mode select key, the display of the job status screen select key is
changed over to display the list of SPOOL. The list indicates the jog outline and the
status.
When a print job during spooling or an encrypted PDF is directly printed, the job is
displayed on the SPOOL screen. If there is a list of encrypted PDF files, touch the job
key and enter the password, and the selected job is shifted to the list of [Reserve/
Executing], and the job enters the standby state.
The job list display is switched to one of SPOOL job, JOB QUEUE job, or COMPLETE
job.
SPOOL: When an encrypted PDF is printed directly, the print job list is displayed. Can be
displayed when the print job is displayed.
JOB QUEUE: The job list which is reserved or executing is displayed.
COMPLETE: The job list which completed is displayed.
Used to select the print mode, the scanner mode, the Fax mode, or the internet FAX mode.
[PRINT JOB] key displays the list of copy, printer, Fax receive, internet Fax receive, and
the self print.
[SCANNER] key displays the send list of the scanner function.
[FAX JOB] key displays the send list of the Fax and the PC-Fax functions.
[INTERNET FAX] key displays the send list of the internet Fax and the PC-Internet Fax
function.
Selects the page of the displayed job list.
Used to stop or delete the job which is executing or to delete a selected or reserved job.
However, the FAX receive print jog and the internet Fax receive print job cannot be stopped
or deleted.
When a job is selected in the reserved jobs displayed in the job list of JOB QUEUE screen
and the key is touched, the job reservation priority is changed to the top priority.
For a print job, select a priority job and touch this key, and the previous copying or printing
is interrupted and the selected job copy or print is started. After completion of the selected
job, the interrupted job is resumed from the interrupted point.
Used to display the details of the selected job. When the automatic temporal save of the
document filing function or filing is executed, or when sequential broadcasting send is
executed with the FAX/image send function, the key display is made in the complete job
status screen. When this key is touched, the details of the completed jobs are displayed
and reprint or resend of the job can be executed by touching [CALL] key.
When the displayed key is touched on the complete job status screen and [CALL] key is
touched, the operation (reprint or resend) of the touched job is executed. Same as when
[DETAIL] key is touched and [CALL] key is touched.
9
Note
G. Sensors
OCSW
MHPS
HPOS
TFD2
TFD3
POD3
POD2
APPD1
POD1
DSW_ADU
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
DHPD_CL DHPD_K
TCS_Y
TCS_M
TCS_C
REGS_F/R
PCS_CL/K
APPD2
TCS_K
MPED
PPD2
MPFD
MTOP1
CSS14
CSPD1
CLUD2
CSS21
Signal name
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
APPD1
APPD2
CLUD1
CLUD2
CPED1
CPED2
CPFD1
CPFD2
CSPD1
CSPD2
DHPD_CL
DHPD_K
DSW_ADU
DSW_C
HPOS
MHPS
MPED
MPFD
MPLD
CPFD2
CPED2
CSS2
CSS23
CPFD1
DSW_C
CSS12
CSS13
TH_M/HUD_M
CPED1
CSS1
CSS11
MPLD
MPWD
PPD1
CLUD1
MTOP2
CSS22
CSS24
Name
Transfer belt separation CL detection
Transfer belt separation BK detection
ADU transport path detection 1
ADU transport path detection 2
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP
detection)
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry
detection)
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry
detection)
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
ADU transport open/close detection
Tray 1 and 2 transport cover open/close
detection
Shifter home position detection
Scanner home position sensor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Manual feed paper length detector
CSPD2
Function/Operation
Detects the transfer belt separation CL.
Detects the transfer belt separation BK.
Detects the duplex (ADU) upstream paper pass.
Detects the duplex (ADU) midstream paper pass.
Detects tray 1 upper limit.
Type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
NOTE
Transmission type
Transmission type
Manual paper
feed unit
Signal name
MPWD
MTOP1
MTOP2
OCSW
PCS_CL/K
POD1
POD2
POD3
PPD1
PPD2
REGS_F/R
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
TH_M/HUD_M
CSS1
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
CSS2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
Name
Manual paper feed tray paper width
detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position
detector 1
Original cover SW
Process control sensor
Fusing after-detection
Paper exit detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Registration pre-detection
Registration detection
Resist sensor
Toner density sensor
Toner density sensor
Toner density sensor
Toner density sensor
Paper exit full detection
Right tray paper exit full detection
Temperature/humidity detection
Tray 1 installation detection
Tray 1 rear edge detection 1
Tray 1 rear edge detection 2
Tray 1 rear edge detection 3
Tray 1 rear edge detection 4
Tray 2 installation detection
Tray 2 rear edge detection 1
Tray 2 rear edge detection 2
Tray 2 rear edge detection 3
Tray 2 rear edge detection 4
Function/Operation
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Type
Volume resistor
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Reflection type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Transmission type
Reflection type
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Magnetic sensor
Transmission type
Transmission type
Duct switch
Duct switch
Duct switch
Duct switch
Duct switch
Duct switch
Duct switch
Duct switch
NOTE
Manual paper
feed unit
Manual paper
feed unit
H. Switches
PWRSW
DSW-R
DHSW
MSW
DSW-F
1TNFD
Signal name
1TNFD
DHSW
(Japan only)
Name
Waste toner full detection switch
Dehumidifier heater switch
Type
Mechanical switch
Seesaw switch
DSW-F
Micro switch
DSW-R
Micro switch
MSW
PWRSW
Main SW
Operation panel power switch
Seesaw switch
Push switch
Function/Operation
Detects the waste toner full.
Turns ON/OFF the power lone of the dehumidifier heaters
provided in the scanner (reading) section and the paper
feed section.
Detects open/close of the front door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Detects open/close of the right door, and turns ON/OFF
the power line of the fusing motor and the LSU laser.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power source.
Outputs the ON/OF control signal of the DC power source.
Note
ADUGS
1TURC
MPGS
LSUSS1
PCSS
MPFS
MPUC
CPUC1
CPFC
CPUC2
Signal name
1TURC
Name
Primary transfer separation clutch
Type
Electromagnetic clutch
CPFC
Electromagnetic clutch
CPUC1
Electromagnetic clutch
CPUC2
Electromagnetic clutch
LSUSS1
MPFS
Electromagnetic solenoid
Electromagnetic solenoid
MPGS
Electromagnetic solenoid
MPUC
Electromagnetic clutch
PCSS
Electromagnetic solenoid
AUGS
Electromagnetic solenoid
Function/Operation
Controls the primary transfer separation
mode.
Controls ON/OFF of the paper transport
roller in the paper feed tray section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 1 section.
Controls ON/OFF of the roller in the
paper feed tray 2 section.
Opens/closes the LSU shutter.
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper
feed)
Controls open/close of the manual paper
feed gate.
Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
Opens/closes the shutter of the process
control and the registration sensor.
Controls the ADU gate.
Note
J. Drive motors
WEBM
PGM
MIM
TNM_Y
OSM
POM
ADUHM
FUM
WTNM
TNM_M
TNM_C
DVM_CL
TNM_K
DM_CL
DM_K
DVM_K
BTM
ADULM
RRM
PFM
CPFM
CLUM1
CLUM2
Signal name
ADULM
CLUM1
Type
Stepping motor
DC brush-less motor
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Drives the lift plate of the paper feed tray.
DC brush-less motor
CPFM
DM_CL
DM_K
DVM_CL
DVM_K
Name
ADU motor lower
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 2)
Paper feed motor
Drum motor (CL)
Drum motor (K)
Developing drive motor (CL)
Developing drive motor (K)
Brush-less motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Brush-less motor
Brush-less motor
FUM
MIM
OSM
PFM
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
PGM
POM
RRM
TNM_C
TNM_K
TNM_M
TNM_Y
WTNM
ADUHM
BTM
Polygon motor
Paper exit drive motor
Registration motor
Toner motor C
Toner motor K
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Waste toner drive motor
ADU motor upper
Belt motor
DC brushless motor
Stepping motor
Stepping motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Synchronous motor
Stepping motor
CLUM2
Note
K. Lamps
CLI
CCFT
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_K
HL_US
HL_UM
HL_LM
Signal name
CCFT
CLI
Name
LCD backlight
Scanner lamp
Type
CCFT cool cathode ray tube
Xenon lamp
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
Heater lamp lower main
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp upper sub
LED
LED
LED
LED
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Halogen lamp
Function/Operation
Backlight for the CCD
Radiates lights onto a document for the CCD to scan
document images.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Heats the lower heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Main)
Heats the upper heat roller. (Sub)
Note
4 : May 15 2006
LSUFAN
2
PCSFM
HDDFM
CPUFM
PSFM
OZFM
1
Signal name
CPUFM
HDDFM
OZFM
POFM_F
POFM_R
PSFM
PCSFM
LSUFAN
No.
1
2
3
Name
Controller cooling fan motor
HDD cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Power cooling fan motor
Toner hopper fan
LSU cooling fan motor
Name
Ozone filter
Toner filter
Paper exit filter
Function/Operation
Cools the controller PWB.
Cools the HDD.
Exhausts ozone.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the power unit.
Cools the toner.
Cools the polygon motor.
Note
Function/Operation
Absorbs ozone generated in the image process section.
Prevents dispersing of toner.
Note
M. PWB
DV
32
16
15
31
12
17
14
LSU
18
13
39
10
37
19
9
20
38
21
33
30
29
28
7
1
control box
27
23
26
22
4
34
25
24
35
36
11
2
3
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Name
RD I/F PWB
Tray 1 detection PWB
Tray 2 detection PWB
DC power PWB
Driver main PWB
MC PWB
Primary transfer PWB
AC power PWB
Scanner control PWB
CCD PWB
Phase detection PWB
CL inverter PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
Document detection light emitting PWB
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
Power SW PWB
HL PWB
Driver sub PWB
Secondary transfer PWB
Temperature/humidity sensor PWB
Manual paper feed width detection PWB
MFPcnt PWB
Mother PWB
PCU PWB
PCU Flash ROM PWB
BD PWB
LSU CNT PWB
LSU thermistor
DL PWB
DV initial PWB
LD PWB
Function/Operation
Detects the sensors in the right door unit.
Detects the tray 1.
Detects the tray 2.
Outputs the secondary side voltage.
Drives the transport motor and related sections.
Generates the high voltage for the main charger and the developing bias voltage.
Generates the primary transfer voltage.
Controls the primary side power source.
Controls the scanner section.
Scans the document images.
Adjusts the BL/CL drum phase.
Drives the xenon lamp.
Outputs the document size detection signal.
Emits the document size detection LED lights.
Generates the high voltage for the LCD backlight.
Converts the display signal and outputs to the LCD.
Outputs the key operation signal.
Outputs the ON/OFF control signal of the DC power source.
Controls the heater lamp.
Drives the process motor and related sections.
Generates the secondary transfer voltage and the transfer belt cleaning voltage.
Detects the ambient temperature and humidity.
Detects the manual paper feed tray paper width.
Controls images and the whole machine.
Interfaces the MFPcnt PWB and other PWB.
Controls the engine section.
Controls the PCU PWB.
Detects laser and outputs the synchronous signal.
Controls the LSU.
Measures the temperature in the LSU.
Discharges electric charges on the OPC drum.
Detects the DV model.
Controls laser lighting.
Note
No.
34
35
36
37
38
39
Name
SCAN IN PWB
DOCC PWB
BOOT ROM PWB
PROGRAM ROM PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB
HVR PWB
DSPF memory PWB
Function/Operation
Rectifies the waveform of scanner image data.
Recognizes the document control pattern.
Stores the program to boot the printer controller.
Stores the program.
Stores the scanner control program.
Divides the primary transfer electrode for each color to improve the transfer capability.
Note
Option
N. Fuses/Thermostats
18
1
2
13
14
15
16
17
4
5
6
7
8
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Signal name
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_LM
F201
F202
F203
F204
F205
F1
F2
F3
F4
F1
F102
F301
F101
F103
F1
Name
Upper thermostat sub
Upper thermostat main
Lower thermostat
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Fuse
Specifications
Prevents against overheating of the sub roller.
Prevents against overheating of the upper heat roller.
Prevents against overheating of the lower heat roller.
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
T6.3AH 250V
20A 125V
20A 125V
T2AH250V
T2AH250V
200mA 250V
125V 15A
T5AH 250V
T1AH 250V
T8AH 250V
1.25A250V
9
10
11
12
Section
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
Fusing unit
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
AC power PWB
LCD INV PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
DC power PWB
CL invertor PWB
O. Gate
No.
1
Name
ADU gate
Function/ Operation
Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU)
section or to discharge paper to the right door.
Note
P. Rollers
35
34
32
33
36
37
24
25
26
27
39
38
11
10
28
29
1
3
2
20
21
31
30
19
17
18
6
15
16
14
22
23
5
4
8
7
12
13
9
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Name
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Paper feed roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 2 paper feed tray)
Resist roller (Drive)
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Function/ Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separate paper to prevent against double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent against double feed.
Transports paper to the transfer section. Controls the paper transport
timing to adjust relative relations between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from No. 3 and No. 4 paper feed tray to the
transport roller 4.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller (No.
2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Reduces friction between paper and the paper guide.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Note
No.
21
Name
Transport roller 7 (Drive)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Function/ Operation
Transports paper from the paper feed tray 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the
transport roller 8.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper to the resist roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the upper/lower heat roller to the paper exit
roller 1.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Transports paper from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8. /
Transports the paper from the manual paper feed tray to the transport
roller 8.
Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the transport roller 2. /
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Discharges paper. Transports paper to the right paper exit tray.
Transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section.
Applies a pressure to paper and the transport roller to give paper the
transport power of the transport roller.
Discharges paper.
Heats toner on paper, and fuses it onto paper.
Applies a pressure to the upper heat roller.
Note
[6] ADJUSTMENTS
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. General
Each adjustment item in the adjustment item list is associated with
a specific Job number. Perform the adjustment procedures in the
sequence of Job numbers from the smallest to the greatest.
Unnecessary adjustments can be omitted. Even in this case, however, the sequence from the smallest to the greatest Job number
must be observed.
However, there is no need to perform all the adjustment items. Perform only the necessary adjustments according to the need.
ADJ 5
ADJ 6
ADJ 7
ADJ 8
ADJ 9
ADJ 10
ADJ 4A
ADJ 4B
ADJ 4C
ADJ 5A
ADJ 5B
ADJ 7A
ADJ 7B
ADJ 8A
ADJ 10A
ADJ 10B
ADJ 10C
ADJ 11
ADJ 12
ADJ 13
ADJ 14
ADJ 15
ADJ 11A
ADJ 11B
ADJ 11C
ADJ 11D
Scan image focus adjustment (CCD unit position adjustment)
Scan image skew adjustment (RSPF) (Refer to MX-RPX1 SM.)
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment
ADJ 14A
(Document table mode)
ADJ 14B
Scan image magnification ratio adjustment (RADF
mode) (Refer to the MX-RPX1 SM.)
ADJ 15A
ADJ 15B
ADJ 16
ADJ 17
ADJ 18
ADJ 19
ADJ 20
ADJ 16A
ADJ 16B
Print area (Void area) adjustment (Print engine section)
Copy image position, image loss adjustment
ADJ 18A
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 1
Simulation
8-2
8-1
8-6
44-13
44-2
64-1/61-4
50-22
44-31
50-10
50-10
50-22
50-20
50-21
48-1
48-1
48-1
48-1
50-12
50-12
50-10/50-1
50-1 (50-2)
50-6 (50-7)
50-5
63-3 (63-5)
46-24
46-21
46-1
46-2
46-10
46-16
46-27
Job No.
ADJ 20
ADJ 21
ADJ 22
ADJ 23
ADJ 24
ADJ 25
ADJ 26
ADJ 27
Simulation
46-25
26-53
46-33
46-33
67-24
67-25
26-54
41-2
41-2
40-2
53-7
65-1
50-28
50-28
50-28
50-28
3. Details of adjustment
2)
3)
adjustment
This adjustment must be executed in the following cases:
* When the developing unit is disassembled.
* When the print image density is low.
* When there is a blur on the print image.
* When there is unevenness in the print image density.
* There is abnormally much toner dispersion.
1)
Remove the developing unit from the main unit, and remove
the developing unit upper cover and the developing doctor
cover.
2
1
70mm
70mm
40mm
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 2
40mm
4)
3)
Hold the thread and bring the needle near the developing
roller. (Do not use a paper clip because it will not provide a correct position.)
4)
23mm
5)
70mm
5)
40mm
70mm
40mm
Measure the distance between the marking position and position A of the developing unit frame, and check that it is 37.8
0.5mm.
If the distance is not within the above range, adjust the developing roller main pole position in the following procedures.
37.8 + 0.5mm
37.8 + 0.5mm
The gauge must pass with its own weight. (It will free-fall if you
release your hand from it.)
The advisable point of measurement is the MIN point of the MG
roller oscillation.
* Marked point (A) on the follower side (right side) of the MG roller.
6)
7)
Remove the developing doctor cover, and place the developing unit on a flat surface.
2)
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed during rotation, the operation is stopped and [EXECUTE] key returns to the normal display.
If [EE-EU], [EE-EL], or [EE-EG] is displayed, setting of the reference toner density control value is not completed normally.
Error
display
EE-EL
EL abnormality
EE-EU
EU abnormality
EE-EC
EC abnormality
Error name
Detail of error
Sensor output level, 1.5V or below; control
voltage, 8.0V or above
Sensor output level, 3.45V or above;
control voltage, 2.0V or below
Sensor output level, other than 2.5V 0.2V
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
xxx
5)
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
xxx
6)
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
xxx
NOTE:
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
xxx
M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
xxx
EXECUTE
1)
1/2
EXECUTE
M
2)
or process interrupt
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
ADJUSTMENT
TCD_K
xx
TCV_K
xx
TCD_C
xx
TCV_C
xx
TCD_M
xx
TCV_M
xx
TCD_Y
xx
TCV_Y
xx
0
TEST
EXECUTE
1/1
Adjustment completed
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
ADJUSTMENT
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
xxx
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
xxx
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
xxx
EXECUTE
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
0
TEST
1/2
MHV/GRID SETTING
A:
Abnormal
end
TEST
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
230
ADJUSTMENT
TCD_K
EE-EL
TCV_K
TCD_C
xx
TCV_C
TCD_M
EE-EL
TCV_M
xx
TCV_Y
TCD_Y
AND OUTPUT
xxx
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
850
MIDDLE
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
A : xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_K
B: xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_C
C: xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_M
D: xxx
MIDDLE SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
10-key
1/1
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
2)
or after 30 sec.
3)
4)
When [EXECUTE] key it pressed, it is highlighted. The developing roller rotates, and the toner sensor detects toner density,
and the output value is displayed.
0
TEST
A:
230
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-02
MHV/GRID SETTING
The above operation is executed for 3 minutes, and the average value of the toner density sensor detection level is set
(saved) as the reference toner density control value.
When the reference toner density control adjustment operation
is completed, [EXECUTE] key display return, to normal from
highlight. This makes you know whether the adjustment operation is completed or not.
OK
xxx
850
MIDDLE
AND OUTPUT
A : xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
B: xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
C: xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
D: xxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
2)
3)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 4
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
Mode
Adjustment value
Adjustment Default
range
value
230 850
645
Actual
voltage
615V
230 850
645
53.6 1.61V
CNMON
615V
230 850
645
53.6 1.61V
CNMON
615V
230 850
645
53.6 1.61V
CNMON
615V
230 850
620
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
230 850
620
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
230 850
620
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
230 850
620
52.7 1.58V
CNMON
605V
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
GBK:XXX
GBC:XXX
GBM:XXX
If possible, it is recommendable to use an unnecessary developing unit and an unnecessary OPC drum for this adjustment.
GBY:XXX
8)
2
1
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 5
1)
0
TEST
DV
SETTING
A:
AND
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-01
700
MIDDLE
OUTPUT
Axxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
Bxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
Cxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
Dxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
0
TEST
DV
SETTING
A:
AND
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-01
700
MIDDLE
OUTPUT
Axxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
Bxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
Cxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
Dxxx
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
2)
3)
Item
MIDDLE
LOW
Mode
Adjustment value
Adjustment Default
range
value
0 700
450
Actual
voltage
450V
0 700
450
12.1 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
450
12.1 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
450
12.1 0.36V
CNMON
450V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
0 700
430
11.4 0.34V
CNMON
430V
To adjust all the modes individually, first adjust the middle speed
mode, then adjust the other mode.
DVK:XXX
DVC:XXX
DVM:XXX
DVY:XXX
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 6
1)
8)
Developing unit
OPC drum unit
High voltage circuit electrode
3)
4)
1)
5)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
TEST
A:
xxx
0
255
Axxx
Bxxx
Cxxx
Dxxx
CNMON
1
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
or after 30 sec.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
TEST
6)
7)
A:
xxx
0
255
Axxx
Bxxx
Cxxx
Dxxx
EXECUTE
OK
2)
3)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 7
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
Content
Primary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
Low speed
Middle speed
CMY
Low speed
Middle speed
K
Low speed
Middle speed
Normal Front surface
paper
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Cleaning process
Low speed print
Middle speed print
Cleaning
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
232
232
139
139
232
232
100
100
90
90
69
69
60
60
184
184
79
72
72
156
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
50V to 1500
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
Default
value
Actual
output value
4500V
4500V
2500V
2500V
4500V
4500V
12.5A
12.5A
10A
10A
6A
6A
4A
4A
30A
30A
8A
200V
200V
800V
Open the front cabinet of the main unit, and remove the waste
toner box.
2)
3)
Turn to the transfer belt tension release cam and release the
primary transfer belt tension.
UN LOCK
* Check to confirm that the transfer belt is clean and free from
scratches.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 8
2 : Feb. 15 2006
4)
5)
Open the process front cover, and pull out the primary transfer
belt unit.
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_CL
LED ADJ
Content
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value
Color image density sensor
dark-voltage level
Color image density sensor
LED current adjustment
target value (PCS CL CARB
OUT) registered LED current
level
Adjustment
value range
1 255
Default
value
108
0 255
1 255
21
Install the image density sensor calibration jig (UKOG0318FCZZ) to the sensor housing section.
Engage the pawl (A) in the sensor housing groove, and slide it
to the rear frame side.
* PCU PWB
* Image sensor calibration jig (standard reflection sheet dirt,
scratch, discoloration)
NOTE: Store the image sensor calibration jig under low temperature, low humidity and dark place.
A
A
1)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-02
7)
xx
PCS_ GRND
xx
xx
xx
PCS_CL DARK
xx
PCS_KBELTMIN :
xx
PCS_K DARK
xx
PCS_KBELTDIF :
xx
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
xxx
PCS CL DARK
xxx
xxx
EXECUTE
2)
1/1
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-13
xxx
PCS CL DARK
xxx
xxx
1/4
EXECUTE
1/1
8)
9)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 9
PRO CON
REGIST
Display/Item
A
PCS_CL LED ADJ
B
PCS _K LED ADJ
C
PCS_CL DARK
D
PCS_K DARK
E
PCS_K GRND
F
PCS_K BELT MAX
G PCS_K BELT MIN
H
PCS_K BELT DIF
I
REG_F LED ADJ
J
REG_R LED ADJ
K
REG_F DARK
L
REG_R DARK
M REG_F GRND
N
REG_R GRND
O REG_F BELTMAX
P
REG_F BELT MIN
Q REG_F BELT DIF
R
REG_R BELT MAX
S
REG_R BELT MIN
T
REG_R BELT DIF
U
REG_F PATCH (K)
V
REG_F PATCH (C)
W REG_F PATCH (M)
X
REG_F PATCH (Y)
Y
REG_R PATCH (K)
Z
REG_R PATCH (C)
AA REG_R PATCH (M)
AB REG_R PATCH (Y)
Content
Color image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Black image density sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Color image sensor dark voltage
Black image density sensor dark voltage
Belt base detection level when completion of Item B adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.)
Belt base detection level (Min.)
Belt base detection level difference (Item F Item G)
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F
Image registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R
Image registration sensor dark voltage F
Image registration sensor dark voltage R
Belt base detection level when completion of Item I adjustment
Belt base detection level when completion of Item J adjustment
Belt base detection level (Max.) F
Belt base detection level (Min.) F
Belt base detection level difference (Item O Item P)
Belt base detection level (Max.) R
Belt base detection level (Min.) R
Belt base detection level difference (Item R Item S)
Patch detection level F (K)
Patch detection level F (C)
Patch detection level F (M)
Patch detection level F (Y)
Patch detection level R (K)
Patch detection level R (C)
Patch detection level R (M)
Patch detection level R (Y)
1)
Default value
21
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
56
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
TEST
A:
xxx
1
PRINT)
Axxx
MULTICOUNT
PAPERCS1
999
* PCU PWB
* Transfer belt (dirt, scratch)
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
TEST
unit)
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.61-04
(SELF
PRINT)
Axxx
MULTICOUNT
PAPERCS1
1 999
* When the LSU (writing) unit is removed from the main unit.
EXECUTE
2)
3)
OK
Direction A
Direction B
Reference line
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 10
4)
Check the printed black image for any skew (right angle).
Measure the right angle level by using the six cross patterns
printed in black.
Open the front cabinet, and remove the waste toner box.
6)
Loosen the LSU (writing) unit fixing screws (2 pcs.) and shift
the skew adjustment screw in the arrow direction to adjust the
LSU (writing) unit skew.
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C > D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of Y.
(Method 1)
When the lengths of the diagonal line are C < D, shift the
adjustment screw in the direction of X.
Diagonal line D
Diagonal line C
F
b) Calculate the difference between the measured lengths C
and D of the diagonal lines.
7)
Install the waste toner box, and close the front cabinet.
8)
10) In the above black image skew adjustment, check the color
image skew pattern printed when completion of the adjustment.
A3 or 11 x 8.5 paper
*B
Comparison line
Direction B
Direction A
Magenta
Cyan
Direction A
Yellow
0.5 mm or less
*A
Direction B
*B
F
*A: Rough adjustment pattern
*B: Fine adjustment pattern
Reference line
F
The cross patterns in a row
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 11
(Compare the front and the rear frame positions of the samecolor print color patterns. All the highest density sections of all
the print color patterns may not be aligned on a line. Compare
only the same-color patterns.)
11) Turn the image skew adjustment screw of the target color to
adjust.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
,MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
PHASE
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
xxx (xx)
REGIST
DRUM POS
xxx (xx)
ALL
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
1/1
Normal end
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
TEST
PRESS
[EXECUTE] TO
START
ERRORTONNER EMPTY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
EXECUTE
2)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 12
SIMULATION NO.44-31
DRUM
POSITION
A:
x
1
SETTING
A x
B x
COLOR
C x
MODESET VALUE
PAPERSELECT
EXECUTE
OK
TEST
10-key
OK
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
DRUM
POSITION
SETTING
A x
A:
MODESET VALUE
B x
COLOR
C x
PAPERSELECT
EXECUTE
5)
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
DRUM
POSITION
A:
x
1
SETTING
A x
B x
COLOR
C x
PAPERSELECT
MODESET VALUE
EXECUTE
OK
10-key
OK
94mm
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
DRUM
POSITION
A:
SETTING
A x
B x
COLOR
C x
PAPERSELECT
EXECUTE
or end of print
0
POSITION
1
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
A:
94mm
EXECUTE
DRUM
94mm
MODE45
EXECUTE
TEST
94mm
SETTING
A 1
B 2
COLOR
C 2
MODE45
EXECUTE
OK
2)
Enter "1" with 10-key in the PRINT MODE of set item A, and
press [OK] key.
3)
4)
1)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
TEST
PAPER
CENTER
A:
xxx
OFFSET
SETUP
Axxx
BK-MAG
B xx
MTF
C xx
CS1
D xx
CS2
64 140
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
end of print
0
TEST
PAPER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
CENTER
xxx
OFFSET
SETUP
Axxx
BK-MAG
Bxx
MTF
Cxx
CS1
Dxx
CS2
64 140
OK
2)
3)
Select the paper feed tray set in procedure 2) with the scroll
key.
4)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
Check that the inside dimension of the printed half tone is 240
0.5mm.
A : xxx
A:
xxx
; BK- MAG
B : xx
; MTF
C : xx
; CS1
D : xx
; CS2
[ 60~140 ]
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
A:
xxx
; BK- MAG
B : xx
; MTF
C : xx
; CS1
D : xx
; CS2
[ 60~140 ]
EXECUTE
Select set item J with the scroll key and enter the value corresponding to the paper feed tray to be adjusted.
Display/Item
2)
OK
BK-MAG
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 14
Content
Main scan print
magnification ratio BK
Print off-center adjustment
value (Manual feed tray)
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 1)
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 2)
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 3)
Print off-center adjustment
value (Paper feed tray 4)
Print off-center adjustment
value (LCC)
Set
range
60 140
Default
value
100
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
Display/Item
H
I
J
ADU
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS 1
CS 2
CS 3
CS 4
DUPLEX
LCC
YES
Content
Print off-center adjustment
value (ADU)
Note: Before execution of
this adjustment, check to
insure that the adjustment
items A G have been
properly adjusted. If not,
this adjustment cannot be
made properly.
Print quantity
Paper feed Manual paper
tray select feed tray
Paper feed
tray 1
Paper feed
tray 2
Paper feed
tray 3
Paper feed
tray 4
LCC
Duplex
Selected
print select
Set
range
1 99
Default
value
50
1 999
16 1
1
2 (CS 1)
2
3
4
5
01
6
0
1 (NO)
3)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper in the paper feed tray selected in procedure 2).
4)
5)
RV = 2.0 2.0mm
FV = 2.0 2.0mm
If the above conditions are not satisfied, execute the procedures below.
6)
7)
When the adjustment value is increased, the adjustment pattern is shifted to the front frame side. When it is decreased, the
adjustment pattern is shifted to the rear frame side.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 15
Display/Item
REGIST
MAIN
R
Content
C
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
DLUM POSITION
AUTO ADJUSTMENT OF REGISTRATION &
,MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
xxx(x)
xxx (x)
REGIST
PHASE
SUB
xxx (x)
xxx (x)
DRUM POS
ALL
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
1/1
Normal end
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
Default
value
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
1.0 199.0
100
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (R side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Cyan)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Magenta)
Image registration
adjustment value (Sub
scanning direction)
(Yellow)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 199.0
EXECUTING
EXECUTE
Abnormal end
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
[EXECUTE] TO
START
ERRORTONNER EMPTY
0
EXECUTE
2)
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-20
TEST
Press [REGIST] key to select the image registration adjustment auto adjustment mode.
A:
xxx
DIRECTION
Axxx
CYAN(FRONT)
Bxxx
CYAN(REAR)
Cxxx
MAGENTA(FRONT)
Dxxx
MAGENTA(REAR)
1 199
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
Display/Item
REGIST
MAIN
F
Content
C
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Cyan) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Magenta) (F side)
Image registration
adjustment value (Main
scanning direction)
(Yellow) (F side)
Adjustment
value range
1.0 199.0
Default
value
100
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-20
1.0 199.0
100
A:
xxx
DIRECTION
CYAN(FRONT)
Bxxx
CYAN(REAR)
Cxxx
MAGENTA(FRONT)
Dxxx
MAGENTA(REAR)
1 199
1.0 199.0
100
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 16
EXECUTE
OK
2)
3)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color in the front frame and the rear
frame sides.
Use the visually highest color density section as the center,
and measure the shift amount.
The front frame registration and the rear frame registration are
adjusted independently.
To check the image registration, therefore, check the front
frame side and the rear frame side individually.
Rough adjustment
print pattern check:
Fine adjustment
print pattern check:
Display/Item
A
CYAN
(FRONT)
CYAN
(REAR)
MAGENTA
(FRONT)
MAGENTA
(REAR)
YELLOW
(FRONT)
YELLOW
(REAR)
Content
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Cyan) (R side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Magenta) (R side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (F side)
Image registration adjustment
value (Main scanning
direction) (Yellow) (R side)
Adjustment
value range
1 199
Default
value
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 17
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
-20
(Example)
The measurement value of the figure is "7."
* Measurement of the rough adjustment pattern
Check that the color line is positioned in the plus direction or in the minus direction and judge the polarity from
that.
The center black line is scaled as 0, the first line mark
as 20, the second line mark as 40, the third line mark as
60. The interval between the rough adjustment marks
corresponds to 20.
(Example)
In the case of the figure, it is between 20 40 of the
plus polarity, and the measurement is "20."
* The actual shift amount is the sum of the rough adjustment reference shift amount and the fine adjustment
shift amount.
Shift amount (correction value) = Rough adjustment
shift amount + Fine adjustment shift amount
20
b)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 18
Yellow
E
Magenta
C
Cyan
A
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 19
(Example)
Previous value before adjustment
A: 100
B: 112
C: 95
D: 98
E: 102
F: 96
0
TEST
REGISTRATION
ADJUSTMENT : SCANNING
Axxx
A:
xxx
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-21
DIRECTION
CYAN
Bxxx
MAGENTA
Cxxx
YELLOW
Dxxx
MULTIOUNT
199
EXECUTE
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
or end of print
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-21
A:
xxx
1
DIRECTION
CYAN
Bxx
MAGENTA
Cxxx
YELLOW
Dxxx
MULTIOUNT
199
EXECUTE
2)
3)
OK
Select the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) or A3 (11 x 17)
paper in it by changing the value of set item H.
Press [EXECUTE] key.
The sub scanning direction image registration adjustment pattern is printed.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 20
4)
Measurement value: 27 (= 20 7)
Check the rough adjustment and the fine adjustment print pattern positions of each color.
The visually highest color density section is regarded as the
center, and used as the measurement value.
Rough adjustment
print pattern check:
Fine adjustment
print pattern check:
CYAN
MAGENTA
YELLOW
Content
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Cyan)
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Magenta)
Image registration adjustment
value (Sub scanning
direction) (Yellow)
Default
value
100
1 199
100
1 199
100
Adjustment
value range
1 199
-20
20
C: Adjustment range
The shift amount is calculated from the adjustment reference position for each of the three adjustment items A
C.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 21
b)
Loosen the fixing screws of the scanner unit A and the drive
wire, and remove the scanner unit A from the drive wire.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 22
2)
Turn the scanner drive pulley manually and shift the scanner
unit B to bring it into contact with the stopper. When the scanner unit B is in contact with the two stoppers on the front and
the rear frames simultaneously, the parallelism is proper.
3)
Loosen the fixing screw of the pulley angle on the front frame
side of the scanner unit.
4)
Adjust the position of the pulley angle on the front frame side
of the scanner unit B so that it is in contact with two stoppers
simultaneously.
5)
Fix the pulley angle on the front frame side of the scanner unit
B.
6)
With the scanner unit B in contact with both stoppers, fit the
edge of the scanner unit A with the right edge of the frame, and
fix the scanner unit A with the fixing screw.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained from the above procedures, perform the following procedures.
Loosen the fixing screw of the scanner unit drive pulley which
is not in contact.
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, turn the scanner
unit drive pulley manually and adjust so that the scanner unit B
is in contact with both stoppers on the front frame and the rear
frame simultaneously. (Change the relative position of the
scanner unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.) Fix the scanner
unit drive pulley fixing screw.
L = 10mm
L
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 23
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table. (Shift the test chart edge 30mm from the reference
position as shown below.) With the document cover open,
make a copy on A3 (11" x 17") paper.
L = 10mm
L
3)
La
2)
Set the test chart prepared in the procedure 1) on the document table, and make a copy on A3 (11"x 17") paper.
3)
Lb
If the four angles of the copy image are right angles, there is
no distortion. (Completion of the adjustment)
Loosen either one of the fixing screws of the scanner unit drive
pulley. (Either one on the front frame or on the rear frame will
do.)
Lc
Lc
Copy A
Copy B
Ld
There is no difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc = Ld
5)
6)
Without moving the scanner unit drive shaft, manually turn the
scanner unit drive pulley to change the parallelism of the scanner unit A and B. (Change the relative position of the scanner
unit drive pulley and the drive shaft.)
Ld
There is some difference
between the distortion on
the right and that on the left.
Lc Ld
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 24
5)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
MAGNIFICATION
A:
xx
99
ADJUSTMENT
Axx
CCD(MAIN)
Bxx
CCD(SUB)
Cxx
SPF(MAIN)
Dxx
SPF(SUB)
OK
6)
7)
2)
3)
2)
5)
Compare the scale length with the scale image length on the
copy paper.
6)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 25
11) Slide the CCD unit in the arrow direction (CCD sub scanning
direction) to change the installing position.
100mm scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
110
When the copy image is longer than the original scale, shift the
CCD unit in the direction B. When the copy image is shorter
than the original scale, shift the CCD unit in the direction A.
One scale of mark-off line corresponds to 0.2%.
At that time, fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the
scale on the front and the rear side of the CCD unit base.
* Fix the CCD unit so that it is in parallel with the line marked
in procedure 9).
1.0mm
Copy image
(1mm (1%)
shorter than
the original)
10
20
90
100
110
A
8)
9)
To prevent against shift of the CCD unit optical axis, mark the
CCD unit base as shown below.
12) Make a copy and check the copy magnification ratio again.
If the copy magnification ratio is not in the range of 100 1%,
repeat the procedures of 9) 11) until the condition is satisfied.
NOTE: By changing the CCD unit fixing position with the simulation 48-1 adjustment value at 50, the copy magnification
ratio is adjusted within the specified range (100 1.0%)
and the specified resolution is obtained based on the optical system structure.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 26
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
1
99
Axx
CCD(MAIN)
Bxx
CCD(SUB)
Cxx
SPF(MAIN)
Dxx
SPF(SUB)
OK
3)
2)
(Example 1)
Copy A
(Shorter than
the original)
10
20
90
100
110
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.48-01
TEST
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
1
99
Axx
CCD(MAIN)
Bxx
CCD(SUB)
Cxx
SPF(MAIN)
Dxx
SPF(SUB)
Scale
(Original)
10
20
90
100
110
OK
3)
4)
5)
(Example 2)
Copy B
(Longer than
the original)
4)
When the adjustment value is increased, the copy magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is increased.
20
90
100
110
When the adjustment value is changed by 1, the copy magnification ratio is changed by about 0.1%.
10
5)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 27
4)
5)
adjustment
6)
Press [CLOSE] key and shift from the simulation mode to the
copy mode and make a copy.
Repeat the procedures of 2) 6) until the above condition is
satisfied.
2)
1)
0
PAPER
CENTER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
TEST
xxx
OFFSET
SETUP
Axxx
BK-MAG
B xx
MTF
C xx
CS1
D xx
CS2
60 140
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
PAPER
CENTER
OFFSET
SETUP
A xxx
TEST
SIMULATION NO.50-12
CLOSE
A:
xxx
A:
xx
1
A xx
OC
Bxx
SPF(SIDE1)
Cxx
SPF(SIDE2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-10
BK-MAG
B xx
MTF
C xx
CS1
D xx
CS2
60 140
EXECUTE
99
OK
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 28
OK
2)
Set A4 (11 x 8.5) paper to all the trays, and select the set item
J with the scroll key. Enter the value corresponding to the
adjustment target paper feed tray.
3)
4)
Select the adjustment item with the scroll key, and enter the
adjustment value and press [OK] key.
Display/
Item
X
Y
Z1/Z2
6)
DENA
Content
Void are
amount
adjustment
DENB
FRONT/
REAR
Z1
2.02.0mm
Lead edge
void area
adjustment
Rear edge
void area
adjustment
FRONT/
REAR void
area
adjustment
Standard
adjustment
value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
1 99
30
3.0
1.0mm
1 99
20
2.0
1.0mm
1 99
20
2.0
2.0mm
X
3.01.0mm
Y
2.01.0mm
The adjustment value and the actual void area are related as
follows:
Adjustment value/10 = Actual void area
After execution of the above, perform procedures 1) 4) to
check that the void area is within the specified range.
Though the lead edge void area adjustment value is proper, if
the lead edge void area is not within the specified range,
change the adjustment value of RRCB-XXX of SIM 50-1.
Z2
2.02.0mm
(Note) Feed paper from all the paper feed trays to confirm.
If the above condition is not satisfied, or if it is set to a desired
condition, execute the simulation 50-1.
5)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
TEST
LEAD EDGE
A:
ADJUSTMENT
xx
0
99
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
Adjustment
range
1 99
Default
value
50
1 99
50
LCC
1 99
50
Manual
feed
ADU
1 99
50
1 99
50
Content
Image lead
edge
position
adjustment
value
Resist
motor ON
timing
adjustment
Standard
cassette
Desk
VALUE
A xx
Display
item
RRCBCS12
RRCBCS34
RRCBLCC
RRCBMFT
RRCBADU
OK
10-key
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5001
LEAD EDGE
A:
0
ADJUSTMENT
xx
99
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
VALUE
A xx
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 29
1)
2)
LEAD EDGE
Place white paper on the document table so that the scale lead
edge can be seen.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-01
TEST
ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
0
99
VALUE
A xx
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
OK
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150
10-key
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5001
LEAD EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
A:
xx
99
VALUE
A xx
RRCA
B xx
RRCB-CS12
C xx
RRCB-CS34
D xx
RRCB-LCC
OK
3)
4)
Display item
RRCA
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Content
Document lead edge reference position (OC)
Resist motor ON timing
Standard cassette
adjustment
Desk
LCC
Manual feed
ADU
Lead edge image loss adjustment
Side image loss adjustment
Lead edge void area adjustment
Rear edge void area adjustment
FRONT/REAR void area adjustment
5)
Adjustment range
0 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
0 99
0 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
30
20
30
20
20
Copy area
10mm
5mm
100%
5mm 10mm
LEAD
200%
5mm
Display/
Item
Content
Image loss
adjustment
value
SIDE
10mm
Lead edge
image loss
adjustment
Side image
loss
adjustment
Standard
adjustment
value
Adjustment
range
Default
value
0 99
30
3.0
1.0mm
0 99
20
2.0
1.0mm
1)
0
TEST
LEAD
EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
VALUE (PRINTER)
Axxx
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
xxx
DEN-C
Bxxx
DEN-B
Cxxx
FRONT/REAR
Dxxx
MULTI COUNT
1 99
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
End of print
TEST
LEAD
EDGE
ADJUSTMENT
VALUE (PRINTER)
Axxx
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
xxx
DEN-C
Bxxx
DEN-B
Cxxx
FRONT/REAR
Dxxx
MULTI COUNT
1 99
EXECUTE
2)
OK
Select the set item E with the scroll key, and enter the value
corresponding to the paper feed tray with A4 (11 x 8.5) paper
in it.
A
D
E
Display/Item
DEN-C
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
Content
Printer print image lead edge adjustment
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Select
3)
4)
Measure the distance from the paper lead edge the adjustment
pattern to the image lead edge, and check to confirm that it is
in the standard adjustment value range.
Adjustment range
1 99
1 999
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
01
0
5)
6)
Default value
30
1
2 (CS1)
1 (NO)
Select the adjustment target of the paper feed mode adjustment item DENC with the scroll key.
Change the adjustment value.
Enter the adjustment value and press [OK] or [EXECUTE] key.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed.
When the adjustment value is increased, the distance from the
paper lead edge to the image lead edge is increased. When
the adjustment value is decreased, the distanced is
decreased.
When the set value is changed by 1, the distance is changed
by about 0.1mm.
3.02.0mm
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 31
Display
ADJ
5
ADJ
6
ADJ
7
ADJ
10
Image density
sensor, image
registration
sensor
adjustment
ADJ
5A
ADJ
5B
44-2
OPC drum
phase
adjustment
50-22
Image
registration
adjustment
(Print engine
section)
ADJ
7A
ADJ
7B
ADJ
10A
ADJ
10B
TN_COV
TN_PROCON
Allow
TN_ENV
Allow
TN_DRIP
Allow
3)
Adjustment/setting item
AU
AL
AO
AO
44-31
50-22
HV
HT
TC
MD VG
MD LD
MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
Set range
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
PHT
Allow
Inhibit
AR_AUTO
50-21
AR_ERROR
Allow
DM_PHASE
Allow
SENSITIVITY
Inhibit
PRT_HT
Allow
Default value
50
50
500
500
Content
TN_SPEND
50-20
Allow
64-1/61-4
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Default
value
Allow
44-13
ADJ
10C
2)
Simulation
to be used
Adjustment item
Set range
TN_LIFE
Job
No
Content
Default
value
Allow
Job No
Allow
ADJ 1
ADJ 2
ADJ 4
Allow
Allow
ADJ 12
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Allow
Adjustment item
Simulation
to be used
8-2
8-1
8-6
2)
3)
4)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 32
Work item
Simulation
24-7
After
replacing
OPC drum
After
replacing
developer
drum
After
replacing
transfer belt
When in
After
After cleaning
install/repair/check
replacement
scanner
(without replacing
of the image
(reading)
consumable parts)
density sensor
section
24-5
ADJ 5A
44-13
ADJ 7
50-22 (44-31)
ADJ 6
64-1/61-4
ADJ 10
50-22 (50-20/
50-21)
The necessary work items for each condition are marked with " ."
Yes
No
Yes
No
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 33
3
Can the
copy color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
Yes
No
No
Yes
1
*2
The number of times
is limited to 3 times
Are the
color balance
and density at the
satisfactory
levels?
No
Were all
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Yes
No
Yes
No
Were the
copy color balance and
density
customized?
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density adjustment
targets changed?
(SIM 63-11)
Yes
Yes
No
1
Set the color patch image (adjustment
pattern) printed in the copy color balance/
density adjustment on the original table,
and press the EXECUTE key.
No
Press the OK key.
*2
The number of
times is limited to
3 times
Yes
Are the
copy color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
Yes
No
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 34
(Method)
a. Note for execution of the color balance and density check in the
color copy mode
To check the copy color balance and density, use the gray test
chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) and the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ). Set the copy density level to "3" in the Text/Printed
Photo mode (Manual), and make a copy.
1)
Check that the table glass, No. 1, 2, 3 mirrors, and the lens
surface are free from dirt and dust. (If there is some dust and
dirt, wipe and clean with alcohol.
2)
At that time, all the color balance adjustments in the user adjustment mode must be set to the default (center).
1)
10
Patch 2 is copied.
If the SIT chart is not available, execute SIM 63-5 to set the
CCD gamma to the default. In this case, however, the adjustment accuracy is lower when compared with the adjustment
method using the SIT chart.
(Black-and-white copy)
Patch 2 is
slightly copied.
1
10
NOTE:
Patch 3 is copied.
Patch 1 is not copied.
0
SCANNER COLOR
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
TEST
BALANCE
#8: 75,
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
#11: 38,
#12: 29,
#13: 27,
#19:
#20:
5,
4, #22: 2,
#:24: 2
OC
1/4
NOTE:
The densities of patches 1 6 of
each color are properly balanced.
Patch 7 is slightly
copied or not copied.
2)
3)
2)
4)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SERVICE
EXECUTE
1)
2)
3)
4)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM44-6)
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
1)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same. Both are set to the standard
color balance when shipping.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
EXECUTE
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 36
5)
High density
CLOSE
TEST
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
Max O
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE PROCON." is displayed. This operation takes several minutes.
PROCEDURE.
6)
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedure, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
THIS
QUIT
CLOSE
PLEASE
(Method 3)
THIS
COMPLETED
OK
REPEAT
TEST
Low density
Also when the service target is selected in procedure 4) to execute the automatic adjustment and a satisfactory result is not
obtained, perform the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
MODE.
(Method 1)
7)
Fig. 1 PG image
High density
Low density
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
C
Bk
EXECUTE
Max O
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
(Method 2)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 37
EXECUTE
1/1
0
HALF
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
2)
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
1)
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#5: ERR
4)
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
5)
EXECUTE
1/1
* Execute the high density image correction (process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
9)
TEST
ENGINE COLOR
A:
245 755
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx
POINT1
B : xxx
POINT2
C : xxx
POINT3
D : xxx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
EXECUTE
10-key
EXECUTE
TEST
A:
BALANCE
xxx
245 755
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
ENGINE COLOR
BALANCE
xxx
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-21
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A : xxx
POINT1
B : xxx
POINT2
C : xxx
POINT3
D : xxx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
2)
3)
a. General
Low density
M
C
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
In this manual adjustment, adjust only the color patch which could
not adjusted properly in the automatic adjustment.
If the color balance is improper, execute the automatic color balance adjustment in advance, and execute this adjustment for better
efficiency.
Max O
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
HALF
7)
VALUE
REGISTER
EXECUTE
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in
the normal copy mode, the text/Printed Photo mode (Manual)
to check the adjustment result. (Refer to the item of the copy
color balance/density check.)
STANDARD
RESULT
6)
PROCON
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
TONE
RESULT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
Execute SIM 44-21. (Execute the initial setting of the half tone
image correction.)
EXECUTE
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
HALF
TONE
TOUCH
PROCON
[EXECUTE]
STANDARD VALUE
THEN
EXECUTION
REGISTER
START.
It takes several minute to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
(Normal end (Auto transition))
0
EXECUTE
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
RESULT
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
COMPLETE
RESULT
0
HALF
TONE
PROCON
STANDARD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-21
TEST
EXECUTE
VALUE
REGISTER
RESULT
HALF
COMPLETE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
RESULT
RESULT
EXECUTE
ERROR:K,C,M,Y
RESULT
EXECUTE
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 39
9)
In the above three, only the service color balance target can be set
to a desired level.
Make a copy of the servicing color test chart (UK0G0283FCZZ) and a user's document according to necessity in
the Text/Printed Photo mode (Manual) and check the adjustment result again. (Refer to the item of the copy color balance/
density check.)
If the copy color balance and density are not in the specified
level, repeat procedures of 7) 9) until they are in the specified range.
If the copy color balance and density are not adjusted to the
specified level by repeating the procedures 3 times, there may
be another cause.
Troubleshoot the cause, and repair or perform proper treatments, and try all the procedures of the print image adjustment
from the beginning.
Each color balance target for the copy color balance adjustment
(NOTE)
If the color balance is customized, use SIM 63-7 to register the
color balance as the service target.
Kind
Factory
color
balance
(gamma)
target
Service
color
balance
(gamma)
target
User
color
balance
(gamma)
target
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target, and each
of them is specified according to the machine design. Use
SIM 63-11 to select one of them as the factory target. The
default setting (factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to customize
the color balance to users desired level. In advance, the
users unique color balance must be registered as the
service color balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the serviceman
with SIM 46-21 to adjust the color balance and with SIM
63-7 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user executes
the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target is
changed, the color balance target of the users color
balance adjustment is also changed. When, however, SIM
63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to the factory
color balance target set with SIM 63-11.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color balance is
same as the factory color balance target. (Emphasized on
color reproduction (DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the color
balance, be sure to use SIM 63-8 to set the color balance
to the factory color balance target.
Same color balance as the service color balance (gamma)
target
When the service color balance target is changed, this
color balance target is also changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the copy
color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Color balance target in the copy color balance
automatic adjustment (SIM 46-24)
Use SIM 63-11 to select
one of the three kinds of
color balance targets.
Factory color balance
target (DEF1)
Factory color balance
target (DEF2)
Factory color balance
target (DEF3)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 40
Factory setting
SIM63-8
Hue
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
+a*
Direction
of Red
Direction
of Green
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Default
Direction of Blue
Service color balance target in the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 45-24).
For the service color balance target, an optional color balance
can be adjusted with SIM 46-21 and registered with SIM 63-7.
When, however, SIM 63-8 is executed, the color balance is set to
the same balance as the factory color balance target set with
SIM 63-11.
Color balance target in the user color balance adjustment
This color balance is same as the service color balance target in
the copy color balance adjustment (SIM 46-24). When, therefore,
the service color balance target is changed, this target is also
changed accordingly.
(Meaning of the service color balance target gamma data and
the purpose of registration)
This procedure must be executed only when the color balance is
customized with SIM 46-21.
If the color balance is not customized, this procedure is not
required.
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21 according to the user's request, use SIM 63-7
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
By this procedure, the service color balance target is revised.
It is recommendable to keep the printed adjustment pattern with
SIM 46-21. This adjustment pattern can be used to register the
same color balance target to another machine.
It is also useful to register the service color balance target data.
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 46-21, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
The correctness of the service color balance target data can be
judges as follows.
Select the service color balance target with SIM 46-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
This may be caused when an improper or abnormal color balance
adjustment pattern was used to register the service color balance
target data for the color balance adjustment with SIM 63-7.
The color balance adjustment pattern used in registration was
made and printed by the color balance adjustment (Manual) with
SIM 46-21. This procedure may have been executed erroneously.
b. Setting procedure
(Setting procedure of an optional color balance (gamma) as
the service color balance target)
1)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 41
2)
0
SCANNER
#B:
#G:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-07
TEST
TARGET
91,
28935,
#L: 169731,
OF
#C
2944,
#H:
54344,
#M: 195950,
COLOR
CALIB SETUP:SERVICE
#D:
3227,
#E:
5822,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#F:
8600
#K: 151198
1/1
SETUP
3)
4)
1)
0
STANDARD
SCANNER
5)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6308
TEST
ARE
TARGET
YOU
SETTING:SERVICE
YES
SURE?
2)
3)
NO
EXECUTE
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
0
SCANNER
SET
CLOSE
TEST
THE
TARGET
OF
PRINTER
CHART
ON
PLATEN
COLOR
AND
CALIB
TOUCH
SETUPSERVICE
[EXECUTE].
1)
EXECUTE
0
The color patch image (adjustment pattern) is read.
6)
EXPOSURE
xx
1
NOW
TARGET
CHART
OF
PATCH
PRINTER
99
A xx
AUTO
B xx
TEXT
C xx
D xx
TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
CLOSE
TEST
SCANNER
A:
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1
TEST
COLOR
CALIB
OK
SETUPSERVICE
READING...
10-key
OK
EXECUTE
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
xx
1
CLOSE
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 - 0 1
99
A xx
AUTO
B xx
TEXT
C xx
D xx
TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 42
OK
2)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
Q
R
S
T
U
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
TWO COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Adjustment
value range
1 99
1 99
1 99
1)
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Light document
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 99
50
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Text (Color tone
enhancement)
1 99
50
1 99
50
0
TEST
CLOSE
E
SIMULATION NO.46-02
EXPOSURE
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
A:
xx
1
99
A xx
AUTO1
B xx
AUTO2
C xx
TEXT
D xx
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
OK
10-key
OK
0
TEST
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
A:
1 99
50
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
Photograph (Color
tone enhancement)
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
50
1 99
1 99
50
50
1 99
50
E
F
G
H
I
1 99
50
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-02
EXPOSURE
Text/Printed Photo
(Color tone
enhancement)
xx
1 99
A xx
AUTO1
B xx
AUTO2
C xx
TEXT
D xx
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
OK
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
2)
Default
value
50
50
50
50
Text/Photograph
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Text (Copy
document)
Test/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
1 99
50
50
50
50
50
1 99
50
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Light density
document
1 99
50
1 99
50
K
L
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
LIGHT
Auto 1
Auto 2
Text
Text/Printed Photo
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
4)
Press [CLOSE] key in this simulation mode to jump to the normal copy mode. Make a copy and check the adjustment result.
Switch the simulation mode and the normal copy mode alternately, and adjust and check the adjustment result.
Repeat switching the adjustment mode (SIM 46-1) and the
normal copy mode and changing the adjustment value and
checking the adjustment result until a satisfactory result is
obtained.
To increase the density, increase the adjustment value. To
decrease the density, decrease the adjustment value.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 43
5)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-10
TEST
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
1/1
TEXT
CLOSE
TEST
A:
xxx
245
755
Axxx
POINT 1
Bxxx
POINT 2
Cxxx
POINT 3
Dxxx
POINT 4
EXECUTE
OK
OK
TEST
1)
CLOSE
A:
xxx
245
755
Axxx
POINT 1
Bxxx
POINT 2
Cxxx
POINT 3
Dxxx
POINT 4
0
TEST
ENGINE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
A:
OK
or end of print
COLOR
xxx
373 627
[SYSTEM
SETTINGS]
key
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
BALANCE
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
Axxx
POINT1
Bxxx
POINT2
Cxxx
POINT3
Dxxx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
0
TEST
10-key
CLOSE
EXECUTE
A:
xxx
245 755
Axxx
POINT 1
Bxxx
POINT 2
Cxxx
POINT 3
Dxxx
POINT 4
EXECUTE
OK
TEST
2)
3)
4)
ENGINE
A:
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Density level
(Point)
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Adjustment
value range
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
245 755
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-16
COLOR
xxx
373 627
BALANCE
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
Axxx
POINT1
Bxxx
POINT2
Cxxx
POINT3
Dxxx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
2)
3)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
When the adjustment value is increased, the density is
increased. When the adjustment value is decreased, the density is decreased.
When the arrow key is pressed, the selected are collectively
adjusted. That is, all the density levels (points) from the low
density point to the high density point can be adjusted collectively.
When [EXECUTE] key is pressed, the adjustment pattern is
printed out.
The density at each density level (point) can be checked by
referring to this printed adjustment pattern. However, it is more
practically to make a cop and check it.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 44
3)
4)
5)
6)
Use a document with fine text and line images for copying and
checking.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
COEFFICIENT
A:
OF
xx
1
99
GAMMA SETUP
A xx
B xx
C xx
D xx
This adjustment is used to set the color balance and the density in
the single color copy mode to the user's request.
OK
10-key
OK
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
COEFFICIENT
A:
OF
xx
1
99
GAMMA SETUP
A xx
BLACK
TEXT
(SLOPE)
B xx
BLACK
TEXT
(INTERCEPTE)
C xx
D xx
a. Adjustment procedures
1)
OK
TEST
2)
Display/Item
(Copy mode)
A BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
B
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
Content
Black text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Black text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Color text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Color text edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
Error diffusion edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (slope) setting
Error diffusion edge area
engine curve calculation
coefficient (density) setting
SINGLE COLOR
Adjustment
range
1 99
A:
Default
value
50
1 99
MODE
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
255
COLOR
BALANCE
Ax x x
RED
Bxxx
GREEN
Cxxx
BLUE
Dxxx
YELLOW
SETUP
OK
50
10-key
1 99
50
1 99
50
OK
0
TEST
1 99
50
SINGLE COLOR
A:
1 99
50
K
MODE
xxx
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-25
255
COLOR
BALANCE
Axxx
RED
Bxxx
GREEN
Cxxx
BLUE
Dxxx
YELLOW
SETUP
2)
3)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 45
OK
4)
Adjustment
value
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
2)
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
5)
6)
7)
Make a copy in the single color copy mode and check the
copy.
2)
3)
4)
5)
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
a. General
In the user program mode, the user can execute the auto color calibration (auto adjustment of the copy color balance and density).
This adjustment is to set Enable/Disable of the above user operation with SIM 26-53.
NOTE: This setting must be set to ENABLE only when the user's
understanding on the automatic adjustment of the copy
color balance and density and the user's operational ability
are judged enough to execute the adjustment.
Black
Yellow
Red
Blue
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
A x
A:
COLOR
6)
CALIBRATION
(1:YES 0:NO)
x
0
OK
10-key
OK
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
A x
A:
COLOR
CALIBRATION
(1:YES 0:NO)
x
0
OK
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 46
2 : Feb. 15 2006
1)
0
TEST
COLOR
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4633
AUTO
0
0 9
A 0
THCLMK_1
B 0
THCLBK_1
C 0
ACSMSK_1
D 0
THCLMK_2
BACK
NEXT
OK
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the entered
value to the memory.
Set item H (TH_MAX_MONO):
2)
3)
Display/Item
COLOR
AE
SW_
MODE1
Content
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE2
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE3
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE4
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE5
ON
OFF
SW_
MODE6
ON
OFF
G SW_
MODE7
ON
OFF
TH_MAX_
MONO
TH_MAX_
COLOR
SW_NEWS
SW_MODE_
SCR1
SW_MODE_
SCR2
M SW_MODE_
MIX
SW_HOSEI
TH_MODE_
SCR
TH_SITAJI_
SCR
Adjustment
range
Default
value
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
0 32
15
0 32
15
01
13
01
12
08
(4 +4)
0 10000
4
3000
0 10000
3000
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 47
2 : Feb. 15 2006
1)
TEST
COLOR
AUTO
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4633
0
0 9
A 0
THCLMK_1
B 0
THCLBK_1
C 0
ACSMSK_1
D 0
THCLMK_2
BACK
NEXT
OK
2)
Select the ACS mode with [NEXT] key and [BACK] key.
3)
Select the setting mode of "P/SIM LEVEL" with the scroll key.
When a monochrome document cannot be judged as a monochrome document or when a color document cannot be judged as a
color document, change this setting. This setting is applied to the
color auto copy mode.
When a monochrome document is not recognized as a monochrome document, increase the set value.
When a color document is not recognized as a color document, decrease the set value.
After entering the set value, press [OK] key to save the set
value to the memory.
The figure in the table indicates the ACS setting level in the
device setting.
The ACS setting level of the device setting (the judgment reference value in the color auto mode) is changed with the setting
of SIM 46-33 ACS/P/SIM LEVEL.
The left and the upper area from the cross point of the device
setting on the table and the ACS/P/SIM LEVEL setting serves
as the ACS operation condition.
About 3mm x
4mm
(7000 pixel)
Area level 1
About 1mm x
3mm
(1875 pixel)
Area level 5 Area level 4 Area level 3 Area level 2 Area level 1
Can be set
optionally.
(30000 pixel or
more)
Large color
area
Hue level
(ACS/P/SIM
LEVEL)
Small color
area
About
10mm 5mm
(30000 pixel)
About
5mm 5mm
(15000 pixel)
Hue
level 4
Hue
level 3
Hue
level 2
[Color]
About
1mm 3mm
(1875 pixel)
Hue
level 5
Hue
level 1
[Monochrome]
About
3mm 4mm
(7000 pixel)
XA
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 48
Hue level
(SIM LEVEL)
Strong
hue
Weak hue
Hue
level 5
Hue
level 4
Hue
level 3
Hue
level 2
Hue
level 1
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 49
START
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Check the printer color balance/
density. (Check the test pattern
of SIM 64-5.)
No
Yes
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 50
3
Can the
printer color balance and
density be adjusted to satisfactory
levels with the fine
adjustment?
No
No
Yes
4
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Yes
Is PCL mode
supported?
No
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance
check sheet, and check the patch color
balance of process black.
No
Are
the color
balance and density at
the satisfactory
levels?
Yes
No
No
Were
all the three kinds
of color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Yes
No
Change the color balance/
density adjustment factory
targets. (SIM 67-26)
Were the
printer color balance
and density
customized?
Were
the three kinds of
color balance/density
adjustment targets
changed?
(SIM 67-26)
Yes
Auto color balance adjustment
service target is set.
Yes
No
No
Is PCL mode
supported?
Yes
Execute the half tone image correction.
(Forcible execution) (SIM 44-26)
Yes
No
Are the
printer color
balance and the density
in the specified
level ?
No
Yes
Is the printer
color balance density
adjustment performed
with SIM67-25?
*1: When adjusting to a customized color balance, select the SERVICE mode.
: Standard adjustment flow
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 51
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed.
The density level of each color must be almost at the same level.
Patch B may not be copied.
Patch A must not be copied.
a. General
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed.
(Procedure)
2)
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter level
to the darker level. The density changing direction must not be
reversed. The density level of each color must be almost at the
same level.
1)
2)
3)
b. When the PCL mode is not supported: (In the case of GDI
model)
Use SIM 67-25 to print the color balance adjustment sheet and
compare each process (CMY) black patch color balance and the
black patch to check the color balance.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
c. Adjustment procedure
(Auto color balance adjustment by the serviceman)
Fig. 1 PG image
Low density
High density
1)
TEST
C
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
Bk
Max O
EXECUTE
1) The max. density
section is not blurred.
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
2)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 52
3)
5)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
PRINTER CALIBRATION
OK
REPEAT
Remark:
After pressing [OK] key, the initial setting of the half tone image
correction is started. During the operation, "NOW REGISTERING THE NEW TARGET OF HALFTONE" is displayed. This
operation takes several minutes.
After completion of the operation, "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
Do not cancel the simulation until "Please quit this mode" is
displayed.
0
4)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
THIS
PROCEDURE.
PLEASE
6)
QUIT
THIS
MODE.
Fig. 1 PG image
,
High density
SERVICE
Low density
EXECUTE
M
C
Bk
Remark:
(Descriptions on FACTORY key and SERVICE key in the color
balance auto adjustment menu.)
There are two kinds of the gamma target for the color balance
auto adjustment; Factory and Service.
FACTORY key and SERVICE key are used to select one of the
above two.
Max O
2) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
Service target color balance: The color balance can be customized according to the user's request. (Variable)
When shipping, the service target gamma data and the factory
target gamma data are the same.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 53
(Method 2)
By printing the color balance adjustment sheet with SIM 67-25
and comparing each process (CMY) black patch color balance
with the black patch, the color balance adjustment can be
checked more precisely.
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
High density
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
Low density
Y
#11:1183, #12:1222, #13:1261, #14:1283,#15:1260
EXECUTE
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
#5: ERR
(Method 3)
EXECUTE
1/1
9)
When the PCL mode is supported, use SIM 64-5 to print the
print test pattern.
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern and check the print
color balance and the density again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key,
and the print test pattern is printed out.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key. The
print test pattern is printed out.
If a satisfactory result is not obtained with the above procedures, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
20C).
When the service target is selected in the procedure 4) and the
auto adjustment is executed but a satisfactory result is not
obtained, execute the manual color balance adjustment (ADJ
21C).
Cancel SIM 67-25.
For the machine which supports only the GDI mode, the
adjustment is completed.
8)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
HALF
7)
1/1
Bk
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode, and press [EXECUTE] key.
[EXECUTE] key is highlighted and the operation is started.
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
2)
3)
4)
EXECUTE
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
* Execute the high density image correction (Process correction) forcibly. (SIM 44-6)
* Execute the half tone image correction forcibly. (SIM 44-26)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 54
c. Adjustment procedure
1)
4)
Select the color to be adjusted with the color select key, and
select the adjustment point with the scroll key.
5)
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key and press [OK] key.
The adjustment value is set in the range of 245 755 (1
999). When SIM 67-24 is used to adjust the automatic color
balance and density, all the set values of this simulation are set
to 500.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
A:
xx
1 99
A xx
POINT1
B xx
POINT2
C xx
POINT3
D xx
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
10-key
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
A:
xx
1 99
A xx
POINT1
B xx
POINT2
C xx
POINT3
D xx
POINT4
6)
EXECUTE
OK
7)
EXECUTE
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
0
TEST
CLOSE
A:
xx
1 99
A xx
POINT1
B xx
POINT2
C xx
POINT3
D xx
POINT4
8)
EXECUTE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
EXECUTE
OK
Use SIM 44-26 to execute the half tone image correction (forcible execution).
Enter the SIM 44-26 mode and press [EXECUTE] key.
2)
3)
High density
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
TOUGH
DENSITY
CORRECT
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
EXECUTION
START.
Low density
EXECUTE
Y
M
It takes several minutes to complete the operation. After completion of the operation, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
C
Bk
CMY
mixed
color
0
Max O
3) Patch C or D of each of Y, C, M,
and BK is very slightly copied.
2) Patch A of each of Y, M,
C, and BK are not copied.
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
TONE
DENSITY
CORRECT
EXECUTION
[S_VALUE]
#1: 907,
#2: 902,
#3: 909,
#4:921,
#6: 347,
#7:992,
#8:1047,
#9:1081, #10:1137
#5:936
EXECUTE
1/1
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-26
TEST
HALF
TONE
DENSITY CORRECT
EXECUTION
#1: ERR,
#2: ERR,
#3: ERR,
#4: ERR,
#6: ERR,
#7: ERR,
#8: ERR,
#5: ERR
9)
[S_VALUE]
* When the copy color balance/density adjustment (manual adjustment) is executed with SIM 67-25.
EXECUTE
1/1
10) Use SIM 64-5 to print the print test pattern again.
Set each set value to the default and press [EXECUTE] key.
The print test pattern is printed out.
The print density must be changed gradually from the lighter
level to the darker level. The density changing direction must
not be reversed. The density level of each color must be
almost at the same level.
Kind
Factory color
balance (gamma)
target
Service color
balance (gamma)
target
User color
balance (gamma)
target
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 56
Descriptions
There are three kinds of the color balance target,
and each of them is specified according to the
machine design. Use SIM 67-26 to select one of
them as the factory target. The default setting
(factory setting) is the color balance (DEF1)
which emphasizes color reproduction.
This target is used when the user requests to
customize the color balance to users desired
level. In advance, the users unique color
balance must be registered as the service color
balance target.
The above registration (setting) is made by the
serviceman with SIM 67-25 to adjust the color
balance and with SIM 67-27 to register it.
This color balance target is used when the user
executes the color balance adjustment.
When, therefore, the service color balance target
is changed, the color balance target of the users
color balance adjustment is also changed.
When, however, SIM 67-28 is executed, the color
balance is set to the factory color balance target
set with SIM 67-26.
The default setting (factory setting) of the color
balance is same as the factory color balance
target. (Emphasized on color reproduction
(DEF1))
If the user does not request for customizing the
color balance, be sure to use SIM 67-28 to set
the color balance to the factory color balance
target.
Same color balance as the service color balance
(gamma) target
When the service color balance target is
changed, this color balance target is also
changed accordingly.
Relationship between the factory target and the service target and the color balance target for the user color balance adjustment in the
printer color balance adjustment (SIM 67-24)
Factory setting
SIM67-28
Factory color balance target (DEF2) =
Service color balance target/Color balance
target for the user color balance adjustment
SIM67-28
Hue
Direction of Green
Factory color
balance target
(DEF1)
(A)
+a*
Direction
of Red
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Default
Direction of Blue
After completion of the customized color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25 according to the user's request, use SIM 67-27
to register the service color balance target data by use of the
printed adjustment pattern.
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 57
If a considerable time has passed after completion of the color balance adjustment (Manual) with SIM 67-25, the color balance of the
adjustment pattern at the time of adjustment differs from the color
balance of the adjustment pattern printed after a considerable time.
Never use such a pattern for the adjustment.
6)
0
SCANNER
#B:
#B:
#G:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
SCANNER
TARGET
91,
28935,
OF
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#E:
5822,
#J: 122678,
#F:
#M: 195950,
#N: 201249,
NOW
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
CHART
PATCH
COLOR
CALIB
1249,
#N: 194377,
#:O: 197276
#F:
2074
#K: 165225
REPEAT
OK
1/1
The color balance (gamma) of the color patch image (adjustment pattern) used in the procedure 5) is set as the service target.
(Procedures to set the service color balance target and the
color balance target for the user color balance adjustment to
the same color balance as the factory color balance target)
This procedure must not be executed when the copy color balance
was adjusted with SIM 67-25 to a unique color balance requested
by the user and it was registered as the service color balance target with SIM 67-27.
* When the factory color balance target is changed with SIM 6726, be sure to execute this procedure.
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-28
1/1
SETUP
Set the pattern so that the light density side is on the left side.
Place 5 sheets of white paper on the color patch image
(adjustment pattern).
PRINTER
#E:
#J: 128495,
OF
908,
76117,
#:O: 207112
TARGET
#I:
TEST
#M: 189254,
#D:
8600
4)
SCANNER
624,
18951,
SETUPSERVICE
3)
5)
SETUPSERVICE
#K: 151198
#C
#H:
TEST
#L: 169731,
OF
2)
3298,
#L: 184155,
227,
#G:
TARGET
BASE:8800
Select the service color balance target with SIM 67-24 and execute
the color valance adjustment (Auto), and check the adjustment
result. When the result is unsatisfactory or abnormal, the registered
service target data for the color balance adjustment (Auto) may be
improper.
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
b. Setting procedure
SETUPSERVICE
ARE
YOU SURE?
2)
3)
YES
NO
EXECUTE
The service color balance target and the color balance target for
the user color balance adjustment are set to the same color balance as the factory color balance target.
READING...
EXECUTE
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 58
adjustment
b. Setting procedure
1)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-54
DISABLING OF AUTOMATIC
COLOR
A x
A:
(1:YES 0:NO)
x
0
1)
2)
OK
2)
3)
Remark: This adjustment is based on the service target color balance set with SIM 67-27 or SIM 67-28. If, therefore, the above settings are not properly performed, this adjustment cannot be made
properly.
1)
2)
3)
4)
A
C
Set the color patch image (adjustment pattern) printed in procedure 4) on the document table. Set the patch image so that
the light density area is on the left side.
At that time, place 5 sheets of white paper on the above color
patch image (adjustment pattern).
Black
Red
Blue
1)
Yellow
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-01
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
1/1
6)
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 59
1/1
Slowly tilt the document detection arm unit in the arrow direction. Loosen the original cover switch actuator adjustment
screw so that the display OCSW is returned to the normal display when the height of the arm unit top from the table glass is
32 0.5mm. Slide the actuator position and adjust. (If the ON
timing of the original cover switch is shifted, the document
detection function may malfunction.)
2)
3)
32+
-0.5mm
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
SETUP
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
ADJUSTMENTE.
EXECUTING
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
P1(A4)POSITION
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
TO START
EXECUTE
Adjustment completed
Adjustment
failed
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
SETUP
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO- SENSOR
LEVEL
IS
ADJUSTED.
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
DOCUMENT
SIZE
PHOTO-SENSOR
PHOTO-SENSOR
ERROR
TEST
SIMULATION NO.40-02
CLOSE
SETUP
POSITION
. COMPLETE
PD1 ,---,---,---,---,---,---,---
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 60
2)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the maximum width position.
4)
5)
6)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the A4R size width.
7)
8)
Set the manual paper feed guide to the minimum width position.
2)
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 61
Content
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (Document table
mode)
Main scanning direction image magnification ratio
adjustment
Image loss off-center sub scanning direction image
magnification ratio adjustment (RSPF mode)
Print lead edge adjustment, image off-center (each
paper feed tray, duplex mode) adjustment
Adjustment result display
Display of data used when an adjustment is
executed
2)
7)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
0
TEST
BK MAG
: ** |**|
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
REPRINT
1/1
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
RESCAN
RETRY
DATA
2)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
MFT
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
CS2
EXECUTE
4)
OK
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
1/1
1/1
3)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
LEAD
OFFSET
ALL
1/1
(NOTE)
By pressing [LEAD] or [OFFSET] button, the following items
can be executed individually.
* [LEAD]: Print image lead edge image position adjustment
* [OFFSET]: Print image off-center adjustment
When [ALL] is selected, both of the above two items are
executed simultaneously.
4)
0
TEST
6)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
ADU
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
EXECUTE
NOW EXECUTING
REPRINT
EXECUTE
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 62
1/1
5)
6)
5)
6)
7)
AUTO
IMAGE
PLEASE
THEN
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
TEST
SET
PRESS
POSITION
THE
SIT
ADJUSTMENT
CHART
[EXECUTE]
TO
SERVICE
PAPER
ON
THE
OC
START
REPRINT
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
AUTO
OC ADJ
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
DATA
2)
3)
Select the paper feed tray with paper in it with the key button.
(Any paper size will do.)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
CS1
REPRINT
POSITION
ADJUSTMENT
LEAD
RESCAN
SERVICE
OFFSET
RETRY
SUB
DATA
OK
CS2
EXECUTE
4)
IMAGE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-28
OC
1/1
TEST
0
TEST
1/1
MX3500N ADJUSTMENTS 6 63
[7] SIMULATION
MX3500N
Service Manual
1. General
There are the following simulation functions for grasping the
machine operating conditions, troubleshooting, early detection of
trouble causes, speedy setting and adjustments, and improvements in servicing.
1)
Various adjustments
2)
3)
Canceling troubles
4)
Operation check
5)
6)
7)
A. Basic operation
(1) Starting the simulation
* Entering the simulation mode
1)
2)
3)
4)
Select an item with the scroll key and the item key.
5)
Press CA key.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 1
NO
YES
<Exclusion type>
You have to exit
simulation mode
before entering into
this mode for self
printing type.
NO
YES
If there is no item.
Operation check ?
NO
Do you want
to perform another
simulation ?
NO
YES
NO
Do you
want to end the
simulation ?
YES
Data clear ?
NO
Adjustments
or setting (counter data
change) ?
NO
NO
YES
Operating conditions
check ?
YES
Is it the same
simulation main
code?
In the power OFF/ON type
simulation, OFF/ON
message is
Press the SYSTEM
displayed by the
SETTINGS key
SYSTEM
SETTINGS key.
YES
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 2
YES
5
1
2
3
3
10
2
3
5
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
6
8
9
1
Function (Purpose)
Section
Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the scanning (read)
section and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the scanner unit.
Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the
control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic
document feeder unit and the related circuits.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the automatic document feeder unit
and the control circuits.
Used to check the operation of sensor and detector in the finisher and the
related circuit.
Used to check the operation of the load in the finisher and the control circuit.
Used to adjust the finisher.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large
capacity tray and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the large capacity tray and the
related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the clutches and the related circuits.
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
RSPF/DSPF
Operation test/check
RSPF/DSPF
Operation test/check
Finisher
Operation test/check
Finisher
Finisher
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Desk/Large capacity tray
(LCC)
Operation panel
Operation test/check
Adjustment
Operation test/check
Used to check the operation of the display, LCD in the operation panel, and
control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the heater lamp and the control circuit.
Used to check the operation of the scanner lamp and the circuit.
Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit.
Used to check the operations of the paper transport system, the transfer system,
the fusing system (clutches and solenoids) and the control circuits.
Used to check the operations of each fan motor and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the primary transfer unit and the related circuit.
Used to set the operating conditions of aging.
Used to set the intermittent aging cycle.
Used to display the warm-up time.
Used to check printing in the color mode.
Used to check and adjust the operations of the developing voltage of each color
and the control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the main charger grid voltage in each
printer mode and the control circuit.
Used to check and adjust the operation of the transfer voltage and the control
circuit.
Operation test/check
Process (Developing)
FAX
LCC
MFPcnt PWB / PCU PWB
/ SCU PWB
Communication unit (RIC/
MODEM)
Operation test/check
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
Clear/cancel (Trouble etc.)
17
--
21
22
1
1
5
6
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 3
Operation test/check
Duplex
1
-----
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
10
13
14
15
16
Operation test/check
Fusing
Optical (Image scanning)
Process
Paper transport section
(Transport, paper exit)
Other
Process (Transfer)
Other
Other
Fusing
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)/Transfer
Duplex
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
Used to check the operations of the loads in the duplex section and the control
circuits.
Used to check the operations of the toner motor and the related circuit.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U1" trouble.
Used to cancel excluding the self-diag U1/LCC/U2/PF troubles.
Used to cancel the self-diag "U6-09" (large capacity paper feed tray) trouble.
Used to cancel the self-diag U2 trouble.
Purpose
Operation test/check
Operation test/check
Setting
Setting
Operation display
Operation test/check
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/Check/
Adjustment
Operation test/check
Code
Main Sub
22
10
11
12
13
19
90
23
Used to make the initial setting of toner concentration when replacing developer.
1
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
25
26
3
5
6
10
18
30
35
38
41
49
50
52
53
54
65
67
69
27
Used to check the use frequency (send/receive) of FAX. (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to check the RSPF/DSPF misfeed positions and the number of misfeed at
each position. (When the number of misfeed is considerably great, it can be
judged as necessary for repair.)
Used to check the operating time of the process section (OPC drum, DV unit,
toner cartridge).
Used to check the values of the counters related to the scan mode and the
internet FAX mode.
Used to output the various set data lists.
9
10
15
30
31
1
1
2
Section
Used to check the trouble history of paper jam and misfeed. (If the number of
misfeed and troubles is considerably great, it may be judged as necessary to
repair.)
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are
cleared after completion of maintenance.)
Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed
section.
Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, DSPF, and the scan
(reading) unit.
Used to clear the maintenance counter, the printer counters of the transfer unit
and the fusing unit. (After completion of maintenance, clear the counters.)
Used to clear the developer counter. (After replacement of developer, clear the
counter.)
Used to clear the copy counter.
Used to clear the OPC drum counter. (After replacement of the OPC drum, clear
the counter.)
Used clear the printer mode print counter and the self print mode print counter.
Used to clear the FAX counter. (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to clear the counters related to the image send.
Used to initialize the administrator password.
Used to initialize the service mode password.
Used to check the operations of the developing section.
80
24
Function (Purpose)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 4
FAX
RSPF/DSPF
Scanner
Purpose
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data check
Operation test/Check
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Process (Developing
section)
Process (Photoconductor/
Developing/Transfer/
Cleaning)
Paper exit
Paper feed
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Data clear
Clear
Operation test/Check
Auditor
Setting
Setting
Setting
Other
Printer
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Process
Setting
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Operation test/Check
Setting
Code
Main Sub
27
4
Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time
between sensors is recorded or not and the threshold value for determining
whether the gain adjustment retry number is recorded or not.
Used to clear the trouble prediction history information.
11
12
13
14
1
2
33
40
2
7
41
1
2
3
43
1
4
20
21
22
23
24
31
32
44
Used to set the FSS functions (initializing, call, toner order auto send).
10
30
Function (Purpose)
1
2
4
6
9
12
13
14
16
21
Used to display the serial communication retry number and the scanner gain
adjustment retry number history.
Used to display the high-density, half-tone process control error history and the
automatic register adjustment error history.
Used to display the history of paper feed time between sensors.
The FSS connection test mode setting is made.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed
section, the paper transport section, and the paper exit section.
Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed
section and the related circuits.
Used to check the operations of the card reader sensor and the related circuits.
(The card reader sensor operation can be monitored with the LCD display.)
(Japan only)
Used to adjust the detection level of the manual feed tray paper width detector.
Used to set the adjustment value of the detection level of the manual paper feed
tray paper width detector.
Used to display the operating state of the document sensor.
Used to adjust the detection level of the document size sensor.
Used to display the document sensor detection level (A/D) in real time and to
display the threshold value adjusted with SIM 41-2 in [ ] beside the sensor
name.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode.
Used to set the fusing temperature in each operation mode. (Continued from 4301.)
Used to correct the environments of low temperature and low humidity (L/L) for
the fusing temperature setting 1 for each paper (SIM 43-01).
Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H)
environment for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-01) for each paper.
Used to perform L/L (low temperature, low humidity) correction for the fusing
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
Used to perform H/H (high temperature, high humidity) correction for the fusing
temperature setting 1 (SIM 43-04) for each paper.
Used to enter the correction values for SIM 43-1 and SIM 43-4 temperature
corrections.
Used to check the operation of the fusing web cleaning motor.
Used to make various settings of the compulsory operations of the web cleaning
at a job end.
Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process)
section are enabled or not.
Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and
the registration sensor (two for resist are adjusted simultaneously) and the
surface scan.
Used to perform the correction operation of the image forming section and to set
the process control sensor adjustment conditions.
Used to forcibly execute the correction in the image process section (highdensity process correction) (process correction).
Used to check the data related to the result of the image forming section
correction (high density process correction). (Corrected main charger grid
voltage in each print mode, developing bias voltage, etc.) (This simulation is
used to check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
Used to check the sampling toner image patch density data in the image forming
section correction (high density process correction). (This simulation is used to
check whether the correction is normally executed or not.)
Color image density sensor adjustment (Adjustment by the jig)
Used to check the output level of the fusing temperature sensor, the machine
temperature sensor, and the humidity sensor.
Used to check data related to the toner density correction result. (This
simulation allows to check that the correction is normally performed or not.)
Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone
correction).
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 5
Section
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Communication (RIC/
MODEM)
Process
Purpose
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data clear
Paper feed
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Paper feed
Operation test/Check
Other
Operation test/Check
Paper feed
Paper feed
Adjustment
Setting
Other
Other
Other
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Fusing
Fusing
Setting
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Setting
Fusing
Fusing
Operation check
Operation setting
Setting
Process
Adjustment
Process
Setting
Process
Operation test/Check
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Process
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Process (Developing)
Process
Code
Main Sub
44
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
43
52
54
56
57
46
1
2
4
5
8
9
10
16
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
33
36
37
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
48
47
1
Function (Purpose)
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone
image forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used
to check that the correction is normally executed or not.)
(This simulation is not used in the market.)
Used to display the process control result.
Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction).
Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly.
Used to clear the half tone process control correction value.
Used to set the timing (ON/OFF) of process control execution.
Enable/disable of the half tone correction during each job is switched.
Used to perform the phase adjustment for OPC drum deflection. (Used to adjust
the phases of four OPC drums deflection.)
Used to display each developing unit installing state AD value.
This simulation is added to check the sampling data of the detection judgment of
developing unit installation not only as the judgment result (trouble display) but
also as the current state value.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in 1 pixel half
tone correction. (The simulation is used to check whether the correction is
normally executed or not.)
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to display the 1 pixel half tone correction result.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to perform the forcible execution of 1 pixel half tone correction.
(This function is not used. Do not operate.)
Used to clear the correction value of 1 pixel half tone correction.
Used to set the default exposure (color copy) for every document mode.
Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK copy.
Used to adjust the exposure of the color scanner.
Used to adjust the exposure of the black scanner.
Used to make the scanner color balance RGB adjustment (for color push
scanner mode).
Used to adjust the exposure.
Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode)
Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG
print.
Used to set the BLACK auto exposure mode.
Used to perform the copy color balance manual correction. [Color, All modes]:
PG print
Used to set ENABLE/DISABLE of the half tone highest density correction.
Used to the copy color balance auto adjustment.
Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance.
Used to reset the single color mode color balance set value to the default.
Used to set the engine gamma calculating formula coefficient.
(Information on this simulation may be requested in some cases. However, this
function is basically not used in the market.)
Used to check the auto exposure/Auto document recognition/ Line number
recognition (Color mode). If the local memory size is less than 256MB, the
operation of this simulation may not operate normally.
Used to execute the color auto mode adjustment.
Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2-color (Red, Black) copy.
Used to perform the BLACK image forming adjustment.
Used to execute the image send sharpness adjustment. (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Used to execute the FAX exposure level adjustment and the individual setting
(600DPI). (Only when FAX is installed)
Used to set the JPEG compression rate in Copy/Scanner (PUSH SCAN).
Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 6
Section
Purpose
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Data clear
Setting
Setting
Adjustment
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process
Process (OPC drum)
Process (Developing)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Process
Process
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Process
Data clear
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Engine
Engine
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Scanner
Engine
Adjustment
Adjustment
Engine
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Image process (ICU)
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
FAX
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
ICU/FAX
Adjustment
FAX
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF/Scanner
Setting
Adjustment
Code
Main Sub
48
5
49
50
6
1
3
1
5
6
10
12
20
21
22
24
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
51
1
2
53
6
7
8
Function (Purpose)
This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a
different copy magnification ratio is specified and copying is made after
adjustment of the sub scanning direction image magnification ratio with SIM 481.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the
adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the
adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted. This is the magnification ratio
adjustment in the scan system.
Used to adjust the rotating speed of each motor.
Used to execute the firmware update.
The Operation Manual saved in the hard disk is updated.
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-05 and 50-02 (Simple method). (Document table mode))
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (Simple adjustment)
(Similar to SIM50-01. This simulation provides the simpler method.)
Used to set the lead edge adjustment value which affects only the printer print.
Used to adjust the copy image position on the print paper in the copy mode and
to adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed
with SIM50-7 (Simple method).) (RSPF/DSPF mode)
Used to adjust the copy image position on print paper in the copy mode and to
adjust the void area (image loss). (The similar adjustment can be executed with
SIM50-6 (Simple type).) (RSPF/DSPF mode)
Used to adjust the print off-center for each tray.
Image print center position adjustment (Adjusted for each paper feed section.)
Used to execute the scan image off-center position adjustment. (Adjusted for
each scan mode.)
Used to execute the manual adjustment of the main scanning direction
registration (color shift). (Backup value input)
Used to execute the manual adjustment of the sub scanning registration (color
shift). (Backup value input)
Used to execute the auto adjustment of the main/sub scan the main/sub
registration. (Print on the belt/ Scan with the registration sensor (photo sensor)
Image registration adjustment (Auto adjustment) adjustment image quality
image position
Used to display the data acquired with the auto registration adjustment
simulation (SIM50-22).
Used to adjust the image loss of scanned image in the FAX/Scanner mode.
Used to execute the service adjustment, the OC adjustment, the BK main scan
magnification ration correction, the RSPF/DSPF adjustment, and the print
position adjustment (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment)).
Used to adjust the OC document lead edge, off-center, and the sub scan
magnification ratio. (Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (1:
OC adjustment))
Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation) (2: BK-main scan magnification ratio
correction))
Used to execute the RSPF/DSPF (Front/Back) document lead edge, off-center,
and sub scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (3: RSPF/DSPF
adjustment))
Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print offcenter (individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (4: Print position
adjustment)
Used to display the adjustment result.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (5: result display)
Used to display the data used for the adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation adjustment) (6: data display))
Used to adjust the ON/OFF timing of the transfer voltage and the separation
bias voltage.
Used to adjust the contact pressure of paper against the registration roller (main
unit paper feed section, duplex paper feed, RSPF/DSPF paper feed) on each
section. (When there are much variations in print image positions for paper or
when the paper jam occurs, the adjustment is required.) Used to change the
deflection quantity correction value of each specified cassette.
Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF document tray size of the main unit.
Used to enter the adjustment value of the main unit RSPF document tray size
adjustment value. SIM53-06 A/D value manual input (for RSPF/DSPF).
Used to adjust the RSPF/DSPF scan position.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 7
Section
RSPF/DSPF/Scanner
Purpose
Adjustment
Adjustment
Version-up
Version-up
Adjustment
Adjustment
Printer
RSPF/DSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
FAX/Scanner
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Process
Adjustment
Paper transport
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
RSPF/DSPF
Adjustment
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Adjustment
Code
Main Sub
55
1
2
3
56
1
2
60
61
62
2
1
4
1
2
3
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
63
1
2
2
3
5
6
7
8
11
64
65
67
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
24
25
26
27
28
30
Function (Purpose)
Used to set the engine soft SW.
Used to set the scanner soft SW
Used to set the controller soft SW.
Used to execute data transfer.
Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of
EEPROM, SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to restore the data.
Used to check read/write of the expansion DIMM installed to the MFPcnt PWB.
After completion of execution, the result of each slot is displayed on the panel.
MFPcnt PWB image DRAM read/write operation check, check MFP (memory)
operation.
Used to set the data of onboard SDRAM.
The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked.
Used to execute self-print of the LSU position adjustment.
Used to execute the hard disk format (except operation manual area).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute the partial check of the hard disk read/write.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute read/write check (all areas) of the hard disk.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to execute the HDD self-diagnostics.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to print the self-diagnostics error log.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to format the hard disk excluding the system area and operation manual
area.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to delete the job completion list. (The job log data are also deleted.)
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to delete the document filing data.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to set Enable/Disable of auto format in HDD trouble.
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to format the hard disk (operation manual area only).
* Be sure to format the HDD in FAT32.
Used to check the following values related to shading for RGB and OC/RSPF/
DSPF. (3 x 2 = 6 kinds)
Used to execute shading forcibly (MX-3500N/4500N).
Used to execute shading forcibly (MX-3501N/4501N).
Used to execute the gamma correction and density conversion for RGB image
data inputted from the CCD. Gamma correction 1 of the SCAN ASIC and the set
value of color correction are set by calculating from the image data.
Used to reset the gamma correction and color correction parameters of the
SCAN ASIC.
Used to scan the engine color balance auto adjustment pattern and to display
the sampling result.
Used to display and register the engine auto density adjustment scanner target
value (for servicing).
Used to execute the standard value reset of the engine auto adjustment scanner
target value (for servicing).
Used to set the factory target color balance in the auto color balance adjustment
(SIM46-24).
Used to execute self-print (Color mode).
Used to print the density adjustment pattern.
Used to execute self-print. (BW mode)
Used to execute self-print.
Used to execute self print (PCL).
Used to execute the printer self print (PS).
Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position.
Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position
adjustment result.
Use to execute the printer setting of auto color calibration.
Used to set the manual correction of the printer engine color balance.
Used to set the reference scanner target value of the printer engine auto density
adjustment of Simulation 67-24.
Compaired to DEF1, DEF2 and DEF3 are decreased-red color balance target
value.
Used to display and register the scanner target value (for servicing) of the
printer engine auto density adjustment.
The scanner target value (for servicing) of the printer engine auto density
adjustment is reset to the standard value.
Used to set YES/NO of delivery of the main unit calibration data and the process
control correction data to the client PC by the GDI printer.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 8
Section
Purpose
PCU
Scanner
MFP
MFP
Memory, HDD
Setting
Setting
Setting
Data transfer
Backup
Operation test/Check
LSU
LSU
MFP (HDD)
Setting
Operation test/Check
Adjustment
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Operation test/Check
MFP
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Data clear
Scanner (Exposure)
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner (scan)
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Scanner
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Setting
Setting
Scanner (Scanning)
Setting
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Operation test/Check
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Operation test/Check
Adjustment
Adjustment/Setup/Operation
data output/Check (Display/Print)
Adjustment
Adjustment
Adjustment
Printer
Adjustment
Scanner
Adjustment
Printer
Setting
Printer
Printer
Printer
Printer
Operation panel
Operation panel
Code
Main Sub
67
31
32
33
33
Function (Purpose)
Section
Purpose
Printer
Data clear
Setting
Adjustment
Adjustment
Printer
Printer
3. Details of simulation
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 1 02
TEST
SCANNER
SENSO R
CHE CK
MHPS
1-1
Operation test/check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the scanner unit and its control circuit.
Section
Item
Operation
1/1
1-5
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
2)
3)
Button
display
50
100
200
Content
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
Selectable
magnification ratios
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
SCANNER CHECK
25
100
50
ZOOM
300
100
150
200
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
2)
3)
0
TEST
Section
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-01
400
Button
display
50
100
200
BLACK(FAST)
BLACK(SLOW)
COLOR
Operation test/check
Content
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
Selectable
magnification ratio
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
EXECUTE
0
TEST
SCANNER CHECK
1-2
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.01-05
25
100
Operation test/check
Item
Operation
50
100
BLACK(FAST)
Operation/Procedure
The sensor and detector operation conditions are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
The scanner (read) unit is in the home position.: "MHPS" section
is highlighted.
The scanner (read) unit is not in the home position.: "MHPS" is
normally displayed.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 9
BLACK(SLOW)
400
%
ZOOM
300
150
200
COLOR
EXECUTE
SPLS2
STMPU
SWD_LEN
SWD_AD
2
2-1
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the automatic document feeder unit and the control
circuit.
Section
Item
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-02
RSPF/DSPF
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
Operation
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPLS1
SPLS2
STMPU
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the operation mode with the buttons on the touch panel.
1/1
2)
1/1
3)
4)
Button
display
50
100
200
Content
Scan magnification ratio:
50%
Scan magnification ratio:
100%
Scan magnification ratio:
200%
Selectable
magnification ratio
COLOR: 50%, 100%,
200%
BLACK (High speed):
100%, 200%
BLACK (Low speed):
50%, 100%, 200%
Default
value
100%
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-01
RSPF AGING
25
100
400
1-SIDE
2-SIDE
50
100
ZOOM
300
150
200
(MX-3501N/4501N)
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SLCOV
SPED1
SPED2
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPOD
SPRDMD
SPLS1
SPLS2
STLD
STUD
STMPU
SWD_LEN
SWD_AD
0
TEST
BLACK(FAST)
BLACK(SLOW)
COLOR
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.02-02
2-2
Operation test/check
Purpose
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SLCOV
SPED1
SPED2
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPOD
SPRDMD
SPLS1
SPLS2
STLD
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the automatic document feeder unit and the related circuits.
2-3
RSPF/DSPF
Section
Purpose
Operation
Item
1/1
1/2
Operation test/check
Section
RSPF/DSPF
(MX-3500N/4500N)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
SSET
SOCD
SCOV
SPED
SPPD1
SPPD2
SPPD3
SPPD4
SPPD5
SPLS1
1)
2)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 10
(MX-3500N/4500N)
SPFM
SPRM_F
SPRM_R
SPFC
SRRC
SGS
STMPS
TEST
RSPF
SIMULATION NO.0203
OUTPUT
CHECK
SPFM
SPRM_R
SRRC
STMPS
0
CLOSE
SPRM_F
SPFC
SGS
EXECUTE
1/1
(MX-3501N/4501N)
SPUM
SPFM
SPOM
SLUM
SPFFAN
SPFC
SRRC
SRRBC
STRRC
STRRBC
STRC
STMPS
DSPF
SIMULATION NO.0203
OUTPUT
CHECK
CLOSE
SPUM
SPFM
SPOM
SLUM
SPFFAN
SPFC
SRRC
SRRBC
EXECUTE
1/2
3
3-2
Purpose
Operation test/check
Finisher
Item
Operation
TEST
FJPID
FJPOD
FJPDD
FED
FPDHPD
FARHPD
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FAD
FOBHPD
FBED
FSLD
FFPD
FFHPD
FFRHPD
FFED
FFE
FULD
FLLD
FLE
FSHPD
FSTHPD
FSD
FSUC
FSPD
FMLD
FFDD
FCD
FFDSW
FJSW
FSSSW
FFANLK
FPE
FPUC
FPHPD
FPDD
FPSHPD
FPTD
FPSD1
FPSD2
FPSD3
FPSD4
Operation/Procedure
The operating conditions of the sensors and detectors are displayed.
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 11
<4K finisher>
FJPID
FJPOD
FJPDD
FED
FAED1
FAED2
FAED3
FFJHPD
FRJHPD
FBED1
FBED2
FCCD
FSLD1
FPDD
FSLD2
FASHPD
FSWHPD
FSWOPD
FSTPD
FSHPD
FSTHPD
FSD
FSTD
FFANLK
FSJOGD
FSSSW
FSSUC
FSHTD
FCD
FFDD
F24V
FPSW1
FPSW2
FPSW3
FAED21
FAED22
FAED23
DIPSW1 detection
DIPSW2 detection
DIPSW3 detection
DIPSW4 detection
DIPSW5 detection
DIPSW6 detection
DIPSW7 detection
DIPSW8 detection
FSPPHPC
FSLGTC
FSLGHPC
FSINDD
FSEJDD
FSINDSW
FSFDSW
FSPSW1
S-DIPSW1 detection
S-DIPSW2 detection
S-DIPSW3 detection
S-DIPSW4 detection
S-DIPSW5 detection
S-DIPSW6 detection
S-DIPSW7 detection
S-DIPSW8 detection
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-02
FJPOD
FJPDD
FPDHPD
FARHPD
FFJHPD
FED
FRJHPD
FAD
FOBHPD
FBED
FSLD
FFPD
FFHPD
FFRHPD
FFED
FFE
FULD
FLLD
FLE
1/2
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 12
3-3
Operation test/check
Purpose
Finisher
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
FSIFM
FSFM
FSFOM
FSGM
FSJM
FSFSTM
FSRSTM
FSLGM
FSFS
FS1DFS
FS2DFS
FSFCS
Punch motor
Punch horizontal resist motor
Punch motor
Punch horizontal resist motor
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0303
FJFM
FFM
FPM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FFSM
FLM
FFC
FINRPS
1/1
FINRPS
FJPM
FJFM
FFM
FAM
FFJM
FRJM
FSM
FTLM1
FTLM2
FFSM
FSWM
FASM
FPPM
FINRRS
FBRRS
FFDRRS
FBES
FSHC
FAORC
1/1
3-10
Adjustment
Purpose
Finisher
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Display
Item
Set range
0 to 400
200
0 to 20
10
REAR ADJUST
0 to 20
10
STAPLE REAR
0 to 200
100
STAPLE FRONT
0 to 200
100
STAPLE BOTH
0 to 200
100
STAPLE PITCH
0 to 100
50
PUNCH
CENTER
Saddle binding
position adjustment
Saddle folding
position adjustment
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Alignment position
adjustment (rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position in front)
Staple binding position
adjustment (two
positions at the
center)
Staple binding position
adjustment (two
positions in pitch)
Punch center
adjustment
0 to 400
SADDLE
POSITOIN
FOLDING
POSITION
FRONT ADJUST
Default
value
200
47 to 53
50
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 13
Item
J
Display
PUNCH HOLE
Item
Punch hole position
adjustment
Set range
0 to 100
Default
value
50
Display
FRONT ADJUST
REAR ADJUST
STAPLE REAR
STAPLE FRONT
STAPLE BOTH
STAPLE PITCH
PUNCH
CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
0
TEST
FINISHER
Item
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Alignment position
adjustment (rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position in front)
Staple binding position
adjustment (two
positions at the
center)
Staple binding position
adjustment (two
positions in pitch)
Punch center
adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
2 to 18
Default
value
10
2 to 18
10
68 to 132
100
68 to 132
100
68 to 132
100
Set range
A:
ADJUSTMENT
200
0 400
A200
SADDLE POSITION
B200
FOLDING POSITION
C 10
FRONT ADJUSUT
D 10
REAR ADJUSUT
OK
4
4-2
Operation test/check
Purpose
68 to 132
100
37 to 63
50
42 to 58
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.03-10
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the desk/large capacity tray and the related circuit.
Section
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
The active sensors and detectors are highlighted.
<4K finisher>
Display
Item
Set range
FRONT ADJUST
0 to 20
STAPLE REAR
94 to 106
100
STAPLE FRONT
94 to 106
100
PUNCH
CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position in front)
Punch center
adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
Default
value
10
40 to 60
50
46 to 52
50
Display
Item
Set range
192 to 208
200
0 to 20
10
STAPLE REAR
94 to 106
100
STAPLE FRONT
94 to 106
100
PUNCH
CENTER
PUNCH HOLE
Saddle binding
position adjustment
Saddle folding
position adjustment
Alignment position
adjustment (front)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position at the rear)
Staple binding position
adjustment (one
position in front)
Punch center
adjustment
Punch hole position
adjustment
197 to 203
SADDLE
POSITOIN
FOLDING
POSITION
FRONT ADJUST
Default
value
200
40 to 60
50
46 to 52
50
<Desk sensor>
DCSI1
DPFD1
DLUD1
DPED1
DCSPD1
DCSS11
DCSS12
DCSS13
DCSS14
DCSI2
DPFD2
DLUD2
DPED2
DCSPD2
DCSS21
DCSS22
DCSS23
DCSS24
DSW_DSK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 14
L24VM
LLSW
LPUSW
LRRSW
4-5
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the
clutches and the related circuits.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.04-02
TEST
DPFD1
DLUD1
Operation test/check
Purpose
Section
Item
Operation
DPED1
Operation/Procedure
DCSPD1
DCSS11
DCSS12
DCSS13
Select the item to be checked with the buttons on the touch panel.
DCSS14
DCSI2
DPFD2
DLUD2
DPED2
DCSPD2
DCSS21
DCSS22
DCSS23
DCSS24
DSW_DSK
DTRC
LTRC
4-3
Operation test/check
Purpose
Item
Operation
TEST
DESK/LCC
CLOSE
DTRC
DTRC OFF
LTRC
LTRC OFF
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
1/1
5-1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the display,
LCD in the operation panel, and control circuit.
Section
Operation panel
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
The LCD is changed as shown below. (The contrast changes every
2sec from the current level to MAX MIN the current level. During this period, each LED is lighted.)
Operation test/check
Purpose
LPFM
LLM
LPFC
LPFS
LTRC
TEST
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5 01
TEST
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 0 5 01
SIMULATION NO.0403
DSK/LCC LOAD CHECK
CLOSE
TEST
DPFM
DPUC2
DLUM1
DPUC1
DLUM2
DTRC
EXECUTE
1/1
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 15
5-2
Operation test/check
Purpose
DL_K
DL_C
DL_M
DL_Y
Fusing
Item
Operation
Discharge lamp K
Discharge lamp C
Discharge lamp M
Discharge lamp Y
Same control
Operation/Procedure
TEST
1)
2)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.05-04
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0502
HL_UM
HL_ALL
EXECUTE
Section
Item
Operation
1/1
5-3
1)
Operation test/check
Item
Operation
2)
Operation/Procedure
2)
Operation test/check
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
6-1
Purpose
HL_LM
HL_E
1/1
6
0
TEST
EXECUTE
Transport/
imaging
OC COPY LAMP
DSPF COPY LAMP
OC copy lamp
DSPF copy lamp (MX-3501N/4501N only)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0503
OC
COPY LAMP
Paper feed
EXECUTE
1/1
5-4
Purpose
Operation test/check
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operation of the discharge lamp and the related circuit.
Section
Process
Item
Operation
2)
Transport motor
Resist motor
Paper exit motor normal rotation
Paper exit motor reverse rotation
Fusing motor
Cassette paper feed motor
Shifter motor
Waste toner drive motor
Cassette vertical transport clutch
Primary transfer separation clutch
Process control shutter solenoid
LSU shutter solenoid 1
LSU shutter solenoid 2
Cassette 1 lift-up motor
Cassette 1 paper feed clutch
Cassette 2 lift-up motor
Cassette 2 paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed clutch
Manual feed take-up solenoid
Manual feed gate solenoid
Operation/Procedure
1)
PFM
RRM
POMF (*)
POMR (*)
FUM
CPFM
OSM
WTNM
CPFC
1TURC
PCSS
LSUSS1
LSUSS2
CLUM1
CPUC1
CLUM2
CPUC2
MPUC
MPFS
MPGS
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 16
PFM
RRM
FUM
CPFM
1TURC
PCSS
CPUC1
CLUM2
0
CLOSE
POMF
POMR
OSM
CPFC
WTNM
CLUM1
CPUC2
MPUC
EXECUTE
7-1
Function (Purpose) Used to set the operating conditions of
aging.
1/2
Section
Other
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
6-2
Operation test/check
1)
2)
Purpose
Section
Other
Item
Operation
2)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Setting
Purpose
AGING
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
FUSING DISABLE
WARMUP DISABLE
DV CHECK DISABLE
SHADING DISABLE
CCD GAIN FREE
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0701
TEST
AGING TEST
SETTING
AGING
SIMULATION NO.0602
TEST
FAN LOAD SETUP
POFM
PSFM
INTERVAL
MISFEED DISABLE
CLOSE
WARMUP DISABLE
FUSING
DV
SHADING DISABLE
CHECK
CCD
DISABLE
DISABLE
GAIN FREE
EXECUTE
OZFM
1/1
LSUFM
7-6
EXECUTE
1/1
Setting
Purpose
Purpose
Process (Transfer)
Item
Operation
Section
Other
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Item
A
2)
TEST
BLACK
COLOR
FREE
Item
CYCLE TIME(SEC)
0
INTERVAL AGING CYCLE TIME SETUP
A 3
A:
1 900
EXECUTE
CYCLE TIME(SEC)
3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0603
Default value
3
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.07-06
0
TEST
Set range
1 to 900
1/1
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 17
OK
7-8
Operation display
Purpose
2)
3)
4)
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Button
Item
Display
Content
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_K
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_C
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED
DVB_Y
LOW
SPEED
DVB_K
LOW
SPEED
DVB_C
LOW
SPEED
DVB_M
LOW
SPEED
DVB_Y
HIGH
SPEED
DVB_K
K developing
bias set value at
middle speed
C developing
bias set value at
middle speed
M developing
bias set value at
middle speed
Y developing
bias set value at
middle speed
K developing
bias set value at
low speed
C developing
bias set value at
low speed
M developing
bias set value at
low speed
Y developing
bias set value at
low speed
K developing
bias set value at
high speed
MIDDLE
0
WARM UP TIME
0
DISPLAY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0708
TEST
SETTING
SECONDS
D
EXECUTE
LOW
7-9
Operation test/check
Purpose
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
HIGH
(MX-4500N/
4501N only)
Setting
range
0 to 700
Default
value
450
0 to 700
450
0 to 700
450
0 to 700
450
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
430
0 to 700
450
Setup/cancel of black
Setup/cancel of cyan
Setup/cancel of magenta
Setup/cancel of yellow
TEST
DV
TEST
PRINTING
K
SELECT(COLOR
AND OUTPUT
450
0 700
A450
B450
C450
D450
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0709
COLOR
SETTING
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0801
MIDDLE
MODE)
EXECUTE
LOW
OK
8-2
Purpose
EXECUTE
1/1
8
Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
8-1
Purpose
Operation test/Check/Adjustment
1)
2)
3)
4)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 18
Button
MIDDLE
Item
A
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_K
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_C
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_M
MIDDLE
SPEED
GB_Y
LOW
SPEED
GB_K
LOW
SPEED
GB_C
LOW
SPEED
GB_M
LOW
SPEED
GB_Y
HIGH
SPEED
GB_K
LOW
HIGH
(MX-4500N/
4501N only)
Display
Content
K charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
middle speed
K charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
C charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
M charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
Y charging/grid
bias set value at
low speed
K charging/grid
bias set value at
high speed
Setting
range
230 to 850
Default
value
645
0
TEST
MHV/GRID SETTING
AND
OUTPUT
A645
230 to 850
A:
645
645
230 850
230 to 850
645
230 to 850
645
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0802
MIDDLE
B645
C645
D645
LOW
EXECUTE
OK
8-6
230 to 850
Operation test/Check/Adjustment
Purpose
620
620
230 to 850
620
Section
Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)/Transfer
Item
Setting
Operation/Procedure
230 to 850
620
1)
2)
3)
230 to 850
665
(MX-3500N/3501N)
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
Content
Primary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
Secondary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
Low speed
Middle speed
CMY
Low speed
Middle speed
K
Low speed
Middle speed
Normal Front surface
paper
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Heavy Front surface
paper
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
OHP
Envelope
Cleaning process
Low speed print
Middle speed print
Cleaning
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
232
232
139
139
232
232
136
136
117
117
79
70
79
70
65
65
184
184
79
72
100
156
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
Setting
range
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
232
232
139
139
232
232
232
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
500V to 5000V
Default
value
Actual
output value
4500V
4500V
2500V
2500V
4500V
4500V
20A
20A
16A
16A
8A
6A
8A
6A
5A
5A
30A
30A
8A
200V
400V
800V
(MX-4500N/4501N)
Item
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Content
Primary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
K
CMY
BLACK
Low speed
Middle speed
Low speed
Middle speed
Low speed
Middle speed
High speed
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 19
Default
value
Actual
output value
4500V
4500V
2500V
2500V
4500V
4500V
4500V
Item
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Display
Content
Secondary transfer
bias reference
value
COLOR
Normal
paper
BLACK
COLOR
Heavy
paper
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
COLOR
BLACK
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.08-06
232
0~255]
A : 232
B : 232
C : 139
D : 139
Default
value
Actual output
setting range
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
51 to 255
136
136
117
117
79
70
79
70
65
65
184
184
79
72
100
114
156
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
2A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
5A to 45A
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
50V to 1500V
Default
value
Actual
output value
20A
20A
16A
16A
8A
6A
8A
6A
5A
5A
30A
30A
8A
200V
400V
500V
800V
9-3
Operation test/check
Purpose
A:
Envelope
Cleaning process
Low speed print
Middle speed print
High speed print
Cleaning
Secondary transfer
cleaning bias
reference value
0
TEST
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
Front surface
Back surface
OHP
Setting
range
EXECUTE
OK
Section
Duplex
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
9-2
Operation test/check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the duplex section
and its control circuit.
Section
Duplex
Item
Operation
ADUM_L
ADUM_U
ADUGS
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.09-03
Operation/Procedure
ADUM_U
ADUGS
EXECUTE
1/1
10
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.0902
APPD1
10-1
Purpose
APPD2
Operation test/check
Process (Developing)
1/1
Item
Operation
1/1
Operation/Procedure
* Before execution of this simulation, remove the toner cartridges.
1)
2)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 20
TNM_K
TNM_C
TNM_M
TNM_Y
15
Toner motor K
Toner motor C
Toner motor M
Toner motor Y
Purpose
0
TEST
TONER
MOTOR
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.10-01
ACTIVATION
TNM_K
TNM_C
TNM_M
TNM_Y
Section
LCC
Item
Trouble
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
1/1
1)
2)
13
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.15
LCC TROUBLE
CANCELLATION
Purpose
FAX
Item
Trouble
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
16
16--
0
U1 TROUBLE
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.13
TEST
CANCELLATION
Section
Item
Trouble
Operation/Procedure
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1)
2)
14
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.16
U2 TROUBLE
CANCELLATION
Purpose
Item
Trouble
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
17
0
TEST
TRO UBLE
CLOSE
S I MU LA TI O N N O . 1 4
17-Purpose
Section
Item
Trouble
Operation/Procedure
ARE
YO U
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1)
2)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 21
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.17
TEST
PF TROUBLE CANCELLATION
YES
NO
EXECUTE
21
21-1
Setting
Purpose
Item
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Item
Display
Content
Set range
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(TOTAL)
MAINTENANCE
COUNTER
(COLOR)
Maintenance
counter
(total)
Maintenance
counter
(color)
0: DEFAULT,
1 300: 1K 300K
999: FREE
0: DEFAULT,
1 300: 1K 300K
999: FREE
COPY(BW)
COPY(COL)
COPY(2COL)
COPY(SGL_COL)
PRINT(BW)
PRINT(COL)
DOC FIL(BW)
DOC FIL(COL)
DOC FIL(2COL)
DOC FIL(SGL COL)
OTHER(BW)
OTHER(COL)
MAINTENANCE ALL
MAINTENANCE COL
TC1 BELT
TC1 BELT RANGE
Default
value
150K
100K
FUSER UNIT(E)
FUSER DAY(U&L)
FUSER DAY(E)
FUSER WEB SEND
FUSER WEB UNIT
FUSER WEB DAY
DRUM LIFE(K)
DRUM LIFE(C)
DRUM LIFE(M)
DRUM LIFE(Y)
DEVE LIFE(K)
DEVE LIFE(C)
DEVE LIFE(M)
DEVE LIFE(Y)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.21-01
TEST
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-01
A:
0
[
0~ 999
A: 0
B: 0
COUNTER DISPLAY
TOTAL OUT(BW)
OK
22
TOTAL(SGL_COL)
: 00000000
COPY(BW)
: 00000000
TOTAL(BW)
: 00000000
COPY(COL)
: 00000000
TOTAL(COL)
: 00000000
COPY(2COL)
: 00000000
TOTAL(2COL)
: 00000000
COPY(SGL_COL)
: 00000000
1/5
22-2
Purpose
22-1
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Purpose
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
Change the display page with [] [] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
TOTAL OUT(BW)
TOTAL OUT(COL)
TOTAL(BW)
TOTAL(COL)
TOTAL(2COL)
TOTAL(SGL_COL)
: 00000000
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
The paper jam/trouble counter value is displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
MACHINE JAM
RSPF/DSPF JAM
TROUBLE
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 22
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-02
Others
22-5
Purpose
: 00000000
Section
TROUBLE
Item
Software
: 00000000
Operation/Procedure
1/1
22-3
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Purpose
Item
Trouble
Operation/Procedure
The history of paper jams and misfeed is displayed.
The above histories are displayed from the newest one to the oldest in this sequence. The max. 50 items are saved. (The oldest one
is sequentially erased.)
* List of JAM codes: Refer to "2. Paper JAM code" in the "[12]
OTHERS."
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-03
CPFD2_S2
MFT
PPD2_N1
CPFD2_S2
APPD3_S
TRAY3
DPFD2_S4
LCC
PPD2_PRI
CPID2_S2
CPID2_S2
CPFD1_N1
PPD2_PRI
TRAY3
APPD3_S
TRAY2
MFT
1/1
Serial No.
ICU (Main section)
ICU (Boot section)
Language support data version
Graphic data for LCD
ImageASIC FlashROM data
Color profile
PCU
SCU
SPF
FAX1 line (Main section)
FAX2 line (Main section)
Desk unit
Side LCC
Finisher
Saddle unit
Punch unit
NIC
EFI
Power controller
Operation manual (HDD storage)
1/1
0
TEST
22-4
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-05
S/N : **********
Purpose
Item
Trouble
ICU(MAIN)
: 00.00.00
ICU(BOOT)
: 00.00.00
PCU
LANGUAGE
: 00.00.00
SCU
: 00.00.00
GRAPHIC
: 00.00.00
SPF
: 00.00.00
: 00.00.00
FAX1(MAIN)
: NONE
: 00.00.00
1/2
Operation/Procedure
The trouble history is displayed.
The trouble history is displayed sequentially from the latest one.
The max. 30 items can be stored. (The oldest one is deleted
sequentially.)
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
* Trouble code list: Refer to "2. Trouble code list" in the "[8] SELF
DIAG AND TROUBLE CODE".
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-04
F9-20
F2-39
L4-31
F1-50
L4-02
F2-39
F1-50
F1-50
L4-02
F1-61
F1-50
F1-50
F2-39
H5-01
E7-23
U5-12
F2-39
L1-00
E7-23
22-6
Purpose
Item
Operation/Procedure
* When installing or servicing, this simulation is executed to print
the adjustment data and set data for use in the next servicing.
(Memory trouble, PWB replacement, etc.)
1)
2)
1/2
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 23
Item
A
Description
Data pattern selection
1: List print
2: List print (Sim50-24)
Set
range
1 to 2
Default
value
1
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
0
TEST
0
DATA PRINT MODE
A: 1
A:
; DATA PATTERN
[ 1~ 2 ]
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-09
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-06
TEST
TRAY1
00000000
MFT HEAVY
00000000
TRAY2
00000000
MFT OHP
00000000
TRAY3
00000000
MFT ENV
00000000
TRAY4
00000000
LCC
00000000
MFT TOTAL
00000000
ADU
00000000
1/1
OK
22-10
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Purpose
22-8
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the number of use of the finisher, the RSPF, the DSPF, and the scan
(reading) unit.
Section
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
The values of the finisher counter, the RSPF counter, the DSPF
counter, and the scanner (read) related counters are displayed.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-08
Item
Specifications (Option)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
RSPF/DSPF
STAMP
DESK
LCC
PUNCHER
00000000
SADDLE STAPLER :
00000000
SCAN
00000000
OC_OPEN
00000000
STAPLER
00000000
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN :
00000000
PUNCHER
00000000
OC LAMP TIME
00000:00
STAMP
00000000
00000:00
1/1
FINISHER
22-9
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Purpose
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
The values of the paper feed related counters are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
Section
Item display
MACHINE
FAX1
FAX2
FAX MEMORY
HAND SET
NETWORK
SCANNER
PRINTER
PS
SECURITY
AIM
SDRAM(SYS)
SDRAM(ICU)
HDD
NIC
BARCODE
INTERNET-FAX
Display content
MX-3500FN
MX-4500FN
MX-3501FN
MX-4501FN
MX-3500N
MX-4500N
MX-3501N
MX-4501N
MX-RPX1/
STANDARD
AR-SU1
MX-DEX3
MX-DEX4
MX-LCX1
Content
Machine
MX-PNX1A
MX-PNX1B
MX-PNX1C
MX-PNX1D
AR-PN1A
AR-PN1B
AR-PN1C
AR-PN1D
MX-FNX2
MX-FNX1
MX-FXX1
MX-FLX1
AR-MM9
MX-MMX1
MX-HNX1
MX-NSX1
Handset
Network scanner expansion kit
MX-PBX1
MX-PKX1
MX-FRX2
MX-AMX1
*****MB
*****MB
*****MB
STANDARD
AR-PF1
MX-FWX1
Finisher
FAX kit
FAX 2 line kit
FAX expansion memory
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-10
TEST
MACHINE SYSTEM
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2212
TEST
52(,#/*+5614;#&+52.#;
MACHINE
MX-3500N
PUNCHER
MX-PNX1A
RSPF/DSPF
MX-RPX1/STANDARD
FINISHER
MX-FNX1
STAMP
AR-SU1
FAX
MX-FXX1
DESK
MX-DEX3
FAX2
MX-FLX1
LCC
MX-LCX1
FAX MEMORY
AR-MM9
1/3
22-11
22-13
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Purpose
FAX
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
The values of the FAX send counter and the FAX receive counter
are displayed.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
Purpose
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
The rotating time and the print quantity of the process section are
displayed.
Change the display with [] [] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
DRUM CTRG K
DRUM CTRG C
DRUM CTRG M
DRUM CTRG Y
DRUM RANGE K
DRUM RANGE C
DRUM RANGE M
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2211
00000000
00000000
SEND IMAGES_L2
00000000
SEND TIME
00000000:00:00
RECEIVED TIME
00000000:00:00
ACR SEND
00000000
00000000
DEVE CTRG K
DEVE CTRG C
DEVE CTRG M
DEVE CTRG Y
DEVE RANGE K
1/1
DEVE RANGE C
DEVE RANGE M
22-12
Purpose
DRUM RANGE Y
RSPF/DSPF
Item
Function
Operation/Procedure
DEVE RANGE Y
TONER MOTOR K
TONER MOTOR C
TONER MOTOR M
TONER MOTOR Y
TONER TURN K
TONER TURN C
TONER TURN M
TONER TURN Y
TEST
PROCESS
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2213
CARTRIDGE
DISPLAY
DRUM CTRG K
00000000
DRUM RANGE K
00000000
DRUM CTRG C
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE C
00000000
DRUM CTRG M
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE M
00000000
DRUM CTRG Y
: 00000000
DRUM RANGE Y
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 25
00000000
1/2
22-19
Purpose
Scanner
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
Used to display the counter value related to the network scanner.
Change the display with [] [] buttons.
Press [COLOR] or [BLACK] button to print.
NET SCN ORG_B/W
NET SCN ORG_CL
NET SCN ORG_2CL
NET SCN ORG_SGL
INTERNET FAX OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B & C
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
Address registration
list
Document filing
folder list
System setting list
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2219
NETWORK
SCANNER
COUNTER
DISPLAY
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
Receive rejection
number table
Receive rejection/
allow address/
domain table
Transfer to Email
table list
Transfer to
Administrator list
Web setting list
Meta data set list
ALL CUSTOM
SETTING LIST
PCL SYMBOL SET
LIST
PCL INTERNAL FONT
LIST
PCL EXTENDED
FONT LIST
PS FONT LIST
PS KANJI FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT
LIST
NIC PAGE
INDIVIDUAL LIST
GROUP LIST
PROGRAM LIST
MEMORY BOX LIST
ALL SENDING
ADDRESS LIST
DOCUMENT FILING
FOLDER LIST
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (COPY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (PRINT)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (IMAGE SEND)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (DOC FILING)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (SECURITY)
ADMIN. SETTINGS
LIST (COMMON)
ALL ADMINISTRATOR
SETTINGS LIST
ANTI JUNK FAX
NUMBER LIST
ANTI JUNK MAIL/
DOMAIN NAME LIST
INBOUND ROUTING
LIST
DOCUMENT ADMIN
LIST
WEB SETTING LIST
METADATA SET LIST
0
1/4
TES
TEST
CL
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.22-90
LIST PRINT
22-90
Purpose
Item
Function
PS FONT LIST
PS EXTENDED FONT LIST
Operation/Procedure
Change the display with [] [] buttons.
Select the print target with the buttons on the touch panel.
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self print.
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 26
1/4
3)
23
23-2
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data check
Purpose
MACHINE
RSPF
DSPF
TROUBLE
0
TEST
JAM/TROUBLE
Section
Item
Trouble
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2401
COUNTER
MACHINE
DATA CLEAR
RSPF
TROUBLE
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
ARE
0
TEST
PRESS
DATA PRINT
[EXECUTE] TO
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-02
JAM/TROUBLE
YOU
MODE
THE
24-2
JAM/TROUBLE PRINT
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use (the number of prints) of each paper feed section.
EXECUTE
Section
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation test/check
2)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed and
transport section.
3)
23-80
Purpose
Section
Item
Function
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] button to execute print of the list.
* When [C] key, [CA] key, [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key, or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is terminated.
0
TEST
TRAY1
TRAY2
TRAY3
TRAY4
MFT TOTAL
MFT HEAVY
MFT OHP
MFT ENV
LCC
ADU
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.23-80
DATA PRINT
MODEPAPER FEED
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2402
TRAY2
MFT TOTAL
LCC
EXECUTE
24
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-3
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the jam counter, and the trouble counter. (The counters are cleared after
completion of maintenance.)
Section
Item
Counter
Data clear
Function (Purpose) Used to clear the number of use of the finisher, RSPF, DSPF, and the scan (reading)
unit.
Section
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
2)
TRAY4
MFT ENV
ADU
Purpose
24-1
1)
MFT OHP
1/1
ARE
Purpose
TRAY3
MFT HEAVY
1)
2)
3)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 27
RSPF/DSPF
SCAN
STAPLER
PUNCHER
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC_OPEN
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN
OC LAMP TIME
DSPF LAMP TIME
24-5
SPF counter
Scan counter
Staple counter
Puncher counter
Stamp counter
Saddle staple counter
OC open/close counter
RSPF/DSPF open/close counter
OC section lamp total lighting time
DSPF section lamp total lighting time
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-03
STAPLER
SCAN
STAMP
SADDLE STAPLER
OC LAMP TIME
ARE
YOU
SURE?
OC_OPEN
Item
Counter
1)
2)
3)
Section
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST
Data clear
Purpose
PUNCHER
RSPF/DSPF_OPEN
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-4
Y
Data clear
Purpose
Section
0
TEST
DEVELOPER COUNTER
K
Counter
Item
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2405
DATA CLEAR
C
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-6
Data clear
Purpose
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
COPY BW
COPY COL
SINGLE COLOR
2COLOR
0
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2404
MAINTENANCE COUNTER
MAINTENANCE ALL
CLEAR
TC1 BELT
COPY COUNTER
DATA CLEAR
COPY COL
FUSER UNIT(E)
FUSER DAY(U&L)
FUSER DAY(E)
FUSER UNIT(U&L)
FUSER UNIT(E)
FUSER DAY(U&L)
FUSER DAY(E)
ARE YOU SURE?
YES
NO
SINGLE COLOR
COLOR
FUSER UNIT(U&L)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2406
COPY BW
MAINTENANCE COL
TC2 BELT
TEST
EXECUTE
1/2
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 28
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-7
24-10
Data clear
Purpose
Data clear
Purpose
Section
Item
Counter
Item
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
FAX OUTPUT
FAX OUTPUT_L2
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND IMAGES
SEND IMAGES_L2
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
ACR SEND
C
M
Y
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2410
SIMULATION NO.2407
TEST
FAX OUTPUT
CLOSE
SEND IMAGES
M
FAX SEND
FAX RECEIVED
SEND TIME
RECEIVED TIME
Y
ARE
YOU SURE?
SEND IMAGES_L2
ACR SEND
C
ARE
FAX OUTPUT_L2
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
24-15
Purpose
Data clear
24-9
Data clear
Purpose
Item
Counter
Section
Item
Counter
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
1)
3)
2)
3)
PRINT BW
PRINT COL
OTHER BW
OTHER COL
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2409
PRINT/OTHER
COUNTER
PRINT BW
CLEAR
OTHER BW
PRINT COL
YES
NO
OTHER COL
EXECUTE
1/1
INTERNET FAX
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX SEND
OUTPUT
INTERNET FAX
RECEIVE
INTERNET FAX SEND
MAIL COUNTER
FTP COUNTER
SMB SEND
USB CNT
TRIAL MODE_B&C
SCAN TO HDD_B/W
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 29
SCAN TO HDD_CL
SCAN TO HDD_2CL
SCAN TO HDD_SGL
25
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2415
TEST
NETWORK
SCANNER
COUTNER
DATA CLEAR
SURE?
NO
Item
Operation
EXECUTE
1)
1/3
2)
Data clear
Item
Clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
24-30
Purpose
Operation test/Check
Operation/Procedure
25-1
Purpose
TCD_K
TCD_C
TCD_M
TCD_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
0
ADMIN
PASSWORD
ARE
SURE?
YES
NO
TCV_
TCD_C
TCV_C
TCD_M
TCV_M
TCD_Y
TCV_
LOW
MIDDLE
EXECUTE
1/1
25-2
Purpose
Data clear
Purpose
Item
Clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Process (Photoconductor/Developing/
Transfer/Cleaning)
Item
Adjustment
1)
2)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.24-31
PASSWORD INITIALIZE
ARE
YOU SURE?
YES
Setting
Operation/Procedure
SERVICE
TCD_
EXECUTE
24-31
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-01
INITIALIZE
YOU
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION
NO.24-30
TEST
NO
EXECUTE
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y
AT DEVE ADJ_M_K
AT DEVE ADJ_M_C
AT DEVE ADJ_M_M
AT DEVE ADJ_M_Y
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 30
Item descriptions
Automatic developer
adjustment value at low
speed
Automatic developer
adjustment value at
middle speed
Display
range
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Display items
Display
range
1 255
Item descriptions
AT DEVE ADJ_H_K
(MX-4500N/4501N only)
Automatic developer
adjustment value at
high speed
Automatic developer
adjustment control
voltage at low speed
AT DEVE VO_L_K
AT DEVE VO_L_C
AT DEVE VO_L_M
AT DEVE VO_L_Y
AT DEVE VO_M_K
AT DEVE VO_M_C
AT DEVE VO_M_M
AT DEVE VO_M_Y
AT DEVE VO_H_K
(MX-4500N/4501N only)
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
1 255
Automatic developer
adjustment control
voltage at middle speed
Automatic developer
adjustment control
voltage at high speed
TCD_K
TCD_C
TCD_M
TCD_Y
TCV_K
TCV_C
TCV_M
TCV_Y
Default
value
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
26-2
Setting
Purpose
Paper feed
Item
Setting
Operation/Procedure
Select the paper size with the buttons on the touch panel.
LCC
0
1
0
TEST
SIZE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-02
SETUP
LCC
8.5
A4
11
B5
0
AUTOMATIC
DEVELOPER
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.25-02
TEST
ADJUSTMENT
AT DEVE ADJ_L_K :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_K :
128
AT DEVE ADJ_L_C :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_C :
128
26-3
AT DEVE ADJ_L_M :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_M :
128
Purpose
AT DEVE ADJ_L_Y :
128
AT DEVE VO_L_Y :
128
EXECUTE
1/2
Setting
Auditor
Item
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
26
Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
When a button is pressed, the set content is saved.
26-1
Setting
Purpose
Item
Paper exit
Item
Setting
EC1
Operation/Procedure
OUTSIDE
AUDITOR
1)
2)
Item
A
Display
Content
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
BUILT-IN
AUDITOR
Set
range
0 to 1
1 (NO)
DOC ADJ
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2601
ESCAPE TRAY
OFF
PF ADJ
ON
(0:YES
OFF
1:NO)
0
VENDOR
MODE (*)
ON
SETUP
A 0
A:
NONE
P VENDOR1
P OTHER
Default
0
TEST
Button
display
P10
OK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 31
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
Content
Default
P10
NONE
OFF
OFF
MODE3
Item
COUNTUP
TIMING1
Button
display
FUSER_IN
FUSER_OUT
EXIT_OUT
Content
Default
EXIT_OUT
0
A3(1117)
COUNTUP
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2605
TEST
A 2
TOTAL(B/W)
B 2
TOTAL(COL)
C 2
MAINTENANCE(B/W)
D 2
MAINTENANCE(COL)
OK
Diagnosis
setting
MODE1
MODE2
MODE3
The
specified
quantity is
completed.
Remainder
of money
left.
Condition 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 1
COLOR
(Remainder
of money
left)
Condition 2
Operation 2
Operation 1
Operation 3
Condition 3
Operation 2
Operation 2
Operation 2
The
specified
quantity is
completed.
No
remainder
of money.
Condition 4
Operation 1
Operation 1
Operation 3
Operation 1: Wait for auto clear setting time. Default, 60sec. Can
be changed by the system setting.
Operation 2: Auto clear is not made.
Operation 3: Setting is immediately cleared. The display returns to
the initial screen.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-03
TEST
AUDITOR
SETUP
BUILT-IN AUDITOR
P10
OUTSIDE AUDITOR
NONE
EC1
P VENDOR1
DOC ADJ
ON
OFF
PF ADJ
ON
OFF
VENDOR MODE
MODE1
MODE2
Setting
Purpose
Item
Specifications (Destination)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select the set target with the button on the touch panel.
2)
U.S.A.
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K.
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
P OTHER
0
MODE3
1/2
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-06
TEST
DISTINATION SETUP
CANADA
U.S.A
26-5
INCH
AB_B
EUROPE
AB_A
CHINA
U.K.
JAPAN
AUS
Setting
Purpose
Item
Counter
EXECUTE
1/1
26-10
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
Setting
1)
2)
3)
Section
Item
Operation
Item
A
B
C
Display
TOTAL (B/W)
TOTAL (COL)
MAINTENANCE
(B/W)
MAINTENANCE
(COL)
DEV (B/W)
DEV (COL)
Content
Total counter (BLACK)
Total counter (COLOR)
Maintenance counter
(BLACK)
Maintenance counter
(COLOR)
Developer counter
(BLACK)
Developer counter
(COLOR)
Setting
range *
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 2
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Default
2
2
2
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 2
Display
TRIAL MODE
(0:YES 1:NO)
* 1 = Count up by 1
2 = Count up by 2
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 32
Content
0
1
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1
Operation/Procedure
0
NETWORK SCANNER TRIAL MODE SETUP
A:1
A:
1)
2)
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-10
TEST
1
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
Item
Display
(0:YES 1:NO)
Setting
Purpose
Content
Item
Default value
Refer to <Initial
value and set
value linked with
the destination>.
2)
CE mark
control allowed
CE mark
control inhibited
Operation/Procedure
1)
Setting
range
0 to 1
Setting value
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
1 (CE not supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
0 (CE supported)
Display
Content
COPY
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
B
PRINTER
(1:YES 0:NO)
0
1
Setting
range
0 to 1
A 1
A:
Default
value
0
0 to 1
SAVE
A:
MODE
0
0
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
A 0
COPY(1:YES
B 0
PRINTER(1:YES
0:NO)
0:NO)
1)
2)
OK
26-30
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
SETUP
1]
0~
(0:YES 1:NO)
26-35
0
TONER
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2618
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-30
TEST
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set allow/inhibit of HL slow-up control (CE mark support control).
Item
Display
(0:ONCE
1:ANY)
Content
0
1
Section
Item
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 33
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-35
TEST
TROUBLE
MEMORY
MODE
A 0
A:
SETUP
(0:ONCE
Item
1:ANY)
Display
Content
(0:YES
1:NO)
Center binding
mode AMS setting
Center binding
mode AMS cancel
1
OK
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default value
Refer to <Initial
value and set
value linked with
the destination>.
26-38
Setting
Purpose
Other
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
PAMPHLET
Content
MAINTENANCE
LIFE OVER
(0:CONTINUE
1:STOP)
FUSER WEB
END
(0:CONTINUE
1:STOP)
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
maintenance life is
over (Print Continue)
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
maintenance life is
over (Print Stop)
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
fusing web is end
(Print Continue)
Continue/Stop setting
of print when the
fusing web is end
(Print Stop)
Setting
range
0 to 1
A:
A:
1
0
Default
value
0
SETTING.
(0:YES
1:NO)
0
0
OK
Setting
Purpose
Section
Item
Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
ENGINE LIFE OVER
AMS
26-49
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2638
TEST
MODE
A 0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-41
TEST
Item
Setting value
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
1 (Setting)
1 (Setting)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
0 (Cancel)
<Item description>
SETTING
A 1
B 1
Item
POSTCARD
Set
value
LOW
HIGH
Content
Postcard copy speed LOW
Postcard copy speed HIGH
OK
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-49
26-41
Purpose
Default
value
LOW
POSTCARD
LOW
HIGH
Setting
Item
1/1
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 34
Destination
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
26-50
Setting
Purpose
Item
Specifications (Operation)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Setting value A
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
0 (Display inhibited)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
Setting value B
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-50
TEST
FUNCTION SETTING
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
A:
1
0
A 1
; BW
B 0
COLOR MODE
C 0
FINISHER FUNCTION : NO
REVERSE : YES
OK
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
2)
26-52
3)
Purpose
Display
BW
REVERSE
YES
NO
COLOR MODE
FINISHER
FUNCTION
YES
NO
Content
description
B/W REVERSE
allowed
B/W REVERSE
inhibited
2-color/Single
color inhibit
setting
The number of
discharge of
special paper
from the finisher
is limited.
The number of
discharge of
special paper
from the finisher
is not limited.
Setting
range
01
01
0 to 7
01
Section
Item
Default value
Operation/Procedure
<Setting range
and default
value of each
set value>
Refer to
"Setting value
A."
<Setting range
and default
value of each
set value>
Refer to
"Setting value
B."
0 (YES)
1)
2)
Display
(0:YES
1:NO)
SIM setting
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
White paper
countup (YES)
White paper
coutup (NO)
Destination
U.S.A
CANADA
INCH
JAPAN
AB_B
EUROPE
U.K
AUS.
AB_A
CHINA
Setting value
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
1 (No countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
1 (No countup)
0 (countup)
0 (countup)
0
A BLANK
PAPER
COUNT
A 1
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-52
TEST
MODE
SETUP
(0:YES
1:NO)
1
0
OK
Default value
01
When 2-color/
Single color inhibit
Setting
range
0 to 1
Content
Setting
Setting value A
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
1 (Display allowed)
Setting value B
0
0
0
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 35
26-53
26-65
Setting
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
Section
Item
Specifications
Item
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
Item
A
Display
Content
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
0
ACC YES
ACC NO
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-53
TEST
ENABLING
OF
AUTOMATIC
COLOR
A 1
A:
LIMIT
SHEETS
LIMIT
COPIES
Content
Staple limit sheets: 30 sheets
Staple limit sheets: 50 sheets
Staple limit copies ON
Staple limit copies OFF
Setting
range
30 or 50
Default
value
30
ON or OFF
ON
<LIMIT SHEETS>
[Target paper size]
0:NO)
1
0
Set
value
30
50
ON
OFF
Item
CALIBRATION
(1:YES
OK
* 25 sheets for L-size paper (A3, B4, 11 x 17, 8.5 x 14, 8.5 x 13,
8K) regardless of setting
* 25 sheets for mixed loading of a same width regardless of setting
26-54
0
Setting
Purpose
TEST
Printer
Item
Operation
SIMULATION NO.26-65
CLOSE
30
50
LIMIT COPIES
ON
OFF
Operation/Procedure
1)
Display
Content
(1:YES 0:NO)
1
0
ACC YES
ACC NO
Setting
range
01
Default
value
1
0
TEST
ENABLING
OF
AUTOMATIC
A 1
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.2654
COLOR
Purpose
Section
Item
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
0:NO)
1
0
Setting
1)
(1:YES
26-67
OK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 36
3)
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
4)
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
Item
TIME ZONE
SUMMER
TIME
SUMMER
TIME
Common
Start time
setting
Content
GMT +/-
B
C
D
GMT HOUR
GMT MINUTE
INTERNET
AUTO SUMMER
TIME ADJ
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
End time
setting
Display
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
GMT +/
GMT HOUR
GMT MINUTE
Internet time YES/
NO
YES
NO
ON
OFF
Auto summertime
setting ON/OFF
Adjustment time
HOUR
Adjustment time
MINUTE
Start time MONTH
Start time DAY
Start time WEEK
Stat time DAY OF
THE WEEK
UTC YES/NO
End time MONTH
End time DAY
End time WEEK
End time DAY OF
THE WEEK
UTC YES/NO
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 37
Setting
range
0
1
0 to 13
0 to 59
0
1
0
1
0 to 23
Default
value
1
0 to 59
1 to 12
1 to 31
1 to 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 to 23
0 to 59
0
1
*
*
*
*
0
1
1 to 12
1 to 31
1 to 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0 to 23
0 to 59
0
1
0
1
*
*
*
Remark
*
1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Destination
AB_B
EUROPE
8 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
U.S.A
5 (Hour)
CANADA
5 (Hour)
INCH
5 (Hour)
JAPAN
9 (Hour)
U.K.
0 (Hour)
AUS.
10 (Hour)
AB_A
8 (Hour)
CHINA
8 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
Summer
ON
Summer
ON
Summer
ON
Summer
OFF
Summer
OFF
4 (Month)
4 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
3 (Month)
3 (Month)
10
(Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
2 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
0 (Minute)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
5 (Week)
5 (Week)
5 (Week)
1 (Week)
1 (Week)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
1 (Day
specifying)
1 (Day
specifying)
1 (Day
specifying)
1 (UTC ON)
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
0 (UTC
OFF)
1 (Day
specifying)
1 (UTC ON)
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
1 (UTC
ON)
1 (Day
specifying)
1 (UTC ON)
0 (Day of
week
specifying)
1 (UTC
ON)
1 (UTC ON)
1 (UTC ON)
10
(Month)
10
(Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
10
(Month)
10
(Month)
3 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Month)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
1 (Day)
2 (Hour)
2 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
3 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
5th (week)
5th (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
5th (week)
5th (week)
5th (week)
1st (week)
1st (week)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
0
(Sunday)
1 (Monday)
1 (Monday)
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
1 (Date
specification)
1 (Date
specification)
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC OFF
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC ON
1 (Date
specification)
UTC ON
0 (Day of
week is
specified)
UTC ON
UTC ON
UTC ON
1 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
1 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (Hour)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
0 (minute)
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-67
A:
1
[ 0~ 1 ]
TIME ZONE
; GMT :-
A:
B:
; GMT HOUR
C:
; GMT MINUTE
D:
; INTERNET: YES
SUMMER TIME
OK
26-69
Setting
Purpose
0
TONER
Section
Process
Item
Specifications
NEAR
A:
Operation/Procedure
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.26-69
TEST
END
SETTING
A 0
B 0
C 3
TONER END
D 3
OK
27
27-1
Section
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Operation/Procedure
2)
3)
1)
2)
3)
Content
TONER PREPA
RATION
(0:YESS 1:NO)
TONER
NEAREND
(0:YESS 1:NO)
TONER END
2
3
D
TONER END
COUNT
1
2
3
4
5
Operation test/Check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether the detection of communication error with RIC (U7-00) is disabled or not.
Set
range
0 to 1
Initial
value
0
0 to 1
Display
A
1 to 3
DISABLE
Content
0: YES
1: NO
(U7-00) Not
detected
YES
NO
Setting
range
0 to 1 0
1
Default
value
0: Not
detected
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.27-01
CLOSE
DISABLE
NO
A 0
1 to 5
A:
0
0
OK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 39
27-2
27-4
Setting
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the FSS function (Sender registration number, HOST server TEL number).
Section
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Section
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Item
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
2)
Enter the set value with 10-key. The entered value is displayed
at "NEW."
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
Description
Sender registration number
HOST server TEL number
Number of digits
Max. 16 digits
Max. 16 digits
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
4)
0
TEST
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-02
00000000000000000000000000000001
NEW
USER
FAX_NO.
SET
SERVA TEL_NO
1/1
Display
FSS MODE
B
C
D
RETRY
TIMER (MINUTE)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (K)
TONER ORDER
TIMING (C)
TONER ORDER
TIMING(M)
TONER ORDER
TIMING(Y)
Content
NEB1
NEB2
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
100% 75%
74% 50%
49% 25%
LOWER 25
NEAREND
EMPTY
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 40
Setting
range
0
1
0 to 15
1 to 15
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
5
4
3
2
1
0
Default value
Remark
1
2
3
3 (49% to 25%)
3 (49% to 25%)
3 (49% to 25%)
3 (49% to 25%)
* 0: No retry
27-7
A:
[
1
0~
1]
Setting
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-04
TEST
A:
B:
RETRY
Section
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
C:
TIMER (MINUTE)
Item
Specifications
D:
Operation/Procedure
OK
27-5
1)
2)
Setting
Purpose
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
When there is no item under [], the display grays out and
the operation is disabled.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-05
TEST
TAG# SETTING
11111111
PRESENT :
NEW :
SET
Display
FUNCTION
(0:YES 1:NO)
27-6
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Specifications
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
1
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-06
0 to 1
0
(YES)
Item
No cause of callout
Maintenance
Service call
Toner send request
Toner collect request
Send timing
Initial/Trouble/Continuous JAM alert
Maintenance timing detection
When Service Call key is pressed.
When toner order auto send setting reaches.
Toner installation data revision. However, only
for a new product.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-07
0
TEST
0
1
Alert resend
ALERT
(0:YES 1:NO)
Default
value
1
(NO)
<Alert item>
Item
FSS function is
enabled.
FSS function is
disabled. (*)
Alert callout is enabled.
Alert callout is disabled.
Setting
range
0 to 1
(*): In the FSS function setting, change from Disable to Enable can
be made, but change from Disable to Enable cannot be made.
Operation/Procedure
2)
Setting
Purpose
1)
Content
A:
A 1
; FUNCTION(0:YES 1:NO)
B
ALERT(0:YES 1:NO)
[ 0~ 1 ]
A:
0:YES,
1:NO
OK
0
0
OK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 41
27-9
27-10
Setting
Purpose
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
Item
Specifications
1)
2)
2)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
4)
Operation/Procedure
3)
Data clear
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to set the threshold value for determining whether the paper feed time
between sensors is recorded or not and the
threshold value for determining whether the
gain adjustment retry number is recorded
or not.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-10
TROUBLE
Display
Content
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
GAIN
ADJUSTMENT
RETRY
JAM ALERT
Setting
range
0 to 100
Default
value
50 (%)
0 to 100
50 (%)
1 to 100
50
(TIMES)
1 to 100
10
(TIMES)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-09
A:
50
0100
A 50
FEED TIME1
50
50
50
JAM ALERT
ARE YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
27-11
Purpose
Communication (RIC/MODEM)
Item
Specification
Operation/Procedure
1)
FEED TIME2
When there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is disabled.
OK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 42
<Display item>
Item
LSU1
LSU2
DESK1
DESK2
INSERTER1
INSERTER2
FINISHER1
FINISHER2
DSPF1
DSPF2
SCAN GAIN
ADJ1
SCAN GAIN
ADJ2
SCAN GAIN
ADJ3
SCAN GAIN
ADJ4
SCAN GAIN
ADJ5
DSPF GAIN
ADJ1
DSPF GAIN
ADJ2
DSPF GAIN
ADJ3
DSPF GAIN
ADJ4
DSPF GAIN
ADJ5
Display item
Occurrence date
and time
(Display)
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
Retry
number
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
RSPF/
DSPF
Common
Content
Serial
communication
retry number
history display
HV_ERR1
DSPF
model
HV_ERR2
Common
HV_ERR3
DSPF
model
HV_ERR4
HV_ERR5
H_TONE ERR1
Common
Scanner gain
adjustment
retry history
display
8 digits
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
H_TONE ERR2
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
H_TONE ERR3
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
H_TONE ERR4
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
H_TONE ERR5
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
99/99/99 99:99:99
8 digits
AUTO REG
ADJ1
AUTO REG
ADJ2
AUTO REG
ADJ3
AUTO REG
ADJ4
AUTO REG
ADJ5
Automatic register
adjustment error history 1
Automatic register
adjustment error history 2
Automatic register
adjustment error history 3
Automatic register
adjustment error history 4
Automatic register
adjustment error history 5
DSPF
model
DSPF gain
adjustment
retry history
display
0
TROUBLE
PRECOGNITION
DATE
LSU1
LSU2
RETRY
99/99/99
999999 99999999
99/99/99
999999
TEST
TROUBLE
99999999
PRECOGNITION
99999999
99/99/99
999999
99999999
HV
ERR2
FINISHER1 99/99/99
999999
99999999
HV
ERR3
HV
ERR4
HV
ERR5
999999
99999999
HV
1/2
99/99/99
RESULT(ADJUSTMENT_ERROR)
DATE
99/99/99
ERR1
H_TONE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.
999999
99/99/99
Error
code
(Digits)
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
Max. 4
digits
RESULT
99/99/99
FINISHER2
Occurrence
date and time
(Display)
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
99/99/99
99:99:99
CLOSE
DESK1
DESK2
Content
99/99/99 99:99:99
SIMULATION NO.
TEST
Display item
999999
99/99/99 999999
ERROR CODE
999999 9999
99/99/99 999999
9999
9999
9999
99/99/99
999999
9999
ERR1 99/99/99
999999
9999
1/3
27-12
Purpose
Process
Item
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
27-13
Purpose
Item
Specifications
Operation/Procedure
1)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 43
Main
unit
RSPF/
DSPF
Display item
Content
FEED TIME1
FEED TIME2
FEED TIME3
FEED TIME4
FEED TIME5
FEED TIME6
FEED TIME7
FEED TIME8
FEED TIME9
FEED TIME10
FEED TIME1(SPF)
FEED TIME2(SPF)
FEED TIME3(SPF)
FEED TIME4(SPF)
FEED TIME5(SPF)
FEED TIME6(SPF)
FEED TIME7(SPF)
FEED TIME8(SPF)
FEED TIME9(SPF)
FEED TIME10(SPF)
Occurrence date
and time
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
99/99/99 99:99:99
Code between
sensors
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
5 digits
Passing time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
Passing
reference time
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
5 digits (ms)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-13
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.27-14
SENSOR CODE
PASS TIME
STANDARD TIME
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
FEED
99999
99999
99999
A:0
A:
0
[ 0~ 1 ]
OK
1/4
27-14
30
Operation test/Check
Purpose
Item
Operation
30-1
Operation test/Check
Purpose
1)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors in the paper feed section, the paper transport section, and the
paper exit section.
2)
Section
Paper feed
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
3)
Display
CONNECTION
TEST MODE
(1: ON 0: OFF)
Content
1
0
Setting
range
0 to 1
Default
0
(OFF)
1)
<Sensor name>
Code of sensor
PPD1
PPD2
POD1
POD2
POD3
TFD2
TFD3
HPOS
DSW_R
DSW_C
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 44
Sensor name
Resist front detection
Resist detection
Fusing after detection
Paper exit detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Main unit paper exit full detection
Right tray paper exit full detection
Shifter home detection
Right door open/close detection
Cassette 1 transport cover open/close detection
Code of sensor
DSW_F
DHPD_K
DHPD_CL
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
Sensor name
Front cover open/close detection
K phase detection
CL phase detection
Waste toner full detection
Primary transfer belt separation CL detection
Primary belt separation BK detection
33
33-1
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.30-01
Operation test/Check
Purpose
Other
Item
Operation
PPD1
PPD2
POD1
POD2
POD3
TFD2
TFD3
HPOS
Operation/Procedure
DSW_R
DSW_C
DSW_F
DHPD_K
1)
DHPD_CL
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1/1
30-2
Code (Display)
CARD
DATA
CLOCK
Operation test/Check
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the operations of the sensors and detectors of the paper feed section and the related circuits.
Paper feed
Section
TEST
Operation
Item
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.3301
Operation/Procedure
1)
Sensor name
Card insertion detection
Card number signal detection
Standard clock signal detection
CARD
DATA
CLOCK
1/1
<Sensor name>
1/1
Content
Cassette 1 transport detection
Cassette 1 upper limit detection
Cassette 1 paper empty detection
Cassette 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Cassette 1rear edge detection 1
Cassette 1 rear edge detection 2
Cassette 1 rear edge detection 3
Cassette 1 rear edge detection 4
Cassette 2 transport detection
Cassette 2 upper limit detection
Cassette 2 paper empty detection
Cassette 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Cassette 2 rear edge detection 1
Cassette 2 rear edge detection 2
Cassette 2 rear edge detection 3
Cassette 2 rear edge detection 4
Manual feed paper entry detection
Manual feed paper length detection
Manual feed tray reduction detection
Manual feed tray extension detection
Manual feed paper empty detection
40
40-2
Purpose
Paper feed
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Extend the manual feed tray guide to the P1 (A4) width position and press [EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the current AD value is temporality saved to RAM
as the P1 width (A4) position. (Hereinafter, the value is saved
for each size setting.)
3)
4)
0
TRAY
SENSOR
CHECK(MAIN)
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
CSPD1
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
MPFD
MPLD
MTOP1
MTOP2
1/2
Extend the manual feed tray guide to the max. width and press
[EXECUTE] button. [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and the
current AD value is temporality saved to RAM as the max.
width.
* During adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.3002
TEST
Adjustment
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 45
41
Description of item
Manual feed max. width
Manual feed P1 position width (A4)
Manual feed P2 position width (A4R)
Manual feed min. width
41-1
Function (Purpose) Used to display the operating state of the
document sensor.
Item content
Adjustment completed
Adjustment failed
Section
Other
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-02
TEST
PRESS
ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE]
<Sensor name>
TO START
Code (Display)
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
EXECUTE
40-7
Setting
Purpose
Operation test/Check
Purpose
Paper feed
Item
Specifications
Sensor name
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Document detection 2
Document detection 3
Document detection 4
Document detection 5
Document detection 6
Document detection 7
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4101
Operation/Procedure
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
1)
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
1/1
3)
1/1
41-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the detection level of the
document size sensor.
Section
Other
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Item
Item
Item content
A
B
MAX POSITION
P1 POSITION
P2 POSITION
MIN POSITION
Default
value
241
231
0 to 255
140
0 to 255
19
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.40-07
A:
241
[ 0~ 255 ]
A : 241
MAX POSITION
B : 231
P1 POSITION
C : 140
P2 POSITION
D : 19
MIN POSITION
OK
Operation test/Check
Purpose
3)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 46
Content
Document sensor 1
Document sensor 2
Document sensor 3
Document sensor 4
Document sensor 5
Document sensor 6
Document sensor 7
Set range
0 255
Default value
128
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.41-02
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4103
TEST
EXECUTE
OCSW
PD5[]
PD1[]
PD6[]
PD2[]
PD7[]
PD3[]
PD4[]
1/1
41-3
Operation test/Check
43
43-1
Purpose
Section
Other
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Content
Original cover SW
Document detection 1
Document detection 2
Document detection 3
Document detection 4
Document detection 5
Document detection 6
Document detection 7
<Display content>
Display
OCSW
PD1
PD2
PD3
PD4
PD5
PD6
PD7
Setting
Purpose
Range
0 1 ("1": Close)
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
0 255
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Item
Display
Content
Set
range
Switch A
Default value
Switch B
MX-3500N/
MX-3501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
A
HL_UM READY
HL_LM READY
HL_E READY
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_E PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL
HL_E PLAIN
PAPER CL
E
F
G
H
I
MX-4500N/
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
MX-3500N/
MX-3501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
MX-4500N/
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
Switch C (Cool-down
control YES, default =
OFF)
General plain paper
(Cool-down control YES)
MX-3500N/
MX-4500N/
MX-3501N
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
70 to 230
165
165
165
165
170
180
175
180
170
170
170
170
30 to 200
120
120
120
120
120
140
120
140
120
130
130
130
70 to 230
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
70 to 230
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
30 to 200
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
70 to 230
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
30 to 200
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 47
Item
Display
Set
range
Content
Switch A
Default value
Switch B
MX-3500N/
MX-3501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
J
WARMUP FUMON
HL_UM T
WARMUP FUMOFF
HL_LM T
WARM UP END
TIME
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER
HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER
HL_E HEAVY
PAPER
HL_UM OHP
PAPER
HL_LM OHP
PAPER
HL_E OHP PAPER
HL_UM ENV
PAPER
HL_LM ENV PAPER
U
V
HL_UM PRE-JOB
HL_E PRE-JOB
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW
HL_E PLAIN
PAPER BW
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
Z
AA
MX-4500N/
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
MX-3500N/
MX-3501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
MX-4500N/
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
Switch C (Cool-down
control YES, default =
OFF)
General plain paper
(Cool-down control YES)
MX-3500N/
MX-4500N/
MX-3501N
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
30 to 200
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
155
30 to 200
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30 to 255
235
235
235
235
235
235
235
235
235
235
235
235
70 to 230
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
30 to 200
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
130
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
70 to 230
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
175
30 to 200
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
70 to 230
70 to 230
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
160
185
30 to 200
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
145
70 to 230
30 to 200
170
150
170
150
170
165
170
165
170
150
170
150
170
165
170
165
170
150
170
150
170
165
170
165
30 to 200
165
165
165
165
165
165
175
175
165
165
170
170
30 to 200
165
165
165
165
165
165
175
175
165
165
170
170
70 to 230
175
175
175
180
175
175
30 to 200
130
130
130
130
130
130
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
*1
*2
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_E
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_E
Purpose
0
FUSER
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4301
TEST
A:
170
70
230
Section
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
HL_UM
READY
B130
HL_LM
READY
C155
HL_E READY
D175
HL_UM
PLAIN PAPER
PAPER
A170
Setting
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
OK
3)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 48
Item
Display
Set
range
Content
Switch A
Default value
Switch B
MX-3500N/
MX-3501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
A
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
HL_E PLAIN
PAPER BW DUP
PLAIN PAPER BW
DUP APP CNT
B
C
D
HL_UM PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
HL_LM PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
HL_E PLAIN
PAPER CL DUP
PLAIN PAPER CL
DUP APP CNT
F
G
H
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HL_E HEAVY
PAPER BW DUP
HEAVY PAPER
BW DUP APP CNT
J
K
L
HL_UM HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
HL_LM HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
HL_E HEAVY
PAPER CL DUP
HEAVY PAPER CL
DUP APP CNT
N
O
P
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
*1
*2
165
165
175
170
175
175
180
165
165
170
175
30 to 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
0 to 60
70 to 230
165
165
165
165
170
175
170
175
165
165
165
165
30 to 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
0 to 60
70 to 230
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
30 to 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
0 to 60
70 to 230
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
170
175
30 to 200
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
70 to 230
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
160
0 to 60
43-20
Purpose
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4304
TEMP SETUP2
175
70230
FOR
PAPER
A175
B100
HL_LM
C160
HL_E PLAIN
D 0
PLAIN
PLAIN PAPER BW
PAPER
PAPER BW
BW
DUP
Setting
0
FUSER
MX-4500N/
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
165
*2
TEST
MX-3500N/
MX-3501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
70 to 230
*1
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_E
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_E
MX-4500N/
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2
Switch C (Cool-down
control YES, default =
OFF)
General plain paper
(Cool-down control YES)
MX-3500N/
MX-4500N/
MX-3501N
MX-4501N
Gr. 1 Gr. 2 Gr. 1 Gr. 2
DUP
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
DUP
APP
Section
CNT
OK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 49
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
Item
Display item
Item content
HL_E OHP LL
HL_UM
ENVELOPE LL
HL_LM
ENVELOPE LL
HL_E
ENVELOPE LL
HL_UM ESTAR LL
HL_UM PREJOB LL
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Correction value: (49 to +49) Input value: Actually entered value
(1 to 99)
Correction value
Input value
49
1
25
25
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
Display item
HL_UM
READY LL
HL_LM
READY LL
HL_E READY
LL
HL_UM PLAIN
BW LL
HL_LM PLAIN
BW LL
HL_E PLAIN
BW LL
HL_UM PLAIN
CL LL
HL_LM PLAIN
CL LL
HL_E PLAIN
CL LL
WARMUP
FUMON
HL_UM T LL
WARMUP
FUMOFF
HL_LM T LL
WARMUP
END TIME LL
HL_UM
HEAVY LL
HL_LM HEAVY
LL
HL_E HEAVY
LL
HL_UM OHP
LL
HL_LM OHP
LL
Item content
Correction value for TH_UM
set value in Ready standby
under LL environment
Correction value for TH_LM
set value in Ready standby
under LL environment
Correction value for TH_E
set value in Ready standby
under LL environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_UM set
value under LL environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_LM set
value under LL environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_E set value
under LL environment
Correction value for COLOR
plain paper TH_UM set
value under LL environment
Correction value for COLOR
plain paper TH_LM set
value under LL environment
Correction value for COLOR
plain paper TH_E set value
under LL environment
Correction value for fusing
motor front rotation start
TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for fusing
motor front rotation start
TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for WARM
UP complete time under LL
environment
Correction value for heavy
paper TH_UM set value
under LL environment
Correction value for heavy
paper TH_LM set value
under LL environment
Correction value for heavy
paper TH_E set value under
LL environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_UM set value under LL
environment
Correction value for OHP
TH_LM set value under LL
environment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
55
HL_E PREJOB LL
1 to 99
55
HL_UM
PLAIN-45 BW
*1
1 to 99
55
Z
HL_LM PLAIN45 BW *1
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
AA
HL_E PLAIN45 BW *1
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
*1 : MX-4500N/4501N only
* WARMUP END TIME LL 1s change by 1 count
1 to 99
55
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
60
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_E
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_E
0
TEST
1 to 99
60
A:
1 to 99
80
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-20
60
1 99
A 60
HL_UM READY LL
B 60
HL_LM READY LL
C 60
HL_E READY LL
D 60
HL_UM PLAIN BW LL
OK
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
1 to 99
60
43-21
Purpose
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to perform correction of high temperature and high humidity (H/H) environment
for the fusing temperature setting 1 (SIM
43-01) for each paper.
Section
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 50
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
Item
Item display
Content of item
HL_UM HEAVY
HH
HL_LM HEAVY
HH
HL_E HEAVY
HH
HL_UM OHP
HH
HL_LM OHP
HH
HL_E OHP HH
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
HL_UM
ENVELOPE
HH
HL_LM
ENVELOPE
HH
HL_E
ENVELOPE
HH
HL_UM ESTAR HH
4)
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49), Input value: Actual input
(1 to 99)
Set value
Input value
49
1
25
25
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
Item display
HL_UM
READY HH
HL_LM READY
HH
HL_E READY
HH
HL_UM PLAIN
BW HH
HL_LM PLAIN
BW HH
HL_E PLAIN
BW HH
HL_UM PLAIN
CL HH
HL_LM PLAIN
CL HH
HL_E PLAIN
CL HH
WARMUP
FUMON
HL_UM T HH
WARMUP
FUMOFF
HL_LM T HH
WARMUP END
TIME HH
Content of item
Correction value for TH_UM
set value in READY
standby under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_LM
set value in READY
standby under HH
environment
Correction value for TH_E
set value in READY
standby under HH
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_UM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_LM set
value under HH
environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper TH_E set value
under HH environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper TH_UM
set value under HH
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper TH_LM
set value under HH
environment
Correction value for
COLOR plain paper TH_E
set value under HH
environment
Correction value for fusing
motor front rotation start
TH_UM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for fusing
motor front rotation end
TH_LM set value under HH
environment
Correction value for WARM
UP end time under HH
environment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
HL_UM PREJOB HH
1 to 99
50
HL_E PREJOB HH
1 to 99
50
HL_UM PLAIN45 BW *1
1 to 99
50
HL_LM PLAIN45 BW *1
1 to 99
50
AA
1 to 99
50
HL_E PLAIN45 BW *1
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
*1 : MX-4500N/4501N only
* WARMUP END TIME HH 1s change by 1 count
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 51
0
TEST
Item
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-21
HL_E PLAIN
CL DUP LL
PLAIN CL
DUP APP
CNT LL
HL_UM
HEAVY BW
DUP LL
HL_LM
HEAVY BW
DUP LL
HL_E HEAVY
BW DUP LL
A:
10
1 99
A 10
HL_UM READY HH
B 10
HL_LM READY HH
C 10
HL_E READY HH
D 10
OK
43-22
Setting
Purpose
Display item
HEAVY BW
DUP APP
CNT LL
HL_UM
HEAVY CL
DUP LL
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
HL_LM
HEAVY CL
DUP LL
HL_E HEAVY
CL DUP LL
Section
Fusing
Item
Operation
Item content
Correction value for upper
TH_E COLOR plain paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for COLOR
plain paper duplex applicable
number of sheets under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_UM BW heavy paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for lower
TH_LM BW heavy paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for upper
TH_E BW heavy paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for BW
heavy paper duplex
applicable number of sheets
under LL environment
Correction value for upper
TH_UM COLOR heavy
paper duplex under LL
environment
Correction value for lower
TH_LM COLOR heavy paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for upper
TH_E COLOR heavy paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for COLOR
heavy paper duplex
applicable number of sheets
under LL environment
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
HEAVY CL
DUP APP
CNT LL
4)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
55
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
50
* PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT LL, PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT LL,
HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT LL, HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT LL
1s change by 1 count
The other correction values 1C change by 1 count
<Code descriptions in the above list>
TH_UM
TH_LM
TH_E
HL_UM
HL_LM
HL_E
0
Set value
Input value
49
1
25
25
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
TEST
FUSER
Display item
HL_UM
PLAIN BW
DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP LL
HL_E PLAIN
BW DUP LL
PLAIN BW
DUP APP
CNT LL
HL_UM
PLAIN CL
DUP LL
HL_LM PLAIN
CL DUP LL
Item content
Correction value for upper
TH_UM BW plain paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for lower
TH_LM BW plain paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for upper
TH_E BW plain paper duplex
under LL environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper duplex applicable
number of sheets under LL
environment
Correction value for upper
TH_UM COLOR plain paper
duplex under LL environment
Correction value for lower
TH_LM COLOR plain paper
duplex under LL environment
Set
range
1 to 99
TEMP
A:
Default
value
55
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-22
ADJUSTMENT
10
1
99
(LL :DUP)
A 10
B 50
C 50
D 50
OK
1 to 99
55
43-23
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
55
Purpose
Setting
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1 to 99
55
1)
2)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 52
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
Item
Display item
HL_E HEAVY
CL DUP HH
HEAVY CL
DUP APP CNT
HH
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
* PLAIN BW DUP APP CNT HH, PLAIN CL DUP APP CNT HH,
HEAVY BW DUP APP CNT HH, HEAVY CL DUP APP CNT HH
1s change by 1 count
The other correction values 1C change by 1 count
Item content
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49)
49
1
25
25
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
FUSER
Display item
HL_UM PLAIN
BW DUP HH
HL_LM PLAIN
BW DUP HH
HL_E PLAIN
BW DUP HH
PLAIN BW
DUP APP CNT
HH
HL_UM PLAIN
CL DUP HH
HL_LM PLAIN
CL DUP HH
HL_E PLAIN
CL DUP HH
PLAIN CL
DUP APP CNT
HH
HL_UM
HEAVY BW
DUP HH
HL_LM
HEAVY BW
DUP HH
HL_E HEAVY
BW DUP HH
HEAVY BW
DUP APP CNT
HH
HL_UM
HEAVY CL
DUP HH
HL_LM
HEAVY CL
DUP HH
Item content
Correction value for TH_UM
BW plain paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_LM
BW plain paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_E
BW plain paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for BW
plain paper duplex
applicable number of sheets
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_UM
COLOR plain paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_LM
COLOR plain paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_E
COLOR plain paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for COLOR
plain paper duplex
applicable number of sheets
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_UM
BW heavy paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_LM
BW heavy paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_E
BW heavy paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for BW
heavy paper duplex
applicable number of sheets
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_UM
COLOR heavy paper duplex
under HH environment
Correction value for TH_LM
COLOR heavy paper duplex
under HH environment
Set
range
1 to 99
A:
Default
value
50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43-23
TEST
10
1 99
A 10
B 10
C 10
D 10
OK
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
43-24
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Setting
Purpose
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
* Input value: The intercept for the correction value is 50. This is
because the set value is kept as a positive number in case of a
negative setting due to negative correction.
Set value: Value to be set (49 to +49)
Input value: Actual input value (1 to 99)
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Set value
Input value
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 53
49
1
25
25
5
45
0
50
+5
55
+25
75
+49
99
Display items
A
B
NN_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E
NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
C
D
LL_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E
LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
E
F
HH_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E
HH_120_WUP_HL_LM
G
H
ON_120_WUP_HL_UM
ON 120 WUP HL_E
J
K
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_E
L
M
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_UM&HL_E
N
O
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_HL_LM
NN_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
LL_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
HH_120_ FUS_DUP_CNT
R
S
T
U
COOL_DOWN_HEAVY
COOL_DOWN_OHP
COOL_DOWN_DEVELOP
WUP DUP TIME
FUS MOTOR
Cool-down time
Temperature correction
continuation time immediately
after completion of warm-up
Fusing web motor operation
interval
* On adjustment values
Each temperature correction value Temperature 1C change
by 1 count
Default
value
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
55
60
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
60
55
1 to 99
55
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
60
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 60
50
5
1 to 60
10
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
1 to 60
0 to 255
15
30
40
120
1 to 20
43-31
Operation check
Purpose
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Item descriptions
Section
Fusing
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Enter the simulation mode with the door open, and press
[EXECUTE] button.
3)
Perform the fusing web cleaning motor drive (continuous rotation for 10 sec). After completion, "COMPLETE" is displayed.
0
TEST
TEST
A:
50
199
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.43.-24
A 50
NN_120_ WUP_HL_UM&HL_E
B 50
NN_120_WUP_HL_LM
C 50
LL_120_ WUP_HL_UMHL_E
D 50
LL_120_WUP_HL_LM
FUSER
SIMULATION NO.43-31
WEB
CLEANING
CLOSE
CHECK
OK
EXECUTE
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 54
1/1
<Set items>
43-32
Operation setting
Purpose
Display
Function (Purpose) Used to make various settings of the compulsory operations of the web cleaning at a
job end.
Section
Fusing
Item
Operation
HT
Operation/Procedure
1)
HV
TC
2)
3)
MD VG
MD LD
<Set items>
Item
Display
JOB END
COMP
ACT
CHECK
Item
YES
NO
Conditions for
Allow
compulsory
Inhibit
operations of
the fusing web
motor at a job
end.
Interval of the print
quantity for compulsory
operations of the fusing
web motor at a job end.
Count number of
compulsory operations
of the fusing web motor
at a job end.
Set
range
0 to 0
1
1
Default
value
1
MD EV
MD DL
MD DL EV
1 to
200
100
TN_HUM
1 to 5
TN_AREA
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
0
JOB
END
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4332
TEST
WEB
CLEANING
0
0
COMPULSORY CHECK
A 0
B100
C 1
TN_PROCO
N
TN_ENV
TN_DRIP
OK
TN_SPEND
PHT
44
AR_AUTO
44-1
Purpose
AR_ERROR
Setting
Function (Purpose) Used to set whether the correction functions of the image forming (process) section are enabled or not.
Section
Item
DM_PHASE
SENSITIVITY
PRT_HT
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Content
Set range
Normal
(Inhibit: 1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Default
value
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Normal (Inhibit:
1: NO)
Highlighted
(Allow: 0: YES)
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
Allow
Allow
Inhibit
Allow
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4401
TEST
MODE SETTING
HV
HT
TC
MD LD
MD EV
MD DL
TN_HUM
TN_AREA
TN_PROCON
PHT
MD VG
MD DL EV
TN_LIFE
TN_COV
AR_AUTO
AR_ERROR
EXECUTE
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 55
1/2
* When an error occurs in the adjustment, "ERROR" is displayed in the value display section at the right of the error
item, and the drum motor is stopped. Data saving to
EEPROM is not performed at all and the operation is terminated. [EXECUTE] button returns to the original state.
44-2
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the light quantity adjustment of the process control sensor and the
registration sensor (two for resist are
adjusted simultaneously) and the surface
scan.
Section
Process
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
<Operation content>
1)
2)
After completion of the adjustment, check the belt surface condition with the BK sensor.
REGIST
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
AA
AB
Display item
PCS_CL LED ADJ
PCS_K LED ADJ
PCS_CL DARK
PCS_K DARK
PCS_K GRND
PCS_K BELT MAX
PCS_K BELT MIN
PCS_K BELT DIF
REG_F LED ADJ
REG_R LED ADJ
REG_F DARK
REG_R DARK
REG_F GRND
REG_R GRND
REG_F BELT MAX
REG_F BELT MIN
REG_F BELT DIF
REG_R BELT MAX
REG_R BELT MIN
REG_R BELT DIF
REG_F PATCH (K)
REG_F PATCH (C)
REG_F PATCH (M)
REG_F PATCH (Y)
REG_R PATCH (K)
REG_R PATCH (C)
REG_R PATCH (M)
REG_R PATCH (Y)
Content
Color sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Black sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value
Color dark voltage
Black dark voltage
Belt surface when item B adjustment is completed.
Belt surface input max. value
Belt surface input min. value
Belt surface input difference (Item E Item F)
Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value F
Registration sensor light emitting quantity adjustment value R
Registration sensor dark voltage F
Registration sensor dark voltage R
Belt surface when completion of Item I adjustment
Belt surface when completion of Item J adjustment
Belt surface input max. value (Front side)
Belt surface input min. value (Front side)
Belt surface input difference (Item O Item P)
Belt surface input max. value (Rear side)
Belt surface input min. value (Rear side)
Belt surface input difference (Item R Item S)
Patch light receiving potential F (K)
Patch light receiving potential F (C)
Patch light receiving potential F (M)
Patch light receiving potential F (Y)
Patch light receiving potential R (K)
Patch light receiving potential R (C)
Patch light receiving potential R (M)
Patch light receiving potential R (Y)
<List of errors>
Error name
Black sensor
adjustment error
Color sensor
adjustment error
Surface read error
Registration sensor F
adjustment error
Error content
PCS_K LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
PCS_CL LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times,
target not reached
PCS_K GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
REG_F LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
Error name
Registration sensor R
adjustment error
Registration surface F
read error
Registration surface R
read error
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 56
Set range
1 to 255
1 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
1 to 255
1 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 256
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Default value
21
21
0
0
0
0
0
0
56
56
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Save
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
Error content
REG_R LED ADJ error, retry in 3 times, target
not reached
REG_F GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
REG_R GRND error, belt 1 lap, outside the
range of effective difference between upper and
lower values
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4402
TEST
Item
Display content
Y_PAT TARGET
ID
M_PAT TARGET
ID
C_PAT TARGET
ID
K_PAT TARGET
ID
HV BK_GROUND
LIMIT
21
PCS_ GRND
: 0
PCS_K BELTMAX
: 0
PCS_CL DARK
: 0
PCS_K BELTMIN
: 0
PCS_K DARK
: 0
PCS_K BELTDIF
: 0
K
L
M
EXECUTE
1/3
44-4
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
123
1 to 255
140
1 to 255
132
1 to 255
1 to 255
29
Setting
Purpose
Process
Item
Operation
PROCON INITIAL
A:
DENSITY
200
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4404
TEST
1 255
SETUP
A200
PCS_C
TARGET
B201
PCS_K
TARGET
C 51
LED_C
OUTPUT
D 51
LED_K
OUTPUT
Operation/Procedure
OK
Section
Process
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the machine enters SIM 44-06, the screen shown on the
right is displayed.
2)
3)
4)
3)
* When [], [], [COLOR], or [BLACK] key is pressed, the current set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
<Set range and default value of each setup>
Item
Display content
PCS_CL TARGET
PCS_K TARGET
LED_CL OUTPUT
LED_K OUTPUT
PCS ADJSTMENT
LIMIT
BELT GROUND
DIF
Operation test/Check
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
44-6
Purpose
BIAS_CL
STANDARD DIF
BIAS_BK
STANDARD DIF
BIAS PATCH
INTERVAL
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
1 to 255
155
1 to 255
21
1 to 255
21
1 to 255
1 to 255
255
0 to 255
0 to 255
1 to 255
60
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 57
Content description
Normal completion
Abnormal completion
Forcible interruption
44-9
Content description
Color sensor adjustment error (*)
Black sensor adjustment error (*)
K high density process control error
C high density process control error
M high density process control error
Y high density process control error
Timeout
0
TEST
PROCON
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4406
COMPULSORY
PRESS[EXECUTE]
TO
Purpose
EXECUTION
Section
Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
START
1)
EXECUTE
OTHER
Page number
1/2
P (PROCON)
Left
N (M)
(NORMAL
(MIDDLE))
Right
2/2
N (L) (NORMAL
(LOW))
1/10
TN/TC
Left
Right
2/10
DRUM
Left
Right
MD K STEP
MD C STEP
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER
MD C DRUM COUNTER
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
Default
value
GB: 645
DV: 430
GB: 645
DV: 430
GB: 620
DV: 400
1 to 14
0 to 1023
9
0
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 14
4
0
4
0
9
0 to 1023
0 to 4
0 to 20
Content description
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 58
Display range
Mode
OTHER
Page number
3/10
VG
4/10
LD
5/10
HV
6/10
CP
7/10
DL
8/10
DL EV
9/10
CRUM
Left
Right
10/10
CNT
Left
Content description
Display range
0 to 255
Default
value
0
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 100
50
100 to 100
Refer to
<CRUM
destination
code list>.
0 to 1
Refer to
<CRUM
destination
code list>.
CRUM
information
*2
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
MODEL TYPE
CRUM DEST_K
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
PROCON COUNT HV
PROCON COUNT HT
0
CRUM
information
*2
Page number
1/2
2/2
OTHER
1/12
Default
value
GB: 645
DV: 430
GB: 645
DV: 430
GB: 620
DV: 400
TN HUD AREA
TN HUD DATA
TC TMP AREA
TC TMP DATA
TC HUD AREA
TC HUD DATA
MD HUD AREA
P
(PROCON)
Left
N (M)
(NORMAL
(MIDDLE))
Right
N (L)
(NORMAL
(LOW))
Left
N (H)
(NORMAL
(HIGH))
TN/TC
Right
Left
Right
MD HUD DATA
Content description
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 59
Display range
GB: 665
DV: 430
1 to 14
0 to 1023
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 9
0 to 1023
1 to 14
9
0
4
0
4
0
9
0 to 1023
Mode
OTHER
Page number
2/12
DRUM
Left
Right
3/12
VG
4/12
LD
5/12
HV
6/12
CP
7/12
DL
8/12
9/12
DL EV
10/12
11/12
CRUM
Left
Right
12/12
CNT
0 to 4
Default
value
0
0 to 20
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Color
0 to 100
70
B/W
Color
100 to 100
80
0
Left
MD K STEP
MD C STEP
MD M STEP
MD Y STEP
MD K DRUM COUNTER
MD C DRUM COUNTER
MD M DRUM COUNTER
MD Y DRUM COUNTER
MD K REVISE(VG) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(VG) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(LD) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(LD) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(HV) : L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(HV) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE(CP): L *** M *** H***
MD C REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD M REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE(CP) : L *** M ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD C REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD M REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL): L *** M ***
MD K REVISE BW (DL): L *** M *** H ***
MD K REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD C REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD M REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M***
MD Y REVISE COL (DL EV): L *** M ***
H ***
DESTINATION
MODEL TYPE
CRUM DEST_K
CRUM DEST_C
CRUM DEST_M
CRUM DEST_Y
PROCON COUNT HV
PROCON COUNT HT
Content description
Display range
B/W
Machine side control CRUM destination
Refer to
<CRUM
destination
code list>.
0 to 1
Refer to
<CRUM
destination
code list>.
CRUM
information
*2
0 to 99999999
0 to 99999999
0
CRUM
information
*2
Destination
A
B EX Japan
C
B Japan
E
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4409
TEST
PROCON
DATA DISP
(PROCON/NORMAL(M))
BLACK
BLACK
CYAN
CYAN
CPY/PRN
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 60
OTHER
1/2
44-12
0
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Purpose
Process
Item
ADK_INT (K)
ID(K)
ID(CMY)
PATCH
(Page 1
to 5)
N-1
N-2
N-3
PATCH
1/1
Adjustment
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
SEAL ADJ
DATA
ADK_SL (K)
TARGET(Y) : 0.00
Process
Display item
: 0.0
Item
CARB DATA
TARGET(M) : 0.00
ADK INT(K)
Section
Item
: 0.00
TARGET
(Page 1)
TARGET(C) : 0.00
ADK SL(K)
TARGET
Content
description
Calibration plate
sensor value
Jig patch seal
sensor value
Developing
characteristics
gradient coefficient
Developing
characteristics
intercept
coefficient
Sensor target
value
Color sensor
target set value
Patch data nth
front patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Patch data nth
center patch
(n = 1 to 10)
Patch data nth rear
patch
(n = 1 to 10)
TARGET(K) : 0.00
Purpose
2)
: 108
CARB DATA
44-13
Operation/Procedure
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-12
TEST
Display
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
1 to 255
108
9.99 to 9.99
0.00 to
255.00
0.00 to
255.00
0 to 255
0.00
0.00
0 to 255
0 to 255
Item
Display item
Description
PCS_CL
CARB OUT
PCS_CL
DARK
PCS_CL LED
ADJ
Calibration plate
sensor value
Color dark voltage
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
108
0 to 255
NO
1 to 255
21
YES
Writing
YES
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4413
21
PCS CL DARK
108
:
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 61
EXECUTE
1/1
44-14
Purpose
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4414
TH_UM
255FGI/ XXX
255.0FGI/ XXX
TH_UM_AD1
TH_UM_AD2
XXX
Section
Process
TH_LM
255FGI/ XXX
Item
Operation
TH_E
255deg / XXX
Operation/Procedure
1)
The machine enters this simulation, the current data are displayed.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
If there is a page under [], an active display is shown and
the page moves down. If there is no page downward, the
display grays out and the operation becomes invalid.
* Data are revised every 5sec.
44-16
Purpose
Section
Process (Developing)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
TH_UM
TH_UM_AD1
TH_UM_AD2
TH_LM
TH_E
TH_US
TEMPRATURE
HUMIDITY
TH1_LSU
Description
Fusing upper
thermister main A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
Fusing upper
thermistor main
compensation
sensor temperature
(C)
AD value (AD value)
Fusing upper
thermistor main
sensor AD value
(AD value)
Fusing lower
thermister main A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
A/D value outside of
the fusing upper
thermistor
(Temperature: C)
Fusing upper
thermister sub A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
Temperature
thermister
(Temperature/AD
value)
Humidity sensor
(Humidity/AD value)
Thermister 1 A/D
value (Temperature
C/AD value)
Default
value
Sensor
value
Display range
Temperature:
0 to 255 C (1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Temperature:
0.0 to 255.0 C
(0.2C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0 to 255 C (1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0 to 255 C (1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature:
0 to 255 C (1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Temperature: 40.0 to
60.0C (0.1C)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Sensor
value
Humidity:
5.0 to 90.0% (0.1%)
AD value: 0 to 1023
Humidity:
5.0 to 60.0 C
(0.1C)
AD value: 0 to 255
Sensor
value
* For the temperature and humidity only, data outside the range
are displayed as "-".
Display item
1/2
2)
Sensor
value
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 62
TONER DEN_LT(L)
TONER DEN_ST(L)
TONER DEN_LT(H)
(MX-4500N/4501N)
TONER DEN_ST(H)
(MX-4500N/4501N)
Item content
Current toner density sensor output value
(final value) at middle speed (KCMY)
Current toner density reference value
(including all the correction values) at
middle speed (KCMY)
Current toner density sensor output value
(final value) at low speed (KCMY)
Current toner density reference value
(including all the correction values) at low
speed (KCMY)
Current toner density sensor output value
(final value) at high speed (K)
Current toner density reference value
(including all the correction values) at
high speed (K)
Set
range
1 to 255
Default
value
129
128
129
128
129
128
Item content
Content description
Set range
Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at middle speed)
(KCMY)
Correction reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate all
the correction values for auto developer adjustment value (KCMY)
Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at low speed)
(KCMY)
Correction reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all the
correction values for auto developer adjustment value (KCMY)
Sensor output value after execution of SIM 25-02 (at high speed)
(K)
Correction reference value (at high speed) used to calculate all the
correction values for auto developer adjustment value (K)
Correction value for environment area (K)
Correction value for humidity change (K)
Correction value for document print rate (K)
Correction value for high density process control result (K)
Correction value for developer life (K)
Correction for toner density sensor sensitivity (K)
1 to 255
Default
value
128
127 to 127
1 to 999
500
Item content
Content description
Set range
Sensor control voltage value (at middle speed) after executing SIM
25-02 (KCMY)
Control voltage reference value (at middle speed) used to calculate
all the correction values for auto developer adjustment value
(KCMY)
Sensor control voltage value (at low speed) after executing SIM 2502 (KCMY)
Control voltage reference value (at low speed) used to calculate all
the correction values for auto developer adjustment value (KCMY)
Sensor control voltage value (at high speed) after executing SIM
25-02 (K)
Control voltage reference value (at high speed) used to calculate
all the correction values for auto developer adjustment value (K)
Control voltage correction value for environment area (KCMY)
Control voltage correction value for humidity change (KCMY)
Control voltage correction value for document print rate (KCMY)
Control voltage correction value for high density process control
result (KCMY)
Control voltage correction value for developer life (KCMY)
Control voltage correction value for toner density sensor sensitivity
(KCMY)
Control voltage correction value under high temperature
environment (KCMY)
1 to 255
Default
value
128
127 to 127
1 to 999
500
127 to 127
ALL VO(M)
LIFE VO
SENSITIVITY VO
ENV VO
ALL VO(L)
AUTO DEVE VO(H)
(MX-4500N/4501N)
ALL VO(H)
(MX-4500N/4501N)
AREA VO
HUD VO
PRINT RATE VO
PROCON VO
* When the correction for the developer counter (life) or the humidity correction is inhibited (OFF) in SIM 44-01, the correction level is displayed as "0."
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 63
Item content
Set
range
1 to 14
Content description
Default
value
8
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-16
TEST
TONER
TONER DEN_LT(M)
TONER DEN_ST(M)
128
TONER DEN_LT(L)
129
128
TONER DEN_ST(L)
K
NEXT
1/1
44-21
44-22
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to register the half tone process control reference value (half tone correction).
Section
Process
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Function (Purpose) Used to check the toner patch image density level of each color in half tone image
forming section correction (process correction). (This simulation is used to check that
the correction is normally executed or not.)
Section
Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
4)
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the
second step is automatically started.
3)
Purpose
Button item
1ST STEP
2ND STEP
Display item
ID_n
ID_n
Content description
1ST patch data display (n = 1 to 5)
2ND patch data display (n = 1 to 16)
* Data of each color are displayed with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons.
Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (Black ([K]) is selected in the initial state.)
* When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the process control
reference value setting is performed again.
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4422
TEST
TONE CORRECT
PTK/BASE
RESULT
PTC
PTM
PTC PTM
PTY
ID 1 :
255/255
255
255
PTY
255
ID 4 :
PTK/BASE
255/255
255
255
255
ID 2 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 5 :
255/255
255
255
255
ID 3 :
255/255
255
255
255
0
HALF
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4421
TEST
TONE
TOUCH
[EXECUTE] THEN
EXECUTION
REGISTER
START.
EXECUTE
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 64
1ST STEP
2ND STEP
1/1
44-24
Page
number
1/3
Category
Purpose
For printer
Process
Item
Display item
2/3
[PRINTER_BASE_DI
THER_VALUE]
3/3
[PRINTER_AUTO_HT
_VALUE]
Operation/Procedure
1)
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the correction value, and the previous value is displayed.
0
HALF
TONE
PROCON RESULT
[RIZE] 16
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4424
TEST
DISPLAY
[SATURATE] 109
[EX-LOW]
A:
0.0
B:
[LOW]
A:-
0.013
B:-
0.569
0.0
B:
0.0
[CONNECT] A:
2)
Content
[PRINTER_S_VALUE]
[STEP]
9.3
100.0
, C:
107.444
NEXT
1/2
44-25
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to check the initial condition of process control (half tone correction).
Page
number
1/2
Display item
[RIZE]
[SATURATE]
[STEP]
[EX-LOW]
[LOW]
[CONNECT]
2/2
[MID]
[HIGH]
[CONNECT POINT]
Reference
value
Correction
value
1/1
[SENSOR_TARGET]
1/1
[S_VALUE]
Content
Low density rising point
High density saturation
point
(Saturation pint Rising
point) / 10
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of lowest density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of low density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
when connecting low
density and middle
density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of middle density
Coefficient of the
approximation formula
of high density
Density sections
connection output ratio
Half tone process
control reference value
Half tone process
control correction
amount
Section
Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a color with [K] [C] [M] [Y] buttons. (In this example, [K]
is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
* Only one color button can be selected. The selected button
is highlighted. (In the initial screen, black ([K]) is selected.)
2)
3)
4)
Display
1ST PATCH
Set
range
0 to 255
2ND PATCH
0 to 255
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 65
Content
Half tone process control
1ST step 1st patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 2nd patch print
gradation
Default
value
40
60
Item
Display
3RD PATCH
Set
range
0 to 255
4TH PATCH
0 to 255
5TH PATCH
0 to 255
Content
Half tone process control
1ST step 3rd patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 4th patch print
gradation
Half tone process control
1ST step 5th patch print
gradation
Default
value
80
HALF
TONE
A:
PROCON
200
0 255
INITIAL
VALUE
1ST PATCH
B 47
2ND
PATCH
C 63
3RD
PATCH
D 79
4TH
PATCH
Data clear
Purpose
OK
Section
Process
Item
Clear
Operation/Procedure
Press [EXECUTE] button.
[EXECUTE] button is highlighted, and [YES] and [NO] buttons
become active display.
44-26
2)
Adjustment
Section
Process
Item
Operation
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
Operation/Procedure
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the half tone process control forcibly.
2)
START.
44-27
1)
1)
EXECUTION
EXECUTE
Purpose
CORRECT
255
DISPLAY
A200
DENSITY
100
0
HALF
TONE
TOUCH
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4425
TEST
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4426
TEST
1 to 15
When the display shifts to the first step completion screen, the
second step is automatically started.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4427
HALF TONE
PROCON
ADJUSTMENT
DATA CLEAR
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
44-28
Purpose
Setting
Process
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Content
Normal completion
Forcible interruption
Color sensor adjustment error
Black sensor adjustment error
High density process control [YMCK] error
Connection error
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 66
3)
Display
Process control
SW ON
execution YES/NO
setting
24H
YES
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
HUM
REV1
YES
NO
REV2
YES
NO
INITIAL
PIX
YES
NO
YES
NO
HUM_LIMIT
BK ONLY
HUM HOUR
HUM_DIF
BK_RATIO
M_RATIO
N
O
PIX_RATIO
COLOR BORDER
YES
NO
YES
NO
Content
When supplying the power (when canceling sleep.)
When READY (sleep setting) is kept for 24H or more
The temperature and humidity in the machine are monitored
every 2 hours (which can be set with Item I), and they are more
than the specified level (more than the set value of item 10)
compared with the previous process control.
When the power is supplied, and when the accumulated
traveling distance of BK or M position drum unit reaches a
certain level.
When the accumulated traveling distance of BK or M position
drum unit reaches a certain level from the previous density
correction.
When warming up after clearing the counter of OPC drum and
the developing unit.
When one of the accumulated toner counts for each colors
reaches over the specified count from the previous high density
correction.
The set conditions of item C are added to the set conditions of
items A to G.
CLOSE
0 1
A 1
SW ON NO
B 0
24H YES
C 0
HUM YES
D 0
REV1 YES
Setting
Item
Operation
Allowed
Inhibited
0 to 1
0
1
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
0 to 1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
1 to 24
1 to 9
1 to 999
20
1 to 999
20
1 to 999
1 to 999
100
20
A
B
C
D
Display
item
COPY
PRINTER
FAX
SELF
PRINT
Description
of item
Copier
Printer
FAX
Self print
Set range
0 to 4
0: No execution
1: HV only
2: HV PHT
3: HV HT
4: HV PHT HT
Default
value
4
2
2
4
0
TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
1
3)
Item
44-29
Section
0 to 1
OK
Purpose
2)
A:
Default value
0
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Example: SW ON:YES
SIMULATION NO.4428
Set range
0 to 1
0
1
0 to 1
0
1
0 to 1
0
1
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
BK process control execution setting when monochrome
Allowed
printing is continued
Inhibited
Item C temperature/humidity monitor monitoring time interval setting (H:
Hour)
Specified value of area difference compared with that in the previous process
control execution of item C
Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of BK position OPC drum traveling distance of
item E
Setting of the zoom ratio (%) of M position OPC drum traveling distance of
item E
Pitch count zoom ratio setting (%)
Setting of the magnification ratio (%) at the upper limit of the M position
photoconductor traveling distance when BK process control is executed
TEST
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
Allowed
Inhibited
HALF
TONE
SETTING
A 1
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-29
1
0 4
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 67
COPY : HV
B 4
PRINTER : HVPHTHT
C 2
FAX : HVPHT
D 4
OK
5)
44-31
Adjustment
Purpose
Section
6)
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
7)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
8)
9)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Enter "3" with 10-key in the print mode of set item A to change
the set value. (Default is 3.)
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
3)
4)
Use [] button to shift to the paper of set item "C" and enter "3"
with 10-key. (The default is 3.)
10) To check the deflection in the set value, enter "3" to set item A
with 10-key, and press [EXECUTE] button to print one sheet of
the drum deflection adjustment pattern.
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is
pressed during self print, the operation is interrupted.
* After completion of self print, [EXECUTE] button returns to the
original state.
* For cassette selection, the manual feed cassette is set. (Set item
C is 1)
Description
Print mode
90deg
90 degree
SET VALUE
B
COLOR
PAPER
45 degree
SET VALUE
Phase adjustment value
BK CL
Cassette selection
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-31
TEST
POSITION
A:
1
SETTING
A 3
B 2
COLOR
C 2
MODESET VALUE
PAPERSELECT
EXECUTE
OK
Default
value
3
(SET
VALUE)
Writing
NO
3
1 to 8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
YES
3
(CS2)
NO
44-43
0
DRUM
Set
range
1 to 3 1
Process (Developing)
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 68
A
B
C
D
DVCH KIND K
DVCH KIND C
DVCH KIND M
DVCH KIND Y
Display
range
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
1 to 9 (*)
E
F
G
H
DVCH_AD_K
DVCH_AD_C
DVCH_AD_M
DVCH_AD_Y
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Item
Item name
Item content
Remark
Developing unit model identification information saved in EEPROM on the
machine side.
A judgment is made by verifying this information and the model information in
CRUM. Since the result (OK or NG) is known when warming up, the error
display is not required in SIM. The display is made by the division code of 1
to 9 instead of the model name.
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
Actual measurement value of the developing unit output voltage AD value
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.44-43
TEST
UNIT
AD
DVCH KIND K
DVCH AD K
DVCH KIND C
DVCH AD C
DVCH KIND M
DVCH AD M
DVCH KIND Y
PTC
255
255
255
255
ID 4 :
255
255
255
255
ID 2 :
255
255
255
255
ID 5 :
255
255
255
255
ID 3 :
255
255
255
255
ID 6 :
255
255
255
255
DVCH AD Y
Purpose
Section
Process
Item
Operation/Procedure
44-52
Item
Operation/Procedure
Section
1)
Purpose
PTM PTY
44-54
MONITOR
1/1
1)
PTK
ID 1 :
1/3
0
DEVELOPER
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4452
TEST
* When [NEXT] button is pressed, the data of the next category are displayed regardless of the display page.
Content description
Patch data display
(n = 1 to 16)
Display range
0 to 255
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 69
Page number
1/2
Display item
[EX-LOW]
Content
EXTRA lowest density area approximation formula
coefficient
Low density approximation formula coefficient
[LOW]
[CONNECT]
Reference
register value
Correction value
[MID]
2/2
[HIGH]
1/1
[CONNECT SENSOR]
[SENSOR_TARGET]
1/1
[S_VALUE]
Display range
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B: 255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B, C:-255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B: 255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B, C: 255.000 to +255.000
A: 10.000 to +10.000
B: 255.000 to +255.000
#1 to #4: 0 to 255
#1 to #15
#1 to #15
* When the display item is not executed yet, is displayed. In case of an error, ERR is displayed.
* An error display is not made for the reference value and the correction value, and the previous value is displayed.
0
TEST
1 PIXEL HALF
[EX-LOW]
A:
TONE RESULT
01.000
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4454
DISPLAY
B:
1PIXEL HALF
100.000
TOUGH
[LOW]
A:
-10.000
B:
-200.000
[CONNECT] A:
10.000
B:
-150.000
[MID]
05.000
B:
200.000
A:
, C:
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
EXECUTION
START.
EXECUTE
44-57
Setting
Process
CORRECT
EXECUTION
1/2
44-56
Item
DENSITY
THEN
150.000
NEXT
Section
TONE
[EXECUTE]
, C: 200.000
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4456
TEST
Data clear
Purpose
Process
Item
Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
* In case of a sensor adjustment error, press [EXECUTE] button to resume the operation.
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
Content
Normal completion
Forcible interruption
Color sensor adjustment error
Black sensor adjustment error
High density process control [YMCK] error
Connection error
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4457
ADJUSTMENT
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 70
YES
DATA CLEAR
NO
EXECUTE
46
Item
Display
PHOTOGRAPH
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
MAP (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
SINGLE COLOR
SINGLE COLOR
(COPY TO COPY)
TWO COLOR
46-1
Adjustment
Purpose
Scanner
Item
Adjustment
R
S
T
Operation/Procedure
1)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
0
EXPOSURE
A:
45
1 99
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
CLOSE
CLOSE
S I M U LA TI O N N O . 4 6 01
TEST
2)
Photograph(Color
tone enhancement)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
Description
A 45
AUTO
B 50
TEXT
C 50
D 50
TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
OK
3)
46-2
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the exposure in BLACK
copy.
Section
Scanner
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
K
L
M
Display
AUTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
LIGHT
TEXT (COPY TO
COPY)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COPY TO
COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
TEXT (COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PRINTED
PHOTO (COLOR
TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
TEXT/PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COLOR TONE
ENHANCEMENT)
Adjustment
Purpose
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
Text/Photo
Printed photo
Photograph
Map
Light density
document
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Print (Copy
document)
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
3)
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Text/Photograph
(Color tone
enhancement)
Printed Photo (Color
enhancement)
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Description
Auto
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Display
Content
A
B
C
D
E
F
AUTO1
AUTO2
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
Auto1
Auto2
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 71
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
Display
Content
G
H
I
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
TEXT (COPY TO COPY)
Photograph
Map
Text (Copy
document)
Text/Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Printed Photo
(Copy document)
Light density
document
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
PRINTED PHOTO
(COPY TO COPY)
LIGHT
K
L
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
50
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4604
ADJUSTMENT(COLOR)[ SCANNER]
45
1 99
A 45
TEXT
B 50
EXT/PRINTED
C 50
TEXT/PHOTO
D 50
PTINTED PHOTO
PHOTO
OK
1 to 99
50
46-5
0
EXPOSURE
A:
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4602
TEST
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[COPY]
45
1 99
A 45
AUTO1
B 50
AUTO2
Section
Scanner
C 50
TEXT
Item
Adjustment
D 50
TEXT/PRINTED
Operation/Procedure
PHOTO
OK
1)
46-4
Adjustment
Purpose
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Scanner
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
2)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
A
B
TEXT
TEXT/PRINTED PHOTO
C
D
E
F
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
Content
Text
Text/Printed
Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
3)
Item
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
Adjustment
Purpose
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
AUTO TEXT
AUTO TEXT/PRINT
PHOTO
AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
TEXT
TEXT/PRINT PHOTO
TEXT/PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTOGRAPH
MAP
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Auto text
Auto text/Print Photo
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
Auto text/Photo
Text
Text/Print Photo
Text/Photo
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Display
Content
0
TEST
EXPOSURE
A:
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4605
ADJUSTMENT(B/W)[SCANNER]
45
1 99
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 72
A 45
AUTO TEXT
B 50
AUTO
C 50
AUTO TEXT/PHOTO
D 50
TEXT
EXT/PRINTED
OK
46-8
Adjustment
Purpose
Scanner
Item
Adjustment
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Select a desired color with [B] [G] [R] buttons. (In this example,
[B] is selected.) The data of the selected color are displayed.
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
Display
Content
COPY: LOW
SCAN: LOW
FAX: LOW
COPY: HIGH
SCAN: HIGH
FAX: HIGH
4)
Display
Content
LOW DENSITY
POINT
HIGH DENSITY
POINT
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
Item
A
Button
OC
A:
70
1 99
LOW
B 50
HIGH
SCAN
SIDEA: LOW
FAX SIDEA:
LOW
COPY
SIDEA: HIGH
SCAN
SIDEA: HIGH
FAX SIDEA:
HIGH
DENSITY POINT
OK
46-9
Purpose
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
COPY
SIDEA: LOW
DENSITY POINT
Display
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4608
Default
value
42
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
53
1 to 99
1 to 99
[MX-3501N/4501N]
0
TEST
Set
range
1 to 99
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 73
Content
DSPF copy mode
exposure
adjustment (low
density side)
DSPF scanner
mode exposure
adjustment (low
density side)
DSPF FAX mode
exposure
adjustment (low
density side)
DSPF copy mode
exposure
adjustment (high
density side)
DSPF scanner
mode exposure
adjustment (high
density side)
DSPF FAX mode
exposure
adjustment (high
density side)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
42
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
53
Item
Button
DSPF
Display
Content
COPY
SIDEB: LOW
SCAN
SIDEB: LOW
FAX SIDEB:
LOW
COPY
SIDEB: HIGH
SCAN
SIDEB: HIGH
FAX SIDEB:
HIGH
BALANCE
SIDEB: R
BALANCE
SIDEB: G
BALANCE
SIDEB: B
H
I
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
45
EXPOSURE
A:
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
1 99
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
COPY LOW
B 42
SCANLOW
C 42
FAXLOW
D 53
COPYHIGH
46-10
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to the copy density adjustment (manual). (color mode)
Section
Engine
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Item
TEXT
TEXT/PRT PHOTO
PRINTED PHOTO
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
Item content
Text
Text/Printed Photo
Printed Photo
Photo+Text/Photo
Map
Light density document
Copy document
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
2)
6)
1 to 99
OK
1)
A 42
Purpose
5)
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during self print, the operation is terminated.
ADJUSTMENT(SPF)
42
1 to 99
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4609
4)
0
TEST
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Select a color.
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4610
* Select [K](BLACK), [C](CYAN), [M](MAGENTA), or [Y](YELLOW) button. The selected button is displayed and the
adjustment value of the selected color is displayed.
TEXT
PRINTED PHOTO
MAP
LIGHT
COPY ORG
PHOTO+TEXT/PHOTO
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 74
46-16
46-19
Adjustment
Purpose
Setting
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to the copy density adjustment (manual) [Monochrome, all modes] PG print.
Section
Engine
Section
Scanner
Item
Operation
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
When the machine enters the simulation, the current set status
is highlighted.
2)
Press a set value button to be changed, and the button is highlighted and the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM. (In
this example, [MODE2] button is pressed.)
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
Content
Set value
AE_MODE
AE_STOP_COPY
AE_STOP_FAX
AE_STOP_SCAN
AE_FILTER
MODE1,
MODE2
ON/OFF
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
ON
ON/OFF
ON
SOFT
NORMAL
SHARP
NORMAL
Set range
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
373 to 627
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
0
TEST
ENGINE
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4616
COLOR
500
373627
BALANCE
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(B/W)]:PG
A500
POINT1
B500
POINT2
C500
POINT3
D500
POINT4
ON
ON/OFF
Default
value
MODE1
TEST
SIMULATION
NO.4619
EXPOSURE
MODE
AE_MODE
SETUP (B/W-AE)
MODE1
MODE
AE_STOP COPY
OFF
ON
AE_STOP
FAX
OFF
ON
AE_STOP
SCAN
OFF
AE_FILTER
SOFT
ON
NORMAL
SHARP
1/1
46-21
Purpose
Adjustment
Engine
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTE
OK
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 75
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
ENGINE MAXIMUM
DENSITY
A 0
A:
ADJUSTMENT
MODE
(0:ENABLE 1:DISABLE)
0
When the set value is not the upper limit value (lower limit
value), the data of each item is increased (decreased) by 1.
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4623
TEST
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Item
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
245 to 755
Default value
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
500
OK
46-24
Purpose
Section
Engine
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
While the high density process control is executed, [EXECUTE] button is highlighted.
3)
4)
0
ENGINE COLOR
A:
BALANCE
500
245~755
MANUAL
ADJUSTMENT [ALL(COLOR)]
A500
POINT1
B500
POINT2
C500
POINT3
D :500
POINT4
EXECUTE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4621
5)
TEST
Adjustment
6)
7)
OK
46-23
Setting
Purpose
Specifications
8)
The display is shifted to the reference value registration process 1 end screen automatically, and the reference value registration process 2 (BLACK) is executed automatically.
9)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Display
(0: ENABLE
1: DISABLE)
Content
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 76
(Initial screen)
TEST
COMPLETED
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-24
TEST
CLOSE
THIS
PROCEDURE.
PLEASE
QUIT
THIS
MODE.
EXECUTE
46-25
0
CLOSE
TEST
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the fine adjustment of single color mode color balance.
Section
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
,
DARK AREA AT LEFT SIDE ON DOCUMENT GLASS.
FACTORY
SERVICE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
0
TEST
CLOSE
3)
4)
EXECUTE
0
TEST
Adjustment
Purpose
(48-patch print)
CLOSE
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
REPEAT
OK
Description
RED
GREEN
BLUE
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
Range
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
C
0
255
255
0
0
255
TEST
TEST
PLEASE WAIT.
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4625
SINGLE COLOR
Y
255
255
0
255
0
0
0
CLOSE
Default value
M
255
0
255
0
255
0
255
0 255
A255
RED
B255
GREEN
C255
BLUE
D 0
YELLOW
SETUP
OK
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 77
OK
46-26
Adjustment
Purpose
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
BLACK TEXT
(SLOPE)
BLACK TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
COLOR TEXT
(SLOPE)
COLOR TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
ED TEXT
(SLOPE)
ED TEXT
(INTERCEPT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
MODE
STANDARD
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
0
CLOSE
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4626
SINGLE COLOR
Set
range
1 to 99
SIMULATION NO.46-27
TEST
TEST
Set range
2)
Display
A:
RATE SETUP
50
1
99
A 50
BLACK
TEXT (SLOPE)
B 50
BLACK
TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
C 50
COLOR
TEXT (SLOPE)
D 50
COLOR
TEXT (INTERCEPTE)
OK
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
46-28
Purpose
46-27
Purpose
Adjustment
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Adjustment
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 78
* When [NEXT] button is pressed under the final category data display state, the head category data are displayed.
* Pressing [NEXT] button displays the next category data regardless of the display page.
COLOR AE
(Color auto
exposure)
ORG RECOG
(Document type
auto recognition)
Detail of category
Display
RESULT
(Judgment result)
COL/MONO
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
RESULT
(Judgment result)
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
RESULT
(Judgment result)
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
Set range/
Number of
digits
1 to 2
ACSCONT
2 kinds
COLOR
(COLOR
BLACK
document,
Monochrome
document)
ACS judgment counter value
Max. 10 digits
SITAJI_JUDGE
0 to 32
RATE_SCR
SHITAJI
BEAT_JUDGE
SUM_SITAJI_SCR
ORIGINAL
TXT
TXT/HT
HT
TXT/PIC
PIC
TXT ON HT
OHT
BACKGROUND
GR
WH
NE
WH_GR
WH_NE
WH_CO
CO
IM
MESH
IMAGE
BASE
Mesh ratio
Base number judgment result
Background judgment result
Base area mesh number
Document
Auto text
Auto text mesh
Auto mesh
Auto text/photo
Auto photo
Auto text on dot
Other auto
Base
None
Gray
White
Newspaper
White gray
White newspaper
White color
Color
Image
Mesh
No mesh
Image mesh
Base mesh (Non-image
mesh)
Line
High number of lines
Low number of lines
Mesh counter value
Photographic paper counter value
Text counter value
Background counter value
Document type judgment mesh counter
value
Text on mesh counter value
Flat mesh counter value
Total of Max. reverse numbers (lower
32bit)
Total of Max. reverse numbers (Upper
4bit)
Total of flat section max. reverse
number (lower 32bit)
Total of flat section max. reverse
number (Upper 4bit)
Background pixel histogram value
(RED)
Background pixel histogram value
(GREEN)
Background pixel histogram value
(BLUE)
Mesh pixel histogram value (RED)
HTFE
HTCNT
PHOTOCNT
STRCNT
FLATCNT
PREHTCNT
HTXTCNT
SUMF
SUMM_L
SUMM_H
SUMFM_L
SUMFM_H
FHSTDR
FHSTDG
FHSTDB
HTHSTDR
COLOR
MONO
Content
HIGH
LOW
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 79
0 to 10000
0 to 3
0 to 8
Max. 10 digits
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
2
1
0
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Remark
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Max. 3 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 3 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
#1 to #32 display A3
pixel number
Category
ORG RECOG
(Document type
auto recognition)
Detail of category
STATISTICS
(Image process
statistic amount)
Display
HTHSTDG
HTHSTDB
LHSTD
Content
REVERSE AVE
REVERSE AVE(FLAT)
FLAT SELECT
Flat section
mesh pixel
comparison
MDHSTD
OHSTDR
OHSTDG
OHSTDB
SUM_BETA_RGB
EREA_BETA RGB
SUM_BETA_PHOTORGB
RATE_BETA
SHITAJI
BETA_JUDGE
RATE_SCR
RATE_SCR2
RATE_TSCR
HTFE_JUDGE
SCR_HIST_JUDGE
SCR_CNT_JUDGE
TSCR_JUDGE
SCR_JUDGE
RATE_OTHER
TEXT_JUDGE
PHOTO_CNT_JUDGE
OTHER_JUDGE
PHOTO_JUDGE
TH_BETA2
TH_BETA_PHT2
TH_SCR2
TH_SCR_CNT2
TH_TSCR_CNT2
TH_TEXT2
TH_PHOTO2
ALLCNT
HTFE RESULT
HIGH2
HIGH1
LOW1
LOW2
YES
NO
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 80
Set range/
Number of
digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Remark
#1 to #32 display A3
pixel number
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
0 to 32
0 to 16
0 to 16
0 to 10000
0 to 3
0 to 8
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
0 to 10000
Max. 3 digits
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 2
0 to 5
0 to 10000
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
0 to 1
A3 pixel
number
Max. 2 digits
Max. 5 digits
Max. 5 digits
A3 pixel number
Max. 5 digits
A3 pixel number
Max. 10 digits
Max. 10 digits
A3 pixel number
A3 pixel number
Max. 10 digits
2
A3 pixel number
1
3
4
0 to 100.00
0 to 100.00
0
1
(Initial screen)
7)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-28
EXECUTE
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.46-28
CLOSE
Setting
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
NOTE: Unless a special change is required, keep the default values except for the following items. For the following items,
change the set values according to the necessity.
COLOR AE(SW MODE 1 - 7 / TH MAX MONO / TH MAX
COLOR / SW NEWS / TH MODE SCR)
ACS(SIM LEVEL)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
COLOR AE
Item
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
THCLMK_1
THCLBK_1
C
D
ACSMSK_1
THCLMK_2
THCLBK_2
F
G
ACSMSK_2
THCLMK_3
THCLBK_3
I
J
ACSMSK_3
THCLMK_4
THCLBK_4
L
M
ACSMSK_4
THCLMK_5
THCLBK_5
O
P
ACSMSK_5
SIM_LEVEL
TH_ACS5_RT
TH_ACS5 ENLARGE
SW_MODE1
SW_MODE2
SW_MODE3
SW_MODE4
SW_MODE5
SW_MODE6
SW_MODE7
TH_MAX_MONO
TH_MAX_COLOR
SW_NEWS
SW_MODE_SCR1
SW_MODE_SCR2
SW_MODE_MIX
N
A
B
SW_HOSEI
TH_MODE_SCR
TH_SITAJI_SCR
Default
value
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 82
Screen
type
09
03
01
09
03
01
09
03
01
09
03
01
09
03
01
13
0 100
50
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0 32
000030000
0 32
01
13
01
12
0 8 (-4 +4)
0 10000
0 10000
1
1
0
0
0
0
17
17
0
3
0
2
4
03000
03000
Category
ORG RECOG
Item
4 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
MVSTRSEL REDUCE
MVSTRSEL ENLARGE
PSEL1 REDUCE
PSEL1 ENLARGE
PSEL2 REDUCE
PSEL2 ENLARGE
BUSYSEL REDUCE
BUSYSEL ENLARGE
HTSEL REDUCE
AREA
ORG
HTSEL ENLARGE
AREA
ORG
ASEL REDUCE
ASEL ENLARGE
HSTSEL REDUCE
HSTSEL ENLARGE
HSTSEL2 REDUCE
HSTSEL2 ENLARGE
TH_SUM_BETARGB
TH_BETA_SUB
TH_WHITE_BETA
TH_GRAY_BETA1
TH_GRAY_BETA2
TH_NOISE REDUCE
TH_NOISE ENLARGE
X
Y
SW_SCR1
SW_SCR2
02
Default
value
0
02
01
01
02
02
01
01
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 83
0
1
0
1
0 23
16
0 23
16
03
03
03
03
0 32
0 32
0 32
25
0 32
18
0 32
25
0 32
10
0 32
10
01
01
0
0
Screen
type
Category
ORG RECOG
Item
4 digits or
less setting
5 digits or
less setting
SCR RECOG
4 digits or
less setting
Content
Display
TH_HTFE
AA
AB
SW_TSCR
TH_SUM_PHOTO_RGB
AC
TH_BETA_RT
AD
TH_SCR_RT
AE
TH_SCR_CNT_RT
AF
TH_TSCR_ CNT_RT
AG
TH_TEXT_RT
AH
TH_PHOTO_RT
AI
TH_BETA_PHT_RT
TH_BETA ENLARGE
TH_SCR ENLARGE
C
D
TH_SCR_RATE
TH_SCR_CNT EL
TH_MANSEN_RATE
TH_TSCR_RATE
TH_TSCR_CNT EL
TH_TEXT ENLARGE
TH_PHOTO ENLARGE
TH_BETA_RATE
TH_BETA_PHT_EL
TH_OTHER
THBAVEM1 REDUCE
THBAVEM1 ENLARGE
THBAVEM2 REDUCE
THBAVEM2 ENLARGE
THBAVEM3 REDUCE
Default
value
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 84
03
01
0 32
1
15
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 100
50
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
1000000
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
20000
0 10000
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000800000
0 10000
1500
0 10000
00300
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000010000
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
0 134217727
(A3 pixel number)
000050000
0 10000
03000
0 134217727
100000
0 10000
07000
0 255
170
0 255
170
0 255
105
0 255
105
0 255
50
Screen
type
04500
000050000
Category
SCR RECOG
SEGMENT
Item
4 digits or
less setting
4 digits
or less
setting
Text-onmesh ON/
OFF (auto/
manual
mode)
Print
document
text
detection
level
Display
Content
THBAVEM3 ENLARGE
CMSUB1 REDUCE
CMSUB1 ENLARGE
CMSUB2 REDUCE
CMSUB2 ENLARGE
MREVSEL REDUCE
MREVSEL ENLARGE
MSDSEL REDUCE
MSDSEL ENLARGE
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
A
THAVEFM1 REDUCE
THAVEFM1 ENLARGE
THAVEFM2 REDUCE
THAVEFM2 ENLARGE
THAVEFM3 REDUCE
THAVEFM3 ENLARGE
THAVEM1 REDUCE
THAVEM1 ENLARGE
THAVEM2 REDUCE
THAVEM2 ENLARGE
THAVEM3 REDUCE
THAVEM3 ENLARGE
MESH_TXT ON HT
0 255
Default
value
50
0 255
55
0 255
55
0 255
0 255
03
03
01
01
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0 720
0
0
(THROUGH)
3
1 (OFF)
65
96
54
80
48
70
65
96
54
80
48
70
0
MESH_TXT/HT1
MESH_TXT/HT2
D
E
MESH_TXT/PR
PR_TXT ON HT
PR_TXT/HT1
PR_TXT/HT2
H
I
PR_TXT/PR
PR_CHECK1(*2)
PR_CHECK2(*2)
PR_CHECK3(*2)
ON
OFF
PR_CHECK4(*2)
ON
OFF
THWMAX(*2)
THWMIN(*2)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 85
(THROUGH)
2 (ON1)
0
3
3 (ON2)
0
(THROUGH)
1(ON1)
2 (ON2)
0
1
3 (ON3)
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0 255
0
220
0 255
153
0
1
0
0
Screen
type
Category
SEGMENT
4 digits
or less
setting
Item
Chroma
saturation/
No Chroma
saturation
judgment
level
Color auto
document
recognition
filter
emphasis
setting
Specification
mode area
separate
(ON/OFF
setting)
INDEX
direct
appointment
Quantity of
detection
adjustment
Text-onmesh blur
adjustment
Content
Display
COLOR_PRINT MODE
Print mode
COLOR_PHOTO MODE
COLOR_CHECK1
(*3)
COLOR_CHECK2
(*3)
THILVC(*3)
THACOLL(*3)
THACOLH(*3)
THILVG(*3)
THAGRYL(*3)
THAGRYH(*3)
SCREEN FILTER
LEVEL
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
H
L
AUTO
SEG_ACT_A_OTR
AA
SEG_ACT_M_PRT1
AB
SEG_ACT_M_PRT2
AC
SEG_DS_A_TOH
AD
SEG_DS_M_TPP
AE
AF
AG
AH
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TPP_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TPP_CL
SEG_ADJ_TPP_PR
AI
AJ
AK
AL
AM
SEG_ADJ_TPP_MESH
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK1
SEG_ADJ_TXT_BK2
SEG_ADJ_TXT_CL
SEG_ADJ_TXT_PR
AN
AO
AP
AQ
AR
AS
AT
SEG_ADJ_TXT_MESH
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK1
SEG_ADJ_OTR_BK2
SEG_ADJ_OTR_CL
SEG_ADJ_OTR_PR
SEG_ADJ_OTR_MESH
THROUGH
BKUCR_ACTM (
99%)
OFF
ON
THROUGH
BKUCR_ACTM
(100% 199%)
OFF
ON
THROUGH
BKUCR_ACTM
(200% )
OFF
ON
AU
AV
Default
value
0
(THROUGH)
(THROUGH)
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
100% 199%
200%
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 86
0
3
1(OFF)
2(ON1)
3(ON2)
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0 255
0
0
166
0 255
21
0 255
18
0 255
118
0 255
14
0 255
20
13
3 (Auto)
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0 512
0 512
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0 20
0
0
2
1
2
0
0
2
1
2
0
0
2
1
2
1
1
1
0
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
0
Screen
type
Category
SEGMENT
Item
4 digits
or less
setting
Text-onmesh blur
adjustment
AW
AX
AY
5 digits
or more
setting
Content
Display
Text on
mesh ON/
OFF (Auto/
Manual
mode)
0
2
100% 199%
0
2
THROUGH
200%
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
0
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
BKUCR_ACTA (
99%)
THROUGH
BKUCR_ACTA
(100% 199%)
THROUGH
BKUCR_ACTA
(200% )
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
MESH_CHECK1
MESH_CHECK2
MESH_CHECK3
ON
OFF
MESH_CHECK4
ON
OFF
THED3A(*1)
THED3B(*1)
0
1
Default
value
0
Screen
type
0
1
0 65535
0
1000
0 65535
1000
* When the check item for investigation is OFF, the set value is not written.
(Initial screen)
46-36
0
COLOR
AUTO
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4633
TEST
0
0 9
A 0
THCLMK_1
B 0
THCLBK_1
C 0
ACSMSK_1
D 0
THCLMK_2
BACK
Purpose
Section
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
NEXT
OK
1)
0
COLOR AUTO
PRESENT 000010000
NEW
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4633
SET
2)
TH_ACS5 ENLARGE
BACK
TEST
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to perform the fine adjustment of 2color (Red, Black) copy.
NEXT
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 87
Item
Display
Content
Color
button
Set
range
A
B
C
A
B
C
D
E
F
PARAMETER O
PARAMETER M
PARAMETER INTENSITY
RED
GREEN
BLUE
CYAN
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
CMY
0 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 6
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
MAGENTA
YELLOW
Default value
C
M
Y
3
3
3
0
255 255
255
0
255
255 255
0
255
0
0
0
255
0
0
0
255
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-36
TEST
A:
RANGE
A 2
RR2
B 3
R
C 1
GG1
D: 3
G
INTENCITY
A:
OK
COEFFICIENT
Section
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
3)
4)
R/G
B/G
YES
NO
EXECUTE
Adjustment
FAX
Item
Image quality
1)
2)
3)
Display
200 x 100[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI] ON
A
B
SURE?
Section
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Content
YOU
Purpose
Display
ARE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Item
99
DEFAULT
5)
B/G
Operation/Procedure
2)
R/G
B 0
46-39
1)
A 35
Adjustment
Item
35
46-37
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4637
TEST
Set
range
0 to 99
0 to 99
Default
value
35
0
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
200 x 400[DPI]
OFF
200 x 400[DPI] ON
400 x 400[DPI]
OFF
400 x 400[DPI] ON
600 x 600[DPI]
OFF
600 x 600[DPI] ON
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 88
half tone
Set
range
0 to 2
Default
value
1
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
half tone
0 to 2
Content
200 x 100[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
OFF
200 x 200[DPI]
ON
200 x 400[DPI]
OFF
200 x 400[DPI]
ON
400 x 400[DPI]
OFF
400 x 400[DPI]
ON
600 x 600[DPI]
OFF
600 x 600[DPI]
ON
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4639
TEST
A:
0 2
A 1
100100DPI OFF
B 0
200100DPI OFF
C:
200200DPI OFF
D:
2)
3)
200200DPI ON
OK
46-40
Adjustment
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment. (Collective adjustment of all the
modes). (Only when FAX is installed)
Item
Section
MFP/FAX
Item
Image quality
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Content
Auto
Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Print
Auto
mode Exposure 1
Exposure 2
Exposure 3
Exposure 4
Exposure 5
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1
2
3
4
5
6
Default
value
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
Item
A
Content
Exposure data value
(Collective)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
0
0
TEST
50
1 99
B 2
PAPERCS1
EXIT
ADJUSTMENT(FAXNORMAL)
F:
EXPOSURE LEVEL(ALL)
1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-41
EXPOSURE
ADJUSTMENT(FAXALL)
A 50
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-40
EXPOSURE
TEST
45
99
TRAYC
D 50
EXPOSURE3
E 50
EXPOSURE4
F 45
EXECUTE MODEEXP5
EXPOSURE5
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
OK
OK
46-42
Adjustment
46-41
Purpose
Purpose
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Fine text). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Normal). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
MFP/FAX
Item
Image quality
MFP/FAX
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Section
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 89
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Content
Fine/Auto
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Auto/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
Fine/Auto
Fine/Exposure 1
Fine/Exposure 2
Fine/Exposure 3
Fine/Exposure 4
Fine/Exposure 5
Fine/Auto/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Purpose
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-42
A:
[ 1~ 99]
50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Super Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
MFP/FAX
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
46-43
TEST
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
EXECUTE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
OK
3)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 90
Content
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/Exposure 1
Super Fine/Exposure 2
Super Fine/Exposure 3
Super Fine/Exposure 4
Super Fine/Exposure 5
Super Fine/Auto/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
Super Fine/Auto
Super Fine/Exposure 1
Super Fine/Exposure 2
Super Fine/Exposure 3
Super Fine/Exposure 4
Super Fine/Exposure 5
Super Fine/Auto/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Super Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-43
A:
[ 1~ 99]
50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
2)
3)
OK
46-44
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the FAX exposure adjustment (Ultra Fine). (Only when FAX is
installed)
Section
MFP/FAX
Item
Image quality
TEST
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 91
Default value
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
Item
M
Content
Ultra Fine/Auto
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5
Ultra Fine/Auto/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 1/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 2/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 3/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 4/Half tone
Ultra Fine/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-44
A:
[ 1~ 99]
50
AUTO
B : 50
EXPOSURE1
C : 50
EXPOSURE2
D : 50
EXPOSURE3
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
Adjustment
FAX
Item
Image quality
2)
3)
OK
46-45
Purpose
TEST
Default value
1 (AUTO)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Default value
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Content
600dpi/Auto
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone
Print mode
600dpi/Auto
600dpi/Exposure 1
600dpi/Exposure 2
600dpi/Exposure 3
600dpi/Exposure 4
600dpi/Exposure 5
600dpi/Auto/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 1/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 2/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 3/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 4/Half tone
600dpi/Exposure 5/Half tone
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 92
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1 (AUTO)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.46-45
TEST
EXPOSURE
L:
1 99
Purpose
Setting
Item
Setting
Operation/Procedure
ADJUSTMENT(FAX600DPI)
45
46-47
J 50
EXPOSURE3
H_TONE
K 50
EXPOSURE4
H_TONE
L 45
H_TONE
M 12
EXECUTE
EXPOSURE5
1)
EXECUTE
OK
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Item
A
COPY (GRAY)
Display
COPY (C)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
COPY (G)
LOW
MIDDLE
HIGH
SCAN (C)
MIDDLE1
MIDDLE2
MIDDLE3
PUSH SCAN (GRAY)
SCAN (G)
MIDDLE1
MIDDLE2
MIDDLE3
Content
Low compression (Color)
Middle compression (Color)
High compression (Color)
Low compression (Gray)
Middle compression (Gray)
High compression (Gray)
Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table (for
brightness, color difference)
Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 1, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 1, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 2, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 2, for decompression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for compression, Q table
Middle compression mode 3, for decompression, Q table
0
TEST
0 (LOW)
0 (MIDDLE1)
2
0
0 (MIDDLE1)
1
2
48
48-1
Default value
0 (LOW)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4647
A:
Set range
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
A 1
COPY(C) MIDDLE
B 0
COPY(G) LOW
C 0
SCAN(C) MIDDLE
C 0
SCAN(G) MIDDLE
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the magnification adjustment in the scan system.
OK
Section
RSPF/DSPF/Scanner
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 93
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Display
Content
CCD (MAIN)
CCD (SUB)
SPF (MAIN)
SPF (SUB)
SPFB (MAIN)
SPFB(SUB)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
0
CLOSE
MAGNIFICATION ADJUSTMENT
A:
50
1 99
A 50
CCD(MAIN)
B 50
CCD(SUB)
C 50
SPF(MAIN)
D 50
SPF(SUB)
Section
RSPF/DSPF/Scanner
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
Select the set item with [] and [] buttons.
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
* If there is any item over [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
* Item B, D, F: When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.01%.
SIMULATION NO.4801
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) This adjustment is executed when a satisfactory result is not obtained when a different copy magnification ratio is specified and
copying is made after adjustment of the sub
scanning direction image magnification
ratio with SIM 48-1.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in reduction copy, the adjustment value of high speed mode is adjusted.
When there is an error in the copy magnification ratio in enlargement copy, the adjustment value of low speed mode is adjusted.
This is the magnification ratio adjustment in
the scan system.
1)
* Item A, C, E: When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by 0.02%.
TEST
48-5
Purpose
OK
3)
Display
MR (HI)
MR (MID)
MR (LO)
RSPF (HI)
RSPF (MID)
RSPF(LO)
Content
Scanner motor (High
speed)
Scanner motor
(Reference speed)
Scanner motor (Low
speed)
Document feed (SPF)
motor (High speed)
Document feed (SPF)
motor (Reference
speed)
Document feed (SPF)
motor (Low speed)
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
50
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
[MX-3501N/4501N]
Item
Display
A
B
MR (HI)
MR (MID)
C
D
MR (LO)
DSPF (HI)
DSPF (MID)
DSPF(LO)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 94
Content
Scanner motor (High speed)
Scanner motor (Reference
speed)
Scanner motor (Low speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(High speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(Reference speed)
Document feed (SPF) motor
(Low speed)
<Reference speed>
Item
HI=314mm/sec
MID=157mm/sec
LO=78.5mm/sec
<Reference calculation formula>
Employed speed = MID speed x {100 + [(Sim48-01 set value - 50)
+ (Sim48-05 set value - 50)] x 0.1} / Magnification ratio
"Sim48-01 set value" varies depending on the magnification ratio
(speed).
MOTOR
SPEED
A:
ADJUSTMENT
50
199
A 50
MR(HI)
B 50
MR(MID)
C 50
MR(LO)
D 50
RSPF(HI)
Content
Mode select
Set
range
Default
value
POM
COLOR
*1
1 to 99
45
FUSER
SETTING
HEAVY
1 to 99
50
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4805
TEST
Display
0
OK
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.4806
TEST
VELOCITY ADJUSTMENT
A:
48-6
Adjustment
Purpose
49
199
COLOR
A 49
RRM
B 45
BTM
C 23
FSM
D 45
DM_K
MONO
HEAVY
OK
Section
Item
Adjustment
49
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
49-1
Purpose
Section
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
* When USB is not connected, "INSERT A STORAGE FIRMWARE STORED ON" is displayed. When [OK] button is
pressed, the display is shifted to the folder or file selection
screen.
1)
2)
Item
E
F
Display
RRM
BTM
FSM
DM_K
DM_CL
PFM
Content
Resist motor
correction value
Belt K motor
correction value
Fusing motor
correction value
Drum K motor
correction value
Drum CL motor
correction value
Mode select
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Monochrome
MONO
Heavy paper
HEAVY
Color
COLOR
Heavy paper
HEAVY
COLOR
*1
Version-up
Set
range
Default
value
1 to 99
49
60
1 to 99
45
18
1 to 69
42
26
The current version and the update version are displayed for
each firmware.
4)
1 to 69
42
1 to 99
50
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 95
6)
7)
Item description
Configuration data
ICU main section former half
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language support data program
(Generic name)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU boot section
PCU main section
Desk unit boot section
Desk unit main section
Side LCC (A4) boot section
Side LCC (A4) main section
Inner finisher boot section
Inner finisher main section
Inserter boot section
Inserter main section
1K Finisher boot section
1K Finisher main section
4K Finisher boot section
4K Finisher main section
Side LCC (A3) boot section
Side LCC (A3) main section
SCU boot section
SCU main section
DSPF boot section
DSPF main section
FAX1 Boot section
FAX1 Main section
FAX2 Boot section
FAX2 Main section
ESC/P fonts
PDL fonts
Number of
digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
Display item
Item description
ANIMATION
IMAGE_DATA
COLOR PROFILE
Animation data
Image ASIC data
Color profile
Number of
digits
8 digits
8 digits
8 digits
Item description
Configuration data
ICU main section former half
ICU boot section main
ICU boot section sub
Language support data program (Generic name)
Graphic data for L-LCD
SLIST data for L-LCD
PCU boot section
PCU main section
Desk unit boot section
Desk unit main section
Side LCC (A4) boot section
Side LCC (A4) main section
Inner finisher boot section
Inner Finisher main section
1K Finisher boot section
1K Finisher main section
Inserter boot section
Inserter main section
4K Finisher boot section
4K Finisher main section
Side LCC (A3) Boot section
Side LCC (A3) main section
SCU boot section
SCU main section
DSPF boot section
DSPF main section
FAX1 Boot section
FAX1 main section
FAX2 Boot section
FAX2 main section
ESC/P fonts
PDL fonts
Animation data
Image ASIC data
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
FIRMWARE
UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR>
FOLDER1
FILE1
FILE2
<DIR> FOLDER2
..
1/1
49-3
Purpose
Version-up
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 96
5)
50
50-1
Purpose
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
[YES] button is highlighted, and update of the selected operation manual is executed.
1)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Adjustment
2)
3)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-03
E-MANUAL
UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR> FOLDER1
<DIR>
FOLDER2
<DIR> FOLDER3
<DIR>
MANUAL1
1/1
..
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-03
E-MANUAL UPDATE/usbbd00
<DIR>
..
MANUAL2
<DIR>
MANUAL3
1/1
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 97
Display item
Lead edge adjustment
RRCA
value
B
C
D
E
F
RRCB-CS12
RRCB-CS34
RRCB-LCC
RRCB-MFT
RRCB-ADU
LEAD
SIDE
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Description
Document lead edge reference position (OC)
The timing from start of document scan to recognition of the image lead
edge is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing is. The greater the set
value is, the slower the timing is.
Resist motor ON timing adjustment
Standard cassette
The timing to turn ON the resist roller from reception Desk
of the resist signal is adjusted. (0.1mm/step)
LCC
* The smaller the set value is, the faster the timing
Manual feed
is. The greater the set value is, the slower the
ADU
timing is.
Lead edge image loss quantity setting
The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. The difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
(0.1mm/step))
* The greater the value is, the grater the image loss is.
Side image loss quantity setting
The side image loss quantity is specified. (Document width Document
edge scan range) / 2 (0.1mm/step)
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Print lead edge adjustment
The void quantity formed at the paper lead edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Sub scan direction print range adjustment
The void quantity formed at the paper rear edge is specified. (0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
FRONT/REAR void amount adjustment
The void quantities formed at the right and left edges are adjusted.
(0.1mm/step)
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
4)
0
EDGE
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5001
TEST
LEAD
ADJUSTMENT
50
0
99
VALUE
A 50
RRCA
B 50
RRCA-S
C 50
RRCB-CS12
D 50
RRCB-CS34
Set range
0 to 99
Default value
50
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
50
50
50
50
50
0 to 99
30
0 to 99
20
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
20
1 to 99
20
OK
L1
50-2
Purpose
Paper lead
edge
Adjustment
Item
L2
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Fig. 1
Place a ruler along the left edge of the document table, and
make a black copy in 400%.
5)
6)
Make a black copy in 100%, and adjust the rear edge void.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 98
Display item
Actual measured L1
value
L2
Image loss
LEAD
quantity set value
B
C
SIDE
Void quantity
setting
DENA
DENB
FRONT/REAR
Description
Distance between the image lead edge and the scale of 10mm (Platen 400%,
unit of 0.1mm)
Distance between the paper lead edge and the image lead edge (unit of 0.1mm)
Lead edge image loss quantity setting
The lead edge image loss quantity is specified. Difference between the
document lead edge scan start position and the document lead edge
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Side image loss quantity setting
The side image loss (SIDE) is specified. (Document width Document edge
scan range / 2
(The rear edge image loss quantity is fixed to 0. (Without adjustment))
* The greater the value is, the greater the image loss is.
Print lead edge adjustment
The void quantity at the paper lead edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
Sub scanning direction print range adjustment
The void quantity at the paper rear edge is specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
FRONT/REAR void quantity adjustment
The void quantities at the left and right edges of paper are specified.
* The greater the value is, the greater the void is.
A to G:1step = 0.1mm
999
60
L1
L2
30
LEAD
15
SIDE
Image quality
20
1 to 99
20
Operation/Procedure
1)
1 to 99
30
If not, go to step 5.
5)
Adjustment
Printer
1 to 99
50-5
Section
20
EXECUTE
Purpose
0 to 99
Measure the dimensions of void area in the right and the left
frame direction of the adjustment pattern to check that the
dimensions are as follows:
CLOSE
60
30
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption, self print is resumed.
A:
0 to 999
0 to 99
* When [C], [CA], [SYSTEM SETTINGS], or [EXECUTE] button is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
SIMULATION NO.50-02
Default value
TEST
Set range
0 to 999
2)
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
MX3500N SIMULATION 7 99
<Description of item>
1 to 99
Default
value
30
DEN-B
1 to 99
20
FRONT/REAR
1 to 99
20
D
E
MULTI COUNT
PAPER
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
DUPLEX
YES
NO
1 to 99
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
2 (CS1)
Item
Description of item
Set range
1 (NO)
0
TEST
Remark
Adjustment value to fit with the print lead edge for the printer.
When the adjustment value of this item is decreased by 1, the
printer print start position is shifted toward the lead edge in the
paper transport direction by 0.1mm.
Void quantity formed at the paper rear edge. When the adjustment
value of Item B (DEN-B) is decreased by 1, the sub scanning
direction print range adjustment value in the paper transport
direction is decreased by 0.1mm.
Adjustment of void quantity formed at the right and left edges of
paper. The greater the value is, the greater the void quantity is.
Display item
SIDE1
SIDE2
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-05
A:
30
[ 1~99 ]
A : 30
DEN-C
B : 20
DEN-B
C : 20
FRONT/REAR
D: 1
MULTI COUNT
EXECUTE
OK
50-6
Purpose
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Item
Image quality
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
Image
loss
quantity
setting
SIDE2
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Description
Front surface
document
scan start
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Back surface
document
scan start
position
adjustment
(CCD)
Front surface
image loss
quantity
setting
Front surface
side image
loss quantity
setting
Front surface
rear edge
image loss
quantity
adjustment
Back surface
image loss
quantity
setting
Back surface
side image
loss quantity
setting
Back surface
rear edge
image loss
quantity
adjustment
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
0 to 99
RSPF:
20
DSPF:
30
20
0 to 99
0 to 99
RSPF:
30
DSPF:
20
A,B: The greater the value is, the slower the scan timing is.
A to H: 1 step = 0.1 m
The RSPF rear edge image loss is provided against shade.
0
SIMULATION NO.50-06
TEST
CLOSE
A:
50
[
1~
99 ]
A : 50
SIDE1
B : 50
SIDE2
C : 20
LEAD EDGE
D : 20
FRONT_REAR
OK
50-7
Adjustment
Purpose
RSPF/DSPF
Item
Image quality
Distance A
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Set L4 and L5 to 0.
6)
Display item
Description of item
L4
L5
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE
(SIDE2)
5)
D
E
F
FRONT_REAR
(SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE
(SIDE2)
Set
range
0 to 999
Default
value
0 to 999
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
20
0 to 99
30
0 to 99
RSPF:
20
DSPF:
30
20
0 to 99
0 to 99
RSPF:
30
DSPF:
20
A to H: 1step=0.1mm
C to H: When the adjustment value is increased, the image loss is
increased.
* It is linked with items C to H of SIM50-6.
0
SIMULATION NO.50-07
TEST
CLOSE
A:
0
0
999
L4
L5
20
LEAD_EDGE(SIDE1)
20
FRONT_REAR(SIDE1)
Distance A
EXECUTE
50-10
Purpose
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, it is highlighted and printing for adjustment is started with the current set value.
Adjustment
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
<Description of item>
Item
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Item content
Main scan print magnification ratio BK
Print off-center adjustment value (manual feed)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 1)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 2)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 3)
Print off-center adjustment value (Cassette 4)
Print off-center adjustment value (LCC)
Print off-center adjustment value (ADU)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
Set range
60 to 140
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
Default value
100
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
1
2 (CS1)
Writing
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
TEST
PAPER CENTER
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5010
OFFSET
100
SETUP
A100
BK-MAG
B50
MTF
C50
CS1
D50
CS2
64140
Adjustment direction
+ direction: Enlargement of magnification ratio
- direction: Reduction of magnification ratio
When the adjustment value of item B to H is decreased by 1, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the front side by 0.1mm.
When the adjustment value of item B to H is increased by 1, the
main scanning print position is shifted to the rear side by 0.1mm.
Items J and K are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
EXECUTE
OK
50-12
50-20
Adjustment
Purpose
Purpose
Adjustment
Section
Section
Item
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
2)
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
Display item
OC
SPF (SIDE1)
SPF (SIDE2)
Set range
OC document off-center
adjustment
RSPF/DSPF front surface
off-center adjustment
RSPF/DSPF back surface
off-center adjustment
Set
value
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Shift the pixel center position. The default value of the center is
3750 pixels.
A to C: When the adjustment value is increased, the center position
is shifted to the rear side. 1step=0.1mm
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.5012
CLOSE
A:
99
1
99
99
OC
50
SPF(SIDE1)
50
SPF(SIDE2)
OK
<Description of item>
Item
A
CYAN (REAR)
MAGENTA (FRONT)
MAGENTA (REAR)
YELLOW (FRONT)
YELLOW (REAR)
G
H
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
DUPLEX
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Description of item
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Cyan laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Cyan laser writing position R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Magenta laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Magenta laser writing position R side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Yellow laser writing position F side)
Registration adjustment value main scanning direction
(Yellow laser writing position R side)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
A:
50
DIRECTION
A50
CYAN(FRONT)
B50
CYAN(REAR)
C50
MAGENTA(FRONT)
D50
MAGENTA(REAR)
OK
50-21
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the manual adjustment of
the sub scanning registration (color shift).
(Backup value input)
Image quality
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
3 (CS2)
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
2)
3)
Operation/Procedure
1)
1 to 199
Adjustment
Item
YES
Section
100
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
1199
Purpose
1 to 199
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5020
Writing
YES
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
0
TEST
Default value
100
Example: PAPER:CS1
Set range
1 to 199
<Description of item>
Item
A
MAGENTA
YELLOW
D
E
MULTICOUNT
PAPER
DUPLEX
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
Description
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Cyan drum Black drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Magenta drum Black drum)
Registration adjustment value sub scanning direction
(Yellow drum Black drum)
Print quantity
Cassette select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Duplex print select
Selected
Not selected
Set value
1 to 199
Default value
100
Writing
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 199
100
YES
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1
2 (CS1)
NO
NO
1 (NO)
NO
Operation/Procedure
0
TEST
A:
100
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5021
DIRECTION
A100
CYAN
B100
MAGENTA
C100
D 1
MULTIOUNT
YELLOW
1199
EXECUTE
OK
50-22
2)
Adjustment
Purpose
Section
Item
Image quality
PHASE:
The number assigned to the phase is displayed.
( ) Difference from the previous value.
Example: This time 90, previous time 45: 3(2)
In this case, the necessary data are saved to EEPROM and
RAM.
* In case of an error end, "ERROR" and the detail are displayed.
* When the registration auto adjustment is interrupted by an
external cause (pressing [EXECUTE] key, opening the door,
etc.), "SUSPENDED" is displayed and the drum motor stops
and [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display.
* In case of an error end or a forcible interruption, the data are
not written to EEPROM and RAM.
REGIST (Auto
registration
adjustment is
executed.)
Display
MAIN F
MAIN R
SUB
DLUM POS
(Auto phase
adjustment is
executed.)
PHASE
Content
C
Display
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
Default
value
100.0
100.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
100.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
1.0
199.0
18
100.0
Remark
Same item with SIM50-20
*
However, the adjustment
accuracy is in the unit of
0.1 dot. (The adjustment
accuracy of 50-20, -21 is
in the unit of 1.0dot.)
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
2
Compulsory
end error
Basic error
Sub scan
adjustment
error
Error
code
1
2
Error display
4
5
7
10
11
15
16
20
21
22
SUSPENDED
SUSPENDED
TONER EMPTY
TONER BEFORE
BEHAVIOR
SENSOR CALIBRATION
TIME OVER
PROCESS CONTROL
MAIN BLACK FRONT
MAIN BLACK FRONT
SUB BLACK REAR
SUB BLACK REAR
SUB CYAN FRONT
SUB CYAN FRONT
SUB CYAN FRONT
23
25
26
27
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
40
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
Error content
Detail of content
Calibration error
Time error
Process control error
Number error sub scan BLACK F
Pitch error sub scan BLACK F
Number error sub scan BLACK R
Pitch error sub scan BLACK R
Number error sub scan CYAN F
Pitch error sub scan CYAN F
Adjustment value error sub scan
CYAN F
Result value error sub scan CYAN F
Main scan
adjustment
error
Error
code
50
51
55
56
60
61
62
63
65
66
67
68
70
71
72
73
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
85
86
87
88
99
OTHER
Main scan
adjustment
error
Other error
Error display
Error content
Detail of content
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.50-22
MAIN R
SUB
105.0 (+0.2)
110.0 (-0.1)
100.0 (+0.0)
99.0 (-0.2)
99.0 (+0.2)
98.0 (+0.3)
98.0 (+0.1)
105.0 (+0.0)
SIMULATION NO.50-22
CLOSE
MAIN F
0
TEST
PHASE
REGIST
DRUM POS
103.0 (+0.4)
4 (3)
ALL
EXECUTE
1/1
(Adjustment screen)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.50-22
CLOSE
EXECUTE
EXECUTE
50-24
Purpose
Adjustment
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
9)
<Display content>
1)
AUTO REGISTRATION
REG_EXE_CNT
REG_CNT
4)
NEXT
1/1
Purpose
Adjustment
Section
FAX/Scanner
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
4)
BACK
7)
50-27
6)
00000000
5)
DATA DISPLAY
00000000
REG_SUC_CNT 00000000
CLOSE
TEST
FAX send
H
I
SCANNER
mode (FAX,
other than
COPY)
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
Image loss
setting OC
Image loss
setting RSPF
(DSPF) SIDE1
Image loss
setting RSPF
(DSPF) SIDE2
Image loss
setting OC
Image loss
setting RSPF
(DSPF) SIDE1
Image loss
setting RSPF
(DSPF) SIDE2
Display item
LEAD_EDGE (OC)
FRONT_REAR (OC)
TRAIL_EDGE (OC)
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
Description
OC lead edge image loss setting
OC side image loss setting
OC rear edge image loss setting
Front surface lead edge image loss setting
Front surface side image loss setting
Front surface rear edge image loss setting
Back surface lead edge image loss setting
Set range
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
FRONT_REAR (SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE (SPF_SIDE2)
0 to 100
0 to 100
LEAD_EDGE(OC)
FRONT_REAR(OC)
TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE1)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
FRONT_REAR(SPF_SIDE2)
TRAIL_EDGE(SPF_SIDE2)
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
0 to 100
Default value
30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
20 (2mm)
30 (3mm)
RSPF: 20 (2mm)
DSPF: 30 (3mm)
20 (2mm)
RSPF: 30 (3mm)
DSPF: 20 (2mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
0 (0mm)
* A to I: The greater the adjustment value is, the greater the image loss is. 1step=0.1mm
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5027
TEST
NO.
3
Menu
display item
SPF ADJ
A:
30
100
FAX
30
LEAD_EDGE(OC)
20
FRONT_REAR(OC)
20
TRAIL_EDGE(OC)
30
LEAD_EDGE(SPF_SIDE1)
50-28
Adjustment
Item
Image quality
1)
2)
* The operating procedures and the display shift for each adjustment and the display, refer to the next page.
<List of adjustment items>
Menu
display item
OC ADJ
BK-MAG
ADJ
SETUP/
PRINT ADJ
Print position
adjustment
RESULT
Result display
DATA
Data display
Content
OC adjustment
BK main scan
magnification ratio
correction
Description
RSPF/DSPF (front/back)
document lead edge, offcenter, sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
Print lead edge adjustment,
all-cassette print off-center
(individual cassette, ADU)
adjustment
Display of the adjustment
result
Display of data used for the
adjustment
OC
RSPF
Operation/Procedure
NO.
4
OK
SCANNER
Purpose
Content
RSPF/DSPF
adjustment
SIDE1
(front)
SIDE2
(back)
DSPF
SIDE1
(front)
Description
OC document lead edge,
off-center, and sub scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
BK main scan
magnification ratio
adjustment
SIDE2
(back)
Adjustment
menu
OC ADJ
SPF ADJ
(RSPF)
SPF ADJ
(DSPF)
Adjustment item
Engine
BK main scan
magnification ratio
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
Print off-center
Print lead edge
MFT
CS1
CS2
ADU
CS3
CS4
LCC
SETUP/PRINT
ADJ
7)
OC ADJ
SETUP/PRINT ADJ
RESULT
BK-MAG ADJ
SPF ADJ
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
TEST
<Adjustment item>
Adjustment
menu
BK-MAG ADJ
DATA
0
TEST
1/1
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
MFT
CS1
CS2
50-28
Purpose
Adjustment
EXECUTE
1/1
50-28
Adjustment
Section
Purpose
Item
Image quality
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the BK main scan magnification ratio adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service instillation)
(2: BK-main scan magnification ratio correction))
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [OC ADJ] button is pressed on the top menu screen, the
screen shown on the right side is displayed.
2)
3)
4)
Section
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Set the OC adjustment pattern on the OC with the corner reference, and cover the black background chart over the OC
adjustment pattern.
3)
When [EXECUTE] button is pressed, self print of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern (print position adjustment
pattern) is started.
5)
Press [EXECUTE] button to start scanning of the BK magnification ratio adjustment pattern.
* During scanning of the main scan magnification ratio correction pattern and calculating the magnification ratio adjustment value
After completion of scanning, calculation of the adjustment
value is started.
After completion of calculation of the front surface adjustment value, the display is shifted to the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pattern (back surface) scan start screen.
<Adjustment item>
<Adjustment item>
7)
8)
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for the adjustment are displayed.
<Adjustment item>
RSPF/DSPF document lead edge adjustment back surface
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
MFT
CS1
CS2
9)
EXECUTE
1/1
50-28
Purpose
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Select an item to be adjusted. The display is shifted to the cassette select screen for printing the RSPF/DSPF adjustment
pattern.
3)
Select a cassette for printing the RSPF/DSPF adjustment pattern. (Only one cassette can be selected.)
4)
5)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
SIDE1
SIDE2
ALL
Content
SPF adjustment front surface
SPF adjustment back surface
SPF adjustment front/back surface
1/1
50-28
Purpose
Adjustment
Function (Purpose) Used to execute the print lead edge adjustment and the all-cassette print off-center
(individual cassette, ADU) adjustment.
(Auto void adjustment (Service installation
adjustment) (4: Print position adjustment)
Section
Item
Image quality
0
AUTO IMAGE POSITION ADJUSTMENTSERVICE
2)
3)
4)
OFFSET
ALL
1/1
50-28
Press [EXECUTE] button to start self-printing of the print position adjustment pattern.
LEAD
5)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
Content
Print lead edge adjustment
Print off-center adjustment
Print lead edge, print of-center adjustment
Purpose
Adjustment
Section
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
TEST
BACK
1/2
<Adjustment item>
Print lead edge (CS3/CS4)
50-28
8)
Purpose
Adjustment
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
When [PRINT] button is pressed, the data used for the print
position adjustment are displayed.
* When [DATA] button is pressed, the data used for adjustment are displayed.
ADJ_SPF2
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
PAPER (OC/SPF1/SPF2)
COUNT (OC/SPF1/SPF2)
ERROR
ADJ (BK-MAG)/PAPER/
COUNT
BK-MAG
BK-MAG
SCAN_MAG (SUB, MAIN)
ERROR
ADJ_MFT (LEAD/OFST)
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
4.99 to +4.99
1 to 99 ( 99)
STEP
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
4.99 to +4.99
1 to 99 ( 99)
STEP
SCAN: %
LEAD: mm
mm
4.99 to +4.99
Times
Error code
ADJ STEP
PAPER: COUNT: Times
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
Status (4)
ADJ_OC
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
ADJ_SPF1
(SCAN/LEAD/OFST)
SCAN (F/C/R)/LEAD (F/C/R)
SPF2 (3)
STEP
Display content
DATA_OFFSET
R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
SCAN_MAIN
SPF1 (2)
Item display
LEAD (F/C/R)
OFFSET R (U/M/L)/F (U/M/L)
ERROR
BK-MAG data
BK-MAG scan magnification ratio
correction value
Error history
PRINT adjustment value,
correction value
0
TEST
OCSPF
51
Purpose
BK-MAG
mm
mm
Error code
51-1
r4.99
Adjustment
OFFSET R(U /M /L) / F(U /M /L) r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9 , r4.9 /r4.9 /r4.9
SCAN_MAIN
mm
SUB:MAIN:-4.99
to +4.99
Error code
LEAD, OFST: mm
PAPER:
COUNT: Times
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5028
Unit
OK
Section
Process
Item
Operation (Transfer)
Operation/Procedure
1)
3)
Display item
TC2 ON TIMING
Description of
content
Secondary transfer
voltage ON timing
setting
Secondary transfer
voltage OFF timing
setting
Set
range
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default
value
40
60
51-2
Purpose
Section
Paper transport
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is decreased, the transfer ON/Off timing for paper is advanced.
0
TEST
CLOSE
A:
99
A 99
TC2 ON
B 60
TC2 OFF
When the value of transfer ON/OFF timing is increased, the transfer ON/Off timing for paper is delayed.
SIMULATION NO.5101
Adjustment
TIMING
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
TIMING
99
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
Button
SIDE1
Display item
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
NORMAL__THIN LOW
RANDOM_PLAIN_LOW
SIDE2
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_1
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_1
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH_2
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW_2
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Transport direction
Item
Button
ENGIN
Display item
TRAY1(S)
TRAY1(L)
TRAY2(S)
TRAY2(L)
I
J
MANUAL OHP
MANUAL ENV
DESK(S)
DESK(L)
Q
R
S
A4LCC
A3LCC (S)
A3LCC (L)
LT size or less
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
1 to 99
45
45
LT size or less
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
LT size or less
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
30
30
30
Transport direction
<Set range and default value of each set value> * DSPF model
Item
Button
REGI1
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
REGI2
Display item
NORMAL_PLAIN_
HIGH
NORMAL_PLAIN_
MID
NORMAL_PLAIN_
LOW
NORMAL_THIN_
HIGH
NORMAL_THIN_MID
NORMAL_THIN_
LOW
RANDOM_PLAIN_
HIGH
RANDOM_PLAIN_
MID
RANDOM_PLAIN_
LOW
RANDOM_THIN_
HIGH
RANDOM_THIN_
MID
RANDOM_THIN_
LOW
NORMAL_PLAIN_
HIGH
NORMAL_PLAIN_
MID
NORMAL_PLAIN_
LOW
NORMAL_THIN_
HIGH
NORMAL_THIN_MID
NORMAL_THIN_
LOW
RANDOM_PLAIN_
HIGH
RANDOM_PLAIN_
MID
RANDOM_PLAIN_
LOW
RANDOM_THIN_
HIGH
RANDOM_THIN_
MID
RANDOM_THIN_
LOW
Set
range
1 to 99
Default
value
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
1 to 99
50
Transport direction
Item
Button
ENGIN
Display item
TRAY1(S)
TRAY1(L)
TRAY2(S)
TRAY2(L)
I
J
MANUAL OHP
MANUAL ENV
DESK(S)
DESK(L)
Q
R
S
A4LCC
A3LCC
A3LCC
SIDE1
99
50
NORMAL_PLAIN_HIGH
50
NORMAL_PLAIN_LOW
50
NORMAL_THIN_HIGH
50
NORMAL_THIN_LOW
SIDE2
ENGIN
OK
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
1 to 99
45
45
LT size or less
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
1 to 99
45
1 to 99
45
LT size or less
1 to 99
30
1 to 99
30
LT size or less
Longer size than the above
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
30
30
30
Adjustment
Operation
Set the tray document guide to the max. width position, and
press [EXECUTE] key. The button is highlighted and the tray
size volume maximum value adjustment is started.
* During the adjustment, "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
* After completion of the tray size volume maximum value
adjustment, the set value is saved to EEPROM and RAM
and the display is shifted to the tray volume A4R size adjustment value start screen. (Each set value is saved to
EEPROM and RAM at each setting.)
CLOSE
1 to 99
RSPF/DSPF
50
LT size or less
Item
A:
30
Section
1)
ROLLER ADJUSTMENT
1 to 99
<Adjustment value>
REGIST
53-6
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
SIMULATION NO.5102
Default
value
30
53
* The smaller the set value is, the smaller the deflection amount of
each specified item is. The greater the set value is, the greater
the deflection amount is.
TEST
LT size or less
Set
range
1 to 99
Transport direction
2)
Set the tray document guide to A4R (11 x 8.5R) width position
and press [EXECUTE] button. The pressed button is highlighted and the tray A4R size adjustment is started.
3)
Adjust the tray volume A5R size and the tray size volume minimum value according to the above procedures.
4)
Display
TRAYVOLMAX
TRAYVOLA4R
TRAYVOLA5R
TRAYVOLMIN
Content
Tray size volume maximum value
Tray volume A4R size adjustment value
Tray volume A5R size adjustment
Tray size volume minimum value
When one of 1-4 in the above table is selected, the guide plate is
shifted to each position of the four widths of the guide plate shown
in the table below. The value of the document width sensor
(RSPF_WIDTH) A/D value is saved to EEPROM.
<Guide plate positions and widths on the mechanism and A/D
values to be saved>
Widths on the mechanism
No.
1
2
3
Guide plate
position
AB
series
INCHI
series
Code in the
figure below
A/D value,
code in
the figure
below
Maximum
position
Middle
position (L)
Middle
position
(S)
Minimum
position
303.3
303.3
WIDTH_MAX
AD_MAX
210
215,9
WITH_P1
AD_P1
148.5
139.7
WITH_P2
AD_P2
118
118
WITH_MIN
AD_MIN
TRAY
PRESS
AD_P1
0 to 1023
AD_P2
0 to 1023
AD_MIN
Minimum position
0 to 1023
Default
value
RSPF: 948
DSPF: 66
RSPF: 517
DSPF: 438
RSPF: 219
DSPF: 699
RSPF: 68
DSPF: 893
* A/D is 10 bit.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.53-07
TEST
Remark
A:
A4R OR
LTR
A5R OR
INVR
CLOSE
ADJUSTMENT
TRAYVOLMAX
0 to 1023
Set range
791
[ 0~ 1023 ]
A 791
AD_MAX
B 713
AD_P1
C 456
AD_P2
AD_MIN
66
OK
53-8
SIMULATION NO.5306
TEST
Maximum position
0
SPF
Display
item
AD_MAX
Item
TRAY ADJUSTMENT.
[EXECUTE] TO START
Adjustment
Purpose
RSPF/DSPF
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
EXECUTE
2)
53-7
Purpose
Adjustment
RSPF/DSPF
Item
Operation
Item
Display item
ADJUST VALUE
Default
value
50
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.53-08
A:
ADJUST VALUE
50
[
1~ 99 ]
3)
RSPF/DSPF scan
position adjustment
Set
range
1 to 99
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Description
Operation/Procedure
1)
1)
OK
55
55-1
TEST
Setting
Purpose
SCANNER
PCU
Item
Operation (Specifications)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-02
SOFT
SW.
SETTING.
SW NO.
AAA
DATA
12345678
12345678
(SW No.1-16)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Purpose
EXECUTE
3)
4)
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
[1] [0]
[0] [1]
55-3
Section
MFP
Item
Operation (Specifications)
Operation/Procedure
1)
3)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-01
SW.
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
0
ENGINE SOFT
2)
Setting
SETTING
[1] [0]
[0] [1]
SW NO.
AAA
(SW No.1-16)
DATA
12345678
12345678
EXECUTE
55-2
Purpose
Setting
TEST
MFP SOFT
Scanner
Item
Operation (Specifications)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.55-03
SW.
SETTING.
SW NO.
AAA
DATA
12345678
12345678
(SW No.1-16)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
EXECUTE
4)
56-1
Purpose
With [DATA] button highlighted, enter the bit data with 10-key.
When 10-key corresponding to the bit is pressed, the bit data
display is switched as shown below.
Section
MFP
Item
Data transfer
[1] [0]
[0] [1]
1)
Data transfer
Operation/Procedure
56
3)
4)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, the display is shifted to the set item select screen.
* During execution, "RUNNNING" is displayed in the corresponding display section.
"HDD EXPORT"
5)
Content
All memory contents are transferred to HDD.
The contents of HDD are transferred to all the
memories.
Transfer from EEPROM to HDD
Transfer from HDD to EEPROM
Transfer from SRAM to HDD.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX) is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX.
Transfer from HDD to SRAM.
If, however, a FAX memory or an option memory
(memory for FAX)* is installed, the data are
transferred to HDD together with the contents of the
memory for FAX.
EEPROM HDD
HDD EEPROM
SRAM HDD
HDD SRAM
6)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.5602
TEST
EXPORT/IMPORT
HDD
FILING
DATA
EXPORT
EEPROM&SRAM
HDD
EXPORT
IMPORT
EEPROM&SRAM IMPORT
1/1
0
COPY
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.56-01
TEST
DATA
60
ENABLE
60-1
DISABLE
Purpose
EEPROM HDD
DISABLE
HDD EEPROM
DISABLE
ALL HDD
HDD ALL
ARE
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/2
56-2
Purpose
Backup
Function (Purpose) Used to backup the data (user authentication data, address book, etc.) of EEPROM,
SRAM, or HDD to a USB memory and to
restore the data.
Section
Memory, HDD
Item
Data
Operation test/Check
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
2)
1)
3)
4)
5)
60-2
Section
<Result display>
Result display
OK
NG
NG
(SDRAM IS NOT IN SLOT4)
NONE
Item
Detail
Success
Fail
Fail: SLOT4 (standard) is unconnected
and SLOT3 (option) is connected.
Not installed (including DIMM trouble)
Operation/Procedure
1)
SLOT2
SLOT3
SLOT4
Descriptions
Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Since it is of only the system area, it is excluded from the targets
of Red/Write check.
Memory connected to the MFP controller.
Read/Write check is executed for some memory area.
Option memory connected to the ICU-ASIC.
Since SLOT4 (standard) memory is not installed, Read/Write
check cannot be executed.
Standard memory connected to the ICU-ASIC
<SLOT descriptions>
SLOT
SLOT1
Setting
Purpose
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
3)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6001
EXECUTE
Display
Content
Default
value
0
SETTING ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
SDRAM setting
change flag
NUMBER OF ROW
11BIT
12BIT
13BIT
0
1
2
NUMBER OF COLUMN
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
3
8BIT
9BIT
10BIT
11BIT
12BIT
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
6CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
9CLOCK
10CLOCK
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
Set
range
0
1
Item
Display
CAS LATENCY
2CLOCK
3CLOCK
4CLOCK
5CLOCK
7CLOCK
8CLOCK
:
20CLOCK
CL=2
CL=2.5
CL=3
NONE
128MBYTE
256MBYTE
NON
1CHIP SELECT
2CHIP SELECT
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6002
TEST
SDRAM SETTING
A:
0
0
A 0
SETTING
ENABLEDISABLE
B 2
NUMBER OF
ROW13BIT
C 2
COLUMN10BIT
D 1
TWR SETTING
NUMBER OF
Set
range
0
1
2
3
0
1
:
13
0
1
2
0
1
2
0
1
2
Content
VALUE3CLOCK
CAS latency
Default
value
1
Content
LSU check polygon mirror is
abnormal
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: K
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: CL
OK
Operation
Operation
interruption and
end
Operation
interruption and
end
Operation
interruption and
end
61
0
TEST
61-01
Purpose
LSU
SIMULATION NO.6101
TEST
PRESS[EXECUTE]
Operation test/Check
CLOSE
TO
START
Function (Purpose) The polygon motor rotation and the BD signal detection are checked.
Section
LSU
Item
Operation
EXECUTE
Operation/Procedure
1/1
1)
2)
3)
Display
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: PG CL
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: PG BW
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: K CL
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: K BW
LSU TESTRESULT
NG: CL
Content
LSU check
Color
polygon mirror
mode
is abnormal
B/W
mode
LSU check KColor
colored LD
mode
emission of light B/W
is abnormal
mode
LSU check CL-colored LD
emission of light is
abnormal
Operation
Operation interruption
and end
Operation interruption
and end
Operation interruption
and end
Operation interruption
and end
Operation interruption
and end
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.61-01
CLOSE
LSU TEST
PRESS[EXECUTE]
COLOR
TO
START
MONO
EXECUTE
1/1
61-4
62
Adjustment
Purpose
LSU
Item
Adjustment
Data clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
62-1
Purpose
Section
MFP (HDD)
Item
Clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
2)
Description of item
Set range
Default
value
Print quantity
Cassette Manual
select
feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
1 to 999
1 to 6 1
1
3 (CS2)
2
3
4
5
6
A:
PRINT)
A 1
MULTICOUNT
B 2
PAPERCS1
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-2
CLOSE
FORMAT
Purpose
Example: PAPER:CS1
SIMULATION NO.6104
HDD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6201
ARE
TEST
TEST
Operation test/Check
MFP (HDD)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1 999
1)
EXECUTE
OK
2)
62-6
Operation test/Check
Purpose
MFP (HDD)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
0
HDD
R/W
1)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-02
TEST
TEST(PART)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
2)
62-3
MFP (HDD)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
Operation test/Check
Purpose
Content
Partial check
All areas check
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TEST
SHORT S.T
ENABLE
EXTENDED S.T
DISABLE
0
TEST
HDD
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6203
R/W TEST(ALL)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6206
EXECUTE
1/1
62-7
Purpose
Operation test/Check
MFP
Item
Data
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-07
TEST
SMART
ERROR
PRESS
LOG
[EXECUTE] TO
* During delete operation of the job log data [EXECUTE] button is highlighted and "EXECUTING..." is displayed.
OUT
THE
EXECUTE
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
62-8
Data clear
Purpose
MFP (HDD)
Item
Clear
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6210
JOB COMPLETE
DATA CLEAR(WITH
JOB
LOG
DATA)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.62-08
HDD FORMAT(EXCEPT
SYSTEM
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-11
Data clear
Purpose
MFP (HDD)
Item
Clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
AREA)
* If delete of the document filing data is not completed normally, "NG" is displayed.
ARE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-10
Purpose
Data clear
* When [CA] key is pressed during delete operation, the operation is interrupted and the simulation is terminated. When
[SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed, the operation is interrupted and the display returns to the sub number entry
screen.
MFP (HDD)
TEST
Clear
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6211
Operation/Procedure
1)
* After completion of delete of the document filing data, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
2)
ARE YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
62-12
Data clear
Purpose
MFP (HDD)
Item
Clear
SIMULATION NO.6212
TEST
CLOSE
CLOSE
A:
(0:YES 1:NO)
0 1
Operation/Procedure
OK
1)
2)
3)
Content
(0: YES,
1: NO)
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
value
1 (Disable)
0
SIMULATION NO.6212
TEST
CLOSE
CLOSE
A:
Scanner (Exposure)
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
(0:YES 1:NO)
0 1
OK
* Only one color button can be selected, and the selected button is highlighted. In the initial state, [B] is selected.
* If there is a page over [], an active display is shown and the
page moves up. If there is no page upward, the display
grays out and the operation is invalid.
62-13
Purpose
63-1
Purpose
63
Data clear
MFP (HDD)
Item
Clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
Display item
GAIN ODD
TARGET VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
Description
Gain adjustment value
(ODD)
Gain adjustment value
(EVEN)
Offset value (ODD)
Offset value (EVEN)
Reference plat sampling
average value (ODD)
Reference plat sampling
average value (EVEN)
Target value
Black output level
Error code (0, 1 to 4)
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 1ST
GAIN EVEN
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
SMP AVE EVEN
Remark
0: No error
1: STAGE1. Over the
loop number
2: STAGE2. The target
value is less than the
specified level.
3: STAGE3. The gain
set value is negative.
4: END is not
asserted.
Display item
RSPF WHITE
LEVEL 2ND
Description
Second and later scan,
RSPF white reference
level
Remark
Display item
GAIN ODD
GAIN EVEN
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
SMP AVE
EVEN
TARGET
VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
DSPF
DSPF FACE
WHITE LEVEL
1ST
DSPF FACE
WHITE LEVEL
2ND
GAIN ODD
GAIN_EVEN
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
SMP AVE ODD
SMP AVE
EVEN
TARGET
VALUE
BLACK LEVEL
ERROR CODE
DSPF BACK
WHITE LEVEL
1ST
DSPF BACK
WHITE LEVEL
2ND
Description
Gain adjustment value
(ODD)
Gain adjustment value
(EVEN)
Offset value (ODD)
Offset value (EVEN)
Reference plat
sampling average
value (ODD)
Reference plat
sampling average
value (EVEN)
Target value
Black output level
Error code (0, 1 to 4)
Remark
147
GAIN ODD
GAIN EVEN
143
OFFSET ODD
OFFSET EVEN
0
1/3
Purpose
0: No error
1: STAGE1. Over
the loop number
2: STAGE2. The
target value is less
than the specified
level.
3: STAGE3. The
gain set value is
negative.
4: END is not
asserted.
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6301
TEST
Section
Scanner
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.6302
CLOSE
SHADING EXECUTION
PRESS
[EXECUTE]
TO SHADING START
EXECUTE
63-2
Purpose
Adjustment
Section
Scanner
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
<Descriptions of buttons>
Display
OC
SHADING
DSPF
SHADING
Content
OC analog correction level correction, and shading
correction data making (Document table mode)
DSPF analog correction level correction, and shading
correction data making (SPF mode)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6303
TEST
SCANNER
COLOR
BALANCE
SCANNER
MOTOR
IS
NOT
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
READY
<Result display>
Display
COMPLETE
ERROR
INCOMPLETE
Content
Normal completion
Abnormal completion (When executing DSPF shading)
Incomplete, interruption (When executing DSPF
shading)
EXECUTE
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6302
TEST
SHADING EXECUTION
SELECT
PRESS
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6303
SCANNER COLOR
1/1
BALANCE
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
EXECUTE
#1, #2, #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, #9, #10, #11, #12, #13, #14, #15,
#16, #17, #18, #19, #20, #22, #24
PLEASE CHECK THE CHART AND PLATEN GLASS
OCSHADING
DSPFSHADING
EXECUTE
RESULT
1/1
* When an error occurs, all the error patch numbers are displayed.
If there is no error after selection of a color, the screen is similar
to the initial screen. Only the color of an error is displayed as the
above error display.
63-3
Adjustment
Purpose
Scanner (scan)
Item
* When the operation is completed normally, "COMPLETE" is displayed. When [RESULT] button is pressed, the display returns to
the initial screen. (The calculation result of normal completion is
displayed.)
(MX-3500N/4500N)
0
TEST
Operation/Procedure
1)
SCANNER COLOR
3)
AUTO
ADJUSUTMENT
#2:185,
#3:165,
#4:148,
#5:117,
#6:110,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55,
#10: 45,
#11: 38,
#12: 29,
#13: 27,
#14: 21,
#19:
#20:
5,
#15: 18,
4,
#22:
#:16:15,
2,
#:24:
#17: 10,
8,
OC
1/2
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.63-03
#1:197,
#2:185,
#3:165,
#4:148,
#5:117,
#6:110,
#7: 88,
#8: 75,
#9: 55,
#10: 45,
#11: 38,
#12: 29,
#13: 27,
#14: 21,
#19:
#20:
5,
#15: 18,
4,
#22:
#:16:15,
2,
#:24:
#17: 10,
#18:
8,
DSPF
#18:
(MX-3501N/4501N)
BALANCE
OC #1:197,
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6303
OC
1/4
63-5
a)
Sampling setting
b)
Scan request
c)
d)
Sampling end
e)
Section
Scanner
f)
Item
Clear
g)
Operation/Procedure
Purpose
1)
Adjustment
2)
Only one color button can be selected. (In the initial screen,
[K] is selected.)
3)
ENGINE COLOR
SET
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6306
TEST
THE
BALANCE
CHART
ON
CHART
PLATEN
READING
AND
TOUCH
[EXECUTE]
EXECUTE
2
3
63-7
Function (Purpose) Used to display and register the engine
auto density adjustment scanner target
value (for servicing).
Section
Item
Operation/Procedure
1)
SIDE A
(OC)
2
3
1
SIDE B
(DSPF)
2)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6305
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/1
63-6
Purpose
Item
4)
Display content
Point B target value
Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Base sampling value
Operation/Procedure
1)
3)
GAMMA SETUP
SIDE AOC
ARE
0
STANDARD SCANNER
Setting
Purpose
#B:
#G:
* The sampling value of each patch from the high density side
is displayed as the result.
When [K][C][M][Y] button is pressed on the sampling result
display screen, the data of each color are displayed.
0
SCANNER
TARGET
91,
28935,
#L: 169731,
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6307
TEST
OF
CALIB
#D:
3227,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#E:
SETUP:SERVICE
2944,
#M: 195950,
COLOR
#C
5822,
#F:
8600
#K: 151198
SETUP
1/1
63-8
Setting
Purpose
TEST
Item
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6311
TBL
DEF1
DEF2
Operation/Procedure
1)
1/1
2)
DEF3
64
64-1
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
Section
Printer
Item
Operation
Purpose
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
0
TEST
TARGET
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6308
SCANNER
STANDARD
Operation test/Check
SETTING:SERVICE
YOU
SURE?
YES
NO
3)
EXECUTE
4)
63-11
Setting
Purpose
Scanner (Scanning)
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper is selected which does not satisfy the paper
feed and paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
Set
value
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Content
DEF1 mode setting
DEF2 mode setting
DEF3 mode setting
Default
value
DEF1
Display item
PRINT PATTERN (1, 2, 9 ~ 11, 14 ~ 19)
Description of item
Print pattern specification
(* For details, refer to the following.)
DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9)
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~
19)
Print quantity
Exposure mode
specifications
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
Cassette select
No process (Through)
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Select
Not select
Plain paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the other, manual feed only.
* Items F, G, H, I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
Set range
1 to 20
(Only 1, 2, 9 to 11,
and 14 to 19 can
be printed.)
Pattern 2, 11: 2 to
255
Other than above:
1 to 255
Pattern 2, 11: 2 to
255
Other than above:
0 to 255
Pattern 9: 255
(fixed)
Other than above:
1 to 255
1 to 999
Pattern 14 to
1
19: 2 to 8
2
Other than
3
above: 1 to 8 4
5
6
7
8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 4
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
Writing
Yes
Yes
254
Yes
255
Yes
1
8 (STANDARD
DITCH)
No
Yes
2 (CS1)
No
1 (NO)
No
1 (PLAIN)
No
Content
Grid pattern
2
3
Mesh print
16 gradations:
sub scan
16 gradations:
main scan
Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
Even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
sub scan
4-color overlap
even pitch
pattern (MBYN):
main scan
Each color 10%
area (A4/4R)
density print
10
8-color band
print
11
4-color mesh
print
12
13
14
256 gradations:
sub scan
15
16 gradations
+MBYN (Center
gradation
section only):
sub scan
16 gradations
+MBYN (Center
gradation
section only):
main scan
16
Pattern
size
All
surface
Pattern
forming
section
LSU-ASIC
Sub
fixed
Main
fixed
All
surface
Fixed
range
All
surface
(Each
color
1/4)
Sub
fixed
Sub
fixed
Main
fixed
Color select
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
M parameter
N parameter
Enable/
Disable
Default
value
Enable/
Disable
Default
value
Remark
254
K only
K only
{
No
K only
No
K only
(4color
fixed)
(4color
fixed)
10
(4color
fixed)
(4color
fixed)
Condition
When
NO
K only
{
{ (up to
3 colors)
{ (Up to
3 colors)
Each interval is
41.86MM(989dot)
When M is outside 1
to 13%, it is
rounded.
[K] print is started at
17mm from the
paper lead edge.
Input
process
(IMG-ASIC
preprocess)
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
(For
through/
default,
C only.)
No
IMG-ASIC
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
NO.
Pattern
size
Content
17
All background
(Half tone)
All
surface
18
256-gradation
pattern (Other
dither)
256-gradation
pattern (Dither
for text)
Fixed
range
4-color grid
pattern (Cross):
main/sub scan
All
surface
19
20
Pattern
forming
section
Color select
When
NO
Condition
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC
afterprocess)
Fixed
range
Gradation
select
Exposure
select
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
{ (up to
3 colors)
K only
No
(up to
3 colors)
K only
No
(4color
fixed)
Controller
(memory)
M parameter
Enable/
Disable
N parameter
Default
value
Enable/
Disable
Remark
Default
value
117
<Description of item>
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-01
A
B
A:
1
1
20
A 1
B 1
DOT1 (DOT1>=2
IF
A : 2,11)
C254
DOT2 (DOT2>=2
IF
A : 2,11)
D255
DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9)
EXECUTE
Printer
Item
Operation
Content
Print quantity
0 The half tone
process control
correction value is
added.
1 The half tone
process control
correction value is
not added.
YES
NO
Set
range
Default
value
1 to 999
0 to 1
1
1
* When PROC ADJ is set to YES, the pattern with the half tone
process control correction value added is printed after execution
of high density process control.
* Item B is displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example:PROC ADJ:NO
Operation/Procedure
1)
COPIES
PROC ADJ
OK
64-2
Purpose
Item
TEST
ENGINE COLOR
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
A:
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6402
BALANCE
PATCH PRINT
MODE
A 1
COPIES
B 1
PROC ADJ:NO
1999
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
If there is any item under [], an active display is made and
item is shifted.
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
64-3
Purpose
Operation test/Check
2)
Section
Printer
3)
Item
Operation
OK
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
<Description of item>
Item
A
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.)
DENSITY (FIXED255 IF A : 9)
E
F
MULTI COUNT
EXPOSURE
(2 ~ 8 IF A : 14 ~
19)
Print quantity
No process (Through)
PAPER
DUPLEX
PAPER TYPE
THROUGH Exposure
mode specification
CHAR/PIC
CHAR/PRPIC
CHAR
PRINT PIC
PRINT PAPER
MAP
STANDARD DITCH
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
YES
NO
PLAIN
HEAVY
OHP
ENVELOPE
Text/Printed Photo
Text/Photograph
Text
Printed Photo
Photograph
Map
Dither without correction
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Selected
Not selected
Plain paper
Heavy paper
OHP
Envelope
Set range
1 to 20
(Only 1, 2, 9 to
11, and 14 to
19 can be
printed.)
Pattern 2, 11:
2 to 255
Other than
above: 1 to
255
Pattern 2, 11:
2 to 255
Other than
above: 0 to
255
Pattern 9: 255
(fixed)
Other than
above: 1 to
255
1 to 999
Pattern
1
14 to 19:
2 to 8
2
Other
3
than
4
above: 1
5
to 8
6
7
8
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 4
1
2
3
4
Default value
1
Writing
Yes
Yes
254
Yes
255
Yes
1
8 (STANDARD
DITCH)
No
Yes
2 (CS1)
No
1 (NO)
No
1 (PLAIN)
No
When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed and paper exit conditions is selected, printing cannot be executed.
Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual. For the other, manual feed only.
Items F, G, H and I are as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER:CS1
Content
Pattern
size
Pattern
forming
section
Gradation
select
LSU-ASIC
Grid pattern
All surface
2
3
Mesh print
16 gradations: sub
scan
16 gradations: main
scan
All surface
Sub fixed
{
No
Main fixed
No
All surface
5
6
7
Exposure
select
M parameter
Enable/ Default
Disable
value
{
1
N parameter
Enable/ Default
Disable
value
{
254
All surface
Fixing
range
10
Fixing
range
All surface
(Each color
1/4)
{
{
Each interval is
41.86mm(989dot)
When M is other than 1 to
13%, it is rounded.
K print is started at 17mm
from the paper lead edge.
10
11
12
13
14
Sub fixed
Input
process
(IMG-ASIC
preprocess)
No
15
16 gradations+M byN
(Center gradation
section only): sub scan
16 gradations+M byN
(Center gradation
section only): main
scan
All background (Half
tone)
Sub fixed
IMG-ASIC
No
No
16
17
18
19
20
Remark
Main fixed
All surface
Fixing
range
Fixing
range
All surface
Half tone
(IMG-ASIC
afterprocess)
No
No
Controller
(Memory)
2)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.64-03
TEST
SELF PRINT(BW)
A:
1 23
A 1
PRINT PATTERN
B 5
DENSITY
C 6
MULTI COUNT
D 1
EXPOSURE:THROUGH
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
OK
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
64-4
Operation test/Check
Purpose
4)
Section
Printer
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
F
G
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to below.)
Print gradation specification
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Graphic
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Set range
1 to 5
1 to 255
1 to 999
1 to 6
1
2
3
4
5
6
0 to 2
0
1
2
0 to 1
0
1
1 to 2
1
2
Default value
3
128
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
2 (CALIB)
* When print pattern 2 or 5 is selected, items E to G cannot be selected. (Though entry of the value is possible, it is not reflected to setting.)
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions, printing cannot be made.
* Paper feed condition PLAIN: Cassette/Manual feed. For the
other, manual feed only.
* Items D, E, F, G are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print in item A>
Color select
NO.
Content
3
4
K only
Gradation
select/ Dither
select
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1: Straight
2: Calibration
1 to 255
K only
1 to 255
Condition
When NOT
K only
K only
Remark
C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
4 pages are continuously printed in the sequence of Y only, M
only, C only, and K only.
C only/ M only/ Y only/ K only/ C & M/ C & Y/ M & Y/ C & M & Y are
executable. For the other, rounded to K only.
Rounded to K only regardless of COLOR SELECT status.
2)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6404
TEST
A:
3
1
A 3
PRINT PATTERN
B128
DENSITY
C 1
MULTI
D 2
PAPER
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
COUNT
EXECUTE
OK
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
64-5
4)
Printer
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation test/Check
Purpose
* When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
F
G
H
I
Description of item
Print pattern specification (*For details, refer to below.)
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Picture
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Rendering indent
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
Gray compensation
K only
KCMY
Toner save mode
Setting
No setting
Set range
1 to 3
1 to 2
1 to 999
1 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 4
0 to 1
0 to 1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
Default value
3
2
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
0 (SHARP COLOR)
0 (K)
1 (OFF)
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation is disabled. (Though
entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
<Detailed description for each print pattern in item A>
NO.
Content
Color select
Condition
1
2
No
K only
Gradation
select
Dither select
1:Straight
2:Calibration
1:Straight
2:Calibration
Remark
NO.
Condition
3
Gradation
select
Dither select
2:Calibration
Color select
Content
No
Remark
Continuous printing is made at the default setting in the sequence of
COLOR and B/W. B/W printing is made at the B/W mode process speed.
2)
* The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6405
TEST
A:
3
1
A 3
PRINT PATTERN
B 2
DITHER CALIB
C 1
MULTI
D 2
PAPERCS1
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
COUNT
EXECUTE
OK
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
3)
64-6
Purpose
Printer
Item
Operation
4)
* When [EXECUTE] button, [C], [CA], or [SYSTEM SETTINGS] key is pressed during printing, the operation is interrupted.
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation test/Check
* When the machine returns to the ready state after occurrence of an interruption (paper empty, jam, etc.), self-printing
is resumed.
* When paper which does not satisfy the paper feed conditions
and the paper exit conditions, printing cannot be made.
<Set item description>
Item
A
DITHER
C
D
MULTI CONUT
PAPER
HALFTONE
BIT DEPTH
INTENT
GRAY COMPENSATION
INK SIMULATION
STRAIGHT
CALIB
MFT
CS1
CS2
CS3
CS4
LCC
PHOTO
TEXT/GRAPHICS
CAD
1BIT
4BIT
SHARP COLOR
PERCEPTUAL
COLORIMETRIC
SATURATION
CAD
K
KCMY
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
Description of item
Print pattern specification (* For details, refer to
below.)
Dither correction
Straight
specification
Calibration
Print quantity
Paper feed tray select
Manual feed
Cassette 1
Cassette 2
Cassette 3
Cassette 4
LCC
Half tone
Photo
Text/Graphic
Design
Bit number
1 bit
4 bit
Rendering intent
Sharp color
Perceptual
Color metric
Saturation
CAD
Gray compensation
K only
KCMY
Ink simulation
OFF
SWOP
EURO
JAPAN COLOR
Set range
1 to 2
1 to 2
1 to 999
1 to 6
0 to 2
0 to 1
0 to 4
0 to 1
0 to 3
Default value
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
0
1
2
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
0
1
2
3
2
1
2 (CS1)
0 (PHOTO)
1 (4BIT)
0 (SHARP COLOR)
0 (K)
0 (OFF)
* When B/W print is made, the bit number is fixed to 1 bit and selection of half tone/rendering intent/gray compensation/ ink simulation is disabled. (Though entry of a value can be made, it is not reflected to the setting.)
* Items B, D, E, F, G, H, and I are displayed as "Display item: Detail of display."
Example: PAPER: CS1
Color select
Condition
When NO
Content
Gradation select
dither select
1:Straight
2:Calibration
1:Straight
2:Calibration
K only
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6406
Remark
65-2
Adjustment/Setup/Operation data output/
Check (Display/Print)
Purpose
A:
1
1
A 1
PRINT PATTERN
B 2
DITHER CALIB
C 1
MULTI
D 2
PAPERCS1
Function (Purpose) Used to check the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position adjustment
result.
COUNT
EXECUTE
OK
Section
Operation panel
Item
Operation
Operation/Procedure
1)
65
2)
65-1
Purpose
Adjustment
* X-coordinates (horizontal direction) and Y-coordinates (vertical direction) are displayed in decimal numbers.
Function (Purpose) Used to adjust the touch panel (LCD display section) detection position.
Section
Operation panel
Item
Adjustment
* As far as the touch panel is properly adjusted, the range of coordinates in the LCD display range is:
Operation/Procedure
1)
* When you take your finger off the touch panel, the last display value is displayed. (It does not return to "0.")
20
40
* When all the four marks are touched and in the case of OK,
the sampled correction value is saved and the display
returns to the sub number entry screen.
40
X 0
600
40
Y 0
70
20
120
220
320
120
420
520
620
170
40
600
200
200
220
67
67-24
Purpose
Adjustment
Printer
Item
Setting
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
6)
EXECUTE
8)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
TEST
PRINTER
ENGINE
HALFTONE
AUTO
ADJUSTMENT
MODE
PLEASE WAIT.
The display is shifted to the reference value registration process 1 completion screen. The reference value registration
process 2 (Black) is automatically started.
NOW
REGISTERING
THE
NEW
TARGET
OF
HALFTONE
PROCON.
EXECUTE
PRINTER
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
ENGINE
COMPLETED
THIS
HALFTONE
AUTO
ADJUSTMENT
MODE
PROCEDURE.
67-25
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-24
Purpose
Adjustment
Printer
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
EXECUTE
The highlighted section of the set value is switched and displayed on the set setting area.
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.67-24
CLOSE
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
EXECUTE
2)
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.67-24
CLOSE
EXECUTE
User request
Cyan-rich
Magenta-rich
Yellowish
Reddish
Greenish
Blueish
3)
Black
-
Cyan
(increase)
decrease
decrease
decrease
(increase)
(increase)
Magenta
decrease
(increase)
decrease
decrease
decrease
decrease
Yellow
decrease
decrease
(increase)
(increase)
(increase)
decrease
Set value
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
Target setting
Standard adjustment setting
5% reduced red setting (Color balance
with slightly strong Cyan)
10% reduced red setting (Color
balance with emphasis on Cyan)
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-26
DEF1
DEF2
DEF3
1/1
Item name
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Set range
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
1 to 99
Default value
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
67-27
Section
Printer
Item
Registration
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
A:
50
1 99
POINT1
B 50
POINT2
C 50
POINT3
D 50
POINT4
EXECUTE
OK
67-26
Purpose
Item
Image quality
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
3)
3)
After completion of sampling, the display is shifted to the sampling result display screen. Press [REPEAT] button to return to
the sampling start screen.
4)
5)
The display returns to the initial screen, and the registered target value is displayed.
Adjustment
Section
Press [SETUP] button, and the display is shifted to the sampling start screen.
Place the 16-patch pattern printed with SIM67-25 on the glass
table and press [EXECUTE] button.
A 50
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-25
TEST
Adjustment
Purpose
Display data
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
BASE
Display content
Point B target value
Point C target value
Point D target value
Point E target value
Point F target value
Point G target value
Point H target value
Point I target value
Point J target value
Point K target value
Point L target value
Point M target value
Point N target value
Point O target value
Base sampling value
0
SCANNER
#B:
#G:
TARGET
91,
28935,
#L: 169731,
OF
#C
2944,
#D:
3227,
#H:
54344,
#I:
86968,
#J: 122678,
#N: 201249,
#:O: 207112
#M: 195950,
#E:
5822,
#F:
8600
A 0
A:
#K: 151198
(0:YES
1:NO)
1/1
SETUP
67-28
OK
67-31
Adjustment
Scanner
Item
Image quality
Data clear
Purpose
Printer
Item
Clear
Operation/Procedure
1)
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
2)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.6728
* When [NO] button or [EXECUTE] button is pressed, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and
[NO] buttons gray out.
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION 6730
TEST
SETUPSERVICE
Purpose
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-27
TEST
* After completion of calibration value clear, [EXECUTE] button returns to the normal display, and [YES] and [NO] buttons gray out.
<Clear item>
Clear item
0
TEST
ARE
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-31
EXECUTE
67-30
Setting
Purpose
Printer
Item
Setting
Purpose
1)
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
Delivery of
calibration data is
inhibited.
Delivery of
calibration data is
allowed.
Set
range
0 to 1
Setting
Setting
Operation/Procedure
Display
EXECUTE
67-32
Item
Item
NO
Section
2)
YES
Operation/Procedure
1)
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Default
value
1
3)
Display
SCREEN
(0:YES 1:NO)
Content
0
1
B
COLOR
(0:YES 1:NO)
0
1
Set
range
0 to 1
Default
value
0
(YES)
0 to 1
0
(YES)
0
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-32
TEST
MODE
A:
0
0
A :0
SCREEN(0:YES 1:NO)
B:0
COLOR(0:YES
Display
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Display
SCREEN1
SCREEN2
SCREEN3
SCREEN4
SCREEN5
SCREEN6
SCREEN7
SCREEN8
SCREEN9
SCREEN10
SCREEN11
67-33
Adjustment
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
(*): When SCREEN6/SCREEN7/SCREEN10/SCREEN11 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y] button is pressed, the grayout keys are disabled.
0
TEST
A:
128
0 255
If there is no item over [], the display grays out and the
operation is invalid.
Enter the set value with 10-key.
* Press [C] key to clear the entered values.
] [ ] buttons to change the set values collectively.
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-33
* Use [
Content
4bit_LOW (Photo)
4bit_HIGH (Graphic)
1bit_LOW (Photo)
1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
4bit_CAD
Mono (600 x 600) (*)
Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
Toner save 1bit_LOW (Photo)
Toner save 1bit_HIGH (Graphic)
Toner save Mono (600 x 600) (*)
Toner save Mono (1200 x 600) (*)
The highlighted set value is switched and the value is displayed in the setting area.
2)
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
Default value
SCREEN1
SCREEN10
9 (KCMY)
, 11 (K)
128
127
128
125
128
124
128
124
128
122
128
120
128
114
128
105
128
95
128
82
128
70
128
64
128
57
128
62
128
75
OK
Section
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set
range
1:NO)
Purpose
Description
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [], [], [ ], [ ] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
A128
POINT1
B128
POINT2
C128
POINT3
D128
POINT4
SCREEN
OK
67-33
Adjustment
Purpose
Printer
Item
Adjustment
Operation/Procedure
1)
2)
When the set value is not the upper limit (lower limit) value,
the value is increased (decreased) by 1. If the set value is
the upper limit (lower limit) value, it is not changed.
3)
When [OK] button is pressed, the current set data are saved to
EEPROM and RAM.
* Also when [], [], [ ], [ ] button, or [COLOR], [BLACK]
key is pressed, the value is saved to EEPROM and RAM.
Display
POINT1
POINT2
POINT3
POINT4
POINT5
POINT6
POINT7
POINT8
POINT9
POINT10
POINT11
POINT12
POINT13
POINT14
POINT15
Description
Point 1
Point 2
Point 3
Point 4
Point 5
Point 6
Point 7
Point 8
Point 9
Point 10
Point 11
Point 12
Point 13
Point 14
Point 15
Set range
SCREEN13
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
0 to 255
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
128
Default value
SCREEN2
C
M
128
128
128
128
127
128
128
128
127
126
126
127
124
124
122
122
116
117
113
112
108
115
113
110
112
117
119
120
119
121
K
128
128
127
127
127
127
123
119
111
112
106
110
120
110
110
Y
128
127
127
127
126
126
123
123
121
117
116
115
118
118
116
Content
TEST
1bit Photo
1bit Graphic
1bit Mono (*)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.67-33
(*): When SCREEN3 is displayed, [K] data only. When [C] [M] [Y]
button is pressed, the gray-out keys are disabled.
A:
128
0 255
A128
POINT1
B128
POINT2
C128
POINT3
D128
POINT4
SCREEN
OK
MX3500N
1. Self diag
When a trouble occurs in the machine or when the life of a consumable part is nearly expired or when the life is expired, the machine
detects and displays it on the display section. This allows the user
and the serviceman to take the suitable action. In case of a trouble,
this feature notifies the occurrence of a trouble and stops the
machine to minimize the damage.
1)
2)
Some trouble messages are automatically cleared when the trouble is repaired. Some other troubles must be cleared by a simulation.
3)
4)
User
Serviceman
Class 2
Other
Warning
Trouble
Other
Warning
Trouble/Warning
Trouble
The machine is stopped.
Trouble/Warning
Warning
Trouble
Troubleshoot the cause.
Repair
Reset
Standby state
A consumable
part has reached
its lifetime.
YES
Replace or supply
the consumable part.
NO
D. Breakdown sequence
(1) Breakdown mode list
There are following cases of the breakdown mode.
Kind of trouble
FAX board trouble
Judgment
block
MFP
Trouble code
F6
HDD trouble
SCU communication
trouble
PCU communication
trouble
Backup battery voltage fall
Printer port system trouble
E7 (03)
E7 (80), A0-02
L4-30
E7 (90), A0-01
L8-20
U1 (01)
F9 (00)
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
{
Scan
push
{
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
{
{
1
FAX
print
1
List
print
Notification
to FAST
host
1
(North
America
only)
{
{
*13
*14
E7 (60 65),
A0 (10 12, 20)
U2 (30)
U2 (00, 05, 10,
11, 22, 23, 24,
25)
U2 (50)
E7 (00, 01, 05,
06, 08, 09)
Not displayed.
(Only the
message for
each trouble is
displayed.)
F2 (80 87)
PCU
{
{
{
{
Operatable
but send
NG
{
Operatable
but send
NG
F3-22
U6-01
U6-02
U6 (09, 20 22,
51)
U6 (00, 10, 50)
11
11
11
F1 (10)
F1 (excluding 10)
{
{
PCU
{
* 10
{
* 10
{
*9
*9
*9
*9
*9
{
{
* 12
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
*9
{
{
*9
{
{
*9
* 10
3
* 10
3
* 10
3
* 10
3
* 10
3
* 10
11
* 10
4
* 10
4
* 10
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Kind of trouble
Connection trouble (SCU
detection)
SCU color system
troubles
Document control trouble
EEPROM system
Scanner section troubles
(mirror motor, lens, copy
lamp)
CCD troubles (shading,
etc.)
Process control trouble
(Only history is left.) (MFP
detection)
Process control trouble
(Only history is left.) (PCU
detection)
{: Operation enabled,
Judgment
block
SCU
Operatable mode
Scan
FAX
Scan pull
To
send
HDD
FAX
print
List
print
Notification
to FAST
host
E7 (70, 75),
A0 (22)
UC (02)
UC (20)
U2 (80, 81)
L1, L3
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Trouble code
Copy scan
(including
interruption)
Scan
push
MFP
PCU
F2 (91 94)
: Operation disabled
Each block
(Power ON sequence)
H3, H4, U1, U2, PF, U6 trouble check
sim task
(Trouble cancel sequence)
When executing SIM 13, 14, 15, 16, 17
Trouble cancel
(The trouble memory is
initialized.)
E6
E7
05
06
07
08
10
11
14
00
01
03
05
06
08
09
10
11
14
Remarks
The trouble
code is not
displayed,
but only the
message for
each trouble
is displayed.
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
PCU
Scanner
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
PCU
Scanner
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Option
Electricity
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
E7
20
21
28
29
50
55
60
61
62
65
70
75
80
90
EE
EC
EL
EU
F1
00
02
03
08
10
11
15
19
20
21
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
F2
50
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
49
50
51
58
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
SCU
SCU
MFP
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Option
Electricity
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
F2
73
74
75
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
92
93
94
F3
F6
12
22
00
01
04
21
30
97
98
F9
00
H2
00
01
02
03
H3
H4
H5
L1
L3
L4
04
00
01
02
04
00
01
02
30
01
00
00
02
04
05
06
11
Remarks
Trouble
detection
Mechanism
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Refer to FAX manual for details
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Scanner
Scanner
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Option
Electricity
FAX
Supply
Trouble code
Main
Sub
code code
L4
30
31
32
34
L6
10
L8
01
02
20
PC
-U1
01
U2
00
05
10
11
22
23
24
25
30
50
80
81
90
91
00
16
30
31
40
00
01
02
09
10
20
21
22
50
51
02
20
U5
U6
UC
Check
and
remedy
A0-02
Check
and
remedy
Mechanism
Option
Electricity
FAX
Supply
MFP
PCU
PCU
PCU
LSUcnt
PCU
PCU
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
MFP
Scanner
Scanner
PCU
PCU
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
Scanner
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
PCU
Scanner
Scanner
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-11
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Trouble
detection
A0-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Remarks
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-12
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-20
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
A0-21
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-01
Trouble content
CE-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
Trouble content
A0-22
CE-02
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-03
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Trouble content
CE-04
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
CE-05
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
E6-10
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
E6-11
CE-06
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
Cause
Check and
remedy
CE-07
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
E6-14
Trouble content
Case 5
Trouble content
CE-08
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write
2) Replace the expansion memory (if installed.)
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Dirt on the memory pin
Clean the memory pin with alcohol.
* When E7-00 is in the following combination where system memory Slot 2 (inside) and Slot 1 (outside) operate normally but a
hard error occurs. (Combination of system memory (slot 1, slot 2)
System memory
Slot2
Slot1
(Inside)
(Outside)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
No.
Operation guarantee
256MB
256MB
512MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
Hard
Soft
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
E7-05
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-06
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 4
Case 5
E7-03
HDD trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Garbled data
1) Use SIM60-01 to check memory read/write.
2) Replace the memory.
3) Replace the MFPcnt PWB.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
E7-01
* Combination where local memory Slot 4 (inside) and Slot 3 (outside) operate normally (Refer to E7-09) but a hard error occurs.
When turning
on the power
Since the
machine is not
booted, the
trouble display is
not made.
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
Normal operation
E7-08
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-09
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Case 2
Check
and
remedy
Local memory
Slot 4
Slot 3
(Inside)
(Outside)
256MB
512MB
256MB
256MB
512MB
256MB
256MB
512MB
512MB
512MB
256MB
512MB
E7-10
Operation guarantee
Hard
Soft
{
{
{
{
{
{
E7-09
Normal operation
E7-09
E7-09
E7-09
Normal operation
E7-09
E7-09
E7-09
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
When turning
on the power
Trouble content
E7-11
Case 5
E7-14
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-21
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
SCAN-ASIC trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-20
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
E7-28
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-29
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-50
E7-60
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-61
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-65
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-55
Trouble content
E7-62
Trouble content
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-70
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-75
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
E7-80
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
Case 4
F1-02
Trouble content
E7-90
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-03
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-08
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
F1-21
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
Case 4
F1-33
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-19
Trouble content
F1-31
F1-15
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-11
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-10
F1-20
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-34
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-35
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-36
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-38
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
F1-37
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-39
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-40
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
F1-50
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
Trouble content
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-40
Trouble content
F2-39
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
F2-41
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-42
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Trouble content
F2-43
F2-44
Check
and
remedy
F2-45
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cartridge trouble
Check the cartridge connection.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-50
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Case 3
F2-51
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
F2-58
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-65
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
F2-66
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
Trouble content
Trouble content
Case 3
F2-64
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-67
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2
F2-70
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-71
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
F2-75
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
F2-76
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 3
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
F2-73
Trouble content
F2-72
F2-74
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-77
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
F2-78
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
CRUM trouble
Replace the toner cartridge.
Trouble content
F2-80
F2-81
F2-82
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-83
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-84
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-85
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-86
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-87
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-92
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-93
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F2-94
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
F3-12
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
F3-22
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
F9-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H2-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H2-02
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble, fusing unit not-installed
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
H2-00
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Non-contact thermistor
compensation thermistor open
(TH_UM_AD1)
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
H2-03
H2-04
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Thermistor open
PCU
Thermistor trouble, control PWB trouble, fusing
section connector connection trouble, AC power
source trouble
Check the harness and the connector from the
thermistor to the control PWB.
H3-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H3-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H3-02
H3-04
H4-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-02
L3-00
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
H4-30
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-02
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-04
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
L1-00
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Trouble content
L4-05
H5-01
Trouble content
Check
and
remedy
Cause
Check
and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check
and
remedy
L4-06
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Case 3
L4-11
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
L4-30
L4-32
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
L4-34
1)
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
MFP
Fan motor trouble
Use SIM6-2 to check the operation of the fan
motor.
Harness connection trouble between the mother
PWB and the fan motor.
Check the harness and the connector between the
mother PWB and the fan motor.
Control circuit trouble
Replace the controller PWB.
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Mother PWB trouble.
Replace the mother PWB.
Trouble content
L6-10
Trouble content
2)
Case 4
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Case 3
Trouble content
Trouble content
Case 3
L4-31
Cause
Check and
remedy
L8-01
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
L8-02
U2-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-05
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
L8-20
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
PC---
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-11
U1-01
Battery trouble
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-22
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
index
Trouble content
Case 2
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
U2-10
Trouble content
Case 3
Trouble content
Case 2
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-23
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2
Case 3
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-24
Case 2
Case 3
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-50
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-30
Section
Case 1 Cause
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-81
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3
Trouble content
Trouble content
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-80
Case 2
U2-25
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-90
U5-30
Trouble content
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U2-91
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
U5-16
Trouble content
Case 3
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 2 Cause
Check and
remedy
Case 3 Cause
Check and
remedy
U5-00
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U5-31
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U5-40
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-01
Trouble content
U6-00
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-09
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-10
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-21
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
U6-20
U6-50
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-51
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
U6-22
Section
Case 1 Cause
Case 2
The encoder input value is not changed in
0.06sec after turning on the motor.
The encoder input value is changed after a
certain time from turning OFF the motor. (After
5sec, count is made for 0.1sec to get 100 or
more count.)
PCU
Motor lock, motor RPM abnormality, an
overcurrent to the motor, LCC control PWB trouble
Use SIM4-3 to check the operation of the transport
motor.
Trouble content
Trouble content
Case 3
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Cause
Check and
remedy
Trouble content
Section
Case 1 Cause
Check and
remedy
MX3500N
[9]
MAINTENANCE
Service Manual
Unit name
Drum
peripheral
Developing
section
Part name
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade
(BK)
Charging unit
(BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner blade
(C)
Charging unit
(C)
Side seal F/R
(BK)
Toner
reception seal
(BK)
Side seal F/
R(C)
Toner
reception seal
(C)
Waste toner
box
Developer
(BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal
F (BK)
DV side seal
R (BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer
(M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C)
DV side seal
F/R (C)
Toner filter
Toner
cartridge (BK/
C/M/Y)
Bias pin/
Connector
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Color
supply
Monochrome
supply
When
calling
150
K
300
K
100
K
450
K
600
K
200
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
300
K
1200
K
400
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
500
K
1800
K
600
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
Color supply
(P/G No.: [23]-14)
(P/G No.: [23]-2)
Mechanical
parts
Monochrome
supply
(P/G No.: [22]-42)
(P/G No.: [22]-26)
(P/G No.: [22]-15)
(P/G No.: [21]-37)
Color supply
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
Mechanical
parts
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 1
5 : Jul. 15 2006
Unit name
LSU
Transfer
section
Fusing
section
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
(P/G No.: [25]-3)
(P/G No.: [26]-9)
(P/G No.: [27]-27)
(P/G No.: [24]-19)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
(P/G No.: [29]-21)
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
{
(P/G No.: [28]-6)
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 2
Specified position
6 : Oct. 15 2006
Unit name
Fusing
section
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Upper
Supplied
Web
by Web
roller
unit
Pressure
roller
Web
roller
bearings
Pressure
roller
bearing
Web
break
rubber
Web unit
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Heat rollers
Mechanical
parts
Filters
Ozone filter PA
Paper feed
section
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Transport
section/
Paper exit
reverse
section
Drive
section
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Grease (JFE552)
(UKOG-0235FCZZ)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
(P/G No.: [10]-40,
[15]-33)
(P/G No.: [10]-41,
[15]-29)
(P/G No.: [9]-4,
[14]-37)
Separation roller
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Torque limiter
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Gears
Gears (Grease)
Mechanical
parts
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
(specified positions).
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
(specified positions).
When checking,
apply to the
necessary positions
(specified positions).
Mechanical
parts
Others
Belts
Sensors
Image quality
Optical
section
Mirror/Lens/
Reflector/CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/Drive wire
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 3
Specified positions
2. Details of maintenance
A. Drum peripheral
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
9
10
11
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Toner reception
seal (BK)
Side seal F/R(C)
Toner reception
seal (C)
Waste toner box
450
K
100
K
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
300
K
600
K
200
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
300
K
1200
K
400
K
1350
K
1500
K
500
K
Monochrome
supply
1650
K
1800
K
600
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [23]-14)
(P/G No.: [23]-2)
Color supply
(P/G No.: [23]-14)
(P/G No.: [23]-2)
Mechanical
parts
7,9
8,10
1,4
2,5
7,9
3,6
11
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 4
"Life meter" indicates the remained life (%) of the drum with the
entire drum life as 100%.
* The PM cycle means the replacement timing of periodic replacement consumable parts which are required for maintaining the
performance.
* The PM cycle is specified only for B/W output. For color output, it
is used as a reference value.
Drum counter
B/W
Full color
150K pages 100K pages
[Reason]
Since the ratio of B/W to color differs depending on the user's operation scene which varies every day, the PM cycle cannot be specified in a certain cycle for color output.
Drum
* For 100% full color output by the user, the life of the black drum
is 100K similarly to the life of the color drums.
Drum Life
When the drum counter exceeds the specified level of 100% black
output or 100% full color output, it is judged as life end.
200
150
100
Black Drum
50
Color Drum
0
0
B. LSU
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
: Replace
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 5
C. Developing section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F
(BK)
DV side seal R
(BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C)
DV side seal F/R
(C)
Toner filter
Toner cartridge
(BK/C/M/Y)
Bias pin/
Connector
When
calling
150
K
300
K
100
K
450
K
600
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
200
K
1050
K
300
K
1200
K
400
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
500
K
Monochrome
supply
1800
K
600
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [22]-42)
(P/G No.: [22]-26)
(P/G No.: [22]-15)
(P/G No.: [21]-37)
Color supply
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
13
4,10
13
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
13
3,10
12(C/M/Y)
12(BK)
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 6
5 : Jul. 15 2006
D. Transfer section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Primary transfer
belt
Primary transfer
roller
Primary transfer
blade
Belt drive gear
Primary transfer
conduction collar
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower
roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller
Resist backup roller
Secondary transfer
belt
Secondary transfer
roller
Secondary belt
drive roller
Secondary belt
tension roller
Secondary belt
follower roller
Secondary transfer
drive idle gear
Sensors (Process
control resist
sensors)
Primary transfer CL
roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner
reception seal
Primary transfer
roller bearing
Packing Mylar
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Mechanical
parts
{
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [25]-3)
(P/G No.: [26]-9)
(P/G No.: [27]-27)
(P/G No.: [24]-19)
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
(P/G No.: [29]-21)
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
{
(P/G No.: [28]-6)
18
20
8
7
4
10
23
11
12
19
9
2
14
2
6
2
13
2
22
18
15
16
9 11
21
14
15
13,17
16
4,6
7 10
17
21
2,5
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 7
E. Fusing section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [31]-42)
(P/G No.: [32]-13)
(P/G No.: [31]-40)
(P/G No.: [31]-41)
(P/G No.: [32]-11)
Specified position
5
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Upper
Supplied
Web
by Web
roller
unit
Pressure
roller
Web
roller
bearings
Pressure
roller
bearing
Web
break
rubber
Web unit
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Heat rollers
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 8
Grease (JFE552)
(UKOG0235FCZZ)
6 : Oct. 15 2006
6
19
22
21
17
20
22
18
11
20
23
7
1
3
4
24
5
13
6
7
10
12
5
Apply 0.2g of grease to the
both ends (bearing sections)
of the upper and the
lower heat rollers evenly.
25
25
17
23
18
15
8
11
15
1
13
10
15
12
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 9
F. Optical section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Mirror/Lens/
Reflector/CCD
Table glass/SPF
glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/Drive
wire
2
3
4
5
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
: Replace
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
1
1
4
5
3
5
1
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 10
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
Specified positions
G. Filters
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Ozone filter PA
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Mechanical
parts
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 11
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
No.
Part name
Paper pickup
roller
Paper feed
roller
Separation
roller
Torque limiter
2
3
4
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
: Replace
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
(P/G No.: [10]-40, [15]-33)
4
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 12
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Gears
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
: Replace
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
2
3
3
4
3
4
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 13
J. Drive section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Gears (Grease)
Shaft earth
sections
(Conduction
grease)
Belts
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
: Replace
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
Mechanical
parts
1800
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
1
(FLOIL G313S)
1
(HANARL FL955R)
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 14
Code
Content
VK
VC
a. Maintenance counters
Code
Content
TA
CA
AA
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
VM
VY
TK1
TK2
(2)
a. Maintenance counters
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Code
Content
TA
FK1
FK2
FK3
CA
AA
Enable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
(3)
Content
Waste toner full
DK
DC
DM
DY
Disable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
After detection of the waste toner full, reset the full detection by
opening/close of the front door.
Enable
Enable
Disable
Code
Print job
Enable/Disable
Disable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
Code
Enable
Enable
Code
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-5 (Developer counters (number of the developer print counter, accumulated traveling distance of the developer) clear).
Enable
Enable
After completion of the maintenance, execute SIM 24-4 (Maintenance counters (total, color) clear).
Code
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Print job
Enable/Disable
Enable
Enable
Enable
Enable
MX3500N MAINTENANCE 9 15
C.
UpdateManual
procedures and kinds of firmware
Service
1. General
1)
2)
3)
4)
1)
Firmware types
MX3500N
2)
3)
When installing a new spare PWB unit with ROM installed to it.
4)
Machine
Flash ROM
ALL
ICU(BOOT)
Option
ICU(MAIN)
IMG-ASIC
SCU
PCU
FAX1
FAX2
1K FINISHER
INNER FINISHER
LCC A4
DESK
Contents
Includes all contents shown below.
ANIME
BOOTSUB
CONFIG
ESCP FONT
GRPH
LANG
SPDL
XIO FONT
PROFILE
MAIN
IMG DATA ROM
SCU(MAIN)
PCU(MAIN)
FAX1(MAIN)
FAX2(MAIN)
FINISHER_1K(MAIN)
FINISHER_INNER(MAIN)
LCC_A4(MAIN)
DESK(MAIN)
NOTE: If the MFPcnt PWB DIP SW No. 2 is not set to ON, an error
occurs.
2. Version-up procedure
A. Firmware download using USB
Firmware.sfu
Controller
USB Cable
First you must install a USB print driver from the setup.exe
program in the MX-4500/4501 CD-ROM Disc 1
Create a folder on the root drive (usually C:\) of the PC. Name
the folder Pastel. Download the firmware (xxxx.sfu) and the
file2PRN program (File2PRN.exe) and place these files into the
pastel folder.
Click on the firmware icon and drag it onto the File2PRN icon
The Imager will automatically enter simulation 49-99.
If you open the print queue on the PC, you can see the firmware
loading for a few minutes.
When the firmware finishes loading from the print queue, the
Imager display in simulation 49-99 shows the following:
"S ***
E"
USB Slave
E"
Firmware.
Firmware.
USB Host
Firmware.
USB Memory
Firmware.sfu
4)
First you must install the firmware file (xxx.sfu) to the root of a
USB jump drive.
2)
0
FIRMWARE
0
FIRMWARE
5)
UPDATE
FILE1
FILE2
FILE3
FILE4
UPDATE
ICU(MAIN)
NOW 01.00.00
: CURRENT
01.00.00
NEXT TO
01.01.00
UPDATED
01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
NOW 01.00.00
: CURRENT
01.00.00
NEXT TO
01.01.00
UPDATED
01.01.00
LANGUAGE
01.00.00
NOW 09.00.00
: CURRENT
UPDATED
01.01.00
NEXT TO
01.00.00
GRAPHIC
01.00.00
NOW 01.01.00
: CURRENT
ARE
ALL
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
TEST
YOU
SURE?
UPDATED
01.01.00
NEXT TO
09.00.00
NO
YES
EXECUTE
1/5
0
TEST
FIRMWARE
1/1
3)
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
S
UPDATE
ICU(MAIN)
NOW
01.00.00
NEXT
01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
NOW
01.00.00
NEXT
01.01.00
LANGUAGE
NOW
09.00.00
NEXT
01.00.00
GRAPHIC
NOW
01.01.00
NEXT
09.00.00
ARE
ALL
YOU SURE?
YES
NO
EXECUTE
1/5
NEXT UPDATED TO
6)
0
TEST
CLOSE
FIRMWARE UPDATE
CURRENT 01.00.00
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
ICU(BOOT)
CURRENT 01.00.00
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
CURRENT
01.00.00
E
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
LANGUAGE
CURRENT 01.00.00
0
UPDATED TO 01.01.00
ICU(MAIN)
GRAPHIC
ALL
0
TEST
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
COMPLETE : PLEASE
POWER
OFF/ON
PLEASE TURN
MAIN
POWER OFF THEN ON
:
ARE YOU SURE?
EXECUTE
1/1
CLOSE
7)
0
TEST
CLOSE
SIMULATION NO.49-01
FIRMWARE
UPDATE
ERROR : PLEASE
OFF/ON
PLEASE POWER
TURN MAIN
POWER OFF THEN ON
ICUM,PCU,SCU
Machine 1
10.36.112.83
10.36.112.84
Firmware.sfu
Machine 2
Machine 4
FTP/HTTP
Server
10.36.101.52
10.36.112.83
FTP software is used to transfer the firmware data (extension .sfu) from the PC to the machine. The controller recognizes the firmware identifier and the machine automatically switches to firmware write mode. After the firmware is updated, the machine automatically resets.
Start the Web browser on a PC and enter the specified URL. A special firmware upgrade page appears.
2)
Click the Update of Firmware button in the Web page. Click the Browse button and select the firmware for the update.
MX-4500N
3)
After selecting the file, click the Submit button to send the firmware to the Renaissance machine.
Update processing begins. While processing takes place, Firmware Update, now processing... appears.
4)
When the firmware update is finished, Firmware Update completed. Please reboot the MFP. appears. Pressing the [Reboot] key, the
machine will restart to complete the update. The browser will shift to the following screen.
Close the browser and open again to display latest information. will be displayed.
5)
OSM
HPOS
TFD3
APPD2
RRM
1TURC
MTOP2
TH/ HUD_M
MPGS
MPFS
MTOP1
MPFD
RD I/ F
PWB
PCSS
REGS_R
REGS_F
PCS
DSW_R
DVTYP_K
TCS_K
DV_K UNIT
DL_K
DHPD_K
DRIVER MAIN
PWB
PFM
CPFC
CPUC1
CLUM1
CPFM
CPUC2
CLUM2
BTM
DM_K
TNM_K
DVCRUM_K
TONER_K UNIT
SPOD
SPFFAN
SRRC
DSPF UNIT
1TUD_CL
1TNFD
PNC
MPUC
MPLD1
2TC
1TUD_K
ADUM_L
WTNM
MPED
MPWD
DSW_ADU
POD3
PPD2
APPD1
HL3_U
TH3_FU
PPD1
HL2_L
TH2_FU
PS UNIT
HL1_U
TH1_FU
FUSER UNIT
ADMH
FUM
POFM_R
TFD2
POM
POFM_F
POD2
POD1
DERIVERY UNIT
DSW_F
OPTION
MC
CSS1
1TC
DSW_C
CSPD1
CPED1
CLUD1
CPFD1
PAPER FEED 1
UNIT
DVTYP_C
TCS_C
DV_C UNIT
DL_C
DVM_K
TNM_C
DVCRUM_C
SPFM
STRC
SPPD4
TONER_C UNIT
SPPD5
SPOM
SRRBC
CSS2
OZFM
CSPD2
CPED2
CLUD2
CPFD2
SPFC
STRRC
SPPD1
AC IN
HL
PWB
DVTYP_Y
TCS_Y
DV_Y UNIT
DL_Y
DVM_CL
TNM_Y
DVCRUM_Y
T ONER_Y UNIT
SPPD2
PAPER FEED 2
UNIT
DVTYP_M
TCS_M
DV_M UNIT
DL_M
DHPD_CL
DM_CL
TNM_M
DVCRUM_M
T ONER_M UNIT
SPPD3
SPUM
STRRBC
SPRANDOM
MSW
PSFM
SLUM
STUD
AC
PWB
DCPS
PCU
PWB
DRIVER SUB
PWB
There is a standards
setting model
Only Japan
ROCD
SOCD
STLD
OPTION
WH
PWB
DHSW
MFPC
PWB
DESK
LSUSS
HDD
DH1
HDDFM
DH_LCC
FAX 2
EFI
OCSW
MIM
ORS_LED
PNC
SPWS
SPLS2
SPLS1
SPFC
SPPD3
SPPD2
SPPD1
USB HUB
OPTION
LSU CNT
PWB
LSU UNIT
DHS1
LVDS
PWB
OPE
PWB
PGM
LD_Y
PWB
LD_M
PWB
LD_C
PWB
LD_K
PWB
POWER SW
PWB
INVERTER
PWB
OPERATION UNIT
OPTION
AUDITOR
OPTION
RSPF
PWB
SPPD5
SPPD4
STMPS
OPTION
FIN 1K
OPTION
CPUFM
FIN INNER
SCNC
PWB
SPRM
SPFM
SGS
RSPF UNIT
OPTION
LCC
MHPS
CCD
PWB
CL INVERTER
PWB
CL
CARD
READER
OPTION
SCANNER UNIT
CL INVERTER
PWB
CL
SPED2
SPED1
COINVENDER
DH_DESK
SCN IN
PWB
DOCC
PWB
OPTION
MOTHER
PWB
DSPFcntPWB
CCD
PWB
SCOV
SPLS2
SPLS1
OPTION
If DOCC PWB
is used,
replace it with
SCN IN PWB.
FAX 1
OPTION
DSPF DRIVER
PWB
STMPS
OPTION
BD_K
PWB
TH1_LSU
ORS_PD
LCD
TOUCH
PANEL
SRRC
SPED
SCOV
SOCD
MX3500N
[11]
ELECTRICAL SECTION
Service Manual
1. Block diagram
ATA
connector
IDE bus
IDE
ASIC
DDR bus 2
SYSAD bus
32bits width
SYSTEM
ASIC
VIDEOIF
SCAN OUT IF
LSU IF
ICU
ASIC
SCAN IN IF
Patch
I2C(Ch.0)
USB
DEV
USB
HOST
IF
ASIC
USB-H
I2C
PCU
SCN
FAX 1st
UART
FLASH
IO
EXPAND
USB-D
IMG-A Bus
(Auto Color)
FLASH IF
LOCAL bus
(LSI bus)
EEPROM
2Kbits
Control
signals
OPE IF
FAX
2nd
UART
SDR
SDR
SDRAM
SRAM
Ether
MAC
MicroWire
LOCAL bus
(ROM bus)
RTC
72pinDIMM Socket
EEPROM
2Kbits
RIC
(RS232C)
IMG
ASIC
244/
245
Expansion
PCI connector
LAN
ICU-IMG IF
I2C (Ch.1)
VBUS
SW
LAN
JACK
EFI connector
PCI bus 1
Piano
SW
IMG-B Bus
(Image process)
IMG-C Bus
(Image process)
574
X5
EEPROM
256Kbits
LVDS
PCI bus 2
DDR bus 1
64bits width
LVDSIC
385/386/047/048
SO-DIMM
DIMM2
SO-DIMM
DIMM1
DDR bus 3
64bits width
ENGINE IF
connector
UART
for Debug
SO-DIMM
DIMM3
SO-DIMM
DIMM4
DDR
SDRAMx2
CPU
RM7065C
RM7965
72pinDIMM Socket
FLASH
Mem.x2
RS232C
Transceiver
UART
72pinDIMM Socket
100pinDIMM Socket
Battery
X1
Xtal
19.6608MHz
UART
UART
To
MFPC
Via
Mother
To
LSU
Via
Mother
UART
UART
UART
LCC
FINISHER
DESK
Optional
FW
DC Power
Supply
IC2
Spread
Spectrum
IC4
RESETIC
IC1
CPU
H8S/ 2373
IC7
DFF
LCX574
IC73
Analog
MUX
RD I/ F PWB
Analog I nput
Analog I nput
DSW_ADU/ TFD3 /
MPLD/ MTOP1/ MTOP2/ MPED
Sensor Input
THOPEN_UM/ LM/ US
Sensor Input
CRUM
CRUM_K/C/M/Y
Syncronous Motor
HV
MC / TC unit
Fuser unit
HL control
HL_UM/ LM/ US
Sensor Input
PPD2
MUX
HC151
I2C Bus
IC9
PMC ASIC
IC71
D/ A Conv
(TCS/ REGS cont)
IC8
I/ O A SIC
IC5
SRAM
(1Mbit)
FLASH ROM
(16Mbit)
Flash Write Protect
IC6
EEPROM
(64kbit)
CLOCK
DATABus[15:0]
AddressBus[20:0]
I2C Bus
3- wired serial
PWM
MUX
HC151
DC Motor Control
Lift Up Motor
(CLUM1/CLUM2)
DC Motor
Toner Motor
(TNM_K/C/M/Y)
Waste Toner Motor(WTNM)
Syncronous Motor
DVSET (K/C/M/Y)
DRDET (K/C/M/Y)
Sensor Input
Sensor Input
PNC_K /
PNC_CL
Load output
Mechanical
Counter
(Optional)
Sensor Input
COIN VENDOR
(Optional)
CV_CLCOPY /
CV_COPY
Drum Lamp
(DL_K/C/M/Y)
PS FAN (PSFM) /
Ozone FAN(OZFM) /
Pout FAN
(POFM_F/ POFM_R)
DV Motor BK(DVM_K)/
DV Motor CL(DVM_CL)
Paper Feed Motor(CPFM)
CSS11- 14 / CSS21- 24
POD1
APPD1 / APPD2
Sensor Input
C. PCU PWB
RSPF Unit
MHPS
RSPF FEED
MOTOR
LAMP UN
SCANNER
MOTOR
PANEL PCB
INVERTER PCB
LCD
LVDS
PHOTO
SENSOR
LVDS Receiver
30bit
LVDS Driver
4bit *2
SCNcntPWB
LVDS
RSPF RVS
MOTOR
LVDS Receiver
4bit * 2
LVDS Driver
30bit
CCD PCB
RGB10bit*3
CLUTCH
CPU
H8S/ 2373
STMP UN
XTAL
19.6608MHz
SRAM
1Mbit
/ CS2
SCAN ASIC
/ CS3
SDRAM BUS
SDRAM
128Mbit
EEPROM
32Kbit
I2C
FlashROM<Socket>
8Mbit
/ CS0
(/ CS0 RESERVE
)
RGB8bit *3
XTAL
28.795MHz
or 22.7425MHz
IO ASIC
/CS5
LVDS
24bit BUS
BUFFER
RGB8bit*3
CPT ASIC
/ CS4
24bit BUS
BUFFER
RGB8bit*3
LVDS Receiver
28bit
LVDS Driver
28bit
LVDS
LVDS
LVDS Driver
28bit
DSPFcnt PCB
OCSW
AUDITOR
CARD READER
<Engine/Controller>
(MFP PCB)
Mother PCB
SCN IN PCB
Or
DOCC PCB
A[4:0]
I/O ASIC
PD65892GC103
DSR_LCC
DTR_LCC
RxD_LCC
TxD_LCC
DSR_DSK
DTR_DSK
RxD_DSK
TxD_DSK
DSR_FIN
DTR_FIN
RxD_FIN
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
PCU
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.D.
2nd FAX
(same as 1st)
(Optional)
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
Schmit Inv.
LSU ASIC
PIC
CPU
H8/3687
CPU
H8/3684
DESK
(Optional)
FINISHER
(Optional)
LSU
RxD
TxD
CPU
SH7706
LCC
(Optional)
1st FAX
(for FG Model)
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
I/O
TxD
RxD
I/O
CPU
I/O M30843FWGP
TxD
RxD
SCK
TxD
RxD
O.C
SCN Cnt
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CPU
H8S/2373
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
New
ASIC
P.D.
P.D.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
RxD_FAX(CS)+
RxD_FAX(CS)-
TxD_FAX(CS)+
TxD_FAX(CS)-
RxD_FAX(D)+
RxD_FAX(D)-
TxD_FAX(D)+
TxD_FAX(D)-
P.U.
P.U.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
DSR_SCAN
D[15:8]
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
Mother
PIC
I/O ASIC
PD65892GC
P.D.
CPU
H8S/2320
A[4:0]
DTR_SCAN
TxD
RxD
TxD
RxD
CPU
H8S/2373
Schmit Inv.
TxD
RxD4
TxD4
RxD3
TxD3
RxD2
TxD_FIN
SCK_LSU
RSV_DAT
TRANS_DAT
PCU_DTR
PCU_DSR
nPCU_TxD
O.C.
I/O
D[15:8]
CPU
H8S/2373
TxD2
SCK1
RxD1
TxD1
I/O port
I/O port
RxD0
O.C.
TxD_SCAN
P.D.
RxD_SCAN
nPCU_RxD
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
TxD0
TxD
P.U
RxD
P.D.
TxD
P.U.
RxD
P.U.
I/O
P.U
RxD
P.D.
DOCC
(Optional)
O.C
O.C
O.C
P.U.
LVDS
P.U.
P.U.
O.C
Schmit Inv.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
P.U.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
DSR_FAX(CS)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(CS)
DSR_FAX(D)
P.D.
DTR_FAX(D)
RxD_FAX(CS)
REQ_PIC
CLR_PIC
nRxD_PIC
nTxD_PIC
CTS_SCN
RTS_SCN
nRxD_SCN
nTxD_SCN
TxD_FAX(CS)
RxD_FAX(D)
TxD_FAX(D)
MFPC
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
P.D.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
O.C.
Schmit Inv.
CTS[4]
RTS[4]
CTS[3]
RTS[3]
RxD[4]
TxD[4]
RxD[3]
TxD[3]
MFPC
I/F ASIC
REQ[PIC]
CLR[PIC]
RxD[PIC]
TxD[PIC]
CTS[2]
RTS[2]
RxD[2]
TxD[2]
RTS[1]
CTS[1]
TxD[1]
RxD[1]
E. Serial communication
AC IN
WH-SW
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
15A 250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
RY1
A2
NO
NC
WH PWB
A1
no-mounting
VR3
10W
5W
LCC
DESK
10W
10W
MAIN UNIT
SCN
OPTION
LCC
OPTION
DESK
VR2
nomounting
MAIN UNIT
OPTION
SCN unit
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
F3
WH-N
MAIN POWER SW
HL PWB
FUSING UNIT
L2
L1
TD1
HL MAIN
T2
T1
SSR1
2
1
GND
HLOUT_UM
15A/125V
F102
TD2
HL LOW
T2
T1
N/F
Z101
drawer
SSR2
/HL_PR
D101
1
GND
FW
Generating
Circuit
F101
T1AH/250V
INT24V1
+
~
AC PWB
DC POWER SUPPLY
HLOUT_LM
F301
HL E
T2
T1
T8AH/250V
F103
T5AH/250V
TD3
SSR3
2
1
GND
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
THERMOSTAT TS_E
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
HLOUT_US
RY1
AC IN
WH-SW
24V2
GND
WH-L
WH-N
T10AH/250V
F2
T10AH/250V
F1
VR1
A1
no-mounting
RY1
A2
NO
NC
WH PWB
A1
no-mounting
VR3
10W
5W
LCC
DESK
10W
10W
MAIN UNIT
SCN
OPTION
LCC
OPTION
DESK
VR2
nomounting
MAIN UNIT
OPTION
SCN unit
WH-L
T2.0AH/250V
F3
WH-N
T2.0AH/250V
F4
MAIN POWER SW
HL PWB
FUSING UNIT
L2
10mH
3A
L1
TD1
HL MAIN
T2
T1
SSR1
2
1
GND
N/F
HLOUT_UM
T8AH/250V
F102
DC POWER SUPPLY
TD2
HL LOW
T2
T1
~
6
drawer
SSR2
/HL_PR
INT24V1
FW
Generating
Circuit
F101
T3.15AH/250V
Z101
D102
+
~
AC PWB
Reactor
GND
F301
HLOUT_LM
HL E
T2
T1
T6.3AH/250V
F103
T3.15AH/250V
TD3
SSR3
1
2
GND
THERMOSTAT TS_UM
THERMOSTAT TS_LM
THERMOSTAT TS_E
Voltage
Generation
+24V1
+24V2
+24V3
+24V4
+24V5
+12V
+5Vn
+3.3V
Voltage
Generation
+ 5Vo
+ 5VL
HLOUT_US
RY1
FUSE
FUSE
PSU
FUSE
F204
FUSE
F205
FUSE
F202
F203
F201
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V5
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
24V2
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
D-GND
D-GND
MFPC PWB
12V
5VL
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
5VL
5VL
5VO
D-GND
12V
24V3
P-GND
5V_LD
24V2
P-GND
INT24V1
/INT_CNT
INT24V2
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
/INT_CNT
INT24V1
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
24V3
P-GND
P-GND
FW
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
12V
24V1
5VN
MOTHER PWB
FET
12V
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
LCC
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LD_C
LD_Y
D-GND
INT24V1
SCAN IN PWB or
DOCUMENT CONTROL PWB
LD_M
INT24V1
PSM
5VN
5VNPD
D-GND
FUM
P-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
INT24V2
RD I/F PWB
LSUSS_C
option
LSUSS_B
1stTC PWB
DVM_BK
PSFM
DM_CL
option
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
DESK
ADULM
2ndTC PWB
D-GND
PFM
POM
5VO
PM
LD_BK
MC PWB
DVM_CL
DM_BK
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
5VO
FINISHER
24V3
P-GND
D-GND
5V_LD
INT24V2
P-GND
P-GND
INT24V2
5VNPD
P-GND
5VN
INT24V1
P-GND
VN
INT24V1
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
LSU
PWB
TEL
LIU
PWB
INT24V1
24V3
P-GND
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
12V
3.3V
5VS
5V
D-GND
A-GND
5V_LD
24V5
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
FAX
MAIN
PWB
FDSW
RDSW
OSM
INT24V2
24V3
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
D-GND
HDD
12V
P-GND
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
INT24V1
P-GND
INT24V2
D-GND
5V_LD
AC PWB
PCU PWB
24V1
24V2
5VNPD
5VN
INT24V1
P-GND
SCAN CNT
PWB
INT24V1
5VN
5VO
3.3V
D-GND
5V
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
24V1
24V
P-GND
A12V
A5V
A3.3V
D-GND
KEY OP
PWB
ORS PD
PWB
option
CARD READER
ORS LED
PWB
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
CCD PWB
5VN
D-GND
N_HL(SUB)
N_HL(LOW)
N_HL(MAIN)
HL PWB
HL_PR
24V_EXT
P-GND
3.3V_EXT
D-GND
24V_EXT
P-GND
5V_EXT
AVCC
5VPD
D-GND
CL
LVDS
PWB
HL(MAIN)
option
RSPF UN
24V
P-GND
3.3V
D-GND
HL(LOW)
INVERTOR
PWB
LCD PWB
HL(SUB)
CN4
1
WH_N(LSU)
WH_N(DESK/LCC)
2
NC
3
WH_L(DESK/LCC)
4
WH_L(LSU)
5
B4P(5-3)-VH
CN3
WH-N(DESK1)
1
NC
2
WH-L(DESK1)
3
B2P3-VH
CN2
WH-N(SCAN)
1
NC
2
WH-L(SCAN)
3
B2P3VH-BL
WH PWB
CN1
WH-L
1
2
NC
WH-N
3
B2P3-VH-R
CN5
D-GND
1
NC
2
24V2
3
B03B-PH-K-R
L_WH
PS-187
PS-187
L_WH
(AC-WH harness
HL PWB
P
2
1
JPN:STANDARD
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
EL 2PIN
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
WH_SW
AC PWB
SCANNER UNIT
(AC-WH harness
R
2
1
EL 2PIN
WH-N(SCAN)
WH-L(SCAN)
P
2
1
P
2
1
CN2(B03P-VL-K)
MSW-Nout
1
NC
2
MSW-Lout
3
CN3(B03P-VL-R)
MSW-Lin
1
NC
2
MSW-Nin
3
CN4(B3P4-VH-R)
L_DC
1
NC
2
NC
3
N_DC
4
CN10(B4P-PH-K-S)
24V2
1
NC
2
NC
3
D-GND
4
(SCN-WH harness )
R
EL 2PIN
2
WH-N(SCAN)
1
WH-L(SCAN)
CN5(B03P-VL-E)
1
L_HL
2
NC
3
N_HL
CN1(B03P-VL)
1
L_IN
2
NC
3
N_IN
CN6(B2P3-VH-R)
1
N_WH
2
NC
3
L_WH
To P15, P15-1
(SCN-WH harness)
R
2
1
CN1
L_HL
1
NC
2
N_HL
3
B03P-VL
(AC-HL harness)
(AC CORD)
MSW
JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
JPN:OPTION
EX100V:OPTION
EX120V:OPTION
EX200V:OPTION
WH
(AC-DC harness)
(MSW harness)
MSW-Nout
1
PS-250(RED)
MSW-Lout
1
PS-250(RED)
MSW-Lin
1
PS-250
MSW-Nin
1
PS-250
CN4(B6P-VH-B)
5VN
1
5VN
2
5VN
3
5VN
4
D-GND
5
D-GND
6
CN3(B03P-VH-B)
3.3V
1
3.3V
2
D-GND
3
TO LCC(P15)
PSU FAN
CN8(B7P-VH-B)
NC(24V1)
1
24V1
2
24V2
3
24V3
4
24V3
5
24V4
6
24V5
7
CN7(B8P-VH-B)
FW
1
P-GND
2
P-GND
3
P-GND
4
NC(P-GND)
5
P-GND
6
P-GND
7
NC(P-GND)
8
CN5(B04P-VH-B)
12V
1
12V
2
NC
3
NC
4
TO INSERTOR(P16)
TO LCC(P15)
To P2
TO LCC(P15)
TO INSERTOR(P16)
TO LCC(P15)
TO INSERTOR(P16)
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
3
PSFM_V
2
2
PSCF_LD
3
1
P-GND
To P2
CN2(B5P-VH-B)
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
5VO
3
5VL
4
5VL
5
DC PWB
CN1(B2P3-VH-B)
3
L_DC
2
NC
1
N_DC
CN6(B03B-PASK-1)
DCCNT1
1
NC
2
DCCNT2
3
NAME
5VL
5VO
5VN
24V1
24V2
24V3
24V4
24V5
MFP
FAX
OTHER
ENGINE
ENGINE
ENGINE
LCC,DESK
FINISHER
PCU PWB
CN3
1
24V1
2
P-GND
3
24V2
4
P-GND
5
24V3
6
D-GND
7
12V
8
D-GND
9
5VN
10
NC(D-GND)
11
3.3V
12
FW
B12B-XL
MOTHER PWB
CN19(B10P-VH)
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
5VL
4
5VL
5
5VO
6
3.3V
7
5VN
8
12V
9
24V3
10
P-GND
CN20(B4P-PH-K-S)
1
NC
2
NC
3
n DCCNT1
4
n DCCNT2
7 : Feb. 15 2007
FRONT
PNC(BLACK)
24V3
/PNC
179228-2
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
DSW-R
24V1
DSW_R(24V)
PS-187-2V
P
1
2
PSU
OPTION
1
2
TNM
1TNFD
D-GND
6-179228-2
1TNFD
DSW-F
DSW_R(24V)
PS-187
DSW_F(24V)
SPS-51T-187
CN1
1
2
R
1
2
1
/LED3
2
/LED2
3
/LED1
4
KEY6
KEY5
5
KEY4
6
KEY3
7
KEY2
8
KEY1
9
OP_SET
10
D-GND
11
5VN
12
5VN
13
LCDD7
14
LCDD6
15
LCDD5
16
LCDD4
17
LCDD3
18
LCDD2
19
LCDD1
20
LCDD0
21
LCD_E
22
/OP_RW
23
LCD_CS
24
PRINTER OP PWB
(PRINTER MODEL ONLY)
AC PWB
To P3
SM18PIN
24V3
/PNC_CL
1TNFD
D-GND
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
24V3
/PNC
WEB_INL
RTH_1CS_IN
D-GND
TH_UM_IN
TH_US_IN
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
WEB-END
NC
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
CN8
24V2
24V2
INT24V2
P-GND
INT24V1in
/INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B
EL2P
DSW_R(24V)
DSW_F(24V)
P
1
2
(PRT OP FFC)
6
7
1
2
3
5
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R
1
2
To P14
To P3
To P3
To P14
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
CN2
1
5VNPD
2
P-GND
3
INT24V1
5
INT24V2
6
P-GND
INT24V1in
4
7
/INT_CNT
B7P-VH-B
B12B-XL
24V3
16
15
/PNC
B30B-PHDSS-B
17
18
CN4
24V1
1
DSW_R(24V)
2
DSW_R(24V)
3
4
DSW_F(24V)
5
INT24V1
6
P-GND
7
5VN
B7P-VH-B
24
/LED3
23
/LED2
22
/LED1
21
KEY6
KEY5
20
19
KEY4
18
KEY3
17
KEY2
16
KEY1
15
OP_SET
14
D-GND
13
5VN
12
5VN
11
LCDD7
10
LCDD6
9
LCDD5
8
LCDD4
7
LCDD3
6
LCDD2
5
LCDD1
LCDD0
4
3
LCD_E
2
/OP_RW
1
LCD_CS
T24FAZ-SMT
CN8
PCU PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
THERMOSTAT
VL
THERMOSTAT
YL
4
3
2
1
1
2
PHNR-4-H +
BU04P-TR-P-H
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
WEB-END
D-GND
1
2
3
4
(WEB-END harness)
PHNR-2-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
TH_E_IN
1
D-GND
1
2
3
4
1
2
4
3
2
1
2
1
YL
SRA-01T-3.2
CRU model
2
6
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-8
A-9
A-10
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
B-9
SPS-51T-187
PHNR-4-H +
BU04P-TR-P-H
TH_UM_IN
TH_UMCS_IN
D-GND
NC
PHNR-2-H +
BU02P-TR-P-H
TH_US_IN
D-GND
P
SPS-51T-187
YL
(Harness CJ between TS-HL LOW)
SPS-51T-187
SPS-51T-187
SRA-01T-3.2
PHNR-2-H +
(WEB-INIT harness) BU02P-TR-P-H
WEB_INL
1
2
1
D-GND
2
SPS-51T-187 SPS-51T-187
(Harness CJ between TS-HL SUB)
(CRU model)
WEB-INL
RTH(SUB)
SRA-01T-3.2
WEB-END
SRA-01T-3.2
RTH(LOW)
RTH(EXTERNAL)
RTH(MAIN)
HL LOW
HL E
THERMOSTAT
SPS-61T-250
(Harness between TS-HL MAIN)
SPS-51T-187
HL MAIN
A1
B9 A2
B8 A3
B7 A4
B6 A5
B5 A6
B4 A7
B3 A8
B2 A9
B1 A10
B-9
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-2
B-1
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
A-10
TH_E_IN
A-9
NC
A-8
NC
A-7
NC
A-6
NC
A-5
NC
A-4
NC
A-3
D-GND
A-2
WEB_INL
A-1
CZHR 9PIN
CZHR 10PIN
TH_UM_IN
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
WEB-END
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
Drawer RWZ
N-HL(MAIN)
N-HL(E)
N-HL(LOW)
L-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(E)
L-HL(LOW)
DF11-6DP-SP1
To P2
1
2
3
4
5
6
SPS-51T-187
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
B9
B8
B7
B6
B5
B4
B3
B2
B1
SPS-61T-250
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SM18PIN
24V3
/PNC_CL
1TNFD
D-GND
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
24V3
/PNC
WEB_INL
TH_E_IN
D-GND
TH_UM_IN
TH_US_IN
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
TH_UMCS_IN
WEB-END
NC
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CN3
1
L-HL(MAIN)
2
N-HL(LOW)
3
N-HL(E)
B03P-VL-R
CN2
N-HL(MAIN)
1
2
L-HL(E)
3
L-HL(LOW)
B03P-VL-K
/HL_PR
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_US
D-GND
INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-S
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
To P2
To P4
To P2
To P2
HL PWB
CN9
1TNFD
1
D-GND
2
3
NC
NC
4
NC
5
NC
6
7
NC
NC
8
9
5VLED
5VLED
10
11
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
12
13
GND
D-GND
14
/PNC
15
24V3
16
WTNM_1
17
WTNM_2
18
19
NC
NC
20
WEB_INL
21
WEB-END
22
NC
23
D-GND
24
TH_UM_IN
25
26
D-GND
TH_US_IN
27
RTH_1CS_IN
28
TH_LM_IN
29
30 TH_UMCS_IN
B30B-PHDSS-B
PCU PWB
CN13(FROM - P13)
24V3
31
/PNC_CL
32
CN34
1
INT24V1
INT24V2
2
3
D-GND
P-GND
4
/HL_PR
5
6
/TC_CLK#
7
HLOUT_UM
/TC_DATA#
8
9
HLOUT_US
/TC_LD#
10
11
HLOUT_LM
12
/HV_REM#
NC
13
NC
14
NC
15
NC
16
DRMCL_A
17
DRMCL_B
18
/DRMCL_A
19
/DRMCL_B
20
/DRMCL_CNT
21
/DRMBK_CNT
22
DRMBK_A
23
DRMBK_B
24
/DRMBK_A
25
/DRMBK_B
26
27
/BK_EN
/CLC_EN
28
29
/CLM_EN
/CLY_EN
30
BTMA
31
BTMB
32
/BTMA
33
/BTMB
34
BTM_CNT
35
/ADMHC
36
ADMHA
37
ADMHB
38
ADMHXA
39
40
ADMHXB
B40B-PADSS-B
To P14
To P4
To P4
To P4
To P4
To P4
To P4
7 : Feb. 15 2007
(Primary transfer
output harness)
1TC-K
SPS-01T-187
1TC-C
SPS-01T-187
1TC-M
SPS-01T-187
1TC-Y
SPS-01T-187
1TC-K
1TC-K
PS-187
VHR-2N
1TC-C
1TC-CMY
PS-250(BLUE)
FPS-187(RED)
1TC-M
PS-250(RED) HVR PWB
1TC-Y
PS-250(YELLOW)
MC-C
PS-187
MC-M
PS-187
MC-M
PS-187
MC-Y
PS-187
MC-Y
PS-187
MC-K
PS-187
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VLED
179228-3
1
2
3
MC-CMY
PS-250
BS-Y
(SPRING)
BS-Y
(MC harness)
(MC interface
harness)
MC PWB
2nd TC
PWB
1st TC PWB
BS-M
GB-Y
(SPRING)
GB-M
BS-M
(SPRING)
BS-C
(SPRING)
GB-M
(SPRING)
GB-C
(SPRING)
BS-C
(SPRING)
BS-K
GB-Y
BS-K
GB-C
(SPRING)
GB-K
2-TC
PS-187
CLR
MC-K
PS-250(RED)
GB-K
(MC-BK harness)
(MC interface
harness)
2-TC
PS-187(BLUE)
1
2
3
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
D-GND
5VLED
179228-3
1TUD_K
CN1
HV_REM
1
MC_YMC
2
1TC_K
3
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_CL
5
P-GND
6
INT24V2
7
B7P-PH-K-S
CN2
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
1TC_CL
3
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_K
5
MC_YMC
6
HV_REM
7
B7P-PH-K-S
CN1
6
INT24V2
5
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
4
/HV_CLK#
3
/HV_LD1#
2
1
HV_REM#
B6P-PH-K-S
CN1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/TC_CLK#
4
/TC_DATA#
3
/TC_LD#
5
/HV_REM#
6
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
NC
INT24V2
AC PWB
To P14
To P1
To P14
To P1
To P14
To P1
To P14
To P12
To P12
B3P-PH-K-S
CN9
1
2
3
To P10
3
D-GND
1
2
2
1TUD_CL
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
3
D-GND
2
1TUD_K
2
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
CN26
APPD1
1
2
APPD2
3
24V3
4
/MPFS
5
/MPGS
6
/MPUC
/ADUGS
7
8
D-GND
9
5VN
10
SIN3
11
MPFD
12
SELIN2
13
SELIN1
14
POD3
15
SELIN3
16
MPWD
17
TH_M
18
P-GND
19
HUD_M
20
P-GND
21
/HV_DATA#
22
/HV_CLK#
23
/HV_LD1#
24
HV_REM#
25
P-GND
26
P-GND
27
0ZFM_V
28
PSFM_V
29
/0ZFM_CNT
30
PSCF_LD
31
OZFM_LD
32
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
TNM_Y
1
2
3
R
INT24V1
LOCK
/PCSFM
SM3P
3
INT24V1
1
2
LOCK
2
1
/PCSFM
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03-TR-P-H
1
2
3
P
SM2P
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
SM2P
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
SM2P
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
SM2P
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
1TURC
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
Toner
cooling fan
D-GND
1
2
DHPD_K
3
5VLED
S3B-PH-K-S
1
D-GND
2
DHPD_CL
3
5VLED
S3B-PH-K-S
TNM_M
DHPD_K
DHPD_CL
TNM_C
TNM_K
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
1
2
R
INT24V1
/PCSFM
SM2P
DF11-4DP-SP1
(DC main harness)
1
2
P
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
24V3
2
1
1
2
/1TURC
DHPD_CL
5VLED
D-GND
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
31
29
23
7
8
13
25
26
27
28
B32B-PHDSS-B
B26B-PHDSS-B
B32B-PHDSS-B
24V3
/1TURC
DHPD_K
5VLED
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
16
14
32
30
5
3
9
11
1
15
17
19
21
22
24
18
20
CN12
INT24V2
6
P-GND
4
10 /DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
12
DVM_K_LD
2
9
10
2
4
1
3
5
7
PCU PWB
CRM_Y_DT#
6
CRM_Y_CK#
8
B10B-PHDSS-B
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
CN5
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
9
10
P
7
8
5
6
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
SM10P
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
9
10
R
7
8
5
6
1
2
3
4
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-6DP-SP1
(CRUM harness)
5
4
3
1
2
6
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
2
3
4
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5
4
3
1
2
6
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CRUM(YELLOW)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_Y_DT#
3
CRM_Y_CK#
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
CRUM(MAGENTA)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_M_DT#
3
CRM_M_CK#
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
CRUM(CYAN)
2
5V_CRUM
CRM_C_DT#
4
3
CRM_C_CK#
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
CRUM(BLACK)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_K_DT#
3
CRM_K_CK#
1
D-GND
TSR-04V-K
7 : Feb. 15 2007
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
PHR-6
BTM_B//
INT24V1
BTM_B/
BTM_A/
INT24V1
BTM_A//
PHR-6
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
DMBK
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
SM6
DMBKA//
DMBKA/
DMBKB/
DMBKB//
INT24V1
INT24V1
PSM
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
INT24V1
PSMA/
PSMB/
PSMA//
PSMB//
INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-R
1
2
3
4
5
6
To P11
CN5
1
PSMA/
2
PSMA//
3
PSMB//
4
PSMB/
5
INT24V1
6
INT24V1
7
ADMLA/
8
ADMLA//
9
ADMLB//
10
ADMLB/
11
INT24V1
12
INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
SUB PWB
CN5
1
DMCLA/
2
DMCLA//
3
DMCLB//
4
DMCLB/
5
INT24V1
6
INT24V1
7
DMBKA/
8
DMBKA//
9
DMBKB//
10
DMBKB/
11
INT24V1
INT24V1
12
B12B-PH-K-S
CN1
1
BTM_A/
2
BTM_A//
3
BTM_B//
4
BTM_B/
5
INT24V1
INT24V1
6
B6B-PH-K-S
7 : Feb. 15 2007
YELLOW
MAGENTA
CYAN
BLACK
23
24V2
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
B40B-PADSS-B
DL_Y#
22
D-GND
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
24
DL_M#
D-GND
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
DL_C#
D-GND
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
21
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
DL_BK#
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
D-GND
CN15
PCU PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
POLYGON MOTOR
/BREAK
1
POLYCLK
2
/LOCK
3
/START
4
P-GND
5
24V1
6
PHR-6
LD PWB(MAGENTA)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_M
8
/ENB_M
7
DT_M6
DT_M+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_M
3
LDCHK_M
2
n LDERR_M
1
PHR-10
LD PWB(BLACK)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_K
8
/ENB_K
7
DT_K6
DT_K+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_K
3
SK_K
2
n LDERR_K
1
PHR-10
BD PWB
4
D-GND
3
n BD
2
D-GND
1
5VN
B4P-PH-K-R
4
3
2
1
LD PWB(YELLOW)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_Y
8
/ENB_Y
7
DT_Y6
DT_Y+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_Y
3
LDCHK_Y
2
n LDERR_Y
1
PHR-10
LD PWB(CYAN)
D-GND
10
INT5V
9
/SH_C
8
/ENB_C
7
DT_C6
DT_C+
5
D-GND
4
Vref_C
3
LDCHK_C
2
n LDERR_C
1
PHR-10
LSU TH1
D-GND
LSUTH1
NC
NC
PHR-4
LSU FAN
(LSU-LD harness)
(LSU-LD harness)
(LSU-BD harness)
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
LSUTH1
NC
B7P-PH-K-S
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
B34B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
CN8
6
/BREAK
5
POLYCLK
4
/LOCK
3
/START
2
P-GND
1
24V1
B6P-PH-K-S
CN2
1
24V1
2
n FANRDY
3
P-GND
B3P-PH-K-S
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
CN1
3
D-GND
1
INT5V
5
/SH_K
7
/ENB_K
6
DT_K4
DT_K+
D-GND
2
Vref_K
8
10
SK_K
9
n LDERR_K
11
LSUTH2
D-GND
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
CN4
3
D-GND
1
INT5V
/SH_C
5
/ENB_C
7
DT_C6
DT_C+
4
D-GND
2
Vref_C
8
LDCHK_C
10
n LDERR_C
9
CN6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
LSU
PWB
LSUSS_B
CN5
INT5V
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
n SCK_LSU
4
n TRANS_DATA
5
D-GND
6
LSUASIC_RST
7
8
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
9
JOBEND_INT
10
LSUTH1
11
LSUTH2
12
VSYNC_K_N
13
VSYNC_K_P
14
VSYNC_C_P
15
VSYNC_C_N
16
VSYNC_M_N
17
VSYNC_M_P
18
VSYNC_Y_P
19
VSYNC_Y_N
20
S20B-PHDSS-B
CN3
CH0_N
1
2
CH0_P
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
5
CH1_N
6
CH1_P
7
CH2_N
CH2_P
8
9
D-GND
D-GND
10
CLCLK_N
11
CLCLK_P
12
CH3_N
13
CH3_P
14
D-GND
15
D-GND
16
HSYNC_LSU_N 17
HSYNC_LSU_P
18
D-GND
19
D-GND
20
ECLK_LSU_P 21
ECLK_LSU_N 22
S22B-PHDSS-B
CN9
D-GND
1
3.3V
2
D-GND
3
5VN
4
24V1
5
P-GND
6
S06B-XASK-1
1
2
P
INT24V1
/LSUSS_B
SM2P
CN10
1
INT24V1
2
NC
3
NC
4
/LSUSS_B
5
NC
B5P-PH-K-S
B22B-PHDSS-B
CN13
1
INT5V
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
n SCK_LSU
4
n TRANS_DATA
5
D-GND
6
LSUASIC_RST
7
n RSV_DAT
8
n TRANS_RST
9
JOBEND_INT
10
LSUTH1
11
LSUTH2
12
VSYNC_K_N
13
VSYNC_K_P
14
VSYNC_C_P
15
VSYNC_C_N
16
VSYNC_M_N
17
VSYNC_M_P
18
VSYNC_Y_P
19
VSYNC_Y_N
20
B20B-PHDSS-B
CN14
CH0_N
1
CH0_P
2
D-GND
3
D-GND
4
CH1_N
5
CH1_P
6
CH2_N
7
CH2_P
8
D-GND
9
D-GND
10
CLCLK_N
11
CLCLK_P
12
CH3_N
13
CH3_P
14
D-GND
15
D-GND
16
17 HSYNC_LSU_N
18 HSYNC_LSU_P
D-GND
19
D-GND
20
21 ECLK_LSU_P
22 ECLK_LSU_N
CN21
1
2
3
4
5
6
PCU PWB
MOTHER PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
CS2
PAPER
FEED
UN
CS1
PAPER
FEED
UN
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
1
CPED2
2
5VNPD
3
PHNR-03-H
CPED2
D-GND
1
CPFD2
2
5VN
3
PHNR-03-H
CPFD2
NC
D-GND
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
S6P-PH-K-S
CSS1
1
D-GND
2
CPED1
3
5VNPD
PHNR-03-H
CPED1
D-GND
1
CPFD1
2
5VN
3
PHNR-03-H
CPFD1
1
2
3
4
5
6
NC
D-GND
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
S6P-PH-K-S
CSS2
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
1
2
3
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
CSPD2
5VNPD
PHR-3
1
2
3
CSPD2
PHNR-9-H +
BU09P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
D-GND
CSPD1
5VNPD
PHR-3
CSPD1
PHNR-12-H +
BU12P-TR-P-H
7
D-GND
8
CPFD1
9
5VN
1
D-GND
CLUD1
2
5VNPD
3
4
D-GND
CPED1
5
5VNPD
6
10
D-GND
11
DSW_C
12
5VN
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
2
4
6
10
12
14
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
8
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
2
4
6
10
12
14
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
8
CN4
3
D-GND
20
5VN
1
D-GND
5VNPD
18
2
D-GND
19
5VNPD
4
D-GND
21
5VN
9
D-GND
26
5VNPD
D-GND
10
11
D-GND
27
5VNPD
28
5VNPD
29
5VNPD
30
5VNPD
12
D-GND
13
D-GND
14
D-GND
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
17
D-GND
7
D-GND
24
5VN
5
D-GND
22
5VNPD
6
D-GND
23
5VNPD
8
D-GND
25
5VNPD
B30B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
CN6
1
CPFD1
3
CLUD1
5
CPED1
7
DSW_C
9
CSPD1
21
CPWD11
23
CPWD12
11
CSS1
10
CSS2
2
CPFD2
4
CLUD2
6
CPED2
8
CSPD2
22
CPWD21
24
CPWD22
13
CSS11
15
CSS12
17
CSS13
19
CSS14
12
CSS21
14
CSS22
16
CSS23
18
CSS24
20
NC
B24B-PHDSS-B
PCU
7 : Feb. 15 2007
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
PHR-6
CPFC2
CPFC1
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
/CPUC2
2
24V3
1
1
2
1
2
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
/CPUC1
2
24V3
1
1
2
CPFC
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
/CPFC
2
24V3
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P
To P11
To P4
CN1
1
PSFMA/
2
PSFMA//
3
PSFMB//
4
PSFMB/
5
INT24V1
6
INT24V1
B6B-PH-K-S
CN17
1
/CPFM_D
2
CPFM_LD
3
NC
4
/CPFM_CK
5
P-GND
6
/CLUM1
7
P-GND
8
/CLUM2
9
P-GND
10
24V3
11
/CPFC
12
24V3
13
/CPUC1
14
24V3
/CPUC2
15
16
24V3
17
/PCSS
18
PCS_LED#
19
PCS_CL
20
REGS_F
21
PCS_K
22 REGS_F_LED#
23
5VNPD
24 REGS_R_LED#
25
D-GND
26
REGS_R
27
D-GND
28
D-GND
29
D-GND
30
D-GND
31
PPD1
32
PPD2
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1
INT24V2
2
NC
3
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
PCU PWB
AC PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
PS UN
PROCON SENSOR UN
1
2
3
4
5
6
2
1
R
2
1
P
(PS UN harness)
PROCON SENSOR UN
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
PS UN
PROCON SENSOR UN
(Process control
shutter solenoid)
PCSS
RESI SENSOR R
5VNPD
4
D-GND
3
REGS_R
2
REGS_R_LED#
1
PHR-4
PROCON SENSOR
5VNPD
5
D-GND
4
PCS_K
3
PCS_CL
2
PCS_LED#
1
PHR-5
RESI SENSOR F
5VNPD
4
D-GND
3
REGS_F
2
REGS_F_LED#
1
PHR-4
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
/PCSS
24V3
NC
NC
NC
SM18P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
P
BU06P-TR-P-H + PHNR-6-H
6
D-GND
1
5
PPD1
2
4
5VNPD
3
3
5VNPD
4
2
PPD2
5
1
D-GND
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
R
(Paper feed
main harness CJ)
6
5
4
3
2
1
DF11-6DP-SP1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
To P6
To P10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PSMA/
PSMA//
PSMB//
PSMB/
INT24V1
INT24V1
ADMLA/
ADMLA//
ADMLB//
ADMLB/
INT24V1
INT24V1
B12B-PH-K-S
CN5
CN17
1
/CPFM_D
2
CPFM_LD
3
NC
4
/CPFM_CK
5
P-GND
6
/CLUM1
7
P-GND
8
/CLUM2
9
P-GND
10
24V3
11
/CPFC
12
24V3
13
/CPUC1
14
24V3
15
/CPUC2
16
24V3
17
/PCSS
18
PCS_LED#
19
PCS_CL
20
REGS_F
21
PCS_K
REGS_F_LED#
22
23
5VNPD
24 REGS_R_LED#
25
D-GND
26
REGS_R
27
D-GND
D-GND
28
29
D-GND
30
D-GND
31
PPD1
32
PPD2
B32B-PHDSS-B
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
PCU
PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
MTOP1
D-GND
5VLED9
179228-3
1
2
3
reduction detection)
1
2
3
MTOP2
D-GND
5VLED13
179228-3
extension detection)
DF11-8DP-SP1
5VLED9
25
27
MTOP1
5VLED9
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
5VLED4
9
10
11
12
13
14
2
4
3
2
1
13
28
5VN
HUD_M
29
14
D-GND
TH_M
31
15
5VLED4
S32B-PHDSS-B
MTOP1
24
MTOP2
5VLED13
22
MTOP2
5VLED13
5VN
MPWD
19
20
10
9
5VN
MPWD
5
6
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
CN3(1/2)
4
APPD2
5
D-GND
5VLED10
6
16
13
18
3
APPD1
1
2
D-GND
2
1
5VLED5
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
179228-3
APPD1
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
179228-3
DSW_ADU
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
179228-3
POD3
CN2
1
TFD3
2
D-GND
3
5VLED1
4
POD3
5
D-GND
6
5VLED4
7
DSW_ADU
8
D-GND
9
5VLED2
10
APPD1
11
D-GND
5VLED5
12
13
NC
14
NC
15
NC
16
NC
S16B-PHDSS-B
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED7
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
HPDET
10
8
9
CN3(2/2)
1
2
3
11
12
17
21
23
26
30
32
7
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
CN1
5VN
1
D-GND
2
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
5
SELIN2
SELIN3
6
7
APPD1
APPD2
8
9
APPD3
POD3
10
11
MPFD
16
5VNPD
MPWD
13
TH_M
14
HUD_M
15
S16B-PHDSS-B
SRA-21T-4
(Right door
harness CJ)
21
6
10
7
23
8
15
31
30
14
28
13
12
5
11
16
22
24
26
27
29
S
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
24V3
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
QR/P4 32PIN
21
6
10
7
23
8
15
31
30
14
28
13
12
5
11
16
22
24
26
27
29
P
2
3
5
4
7
6
4
5
MPGS
MPFD
/MPGS
24V3
D-GND
5VLED7
9
25
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
24V3
/ADUGS
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
9
25
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
(Multi upper UN
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-H harness)
24V3
1
8
2
7
/MPFS
6
HPDET
3
MPUC
1
24V3
2
2
/MPUC
1
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
FG
1
3
5
2
4
6
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
2
24V3
1
1
/ADUGS
2
(Right paper exit/
TFD3 (Right full detection) (Right paper exit UN harness)
reverse PG interface harness CJ)
TFD3
1
6
TFD3
1
D-GND
2
5
D-GND
2
5VLED1
3
4
5VLED1
3
4
3
POD3
179228-3
2
5
D-GND
6
1
5VLED4
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP2
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
P
1
2
P
1
2
SRA-21T-4
FG
6
5
3
4
2
1
R
1
2
/MPUC
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
R
1
2
MPFD
1
D-GND
2
5VLED7
3
179228-3
(Manual feed
take-up clutch)
MPFS
PCU PWB
3
24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
/MPGS
/MPFS
POD3
MPFD
5VNPD
MPWD
TH_M
HUD_M
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
5
4
14
11
32
16
17
19
18
9
8
10
13
12
15
1
2
HPDET
D-GND
5VLED7
179228-3
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
/MPGS
2
4
5
24V3
1
1
5
5VLED7
2
D-GND
4
3
MPFD
3
1
2
3
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
DF11-6DP-SP1
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
ADU gate
solenoid
7 : Feb. 15 2007
3
2
1
(WEB motor)
WEBM
179228-3
5VNPD
HPOS
D-GND
1
2
3
HPOS(SHIFTER HP)
PHR-3
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
1
2
3
SL-2p
WEB_M1out
WEB_M2out
1
2
3
SRA-21T-3
FG
PHR-6
POMA//
INT24V1
POMB//
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
1
4
6
3
2
5
R
1
2
SRA-21T-3
FG
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SM-12p
INT24V1
P-GND
/FUMCK
/FUMD
FUMLD
NC
POMA//
INT24V1
POMB//
POMA/
INT24V1
POMB/
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
DF11-6DP-SP1
(Paper exit UN harness CJ)
DF11-8DP-SP2
DF11-4DP-SP1
OSM
(SHIFTER MOTOR)
R
5
1
2
3
4
SM-6P
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
DF11-6DP-SP1
P
5
1
2
3
4
NC
NC
10
20
P
1
2
3
4
5
21
22
23
24
25
26
18
19
10
20
16
17
12
15
14
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
SM-5p
INT24V1
P-GND
/FUMCK
/FUMD
FUMLD
ADMHA//
ADMHA/
ADMHB/
ADMHB//
INT24V1
INT24V1
CN6
1
POMA/
2
POMA//
3
POMB//
4
POMB/
5
INT24V1
6
INT24V1
7
NC
8
NC
9
NC
10
NC
11
NC
12
NC
B12B-PH-K-S
R
1
2
3
4
5
21
22
23
24
25
26
WEB_M1out
WEB_M2out
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
16
17
12
18
19
HPOS
15
POD2
13
TFD2
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
S
6
7
11
8
9
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
DF1B-26p
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
1
2
3
4
5
P
6
7
11
8
9
To P2
To P5
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
NC
WEB_M1out
WEB_M2out
LOCK
NC(24V3)
NC(/PNC_C)
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
HPOS
POD2
TFD2
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
CN2
1
ADMHA/
2
ADMHA//
3
ADMHB//
4
ADMHB/
5
INT24V1
6
INT24V1
7
N.C
B7B-PH-K-S
1
INT24V1
28
P-GND
27
/FUMCK
/FUMD
25
26
FUMLD
B32B-PHDSS-B
3
4
5
20
29
30
6
8
23
31
32
14
2
18
16
12
10
24
7
9
11
13
CN13
15
17
19
21
22
DRIVER
SUB PWB
PCU PWB
ADMHA//
ADMHA/
ADMHB/
ADMHB//
INT24V1
INT24V1
PHR-6
P
1
2
179228-3
5VNPD
POD1
D-GND
179228-3
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
4
1
2
3
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POFM 1
4
2
8
6
1
3
7
5
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD1
1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
P-GND
3
2
4
POFM_LD2
1
7 : Feb. 15 2007
CPU
FAN
CN5
SCANDATA01
SCANDATA0+
2
D-GND
3
SCANDATA14
SCANDATA1+
5
D-GND
6
SCANDATA27
SCANDATA2+
8
D-GND
9
OUT_SCANCLKOUT- 10
OUT_SCANCLKOUT+ 11
D-GND
12
SCANDATA313
SCANDATA3+ 14
D-GND
15
SCAN IN
D-GND
16
PWB
FLVPP_MFP 17
3.3V
18
or
RES_SCN
19
3.3V
20
DOCC
D-GND
21
PWB
3.3V
22
D-GND
23
3.3V
24
D-GND
25
3.3V
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
D-GND
29
D-GND
30
TX24-30R-12ST-H1
CN14
1
12V
PWM_CPUFAN
2
3
D-GND
LOCK_CPUFAN
4
B4P-PH-K-S
CN18
SCANDATA01
SCANDATA0+
2
3
D-GND
SCANDATA14
SCANDATA1+
5
6
D-GND
SCANDATA27
SCANDATA2+
8
9
D-GND
10 OUT_SCANCLKOUT11 OUT_SCANCLKOUT+
12
D-GND
SCANDATA313
14 SCANDATA3+
15
D-GND
16
D-GND
17 FLVPP_MFP
18
3.3V
19
RES_SCN
3.3V
20
21
D-GND
22
3.3V
23
D-GND
24
3.3V
25
D-GND
26
3.3V
27
5VN
28
D-GND
29
D-GND
D-GND
30
TX25-30P-12ST-H1E
(Board to Board)
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
MOTHER
PWB
CN26
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
CN2
POMA
1
POMB
2
/POMA
3
/POMB
4
/POMCNT
5
/FUM_CNT
6
FUMA
7
FUMB
8
/FUMA
9
/FUMB
10
RRM_A
11
RRM_B
12
/RRM_A
13
/RRM_B
14
/RRM_CNT
15
/PFM_CNT
16
PFM_A
17
PFM_B
18
/PFM_A
19
/PFM_B
20
ADUM_L_A
21
ADUM_L_B
22
ADUM_L_XA 23
ADUM_L_XB 24
/ADUM_L_C 25
D-GND
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
B28B-PHDSS-B
CN3
INT24V1
1
2
P-GND
3
5VNPD
B3P-VH
D-GND
FWP_PCU
PCU_RES
/MPFC_RES
/Reserve_out3
PCU_TXD
PCU_DTR
D-GND
PCU_RXD
PCU_DSR
/FAX_LED
/POF
D-GND
LSU_RST
TRANS_RST
D-GND
SCK
TRANS_DAT
D-GND
RSV_DAT
JOBEND_INT
TH1_LSU
TH2_LSU
D-GND
D-GND
INT5V
INT5V
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
CN23
POMA
1
POMB
2
/POMA
3
/POMB
4
/POMCNT
5
/FUM_CNT
6
FUMA
7
FUMB
8
/FUMA
9
/FUMB
10
RRM_A
17
RRM_B
18
/RRM_A
19
/RRM_B
20
/RRM_CNT
15
/PFM_CNT
16
PFM_A
11
PFM_B
12
/PFM_A
13
/PFM_B
14
ADUM_L_A
21
ADUM_L_B
22
ADUM_L_XA
23
ADUM_L_XB
24
25 /ADUM_L_C
D-GND
26
5VN
27
D-GND
28
B28B-PHDSS-B
CN2 (FROM - P2)
INT24V1
3
2
P-GND
1
5VNPD
B7P-VH
CN7
28
D-GND
27
FWP_PCU
26
PCU_RES
25 /MPFC_RES
24 /Reserve_out3
23
PCU_TXD
22
PCU_DTR
21
D-GND
20
PCU_RXD
19
PCU_DSR
18
/FAX_LED
17
/POF
16
D-GND
15
LSU_RST
14 TRANS_RST
13
D-GND
12
SCK
11 TRANS_DAT
10
D-GND
RSV_DAT
9
JOBEND_INT
8
7
TH1_LSU
6
TH2_LSU
5
D-GND
4
D-GND
3
INT5V
2
INT5V
1
D-GND
28FMZ-BT
PCU PWB
CN4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
24V1
DSW_R(24V)
DSW_R(24V)
DSW_F(24V)
INT24V1
P-GND
5VN
B7P-VH
To P2
3
1
2
4
P
P-GND
0ZFM_V
/0ZFM_CNT
OZFM_LD
SM4P
CN4
1
DRMCL_A
2
DRMCL_B
3
/DRMCL_A
4
/DRMCL_B
5
/DRMCL_CNT
6
DRMBK_CNT
7
DRMBK_A
8
DRMBK_B
9
/DRMBK_A
10
/DRMBK_B
11
/BK_EN
12
/CLC_EN
13
/CLM_EN
14
/CLY_EN
15
BTMA
16
BTMB
17
/BTMA
18
/BTMB
19
BTM_CNT
20
/ADMHC
21
ADMHA
22
ADMHB
23
ADMHXA
24
ADMHXB
25
NC
26
NC
B26B-PHDSS-B
CN13
1
INT24V1
2
P-GND
3
5VN
B3P-VH
3
1
2
4
R
(Ozone fan)
OZFM
7 : Feb. 15 2007
(LSU OPTION)
WH
(LCC OPTION)
WH
(DESK OPTION)
WH
F.G.
1
2
1
2
P
F.G.
1
2
1
2
WH_L(LSU)
WH_N(LSU)
EL 2PIN
WH_L(LCC)
WH_N(LCC)
1
2
R
1
2
CN-A
NC
4
TXD_LCC
7
RXD_LCC
8
/DTR_LCC
9
/DSR_LCC
10
RES_LCC
11
NC
3
5VN
5
D-GND
6
24V4
1
P-GND
2
/TRC_LCC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
WH_L(DESK)
WH_N(DESK)
CN-F
24V4
1
P-GND
2
5VN
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
5
TXD_DSK
6
RXD_DSK
7
/DTR_DSK
8
DSR_DSK
9
RES_DSK
10
/TRC_DSK
11
NC
12
B12B-PHDSS-B
(LSU-WH harness)
F.G.
WH_L(LSU)
NC
WH_N(LSU)
EL 3PIN
1
2
3
R
1
2
3
P
WH_L(LCC)
4
WH_N(LCC) 12
F-GND
5
EL 12PIN
R
SRA-21T-4
F.G.
F.G.
F.G.
4
12
5
P
SRA-21T-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
R
NC
NC
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
24V4
P-GND
/TRC_LCC
EL 15PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
P
WH_L(DESK)
1
WH_N(DESK)
3
F-GND
2
EL 3PIN
R
SRA-21T-4
24V4
P-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
TXD_DSK
RXD_DSK
/DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK
RES_DSK
/TRC_DSK
SM 11PIN
1
3
2
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
R
TXD_LCC
RXD_LCC
/DTR_LCC
/DSR_LCC
RES_LCC
10
4
12
6
14
2
D-GND
8
/TRC_LCC
B26B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
PCSFM2_LD
PCSFM2_V#
NC
/PCSFM
NC
INT24V1
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
CN21
1
D-GND
9
TXD_DSK
3
RXD_DSK
11
/DTR_DSK
DSR_DSK
5
RES_DSK
13
/TRC_DSK
7
CN4
1
WH_N(LCC)
2
WH_N(DESK/LCC)
NC
3
4
WH_L(DESK/LCC)
WH_L(LCC)
5
B4P(5-3)-VH
To P5
To P16
WH PWB
PSU
PCU PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
FINISHER
CN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INSERTOR
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
CN
TXD_FIN
RXD_FIN
/DTR_FIN
/DSR_FIN
RES_FIN
24V3
5VN
D-GND
P-GND
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
P
TXD_INS
RXD_INS
/DTR_INS
/DSR_INS
RES_INS
NC
5VN
D-GND
NC
F-GND
24V5
P-GND
EL 12PIN
SRA-21T-4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R
F.G.
TO COIN VENDOR
(OPTION)
15
D-GND
B26B-PHDSS-B
CN29
1
24V3
2
P-GND
3
/CV_COPY
4
/CV_COUNT
/CV_START
5
6
/CV_CA
7
/CV_CLCOPY
8
/CV_COLOR1
9
/CV_STAPLE
10 /CV_COLOR0
11 /CV_DUPLEX
12
5VN
13
/CV_SIZE0
14
/CV_SIZE1
15
/CV_SIZE2
16
/CV_SIZE3
B16B-PNDZS
PSU
PCU PWB
7 : Feb. 15 2007
MOTHER PWB
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN148
CN136
1
5VEXT
2
D-GND
3
OCSW
4
24VEXT
5
/SIZE_LED1
6
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN19
B12B-PHDSS-B CN5
SCN-CNT
PWB
501190-4017
B15P-PH-K-S
CN147
CN4 B12B-PHDSS-B
CN146 B10B-PHDSS-B
CN130
B15P-PH-K-S
B15P-PH-K-S
5597-05CPB7F
SCAN IN PWB
CN3
CN143
501190-2017
CN134
DOCC PWB
CN137
CN25
FG
SRA-21T-4
(Document
detection light
emitting side
harness)
(CCD-F harness 1)
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
MIRROR
MOTOR
CN18 B6P-VH
1
2
3
OCSW
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
EHR-3
P-GND
24V3
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
n INFO_LED
5VO
CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED
D-GND
POW_LED
LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY
LCD_CLKn PWRSW
D-GND
NC
LCD_DAT2+
n POF_SCN
LCD_DAT2n RES_MPFC_SCN
D-GND
RES_SCN
LCD_DAT1+
n RTS_SCN
LCD_DAT1TXD_SCN
D-GND
n CTS_SCN
LCD_DAT0+
RXD_SCN
LCD_DAT0n FWP_SCN
CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND
MiM_A
1
MiM_B
2
MiM_/A
3
MiM_/B
4
B4B-PH-K-S
MHPS
1
2
D-GND
5V
3
B3B-PH-K-S
3
2
1
(MHPS harness)
MHPS
1
2
3
4
5
6
P-GND
24V3
12V
5VN
3.3V
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
CL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
n INFO_LED
5VO
CN_CHK_IN
WU_LED
D-GND
POW_LED
LCD_CLK+
n WU_KEY
LCD_CLKn PWRSW
D-GND
NC
LCD_DAT2+
n POF_SCN
LCD_DAT2n RES_MPFC_SCN
D-GND
RES_SCN
LCD_DAT1+
n RTS_SCN
LCD_DAT1TXD_SCN
D-GND
n CTS_SCN
LCD_DAT0+
RXD_SCN
LCD_DAT0n FWP_SCN
CN_CHK_OUT
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
(SCN-LAMP
FFC)
P-GND
1
P-GND
2
CL
3
24VPD
4
5
24VPD
5597-05APB
1
2
CL INVERTOR
PWB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
NC
TXD_ANC
NC
RXD_ANC
NC
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
(CCD-F harness 1)
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
NC
TXD_ANC
NC
RXD_ANC
NC
D-GND
D-GND
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
501190-2017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
NC
TXD_ANC
NC
RXD_ANC
NC
D-GND
D-GND
5
4
3
2
1
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
501190-4017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
CCD PWB
1
2
3
5
7
9
10
/DETECT
D-GND
/DET_ANC
TXD_ANC
RXD_ANC
D-GND
D-GND
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
SCANDATA0SCANDATA0+
D-GND
SCANDATA1SCANDATA1+
D-GND
SCANDATA2SCANDATA2+
D-GND
SCANCLKOUTSCANCLKOUT+
D-GND
SCANDATA3SCANDATA3+
D-GND
OPTION
B15P-PH-K-S
CARD
READER
(OPTION)
SM6P
/C_CARD
/C_SEL
/C_CLOCK
/C_DATA
5V
D-GND
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
(PNC harness)
P
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
6
/C_CARD
1
1
5
/C_SEL
2
2
4
/C_CLOCK
3
3
3
/C_DATA
4
4
2
5V
5
5
6
1
D-GND
6
(SCN-mother DATA harness)
(HL interface harness CJ)
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
CN131
1
n A_PNC
n A_COPY
2
n A_CA
3
n A_READY
4
n A_AUD
5
5V
6
7
D-GND
8
24V
9
NC
10
n A_TC
11
24V
12
PNC-a
13
D-GND
B13P-PH-K-S
CN145
1
/C_CARD
2
/C_SEL
3
/C_CLOCK
4
/C_DATA
5
5V
6
D-GND
B6P-PH-K-R
CN125
D-GND
30
CN_CHK_OUT
29
LCD_CLK+
28
LCD_CLK27
D-GND
26
LCD_DAT2+ 25
LCD_DAT224
D-GND
23
LCD_DAT1+ 22
LCD_DAT121
D-GND
20
LCD_DAT0+ 19
LCD_DAT018
D-GND
17
DISP
16
3.3V_EXT
15
VEEON
14
VCONT
13
AVCC
12
SC_TEMP
11
P-GND
10
24V_EXT
9
NC
8
/CCFT1
7
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
6
X2CN
5
Y2CN
4
X1CN
3
Y1CN
2
D-GND
1
52030-3029
(LVDS I/F
FFC)
CN135
D-GND
26
3.3V
25
5VN
24
D-GND
23
PD
22
PDSEL0
21
PDSEL1
20
PDSEL2
19
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
/F0
14
/F1
13
/F2
12
/F3
11
/BZR
10
D-GND
9
n PWRSW
8
n WU_KEY
7
n INFO_LED
6
POW_LED
5
WU_LED
4
D-GND
3
5VO
2
D-GND
1
52030-2629
(MFP OP
I/F FFC)
SCN-CNT
PWB
CN142
1
P-GND
2
P-GND
3
SPPD1
4
SPPD2
5
24VPD
6
24VPD
7
5V_EXT
8
AVCC
9
SPFMCK
10
SPFMM1
11
SPFMM2
12
SPFMO1
13
SPFMO2
14
SPRMA
15
SPRMA/
16
SPRMB
SPRMB/
17
18
SPRMO1
19
SGS
STMPS
20
21
SRRC
22
SPFC
23
SPWS
24
SELA_
25
SELB_
26
SELC_
27
SSELO
28
SPPD4
29
SPFFAN
30
SPPD3
31
SPPD5
32
5VPD
33
D-GND
34
D-GND
B34B-PHDSS-B
CN1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
CN_CHK_OUT
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
LCD_DAT1D-GND
LCD_DAT0+
LCD_DAT0D-GND
DISP
3.3V_EXT
VEEON
VCONT
AVCC
SC_TEMP
P-GND
24V_EXT
NC
/CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
Y2CN
X1CN
Y1CN
D-GND
52271-3090
CN1
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
5VN
D-GND
4
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
7
PDSEL1
8
PDSEL2
9
/KEYIN
10
SEG0
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
15
/F2
16
/F3
17
/BZR
18
D-GND
19
n PWRSW
20
n WU_KEY
21 n INFO_LED
22
POW_LED
23
WU_LED
24
D-GND
25
5VO
26
D-GND
52610-2671
(PSW
harness)
CN1
3
2
1
BACK
LIGHT
CN2
1
4
CCFT+
/CCFT
53259-0417
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
S3B-PH-K-S
(LCD
Inverter LCD INVERTOR PWB
harness CJ)
CN2
1
/CCFT
D-GND
2
24V_EXT
3
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
LCD UN
TOUCH
PANEL
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(ORS PD harness)
ORS PD PWB
1
PDSEL0
2
PDSEL1
3
PDSEL2
4
5VN
5
PD
6
D-GND
PHR-6
CN3
VO
1
LP
2
D-GND
3
CP
4
D-GND
5
M
6
3.3V_EXT
7
D0
8
D1
9
D-GND
10
D2
11
D3
12
D-GND
13
DISP
14
VEE
15
52746-1570 (LCD
FFC)
LVDS-P PWB CN4
1
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
2
3
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
4
MFP OPE-P
PWB
CN3
n PWRSW
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
S3B-PH-K-S
CN2
1
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
PD
5
D-GND
6
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
TO R-SPF
XAD 34PIN
P-GND
P-GND
SPPD1
SPPD2
24VPD
24VPD
5V_EXT
AVCC
SPFMCK
SPFMM1
SPFMM2
SPFMO1
SPFMO2
SPRMA
SPRMA/
SPRMB
SPRMB/
SPRMO1
SGS
STMPS
SRRC
SPFC
SPWS
SELA_
SELB_
SELC_
SSELO
SPPD4
SPFFAN
SPPD3
SPPD5
5VPD
D-GND
D-GND
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
7 : Feb. 15 2007
CN1
1
2
3
4
5
6
MJ2
1
2
3
4
5
6
TX+
RX+
RXTXDG
RHS-
BT1
LT1
TEL1
TEL2
LT2
BT2
MJ-66J-RD315
TP21
TP24
L1
L2
TP38
TP37
MJ-62J-RD315
CN2
12V
1
2
AG
3
12V
4
AG
5
150VON
6
CION
7
48VON
8
HS19
HS210
CI11
EXHS12
SON1
13
SON2
14
ECON
15
MRON
16
TELID
17
NC
18
NC
19
NC
20
NC
21
DG
22
3.3V
23
DG
24
5VS
25
DG
26
SI3_RES27
SPK
MDM_ATXD 28
MDM_ARXD 29
MDM_ABITCLK 30
MDM_ASPCLK
31
32
RGDT33
MDM_CLK
34
AFERES35
BBITCLK
36
BSPCLK
37
BRXD
38
BTXD
39
HDMUTE40
RHSTX24-40R-10ST-H1
(BOARD TO
BOARD)
CN7
1
12V
2
P-GND
3
12V
4
P-GND
5
150VON
6
CION
7
48VON
8
HS19
HS210
CI11
EXHS12
SON1
13
SON2
14
ECON
15
MRON
16
TELID
17
NC
18
NC
19
NC
20
NC
21
GND
22
3.3V
23
GND
24
5VS
25
GND
26
SI3_RES27
SPK
28
ATXD
29
ARXD
30
ABITCLK
31
ASPCLK
32
RGDT33
MDM_CLK
34
AFE_RES35
BBITCLK
36
BSPCLK
37
BTXD
38
BRXD
39
HDMUTE40
RHSTX25-40P-8ST-H1
SPSP+
NC
B3P-PH-K-S
CN8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
MOTHER
PWB
D-GND
D-GND
3.3V
3.3V
FAX_TXD(D)_N
n CNCT_FAX
FAX_TXD(D)_P
n MSW_MON
FAX_TXD(CS)_P
n RES_FAX
FAX_TXD(CS)_N
D-GND
FAX_RXD(D)_N
n RES_MPFC_FAX
FAX_RXD(D)_P
n WU_FAX
FAX_RXD(CS)_P
n PLED
FAX_RXD(CS)_N
D-GND
n FAX_RTS(D)
D-GND
n FAX_CTS(D)
FLVPP
n FAX_RTS(CS)
5VO
n FAX_CTS(CS)
12V
3.3V
3.3V
D-GND
P-GND
B32B-PHDSS-B
TO
HANDSET
(JAPAN ONLY)
TO EX TEL
TO LINE
MJ1
1
2
3
4
5
6
SPEAKER
CN2
1
2
3
7 : Feb. 15 2007
BOARD TO BOARD
CN4
CN21
CN5
MOTHER PWB
MFPC PWB
HU5-400PNA-S53T-FA
IDE_RST_N
D-GND
IED_DD7
IED_DD8
IED_DD6
IED_DD9
IED_DD5
IED_DD10
IED_DD4
IED_DD11
IED_DD3
IED_DD12
IED_DD2
IED_DD13
IED_DD1
IED_DD14
IED_DD0
IED_DD15
D-GND
KEY
IDE_DMARQ
D-GND
IDE_DIOW_N
D-GND
IDE_DIOR_N
D-GND
IDE_IORDY_N
D-GND
IDE_DMACK_N
D-GND
IDE_INTRQ
ICCS10
IDE_DA1
IDE_CBLID_N
IDE_DA0
IDE_DA2
IDE_CS0
IDE_CS1
IDE_DASP_N
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
4
3
2
1
CN9 USB-A
CN8 USB-B
USB1.1
(DEVICE)
1
2
3
4
5V
DD+
GND
(HOST)
1
2
3
4
5V
DD+
GND
USB2.0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX+
TXCT
NC
NC
CT
RX+
RX-
P
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
CD
RXD
TXD
DTR
GND
DSR
RTS
CTS
RI
CN26
LAN
S
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LAN
QR/P4 8P
12V
NC
NC
5VN
D-GND
NC
NC
D-GND
IDE_RST_N
D-GND
IED_DD7
IED_DD8
IED_DD6
IED_DD9
IED_DD5
IED_DD10
IED_DD4
IED_DD11
IED_DD3
IED_DD12
IED_DD2
IED_DD13
IED_DD1
IED_DD14
IED_DD0
IED_DD15
D-GND
KEY
IDE_DMARQ
D-GND
IDE_DIOW_N
D-GND
IDE_DIOR_N
D-GND
IDE_IORDY_N
D-GND
IDE_DMACK_N
D-GND
IDE_INTRQ
ICCS10
IDE_DA1
IDE_CBLID_N
IDE_DA0
IDE_DA2
IDE_CS0
IDE_CS1
IDE_DASP_N
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
D-GND
12V
CN18
TX25-100P-LT-H1E
RS232C
RS232C
CN15
B4P-VH
SCANDATA3+
SCANDATA3SCANCLKOUT+
SCANCLKOUTSCANDATA2+
SCANDATA2SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA1SCANDATA0+
SCANDATA0LCD_DATA0LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA1LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA2LCD_DATA2+
LCD_CLKLCD_CLK+
CH0_N
CH0_P
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
CLK_N
CLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
RXD_SCN
n CTS_SCN
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN
n RES_SCN
n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
n RTS_PCU
TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D)
RXD_FAX(CS)
n RTS_FAX(D)
n CTS_FAX(D)
n RTS_FAX(CS)
n CTS_FAX(CS)
n RES_FAX
n CNCT_FAX
n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC
n REQ_PIC
n CLR_PIC
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC
PWM
n CNCT_FAN
n RES_PIC
RES_MFP
PWM2
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT
n WU_FAX1
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
5VO
12V
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
4
HDDFM_LD
1
3
D-GND
2
HDDFM_PWM
2
3
1
12V
4
CN17 B10B-PHDSS-B
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
SCANDATA3+
SCANDATA3SCANCLKOUT+
SCANCLKOUTSCANDATA2+
SCANDATA2SCANDATA1+
SCANDATA1SCANDATA0+
SCANDATA0LCD_DATA0LCD_DATA0+
LCD_DATA1LCD_DATA1+
LCD_DATA2LCD_DATA2+
LCD_CLKLCD_CLK+
CH0_N
CH0_P
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
CLK_N
CLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
ECLK_LSU_N
ECLK_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_P
HSYNC_LSU_N
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
5VL
RXD_SCN
1TC_YMC
TXD_SCN
n RTS_SCN
n RES_SCN
n RES_PCU
RXD_PCU
n CTS_PCU
TXD_PCU
n RTS_PCU
TXD_FAX(D)
TXD_FAX(CS)
RXD_FAX(D)
RXD_FAX(CS)
n RTS_FAX(D)
n CTS_FAX(D)
n RTS_FAX(CS)
n CTS_FAX(CS)
n RES_FAX
n CNCT_FAX
n WU_FAX2
n MSW_MON2
n POF_MFPC
n REQ_PIC
n CLR_PIC
TXD_PIC
RXD_PIC
PWM
n CNCT_FAN
n RES_PIC
RES_MFP
PWM2
FLVPP
n REQ_PIC_INT
n WU_FAX1
3.3V
3.3V
3.3V
5VO
12V
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
HDD
FAN
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
5VN
12V
HDD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
NC
12V
NC
HDDFM_PWM
NC
D-GND
NC
HDDFM_LD
NC
NC
EFI
(OPTION)
CN22
MFPC PWB
FX8C-60S-SV5
CN19
D-GND
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
3.3V
4
FAXD_TXD_N
5
n CNCT_FAX
6
FAXD_TXD_P
7
n MSW_MON
8
FAXCS_TXD_P
9
n RES_FAX
10
FAXCS_TXD_N
11
D-GND
12
FAXD_RXD_N
13
n RES_MFP
14
FAXD_RXD_P
15
n FAX_WUP
16
FAXCS_RXD_P
17
n PLED
18
FAXCS_RXD_N 19
D-GND
20
n FAXD_RTS
21
D-GND
22
n FAXD_CTS
23
FLVPP
24
n FAXCS_RTS
25
5VO
26
n FAXCS_CTS
27
12V
28
3.3V
29
3.3V
30
D-GND
31
D-GND
32
B32B-PHDSS-B
5V_IN
5V_IN
5V_IN
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
PCI1_EXT
n PCI1_RST
PCI1_INTA_PU
EXT_REQ
EXT_GNT
PCI1MAC_AD30
PCI1MAC_AD31
PCI1MAC_AD28
PCI1MAC_AD29
PCI1MAC_AD26
PCI1MAC_AD27
PCI1MAC_AD24
PCI1MAC_AD25
PCI1MAC_AD23
PCI1MAC_CBE3
PCI1MAC_AD21
PCI1MAC_AD22
PCI1MAC_AD19
PCI1MAC_AD20
PCI1MAC_AD17
PCI1MAC_AD18
PCI1MAC_CBE2
PCI1MAC_AD16
PCI1MAC_AD14
PCI1MAC_AD15
PCI1MAC_AD12
PCI1MAC_AD13
PCI1MAC_AD10
PCI1MAC_AD11
PCI1MAC_AD8
PCI1MAC_AD9
PCI1MAC_AD7
PCI1MAC_CBE1
PCI1MAC_AD5
PCI1MAC_AD6
PCI1MAC_AD3
PCI1MAC_AD4
PCI1MAC_AD1
PCI1MAC_AD2
PCI1MAC_CBE0
PCI1MAC_AD0
D-GND
PCI1MAC_IDSEL
PCI1MAC_PAR
PCI1MAC_FRAME
PCI1MAC_IRDY
PCI1MAC_TRDY
PCI1MAC_DVSEL
PCI_STOP
PCI1_SERR
PCI1_PERR
D-GND
D-GND
EXTEND PCI
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
2nd FAX UN
(OPTION)
CN20
1
3.3V
3.3V
2
3
3.3V
4
D-GND
5
SA_VIDEO_CLKI
6
D-GND
7
SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_I
8
D-GND
9
SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_K_I
10
D-GND
11 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_C_I
12
D-GND
13 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_M_I
14
D-GND
15 SA_VIDEO_VSYNC_Y_I
16
D-GND
17
VIDEO_DAT_K0
18
VIDEO_DAT_K1
19
VIDEO_DAT_K2
VIDEO_DAT_K3
20
VIDEO_DAT_K4
21
22
VIDEO_DAT_K5
23
D-GND
24
VIDEO_DAT_C0
25
VIDEO_DAT_C1
26
VIDEO_DAT_C2
27
VIDEO_DAT_C3
28
VIDEO_DAT_C4
29
VIDEO_DAT_C5
30
D-GND
31
VIDEO_DAT_M0
32
VIDEO_DAT_M1
33
VIDEO_DAT_M2
34
VIDEO_DAT_M3
35
VIDEO_DAT_M4
36
VIDEO_DAT_M5
37
D-GND
38
VIDEO_DAT_Y0
39
VIDEO_DAT_Y1
40
VIDEO_DAT_Y2
41
VIDEO_DAT_Y3
42
VIDEO_DAT_Y4
43
VIDEO_DAT_Y5
44 SA_VIDEO_HSYNC_O
45
D-GND
46
EF_CLK_IN
47
D-GND
48 GPI_nEF_DETECT
49 ENG_RDY(O,OC)
50 PRTC_RDY(I,OC)
51
PRT_RTS(O)
PRT_TXD(O)
52
PRT_CTS(I)
53
54
PRT_RXD(I)
55
3.3V
56
PON_PRTC(I)
57
n WU_EF
58 n PD_PRTCIF(O)
59
D-GND
60
D-GND
FX8C-60S-SV5
7 : Feb. 15 2007
3. Signal list
Signal
name
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1TURC
ADUM_L
APPD1
APPD2
CCFT
CLI
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED1
CPED2
CPFC
CPFD1
CPFD2
CPFM
CPUC1
CPUC2
CPUFM
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DHPD_CL
DHPD_K
DHSW
(Japan
only)
Name
Waste toner full detection switch
[Mechanical switch]
Transfer belt separation CL
detection
Transfer belt separation BK
detection
Primary transfer separation clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
ADU motor lower [Stepping motor]
ADU transport path detection 1
[Transmission type]
ADU transport path detection 2
[Transmission type]
LCD backlight
[CCFT cool cathode ray tube]
Scanner lamp [Xenon lamp]
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection) [Transmission type]
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift
HP detection) [Transmission type]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 1) [DC brush-less motor]
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper
feed tray 2) [DC brush-less motor]
Tray 1 paper empty detection
[Transmission type]
Tray 2 paper empty detection
[Transmission type]
Tray vertical transport clutch
[Electromagnetic clutch]
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper
entry detection)
[Transmission type]
Paper feed motor [Brush-less
motor]
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray
1) [Electromagnetic clutch]
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray
2) [Electromagnetic clutch]
Controller cooling fan motor
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity
detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity
detection
Tray 1 installation detection
Tray 2 installation detection
CL phase detection
BK phase detection
Dehumidifier heater switch
[Seesaw switch]
DL_C
DL_K
DL_M
DL_Y
DL_K
DM_CL
DM_K
DSW_ADU
Function/Operation
Connector level
L
H
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
Note
Signal
name
DSW_C
DSW-F
Name
Tray 1 and 2 transport cover
open/close detection
Front door open/close switch
[Micro switch]
DSW-R
DVM_CL
F1
F1
F1
Fuse (1.25A250V)
F2
F3
Fuse (T2AH250V)
F4
Fuse (T2AH250V)
F101
F102
Fuse (T1AH250V)
F103
Fuse (T8AH250V)
F201
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F202
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F203
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F204
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F205
Fuse (T6.3AH250V)
F301
Fuse (T5AH250V)
FUM
HDDFM
HL_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
HLTS1
HLTS2
HLTS3
HOPS
LSUSS1
DVM_K
MHPS
MIM
MPED
MPFD
MPFS
MPGS
MPLD
Function/Operation
Connector level
L
H
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
Note
Home
position
Manual
paper
feed unit
Signal
name
Name
MPUC
MPWD
MSW
MTOP1
MTOP2
OCSW
OSM
OZFM
PCS_CL/K
PCSS
PFM
PGM
Polygon motor
[DC brushless motor]
Fusing after-detection
[Transmission type]
Paper exit detection
[Transmission type]
Right tray paper exit detection
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor
(R side)
Paper exit drive motor
[Stepping motor]
Registration pre-detection
[Transmission type]
Registration detection
POD1
POD2
POD3
POFM_F
POFM_R
POM
PPD1
PPD2
PSFM
PWRSW
REGS_F/R
RRM
TCS_C
TCS_K
TCS_M
TCS_Y
TFD2
TFD3
TH_M/
HUD_M
TNM_C
Function/Operation
Controls ON/OFF of the manual paper
feed roller in the manual paper feed
section.
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper width.
Turns ON/OFF the main DC power
source.
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (storing
position).
Detects the manual paper feed tray
paper pull-out position (pull-out
position).
Document size detection trigger.
PWB
name
Close
Open
VR203
Volume
Note
Manual
paper
feed unit
Manual
paper
feed unit
VR201
TNM_Y
Pin
No.
TNM_M
Connector
No.
Toner motor C
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor K
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor M
[Synchronous motor]
Toner motor Y
[Synchronous motor]
Volume
TNM_K
Connector level
L
H
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
Signal
name
Name
Function/Operation
VR204
Volume
VR205
Volume
VR402
Volume
WTNM
Connector level
L
H
Connector
No.
Pin
No.
PWB
name
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
DC power
PWB
Note
MX3500N
[12]
OTHERS
Service Manual
Item
1. System settings
A. System settings (General)
(1) When User Authentication is not Enabled
1)
2)
2)
3)
Enter a password.
(1) Touch the [Password] key.
(2) Enter a password on the text entry screen that will appear.
4)
2)
Item
Total Count
Job Count
Device Count
Default Settings
Display Contrast
Clock
Date Format
Daylight Saving Time Setting
Keyboard Select
List Print (User)
All Custom Setting List
Printer Test Page
PCL Symbol Set List*1
PCL Internal Font List*1
PCL Extended Font List*1
PS Font List*2
PS Extended Font List*2
NIC Page
Sending Address List*3
Individual List
Group List
Program List
Memory Box List
All Sending Address List
Document Filing Folder List
Paper Tray Settings
Tray Settings
Tray 1
Tray 2
Tray 3
Tray 4
Tray 5
Bypass Tray
Paper Type Registration
User Type 1
User Type 2
User Type 3
User Type 4
User Type 5
User Type 6
User Type 7
Auto Tray Switching
Address Control
Direct Address / Program
Individual
E-mail*4
Search Number
Name
Initial
Index
Address
Key Name
File Format
Internet Fax*5
Search Number
Name
Initial
Index
Address
Key Name
Compression
Internet Fax Report
Group
Search Number
Group Name
Initial
Index
Address
Key Name
Program
Program Name
Settings
Address
Resolution
Exposure
Special Modes
Amend/Delete
Custom Index
User 1
User 2
User 3
User 4
User 5
User 6
Fax Data Receive/Forward
Internet Fax Manual Reception*5
Reception Start
Manual Reception Key in Initial
Screen
Internet Fax Data Forward*5
Printer Condition Settings*1
Printer Default Settings
Copies
Orientation
Default Paper Size
Default Output Tray*6
Default Paper Type
Line Thickness
2-Sided Print
Colour Mode
N-Up Print
PCL Settings*1
PCL Symbol Set Setting
PCL Font Setting
PCL Line Feed Code
Wide A4
Postscript Settings*2
Print PS Errors
MX3500N OTHERS 12 1
Enable
-
1
Portrait
A4 (8-1/2" x 11")
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Plain Paper
5
1-Sided
B/W
1-Up
3. PC-8
Internal Font, 0. Courier
0. CR=CR:LF=LF:FF=FF
Disable
Disable
Item
Document Filing Control
Custom Folder Registration
Folder Name
Initial
Password
User Name
Amend/Delete Custom Folder
USB-Device Check
User Control*7
Amend User Information
2)
3)
Log in.
(1) Touch the [Password] key and enter the administrator password.
(2) Touch the[OK] key.
4)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
installed.
1)
(4)
MX3500N OTHERS 12 2
Disable
Authenticate a User by
Login Name and
Password
Disable
Job is Stopped when the
Limit of Pages is Reached
8
Disable
Disable
-
Disable
Disable
Enable
Timer 60 min.
15 min.
Middle
Disable
60 sec.
Disable
6 sec.
English
Disable
Disable
0.0 sec.
Disable
Disable
Disable
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Quick File
Special Modes
File
Item
Customize 3
USB Memory Scan
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
Data Entry
Customize 1
Customize 2
Customize 3
Device Control
Original Size Detector Setting
Original Detection Size
Combination
Cancel Detection at Document
Glass
Disabling of Document Feeder*3
Original Feeding Mode*3
Disabling of Duplex
Disabling of Large Capacity
Cassette*7
Disabling of Optional Paper Drawer*8
Disabling of Tray Setting
Disabling of Finisher*9
Disabling of Offset
Disabling of Stapler*9
Saddle Stitch Position Adjust*10
Disabling of Punch*11
Disabling of Colour Mode*12
Auto Paper Selection Setting
Registration Adjustment
Auto Adjustment
Optimization of the Hard Disk
Tandem Connection Setting
IP Address of Slave Machine
Port Number
Disabling of Master Machine Mode
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
Clear All Job Log Data
Detect Standard in Auto Colour Mode
Copy Settings
Initial Status Settings
Colour Mode
Paper Tray
Exposure Type
Copy Ratio
2-Sided Copy
Output
Exposure Adjustment
Colour
Document Glass
Document Feeder
B/W
Document Glass
Document Feeder
Rotation Copy Setting
Add or Change Extra Preset Ratios
Reduction
Enlargement
Setting a Maximum Number of Copies
Initial Margin Shift Setting
Side-1
Side-2
Erase Width Adjustment
Edge
Centre
Card Shot Settings
Original Size
Fit to Page
Automatic Saddle Stitch*10
Initial Tab Copy Setting
Varies depending on
country and region
Disable
Disable
All Disabled
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
0.0 mm
Disable
Disable
Plain Paper
0.0.0.0
50001
Disable
Disable
3
Auto
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Auto
1
1-Side to 1-Side
-
5
5
5
5
Enable
999
10 mm (1/2")
10 mm (1/2")
X: 86 mm (3-3/8") Y: 54
mm (2-1/8")
Disable
Enable
10 mm (1/2")
Item
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex
Copy
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Auto Selection Setting of Tray that is
Supplied the Paper
Initial Colour Balance Setting
Auto Colour Calibration
B/W 600dpi x 600dpi Scanning Mode
for Document Feeder*3
B/W Quick Scan from Document Glass
Network Settings
IP Address Setting
Enable TCP/IP
Enable NetWare
Enable EtherTalk
Enable NetBEUI
Reset the NIC
Ping Command
Printer Settings
Default Settings
Prohibit Notice Page Printing
Prohibit Test Page Printing
A4/Letter Size Auto Change
Print Density Level
Colour
B/W
Bypass Tray Settings
Enable Detected Paper Size in
Bypass Tray
Enable Selected Paper Type in
Bypass Tray
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Paper Select
Job Spool Queuing
Interface Settings
Hexadecimal Dump Mode*1
I/O Timeout
Enable USB Port
USB Port Emulation Switching*1
Enable Network Port
Network Port Emulation
Switching*1
Port Switching Method
Colour Adjustments
Auto Colour Calibration
Image Send Settings*14
Operation Settings
Default Display Setting
Mode
Hold settings for a while after
scanning has been completed
Switch Automatically to Copy
Mode Screen
Initial Resolution Setting
Apply the Resolution Set when
Stored
Scanner*4
Internet Fax*5
Fax*6
Default Exposure
Exposure
Original Image Type
Must Input Next Address Key at
Broadcast Setting
Scan Complete Sound Setting
The Number of File Name/Subject/
Body Keys Displayed Setting
The Number of Direct Address
Keys Displayed Setting
MX3500N OTHERS 12 3
Enable
Disable
Varies depending on
country and region.
3
3
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
20 sec.
Enable
PCL (Auto*13)
Enable
PCL (Auto*13)
Switch at End of Job
-
Scanner*4 (Fax*6)
Disable
Disable
Disable
200x200dpi
200x100dpi
Standard
Settings
Auto
Text
Disable
Disable
Middle
6
6
Item
Factory default setting
Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
Hold Setting for Received Data Print
Received Data Hold
Disable
Password Setting
Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registration Using
Disable
Network Scan Tools*15
Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Send Mode
Disable Selection from the Address Book
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Direct Entry
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Disable
Transmission*5
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
Scan Settings*4
Default Sender Set
Default Colour Mode Settings
Colour Mode
Auto, Greyscale
B/W Mode
Mono 2
Disable Change of B/W Setting Disable
in Auto Mode
Initial File Format Setting
B/W
File Type
PDF
Compression Mode
MMR (G4)
Specified Pages per File
Disable
Colour/Grey
File Type
PDF
Compression Ratio
Medium
Specified Pages per File
Disable
Compression Mode at Broadcasting
Black & White
MMR (G4)
Colour/Greyscale
Medium
Maximum Size of E-mail
Unlimited
Attachments
Maximum Size of E-mail
Disable
Attachments (FTP/Desktop/Network
Folder)
Default Address Setting
Disable
Bcc Setting
Enable Bcc
Disable
Display Bcc Address on the Job Disable
Status Screen
Disable Scan Function
PC Scan
Disable
USB Memory Scan
Disable
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disable
Internet Fax Settings*5
Internet Fax Default Settings
Item
Factory default setting
Internet Fax Own Name and
Address Set
Auto Wake Up Print
Enable
Internet Fax Speaker Volume
Settings
Receive Signal
Middle
Communication Error Signal
Middle
Original Print on Transaction
Print Out Error Report
Report
Only
Transaction Report Print Select Setting
Single Sending
Print Out Error Report
Only
Broadcasting
Print Out All Report
Receiving
No Printed Report
Pre-Setting Mail Signature
Disable
Internet Fax Send Settings
Internet Fax Reception Report
Disable
On/Off Setting
Internet Fax Reception Report
1 Hour
Request Timeout Setting
Number of Resend Times at
2
Reception Error
Maximum Size of E-mail
Unlimited
Attachments
Rotation Sending Setting
All Enable
Printing Page Number at
Enable
Receiver
Internet Fax Receive Settings
Auto Receive Reduce Setting
Enable
Duplex Reception Setting
Disable
Set Address for Data
Forwarding
Letter Size RX Reduce Print
Disable
POP3 Communication Timeout 60 sec.
Setting
Reception Check Interval
5 min.
Setting
Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name
All Invalid
Setting
Internet Fax Output Setting*16
Varies depending on the
machine configuration
Document Filing Settings
Default Mode Settings
Sharing Mode
Sort Method Setting
Date
Document Output Options
Print
Copy
Enable
Printer
Enable
Scan Send
Disable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
Scan to HDD
Enable
Scan Send*4
Copy
Disable
Scan Send
Enable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
Scan to HDD
Enable
Internet Fax Send*5
Copy
Disable
Scan Send
Disable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCEnable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Disable
Scan to HDD
Disable
Fax Send*6
Copy
Disable
Scan Send
Disable
Internet Fax Send (Incl. PCDisable
Internet Fax)
Fax Send (Incl. PC-Fax)
Enable
MX3500N OTHERS 12 4
Item
Scan to HDD
Administrator Authority Setting
Delete File
Delete Folder
Default Colour Mode Settings
Colour
B/W
Default Exposure Settings
Exposure
Original Image Type
Initial Resolution Setting
Colour Data Compression Ratio
Setting
Default Output Tray*16
Scan Complete Sound Setting
Delete All Quick Files
Delete
Delete quick files at power up.
(Protected file excluded)
Disable Stamp for Reprinting
Batch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not
allowed.
Selection of [User Unknown] is not
allowed.
List Print (Administrator)
Administrator Settings List
Copy
Print
Image Send*14
Document Filing
Security
Common
All Administrator Settings List
Image Sending Activity Report*14
Image Sending Activity Report
(Scanner)
Image Sending Activity Report
(Internet Fax)
Image Sending Activity Report
(Fax)
Anti Junk Fax Number List*6
Anti Junk Mail/Domain Name List*5
Inbound Routing List*14
Document Admin List*14
Web Setting List*15
Metadata Set List*17
Security Settings
SSL Settings
HTTPS
IPP-SSL
Enable/Disable Settings
User Control
Disabling of Printing by Invalid User
Operation Settings
Cancel Auto Clear Timer
Disabling of Job Priority Operation
Disabling of Bypass Printing
Disable Auto Key Repeat
Disabling of Clock Adjustment
Disabling of Covers/Inserts Mode
Device Control
Disabling of Document Feeder*3
Disabling of Duplex
Disabling of Large Capacity
Cassette*7
Disabling of Optional Paper
Drawer*8
Disabling of Tray Setting
Disabling of Finisher*9
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Disable
Item
Factory default setting
Disabling of Offset
Disable
Disabling of Stapler*9
Disable
Disabling of Punch*11
Disable
Disabling of Colour Mode*12
Disable
Disabling of Master Machine Mode Disable
Disabling of Slave Machine Mode
Disable
Copy Settings
Disable Copy in Different Size/
Disable
Direction
Disabling Deletion of Job Programs Disable
Disabling of Bypass-Tray in Duplex Disable
Copy
Disabling of Auto Paper Selection
Disable
Printer settings
Prohibit Notice Page Printing
Enable
Prohibit Test Page Printing
Disable
Exclude Bypass-Tray from Auto
Disable
Paper Select
Image Send Settings
Disable Switching of Display Order Disable
Disable Scan Function
PC Scan
Disable
USB Memory Scan
Disable
Settings to Disable the Registration of Destination
Disable Registering Destination from Operation Panel
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registering Destination on Web Page*15
Group
Disable
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Registration Using
Disable
Network Scan Tools*15
Settings to Disable Transmission
Disable [Resend] on Fax/Image Disable
Send Mode
Disable selection from the
Address Book
E-mail
Disable
FTP
Disable
Desktop
Disable
Network Folder
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable Direct Entry
E-mail
Disable
Internet Fax
Disable
Fax
Disable
Disable PC-Internet Fax
Disable
Transmission*5
Disable PC-Fax Transmission*6 Disable
Document Filing Settings
Disable Stamp for Reprinting
Disable
Batch Print Settings
Selection of [All Users] is not
Enable
allowed.
Selection of [User Unknown] is
Enable
not allowed.
Change Administrator Password
See "TO THE
ADMINISTRATOR OF
THE MACHINE" in the
Safety Guide.
Product Key*18
Network Scanner Expansion Kit
Printer Expansion Kit
PS3 Expansion Kit
-
MX3500N OTHERS 12 5
Item
Internet Fax Expansion Kit
E-mail Alert and Status
Application Integration Module
Serial Number
Storing/calling of System Settings
Restore Factory Defaults
Store Current Configuration
Restore Configuration
*1: In some countries and regions, the printer expansion kit must be
installed.
*2: This function is not available in some countries and regions.
*3: When an automatic document feeder is installed.
*4: In some countries and regions, the network scanner expansion
kit must be installed.
*5: When the Internet fax expansion kit is installed.
*6: When the facsimile expansion kit is installed.
*7: When a large capacity tray is installed.
*8: When a paper drawer is installed.
*9: When a saddle stitch finisher or finisher is installed.
*10: When a saddle stitch finisher is installed.
*11: When a punch module is installed.
*12: When a colour-related problem has occurred.
*13: When the PS3 expansion kit is installed.
*14: In some countries and regions, the facsimile expansion kit or
the Internet fax expansion kit or the network scanner expansion kit
must be installed.
*15: When network connection is enabled.
*16: When a right tray is installed.
*17: When the application integration module is installed.
*18: Depending on the peripheral devices installed, it may not be
possible to use some settings.
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
Cassette 1 paper feed JAM (CPFD1 not-reached
JAM)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Cassette 2 paper feed JAM (CPFD2 not-reached
JAM)
CPFD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2 Not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
CPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
Code
PPD1_S3
PPD1_S4
PPD1_SM
PPD1_SL
PPD1_SA
PPD2_N1
PPD2_N2
PPD2_N3
PPD2_N4
PPD2_NM
PPD2_NL
PPD2_NA
PPD2_S1
PPD2_S2
PPD2_S3
PPD2_S4
PPD2_SM
PPD2_SL
PPD2_SA
PPD2_PRI
POD1_N
POD1_S
POD2_N
POD2_S
POD3_N
POD3_S
APPD1_N
APPD1_S
APPD2_N
APPD2_S
TRAY3
DPFD1_N4
DPFD1_S3
DPFD1_S4
TRAY4
DPFD2_S4
MFT
MPFD_S
LCC
LPFD_SL
SIZE_ILG
MTR_ILG
FJPID_N
FJPID_S
FJPOD_N
FJPOD_S
FED_N
FED_S
FFPD_N
FFPD_S
FEXIT_S
FSTPL
FPNCH
FDOP
FIN_TIME
MX3500N OTHERS 12 6
Code content
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Manual 2 feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD1 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Manual feed tray feed
paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 not-reached JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 1 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Cassette 2 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
PPD2 remaining JAM (ADU refeed paper)
PPD2 JAM (Image preparation wait timeout)
POD1 not-reached JAM
POD1 remaining JAM
POD2 not-reached JAM
POD2 remaining JAM
POD3 not-reached JAM
POD3 remaining JAM
APPD1 not-reached JAM
APPD1 remaining JAM
APPD2 not-reached JAM
APPD2 remaining JAM
Cassette 3 (Desk 1) paper feed JAM
DPFD1 not-reached JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 1 feed paper)
DPFD1 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Cassette 4 (Desk 2) paper feed JAM
DPFD2 remaining JAM (Desk 2 feed paper)
Manual feed tray paper feed JAM (MPFD notreached)
MPFD remaining JAM (Manual feed tray feed paper)
Side LCC paper feed JAM (LPFD1 not-reached)
LPFD remaining JAM (Side LCC feed paper)
Size illegal JAM
Motor driver trouble JAM
Interface transport inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport inlet port sensor remaining JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor not-reached JAM
Interface transport outlet sensor remaining JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor not-reached JAM
Finisher inlet port sensor remaining JAM
Finisher saddle not-reached JAM
Finisher saddle remaining JAM
Finisher bundle exit remaining JAM
Staple JAM
Punch JAM
Finisher door open
Finisher paper clearance abnormality JAM
Code content
No JAM. Also used for JAM canceling.
Parameter no matching
Emergency stop request JAM (Controller request)
SPPD1 not-reached JAM
SPPD1 remaining JAM
SPPD2 not-reached JAM
SPPD2 remaining JAM
SPPD3 not-reached JAM
SPPD3 remaining JAM
SPPD4 not-reached JAM
SPPD4 remaining JAM
SPPD5 not-reached JAM
SPPD5 remaining JAM
SPOD not-reached JAM
SPOD remaining JAM
SPRDMD remaining JAM
Exposure start notification wait timeout
SPPD2 reverse not-reached JAM
SPPD2 reverse remaining JAM
ICU factor stop JAM
MX3500N OTHERS 12 7
MX3500N
[A]
EXTERNAL OUTFIT
(2)
Rear cabinet
Service
Manual
1)
(4)
(18)
(15)
(12)
(16)
(1)
(17)
(13)
(14)
(6)
(11)
(10)
(3)
1)
(5)
(3)
(2)
(7)
(9)
(8)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
(18)
Parts
Front cabinet
Rear cabinet
Paper exit cover
Upper cabinet right
Upper cabinet left.
Paper exit tray cabinet
Left cabinet rear
Left cabinet rear lower
Left cabinet
Upper cabinet rear cover
Upper cabinet rear
Front cabinet upper
Frame cover
Right cabinet front
Right connection cabinet
Right cabinet rear cover
Right cabinet rear
Operation panel base plate
(4)
(5)
1)
2)
Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
2
C
1
A
Remove the front cabinet band and the front cabinet hinge,
and remove the front cabinet.
3)
Remove the screws, and remove the upper cabinet right (A)
and the upper cabinet left (B).
B
A
1)
1)
2)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover lid (A). Remove the
screws, and remove the upper cabinet rear cover (B).
Remove the screws, and remove the paper exit tray cabinet
(A).
Remove the screws, and remove the left cabinet rear (B).
BK
2
B
1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
Open the front cabinet. Remove the screws, and remove the
front cabinet upper.
Pull out the knob (A). Remove the desk connection cover (B).
Remove the screws, then remove the left cabinet rear lower
(C) and the left cabinet (D).
C
4
1
3
4)
Remove the waste toner box, and open the drum positioning
unit. (Refer to Process Drum Unit in Image Process Section.)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Pull out the knob (A). Remove the screws, and remove the
right cabinet front (B). Remove the screws, and remove the
right connection cabinet (C). Remove the ozone filter cover
(D). Remove the screws, and remove the right cabinet rear
cover (E). Remove the desk connection cover (F). Remove the
screws, and remove the right cabinet rear (G).
1
1
B
4
A
A
D
G
6
F
1)
2)
2)
3)
1
2
CN4
1
2
3
4
LVDS-P PWB
FG
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
CN2
1
2
3
S3B-PH-SM4-TB
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
52746-1570
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
04FM-1.0SP-1.9-GW-TF
/YL(Y1)
XH(X1)
YH(Y2)
/XL(X2)
MFP OPE-P
PWB
SCN-CNT PWB
5VEXT
D-GND
OCSW
CN3
n PWRSW
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
S3B-PH-K-S
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
PDSEL2
5VN
PD
D-GND
CN1
3
n PWRSW
2
D-GND
1
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
CN2
S02(8.0)B-BHS
CCFT+
/CCFT
/CCFT
D-GND
24V_EXT
S3B-PH-K-S
VO
LP
D-GND
CP
D-GND
M
3.3V_EXT
D0
D1
D-GND
D2
D3
D-GND
DISP
VEE
TOUCH PANEL
CN2
1
PDSEL0
PDSEL1
2
PDSEL2
3
5VN
4
PD
5
D-GND
6
B6B-PH-SM3-TB
CN1
3
2
1
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN136
1
5VEXT
2
D-GND
3
OCSW
4
24VEXT
5
/SIZE_LED1
6
/SIZE_LED2
B6P-PH-K-S
CN1
1
D-GND
2
3.3V
3
5VN
D-GND
4
5
PD
6
PDSEL0
7
PDSEL1
8
PDSEL2
9
/KEYIN
10
SEG0
11
SEG1
12
SEG2
13
/F0
14
/F1
15
/F2
16
/F3
17
/BZR
18
D-GND
19
n PWRSW
20
n WU_KEY
21 n INFO_LED
22
POW_LED
23
WU_LED
24
D-GND
25
5VO
26
D-GND
52610-2671
CN135
D-GND
26
3.3V
25
5VN
24
D-GND
23
PD
22
PDSEL0
21
PDSEL1
20
PDSEL2
19
/KEYIN
18
SEG0
17
SEG1
16
SEG2
15
/F0
14
/F1
13
/F2
12
/F3
11
/BZR
10
D-GND
9
n PWRSW
8
n WU_KEY
7
n INFO_LED
6
POW_LED
5
WU_LED
4
D-GND
3
5VO
2
D-GND
1
52030-2629
D-GND
CN_CHK_OUT
LCD_CLK+
LCD_CLKD-GND
LCD_DAT2+
LCD_DAT2D-GND
LCD_DAT1+
LCD_DAT1D-GND
LCD_DAT0+
LCD_DAT0D-GND
DISP
3.3V_EXT
VEEON
VCONT
AVCC
SC_TEMP
P-GND
24V_EXT
NC
/CCFT1
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
X2CN
Y2CN
X1CN
Y1CN
D-GND
52271-3090
CN1
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN125
D-GND
30
CN_CHK_OUT 29
LCD_CLK+
28
LCD_CLK27
D-GND
26
LCD_DAT2+ 25
LCD_DAT224
D-GND
23
LCD_DAT1+ 22
LCD_DAT121
D-GND
20
LCD_DAT0+ 19
LCD_DAT018
D-GND
17
DISP
16
3.3V_EXT
15
VEEON
14
VCONT
13
AVCC
12
SC_TEMP
11
P-GND
10
24V_EXT
9
NC
8
/CCFT1
7
CN_CHK_IN(LCD)
6
X2CN
5
Y2CN
4
X1CN
3
Y1CN
2
D-GND
1
52030-3029
MX3500N
Service Manual
OCSW
LCD
BACK LIGHT
PWRSW
LCD INVERTOR
PWB
Signal
OCSW
PWRSW
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Original cover SW
Operaton panel power supply switch
Function/Operation
Timing switch for document size detection
Outputs the DC power supply ON/OFF control signal.
Name
MFP OPE-P PWB
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB
Document detection light receiving PWB
Document detection light emitting PWB
Function/Operation
Detects the key pressed on the operation panel.
Drives LCD and the backlight, and controls the touch-panel.
Receives the light from the document detection light emitting PWB, and detects the document size.
Emits light for document size detection.
2. Operational descriptions
(1)
A. Outline
The operation panel unit is composed of the MFP OPE-P PWB, the
LCD INV PWB/LVDS PWB, the LCD unit, and the operation keys,
and is used to operate the machine and to set and display the
machine status.
1)
Remove the paper exit cover and the upper cabinet left.
2)
Remove the front cabinet upper and the operation panel base
plate.
3)
4)
Unit
Operation panel unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
Parts
LCD INV PWB
LVDS PWB
LCD module
Touch panel
POWER SW PWB
MFP OPE-P PWB
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-a
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-c
(1)-e
a. LCD INV PWB
b. LVDS PWB
1)
2)
Remove the LCD INV PWB (A). Remove the LVDS PWB (B).
c. LCD module
e. POWER SW PWB
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
2)
3)
d. Touch panel
1)
2)
3)
MX3500N
Service Manual
MHPS
5
4
3
7
MIM
CLI
3
2
501190-4017
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CN1
501190-2017
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
CCD PWB
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
CN3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
1
2
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
CL
INVERTOR
PWB
Signal
CLI
MHPS
MIM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
MiM_A
MiM_B
MiM_/A
MiM_/B
1
2
3
4
AGND
AGND
TC+
TE+
TCTEAGND
AGND
TB+
TD+
TBTDAGND
AGND
TA+
TCLK+
TATCLKAGND
AGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
AGND
AGND
AGND
A12V
CCD_CPAGND
CCD_CP+
A5V
AGND
AGND
CCD_RS+
A3.3V
CCD_RS/LVDS_STBY
AGND
/RES_CCDAD
CCD_CLK2AD_SCLK
CCD_CLK2+
AD_WRSO
AGND
AD_SEN
CCD_CLK1+
AD_RDSI
CCD_CLK1AGND
AGND
AD_CLPIN
AD_MCLKAD_BLKCLP
AD_MCLK+
CCD_SH
AGND
AGND
CLKP1_OUT+
SH_OUT+
CLKP1_OUTSH_OUTAGND
AGND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
P-GND
P-GND
CL
24VPD
24VPD
5
4
3
2
1
MHPS
D-GND
5V
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
3
2
1
MHPS
D-GND
5V
CN134
CN130
CN148
CN147
CN137
Name
Scanner lamp
Scanner home position sensor
Scanner motor
Name
Pulley belt
Pulley
Scanner drive wire
Reflector
No. 2 mirror
No. 3 mirror
Lens
CCD PWB
Idle gear
SCN-CNT PWB
501190-4017
501190-2017
Function/Operation
Illuminates the document. (Xenon lamp)
Detects the home position of the copy lamp unit.
Drives the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Function/Operation
Transmits the scanner motor power to the pulley.
Drives the scanner drive wire.
Transmits the scanner motor power to the copy lamp unit and the mirror base unit.
Condenses the copy lamp light.
Inducts the document image into the No.3 mirror.
Inducts the document image into the lens.
Reduces the document image (light), and project it on CCD.
Reads the document image (optical signal) and converts it into the electric signal.
Transmits the scanner motor power to the belt.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
1)
The copy lamp radiates light onto the document, and the
reflected light is scanned by the three line (RGB) CCD element
and then converted into image signals (analog).
2)
The image signals (analog) are converted into 10bit digital signals by the A/D converter.
3)
The image signals (digital) are sent to the image process section (scanner control PWB).
B. Detail description
R
G
B
(Image data per 1 line)
The scanner motor (MIM) is controlled by the drive signal sent from
the scanner control PWB.
The scanner lamp (CLI) is driven by the scanner lamp drive voltage
generated in the CL inverter PWB according to the control signal
sent from the scanner control PWB.
Red component of
image data
(4)
Green component of
image data
B
Blue component of
image data
1)
Each image signal (analog) of RGB is converted into 10bit digital signal by the A/D converter.
2)
The red CCD extracts the red components from the document
image, the green CCD the green components, and the blue CCD
the blue components. This operation is called Color Separation.
CCD PWB
The CCD element, appeared as one unit, but has three separate
rows of CCD elements drive each for (RGB).
Scanning of a document in the main scanning direction is performed by the CCD elements. Scanning of a document in the sub
scanning direction is performed by shifting the scanner unit position
with the scanner motor.
3
CCD
IC
R ADC
IC
G ADC
IC
B ADC
Transfer IC
R
(5)
R
G
B
Zooming operation
(1)
A. Optical system
(1)-o
Scanner unit
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
3)
Remove the upper cabinet right and the upper cabinet left.
4)
5)
Remove the mylar. Remove the screws, and the ground sheet.
Remove the screw, and the I/F cable holder unit. Remove the
screws, and remove the scanner unit.
(1)-n
(1)-b
(1)-o
(1)-m
(1)
(1)-a
(1)-k
(1)-f
(1)-e
(1)-h (1)-l
(1)-p
(1)-j
(1)-q
(1)-g
(1)-f
(1)-p
(1)-c
(1)-i
(1)-d
4
2
1
(1)
Unit
Scanner unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
Parts
Table glass
SPF glass
Lens
CCD
Reflector
Mirrors
Lamp
CL inverter PWB
CCD unit
Scanner motor
Scanner home position
sensor
Original cover SW
Document detection light
receiving PWB
Document detection light
emitting PWB
Rails
Drive wire
Drive belt
Maintenance
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
3
4
4
a. Table glass
b. SPF glass
1)
Remove the SPF glass (A). Remove the glass holder (B) and
the table glass (C).
2
C
1
A
4)
c. Lens
d. CCD
1)
2)
Remove the dark box cover (A) and the lens cover (B).
Shift the lamp unit to the right end. Loosen the screws and
remove the wire.
2
3
A
2
B
5)
3)
While rotating the lamp unit, lift the lamp unit. Remove the harness holder and the flat cable. Remove the lamp unit.
A
e. Reflector
f. Mirrors
1)
2)
3)
6)
g. Lamp
h. CL inverter PWB
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
Disconnect the connector, and remove the scanner home position sensor.
1
2
i. CCD unit
1)
l. Original cover SW
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
j. Scanner motor
1)
Remove the upper cabinet rear cover and the upper cabinet
rear.
2)
2)
p. Drive wire
1)
q. Drive belt
2)
* Install the drive wire in the sequence shown in the figure below.
Wind the drive wire 10 turns around the winding pulley.
The 9th turn must be fixed with a screw.
7
6
2
5
1
3
7
3)
10 9 8 1
4
6
5
2
1
3
o. Rails
1 8 9 10
4. Maintenance
A. Optical Section
When moving the copy lamp unit manually for cleaning or adjusting the scanner section and the mirror section, be sure to turn OFF the main
power source (the power switch inside the front cover) and confirm that the power LED on the operation panel is OFF.
If the copy lamp unit is manually moved with the main power ON, the trouble code "F6-30" may occur.
If the trouble code "F6-30" is not canceled by turning OFF/ON the main power, refer to the Service Manual (FAX self diagnostics and the trouble codes).
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Mirror/Lens/
Reflector/CCD
Table glass/
SPF glass
Scanner lamp
Rails
Drive belt/
Drive wire
2
3
4
5
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
: Replace
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Specified positions
1
1
4
5
3
5
1
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
MX3500N
[D]
MANUAL PAPER FEED SECTION
Service Manual
CN1
2
PSFMA//
INT24V1
5
PSFMB//
3
PSFMA/
1
INT24V1
6
PSFMB/
4
B6B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
AC PWB
24V3
/MPGS
/MPFS
24V3
/MPUC
24V3
QR/P4 32PIN
CN26
15
31
30
14
28
13
S
5
4
/MPGS
/MPFS
/MPUC
24V3
1
2
4
3
5
6
B32B-PHDSS-B
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
8
9
6
7
14
15
12
13
10
11
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
SM18P
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
R
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
CPFM_LD
2
/CPFM_D
1
/CPFM_CK
4
P-GND
5
B32B-PHDSS-B
5
4
3
2
1
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
5
4
3
2
1
CN17
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
PCU PWB
15
31
30
14
28
13
P
CN9
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
FG-OUT
5V
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
B7P-PH-K-S
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
DF11-6DP-SP1
PHNR-8-H + BU08P-TR-P-Ha
24V3
1
8
7
/MPFS
2
6
HPDET
3
CN3(2/2)
HPDET
7
D-GND
5VLED7
8
9
5
4
D-GND
5VLED7
4
5
2
3
/MPGS
24V3
7
6
MPFD
1
2
3
1
2
24V3
/MPUC
2
1
P
1
2
SM2P
24V3
/MPFS
R
1
2
PFM
HPDET
D-GND
5VLED7
PHNR-5-H + BU05P-TR-P-H
MPFD
10
4
5
1
2
3
/MPGS
24V3
5VLED7
D-GND
MPFD
2
1
5
4
3
R
1
2
MPUC
1
2
3
SM2P
24V3
/MPGS
6
4
2
5
3
1
MPFD
D-GND
5VLED7
P
1
2
5VLED7
5VLED7
5VLED7
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP2
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
MPFS
MPFD
MPED
5VN
MPWD
16
13
18
19
20
PHNR-14-H + BU14P-TR-P-H
12
MPLD
3
14
MPLD2
1
11
5VLED12
4
10
9
5VN
MPWD
PHNR-9-H + BU09P-TR-P-H
5
6
MTOP2
22
MTOP2
5VLED13
24
5VLED13
6
5
4
MPLD
D-GND
5VLED12
4
5
6
1
2
3
MPLD
D-GND
5VLED12
3
2
1
5VN
MPWD
D-GND
7
8
9
3
2
1
D-GND
5VN
MPWD
1
2
3
MTOP2
D-GND
5VLED13
MTOP1
25
MTOP1
5VLED9
27
5VLED9
10
1
2
3
MTOP1
D-GND
5VLED9
5VN
28
HUD_M
29
D-GND
14
TH_M
31
S32B-PHDSS-B
4
3
2
1
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5VN
HUD_M
D-GND
TH_M
TH_D/HUD_M
MPGS
CN3(1/2)
MPLD
MPLD2
5VLED12
CPFM
1
3
5
4
2
7
6
8
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-8DP-SP1
MPWD
MTOP1
MTOP2
MPLD
Signal name
CPFM
MPED
MPFD
MPDS
MPGS
MPLD
MPUC
MPWD
MTOP1
MTOP2
PFM
Name
Paper feed motor
Manual feed paper empty detection
Manual feed paper entry detection
Paper pickup solenoid
Manual paper feed gate solenoid
Manual feed paper length detector
Manual paper feed clutch
Manual paper feed tray paper width detector
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2
Transport motor
TH_M/HUD_M
Temperature/humidity detection
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
Paper feed roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Separation roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (Manual paper feed tray)
Torque limiter
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Paper feed section drive
Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
Manual paper feed tray paper empty detection
Paper pickup solenoid (Manual paper feed)
Controls the manual paper feed gate solenoid Open/Close.
Manual paper feed tray paper length detection
Controls the manual paper feed section paper feed roller ON/OFF.
Manual paper feed tray paper width detection
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (storage position)
Manual paper feed tray paper pull-out position detection (pulling-out position)
Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive
between the resist roller and the right door section.
Detects temperature/humidity.
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation roller to
prevent double feed.
Transports paper transported from the transport roller 11 to the transport roller 8.
Transports paper fed from the manual feed tray to the transport roller 8.
2. Operational descriptions
The paper pickup roller moves up and down to press paper and
separates the top paper, which is fed to the paper feed roller.
The paper feed roller feeds paper to the paper transport section,
and the separation roller prevents double feed.. ON/OFF control of
the pickup roller and the paper feed roller is made by the manual
paper feed clutch. Paper is transported to the resist roller by the
manual paper transport roller.
(2)
(2)-i
(2)-e
(2)-b
(2)-g
(2)-a
(2)-h
(2)-c
(2)-f
(2)-d
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-d
(1)-c
(1)-e
(1)
(1)
Unit
Manual
paper feed
tray unit
a
b
c
d
e
(2)
Manual
paper feed
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
Temperature/humidity sensors
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 1
Manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2
Manual paper feed tray paper
width detector
Manual feed paper length
detector
Paper pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Manual paper feed gate
solenoid
Transport roller 12 (Drive)
Manual feed paper entry
detection
Torque limiter
Manual feed paper empty
detection
Paper pickup solenoid
Maintenance
{
{
{
4)
5)
2
1
2)
6)
3)
Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl.
Remove the ADU cabinet F, and the right door release lever.
3
1
a. Temperature/humidity sensors
b. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 1
c. Manual paper feed tray pull-out position detector 2
4
5
2)
3)
Disengage the pawl. Lift the MF tray upper and the MF tray 2,
and disconnect the connector.
4)
2
3
4)
Temperature/humidity sensor (A), manual paper feed tray pullout position detector 1 (B), manual paper feed tray pull-out
position detector 2 (C)
(2)
1)
2)
3)
A
B
5)
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller (A) and the paper feed roller
(B).
2)
3)
c. Separation roller
1)
1)
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller and the paper feed roller.
2)
3)
3)
1
2
2
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
3)
g. Torque limiter
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
5)
6)
7)
5)
Remove the E-ring. Remove the shaft and remove the torque
limiter.
1
3
2
1
2)
8)
3)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Paper pickup
roller
Paper feed
roller
Separation
roller
Torque limiter
Transport
rollers
2
3
4
5
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
: Replace
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
(P/G No.: [10]-40, [15]-33)
5
4
2
P
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
PHNR-9-H+
BU09P-TR-P-H
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
10
11
12
2
3
4
5
6
2
3
4
5
6
PHNR-12-H+
BU12P-TR-P-H
D-GND
6
5
CPFD1
4
5VN
12
D-GND
11
CLUD1
5VNPD
10
D-GND
9
8
CPED1
7
5VNPD
D-GND
3
DSW_R
2
5VN
1
6
1
3
5
7
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
5
4
3
2
1
CLUD1
CPED1
10
9
CSS11
CSS13
3
7
6
5
4
2
1
4
CPFM CPUC1
CPUC2
DSW_R
CPFD1
CSS1
8
CSS2
CSS21
CSS23
CSS22
CSS24
PCU
1
2
/CLUM1
P-GND
B2P-PH-K-S
D-GND
CPED2
5VNPD
1
2
24V3
/CPUC2
1
2
3
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
1
2
1
2
3
R
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
D-GND
CLUD2
5VNPD
5
4
3
2
1
SM18P
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
1
2
3
D-GND
CSPD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
CPFM_LD
2
/CPFM_D
1
/CPFM_CK
4
P-GND
5
B32B-PHDSS-B
P
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
/CLUM2
P-GND
B2P-PH-K-S
2
1
D-GND
CPFD2
5VN
D-GND
DSW_R
5VN
8
9
6
7
14
15
12
13
10
11
2
1
1
2
3
D-GND
CPED1
5VNPD
1
2
3
1
2
3
PCU PWB
D-GND
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
S6P-PH-K-S
D-GND
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
S6P-PH-K-S
D-GND
CPFD1
5VN
D-GND
CLUD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
1
2
3
CN17
/CLUM2
P-GND
/CLUM1
P-GND
24V3
/CPUC2
24V3
/CPUC1
24V3
/CPFC
B30B-PHDSS-B
DF1B-24p
CPFD1
CLUD1
CPED1
DSW_R
CSPD1
CPWD11
CPWD12
CSS1
CSS2
CSS11
CSS12
CSS13
CSS14
CSS21
CSS22
CSS23
CSS24
CPFD2
CLUD2
CPED2
CSPD2
CPWD21
CPWD22
AC PWB
CN9
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
7
24
5
22
6
23
8
25
3
20
1
18
2
19
4
21
9
26
10
11
27
28
29
30
12
13
14
S
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
16
17
19
21
23
18
20
22
24
2
4
6
10
12
14
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
CN4
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
5VN
D-GND
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
CN6
CPFD1
1
CLUD1
3
CPED1
5
DSW_R
7
CSPD1
9
CPWD11
21
CPWD12
23
CSS1
11
CSS2
10
CSS11
13
CSS12
15
CSS13
17
CSS14
19
CSS21
12
CSS22
14
CSS23
16
CSS24
18
CPFD2
2
CLUD2
4
CPED2
6
CSPD2
8
CPWD21
22
CPWD22
24
B24B-PHDSS-B
MX3500N
Service Manual
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
1
PHNR-2-H
BU02P-TR-P-H
2
1
2
1
FG-OUT
5V
CPFM_LD
/CPFM_D
/CPFM_CK
P-GND
INT24V2
B7P-PH-K-S
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPFC
CSS12
CSS14
CSPD1
11
CLUD2
CPED2
CPFD2
CSPD2
11
Signal name
CLUD1
CLUD2
CLUM1
CLUM2
CPED 1
CPED 2
CPFC
CPFD1
CPFD2
CPFM
CPUC1
CPUC2
CSPD1
CSPD2
CSS1
CSS2
DSW_C
Name
Tray 1 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
Tray 2 upper limit detection (Lift HP detection)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper tray lift-up motor (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Tray vertical transport clutch
Tray 1 transport detection (Paper entry detection)
Tray 2 transport detection (Paper entry detection)
Paper feed motor
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 1 install detection
Tray 2 install detection
Tray 1, 2 transfer cover open/close detection
No.
1
2
3
4
Name
Paper feed roller (No.1 paper feed tray)
Paper pickup roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Separation roller (No. 1 paper feed tray)
Torque limiter
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Rotation plate
Function/Operation
Tray 1 upper limit detection
Tray 2 upper limit detection
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Drives the paper tray lift plate.
Tray 1 paper empty detection
Tray 2 paper empty detection
Controls the paper feed tray section paper transport roller ON/OFF.
Tray 1 paper pass detection
Tray2 paper pass detection
Paper feed section drive
Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
Controls the paper feed tray section roller ON/OFF.
Tray 1 paper remaining quantity detection
Tray 2 paper remaining quantity detection
Detects the install of the tray 1
Detects the install of the tray 2
Detects opening of the tray 1, 2 transport cover.
Function/Operation
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
A certain level of resistance force is supplied to the rotation of the separation
roller to prevent double feed.
Feeds paper to the paper transport section.
Feeds paper to the paper feed roller.
Separates paper to prevent Double Feed.
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 1 and paper feed roller
(No. 2 paper feed tray) to the transport roller 7.
Transports the paper fed from the paper tray 1 to the transport roller 7.
Transports the paper fed from the paper feed tray 1, 2 or 3, 4 to the transport
roller 8.
Lifts up the paper to keep the paper feed position.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Preliminary operation before paper feed
When the paper is set and the paper feed tray is inserted, the
pickup roller moves down and the paper feed tray sensor turns
ON.
The lift-up motor operates to lift the rotating plate.
The paper upper limit sensor turns on to stop the rotating plate at
the specified position.
(Figure showing state transition of the remaining paper detection sensor during tray elevation and
changes in status according to the number of remaining sheets)
The no-paper detection sensor detects
the state of no remaining paper.
CPED
(paper sensor)
Turn plate
Remaining Paper
Detection Actuator
1/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
CSPD
(remaining paper detection)
2/3 Field
Sensor logic: Hi
3/3 Field
Sensor logic: Low
(1)
1)
2)
(1)-e
(1)-k
2
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-j
(1)-c
1
(1)-f
3)
4)
5)
(1)-i
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)-b
(1)-g
(1)-j
(1)-c
(1)
(2)-b
(2)-a
(1)
Unit
Tray paper
feed unit 1, 2
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
(2)
Others
i
j
k
a
b
Parts
Paper pickup roller
Paper feed roller
Separation roller
Tray 1 transport cover
detection
Transport roller 7 (Drive)
Transport roller 4 (Drive)
Torque limiter
Tray 1, 2 paper presence
detection
Tray 1, 2 upper limit detection
Tray 1, 2 transport detection
Transport roller 5 (Drive)
Tray 1, 2 paper remaining
quantity detection
Tray 1, 2 install detection
Maintenance
{
{
{
{
{
1)
1)
2)
Remove the paper pickup roller (a) and the paper feed roller
(b).
1)
2)
3)
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit, and remove the belt.
1
c. Separation roller
1)
2)
3)
4)
4)
2)
Remove the separation roller. Remove the E-ring and the separation shift. Remove the torque limiter.
2
1
1)
1)
2)
2)
Remove the E-ring and the bearing, and remove the paper
feed lower PG unit.
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3)
2
1
1
3
1
3)
4)
5)
Remove the tray 1, 2 paper presence detector (a) and the tray
1, 2 upper limit detector (b).
1
2
2)
1)
2)
Remove the paper feed reverse PG unit. (Tray paper feed unit
1 only)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1, 2 paper remaining quantity detector.
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the tray
1, 2 presence detector.
3)
2)
3)
4)
4
3
1
2
(2) Others
a. Tray 1, 2 paper remaining quantity detection
1)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Separation roller
Torque limiter
Transport rollers
No.
Part name
1
2
Paper pickup
roller
Paper feed roller
3
4
5
When
calling
: Replace
Mechanical
parts
5
4
1
2
3
5
4
1
2
3
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [10]-40,
[15]-33)
(P/G No.: [10]-41,
[15]-29)
(P/G No.: [9]-4,
[14]-37)
MX3500N
Service Manual
RRM
PSFMA//
INT24V1
PSFMB//
PSFMA/
INT24V1
PSFMB/
PFM
1
2
CN1
2
PSFMA//
5
INT24V1
3
PSFMB//
1
PSFMA/
6
INT24V1
4
PSFMB/
B6B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
PPD2
3
PPD1
D-GND
PPD1
5VNPD
1
2
3
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
PHNR-6-H
BU06P-TR-P-H
D-GND
6
PPD1
5
5VNPD
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
PPD2
D-GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN17
29
31
D-GND
PPD1
1
5
6
2
3
4
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
32
PPD2
30
D-GND
23
5VNPD
27
D-GND
26
REGS_R
24 REGS_R_LED#
17
/PCSS
16
24V3
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU
PWB
DF11-6DP-SP1
Signal name
PFM
PPD1
PPD2
RRM
Name
Transport motor
Resist front detection
Resist detection
Resist motor
No.
1
Name
Resist roller (Drive)
2
3
Function/Operation
Transport drive between the resist roller and the paper feed section. Transport drive between the resist
roller and the right door section.
Detects paper before the resist roller.
Detects paper after the resist roller.
Controls the drive and ON/OFF of the resist roller.
Function/Operation
Transport paper to the transfer section./ Controls the transport timing of paper and adjusts relationship
between images and paper.
Applies a pressure to paper and the resist roller to supply transport power of the transport roller to paper.
Transport the paper to the resist roller.
2. Operational descriptions
7)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the resist
roller unit.
Paper is fed from each paper feed section and transported to the
resist roller by the transport rollers. ON/OFF control of each transport roller is made by the paper transport clutch. The resist roller
controls the relative positions of transported paper and the transfer
image. The resist roller is driven by the transport motor. The relative positions of paper and the transfer image are determined by
the ON timing of the transport motor.
(1)
(1)-d
1)
2)
(1)-b
(1)-a
(1)
Unit
Resist roller
unit
a
b
c
d
e
Parts
Resist front detection
Transport roller 8 (Drive)
Resist roller (Drive)
Resist detection
Resist roller (Idle)
Maintenance
{
{
2)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
3
4
1)
1)
2)
Remove the spring and the E-ring. Remove the JAM release
handle.
2)
3)
3)
Remove the parts. Slide the resist roller (Drive) to the front
side. Remove the parallel pin, the PS gear, and the E-ring from
the resist roller (Drive).
3
2
5
d. Resist detection
1)
2)
1
2
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
PS follower roller
Transport rollers
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
: Replace
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
MX3500N
[G]
DUPLEX SECTION
Service Manual
DRIVER
SUB
PWB
CN2
ADMHA//
ADMHA/
ADMHB/
ADMHB//
INT24V1
INT24V1
N.C
B7B-PH-K-S
2
1
4
3
5
6
7
S
21
22
23
24
25
26
DF1B-26p
ADMHA//
ADMHA/
ADMHB/
ADMHB//
INT24V1
INT24V1
P
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
4
6
3
2
5
ADMHA//
ADMHA/
ADMHB/
ADMHB//
INT24V1
INT24V1
ADUHM
PHNR-2-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
2
24V3
1
1
/ADUGS
2
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
CN2
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
6
5
4
3
2
1
PHNR-6-H + BU06P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
TFD3
D-GND
5VLED1
1
2
3
POD3
D-GND
5VLED4
4
5
POD3
TFD3
ADUGS
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
7
8
9
APPD1
10
D-GND
11
5VLED5
12
S16B-PHDSS-B
CN3(1/2)
APPD2
4
D-GND
5
6
5VLED10
S32B-PHDSS-B
RIGHT
DOOR I/F
PWB
CN1
5VN
1
D-GND
2
SIN3
3
SELIN1
4
SELIN2
5
6
SELIN3
APPD1
7
APPD2
8
9
APPD3
POD3
10
MPFD
11
5VNPD
16
MPWD
13
TH_M
14
HUD_M
15
S16B-PHDSS-B
FG
3
DSW_ADU
2
D-GND
3
2
4
5VLED2
1
PHNR-4-H + BU04P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
DSW_ADU
D-GND
5VLED2
1
APPD1
3
2
D-GND
2
3
5VLED5
1
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
2
3
APPD1
D-GND
5VLED5
1
2
3
APPD2
D-GND
5VLED10
9
25
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
24V3
/ADUGS
F-GND
5VN
D-GND
SIN3
SELIN1
SELIN2
SELIN3
APPD1
APPD2
9
25
32
1
17
2
18
3
19
4
20
21
6
10
7
23
8
15
31
30
14
28
13
P
POD3
21
MPFD
6
5VNPD
10
MPWD
7
TH_M
23
HUD_M
8
24V3
15
/MPGS
31
/MPFS
30
24V3
14
/MPUC
28
13
24V3
QR/P4 32PINS
FG
6 5 3 4 2 1
CN26
7
/ADUGS
9
5VN
8
D-GND
10
SIN3
SELIN1
13
12
SELIN2
15
SELIN3
1
APPD1
2
APPD2
14
POD3
MPFD
11
32
5VNPD
16
MPWD
17
TH_M
19
HUD_M
18
P-GND
5
/MPGS
4
/MPFS
/MPUC
6
24V3
3
B32B-PHDSS-B
ADULM
3
APPD1
DSW_ADU
APPD2
PCU PWB
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
24V3
DF11-6DP-SP1
DRIVER
MAIN PWB
CN5
ADMLA//
8
INT24V1
11
ADMLB//
9
ADMLA/
7
INT24V1
12
ADMLB/
10
B12B-PH-K-S
1
2
3
4
5
6
ADMLA//
INT24V1
ADMLB//
ADMLA/
INT24V1
ADMLB/
Signal name
ADULM
APPD1
APPD2
DSW_ADU
POD3
TFD3
ADUGS
ADUHM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
Name
ADU motor lower
ADU transport path detection 1
ADU transport path detection 2
ADU transport open/close detection
Right tray paper exit detection
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
ADU gate solenoid
ADU motor upper
Name
Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Transport roller 11 (Drive)
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
ADU gate
Transport roller 13 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Drives the right door section.
Detects paper pass in the upstream of the duplex (ADU).
Detects paper pass in the midstream of the duplex (ADU).
Duplex (ADU) cover open/close detection
Detects the paper exit into the right tray.
Detects the right tray paper exit full.
Controls the ADU gate.
Drive the transport roller 13.
Function/Operation
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 13 to the transport roller 11.
Transports the paper transported from the transport roller 10 to the transport roller 12.
Used to discharge paper.
Selects the paper path to transport paper to the duplex (ADU) section or to discharge paper to
the right tray.
Transports paper from the paper exit roller 1 to the paper exit roller 2. Transports paper to the
duplex (ADU) section.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Duplex section
A. Duplex section
(2)-b
(1)-e
(1)-d
(1)-n
(1)-c
(1)-f
(1)-l
(1)-a
(1)-m
(1)-h
(1)-g
(2)-a
(1)-i
(1)-b
(1)
(1)-j
(1)-k
(1)
Unit
Right door
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
(2)
Others
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
a
Parts
RD I/F PWB
Manual paper feed clutch
Discharge brush
Detects the right tray paper exit
full.
Right tray paper exit detection
ADU transport open/close
detection
ADU transport path detection 1
Paper exit roller 2 (Drive)
Transport roller 10 (Drive)
Transport roller 11 (Drive)
ADU transport path detection 2
Transport roller 13 (Drive)
ADU gate
ADU gate solenoid
ADU motor lower
Maintenance
{
{
{
{
1)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the MF drive connection plate. Disconnect the connector, then remove the manual paper feed clutch unit.
5)
2
1
2)
a. RD I/F PWB
1)
2)
c. Discharge brush
d. Detects the right tray paper exit full.
e. Right tray paper exit detection
3)
1)
2)
3)
Remove the lock block. Disengage the right door lock pawl.
7)
Remove each sensor mounting plate. Right tray paper exit full
detection (A), right tray paper exit detection (B)
A
3
1
3
f. ADU transport open/close detection
1)
4)
Remove the right paper exit upper cabinet unit, and disconnect
the connector.
5)
6)
2)
3)
2)
3)
4)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
B
k. ADU transport path detection 2
1)
2)
3)
2)
3)
2
3
l. Transport roller 13 (Drive)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
(2)
Others
2)
3)
m. ADU gate
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
3
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Gears
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
: Replace
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
2
1
2
Service Manual
MX3500N
10
10
10
1
2
P
1
2
R
PCU PWB
6 7
4
2
12
14
LSU FAN
1
11 9
13
PGM
5
1
2
3
4
B4P-PH-K-R
5VN
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
CN6
4
3
2
1
6
5
B7B-PH-K-S
5VN
D-GND
n BD
D-GND
LSUTH1
D-GND
CN9
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN21
1
2
3
4
5
6
CN13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
S6B-XA
CN5
INT5V
1
D-GND
2
D-GND
3
n SCK_LSU
4
5
n TRANS_DATA
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
CN14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
S20B-PHDSS-B
CN3
1
CH0_N
2
CH0_P
3
D-GND
4
D-GND
CH1_N
5
CH1_P
6
CH2_N
7
8
CH2_P
9
D-GND
D-GND
10
11
CLCLK_N
12
CLCLK_P
13
CH3_N
14
CH3_P
15
D-GND
D-GND
16
HSYNC_LSU_N 22
HSYNC_LSU_P 21
D-GND
19
D-GND
20
ECLK_LSU_P
18
17
ECLK_LSU_N
S22B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
3.3V
D-GND
5VN
24V1
P-GND
B6B-XA
INT5V
D-GND
D-GND
n SCK_LSU
n TRANS_DATA
B20B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
LSUASIC_RST
n RSV_DAT
n TRANS_RST
JOBEND_INT
LSUTH1
LSUTH2
VSYNC_K_N
VSYNC_K_P
VSYNC_C_P
VSYNC_C_N
VSYNC_M_N
VSYNC_M_P
VSYNC_Y_P
VSYNC_Y_N
CH0_N
CH0_P
D-GND
D-GND
CH1_N
CH1_P
CH2_N
CH2_P
D-GND
D-GND
CLCLK_N
CLCLK_P
CH3_N
CH3_P
D-GND
D-GND
HSYNC_LSU_N
HSYNC_LSU_P
D-GND
D-GND
ECLK_LSU_P
ECLK_LSU_N
B22B-PHDSS-B
3
4
B6P-PH-K-S
/BREAK
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
P-GND
24V1
MOTHER PWB
LSUTH1
D-GND
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_M
/ENB_M
DT_MDT_M+
D-GND
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
n LDERR_M
B34B-PHDSS-B
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
15
13
17
19
18
16
14
20
22
21
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
CN4
27
25
29
31
30
28
26
32
34
33
D-GND
10
9
INT5V
/SH_M
8
7
/ENB_M
DT_M6
DT_M+
5
4
D-GND
3
Vref_M
LDCHK_M
2
n LDERR_M 1
3
1
5
7
6
4
2
8
10
9
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_Y
/ENB_Y
DT_YDT_Y+
D-GND
Vref_Y
LDCHK_Y
n LDERR_Y
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_C
/ENB_C
DT_CDT_C+
D-GND
Vref_C
LDCHK_C
n LDERR_C
CN8
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN4
B3P-PH-K-S
1
24V1
2
n FANRDY
3
P-GND
CN1 B12B-PHDSS-B
3
D-GND
1
INT5V
5
/SH_K
/ENB_K
7
6
DT_KDT_K+
4
2
D-GND
8
Vref_K
SK_K
10
9
n LDERR_K
11
LSUTH2
12
D-GND
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
D-GND
INT5V
/SH_K
/ENB_K
DT_KDT_K+
D-GND
Vref_K
SK_K
n LDERR_K
/BREAK
POLYCLK
/LOCK
/START
P-GND
24V1
LSU PWB
CN10
24V3
1
4
/LSUSS_B
B5P-PH-K-S
LSUSS
24V3
/LSUSS_B
SM2P
10
Signal name
PGM
LSUSS
LSUFAN
Name
Polygon motor
LSU shutter solenoid
LSU cooling fan motor
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
Name
LD PWB (K)
LD PWB (C)
LD PWB (M)
LD PWB (Y)
Cylindrical lens
f lens 1
f lens 2
Reflection mirror
Cylindrical lens
OPC drum
Convergence lens for BD
BD PWB
LSU CNT PWB
14
LSU therminstor
Function/Operation
Laser beam is reflected at the constant speed rotation.
Opens or closes the LSU shutter.
Cools the polygon motor.
Function/Operation
Controls laser beam flashing and the output value.
2. Operational descriptions
(Scan system)
A. LSU section
(1) Outline
Image data sent from the image process circuit through the mother
are converted into laser beams to be radiated onto the OPC drum
surface. The LSU unit is composed of the primary system including
optical elements such as lasers and the polygon mirror and the mirror which assures the optical path and the scan system which
includes the optical elements including the polygon mirror and the
mirror which assures the optical path.
(2) Composition
(Primary system)
MX-3500N
MX-3501N
MX-4500N
MX-4501N
(3)
Number of
mirror
surfaces
7 surfaces
Rotating speed
Bearing
33813 rpm
(color/35 sheets)
45556 rpm
(Monochorome/
45 sheets)
AIR
Remark
307mm
600dpi
Main scan = 50 to 65m, Sub scan = 60 to 75m
Max. 0.302mW
770 to 795nm
4)
A. LSU section
Remove the LSU slant adjustment plate screw (A), and loosen
the screw (B).
Remove the LSU shaft fixing plate. Remove the screws.
(2)-a
(1)
(1)-c
(1)-b
(1)-a
(2)-b
5)
Shift the front side of the LSU shaft from (A) to (B), and remove
the LSU shaft.
2
(1)
Unit
LSU
(2)
Others
a
b
c
a
b
Parts
Dust-proof glass
LSU cooling fan motor
Polygon motor
LSU shutter solenoid
Cleaning base
Maintenance
{
(1) LSU
1)
2)
Remove the left cabinet rear lower and the left cabinet. (Refer
to Left Cabinet Rear Lower and Left Cabinet in External Outfit
Section.)
1
B
3)
1)
2)
3)
Insert the LSU cleaning rod and slide it back and forth a few
times to clean the dust-proof glass.
4)
Remove the screws, then lift up the LSU CNT PWB cover F
(A).
Remove the screws, and lift up the polygon motor unit (B).
2
b. LSU cooling fan motor
1)
2)
Remove the screws, and remove the LSU CNT PWB cover R.
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the polygon motor.
* When installing, do not touch the moving section of the polygon mirror and the mirror surface.
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the LSU
cooling fan motor.
(2)
Others
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the LSU
shutter solenoid unit.
* When installing, the shutter U-groove is engaged with the
shutter lever arm shaft section (A).
A
c. Polygon motor
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the fan
cover.
3)
b. Cleaning base
1)
2)
3)
4. Maintenance
A. LSU section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
: Replace
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Mechanical parts
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [2]-35)
MC
GB-Y
MC
1
1
CN9
2
P
6
5
4
3
2
1
CN15
DMCL
DMBK
DL_Y
DL_M
DL_C
DL_BK
GB
GB
GB
GB
MC
MC
DMCLB//
INT24V1
DMCLB/
DMCLA/
INT24V1
DMCLA//
3
1
1
3
CN1
3
6
4
1
5
2
23
21
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
10
DL_BK#
1
1
3
D-GND
DL_BK#
D-GND
DL_C#
D-GND
DL_M#
D-GND
DL_Y#
B40B-PADSS-B
4
2
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
D-GND
2
9
10
DL_C#
1
24
22
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
10
DL_Y#
1
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
9
D-GND
2
DL_M#
10
1
1
3
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN26
20
21
22
23
24
PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION
DMCLB//
1
INT24V1
2
DMCLB/
3
DMCLA/
4
INT24V1
5
DMCLA//
6
R
SM6
INT24V1
6
5
INT24V1
DMBKB//
4
DMBKB/
3
DMBKA/
2
DMBKA//
1
D-GND
DL_M#
53254-0310
DL_C
D-GND
DL_C#
53254-0310
DL_BK
D-GND
DL_BK#
53254-0310
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
MC PWB
AC
PWB
DL_Y
D-GND
1
DL_Y#
3
53254-0310
DL_M
MC-K
GB-K
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
PCU PWB
GB-C
1st TC PWB
GB-M
CN2
1TC_CL
3
HV_REM
7
MC_YMC
6
1TC_K
5
1TC_YMC
4
P-GND
2
INT24V2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
[i]
MC-CMY
CN1
INT24V2
7
P-GND
6
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_K
3
MC_YMC
2
HV_REM
1
1TC_CL
5
B7P-PH-K-S
MX3500N
Service Manual
DRIVER
SUB PWB
Signal name
DMCL
DMBK
DL
MC
GB
Name
Drum motor (Color)
Drum motor (Black)
Discharge lamp (Y, M, C, BK)
Main charge (Y, M, C, K)
Grid (Y, M, C, K)
Function/Operation
Color photoconductor drive
Black photoconductor drive
Light is passed to the discharge lens to drive the OPC drum surface.
The OPC drum surface is charged negatively.
The OPC drum surface potential is controlled.
No.
1
2
Name
OPC drum (Y, M, C, K)
Cleaning blade
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images are formed.
Residual toner is cleaned and removed from the OPC drum surface.
2. Operational descriptions
A. OPC drum section
The OPC drum surface is negatively charged by the main charger.
The laser beam images are radiated to the OPC drum surface by
the laser (writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
1)
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
Screen grid
The main charger grid is provided with the screen grid. The
OPC drum is charged at a voltage virtually same as the voltage applied to the screen grid.
2)
LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum surface by the laser
(writing) unit to form latent electrostatic images.
OPC drum
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
OPC drum
LED lights
When LED lights are radiated to the OPC drum CGL, negative
and positive charges are generated.
Positive charges generated in CGL are attracted to the negative charges on the OPC drum surface. On the other hand,
negative charges are attracted to positive charges in the aluminum layer of the OPC drum.
Therefore, positive charges and negative charges are balanced out on the OPC drum and in the aluminum layer, reducing positive and negative charges to decrease the OPC drum
surface voltage.
Electric charges remain at a position where LED lights are not
radiated.
MX3500N PHOTOCONDUCTOR SECTION i 2
4)
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
Aluminum
layer
CGL
CTL
(1)-d
(1)-e
(1)-a
Lens
(1)
(1)-c
(1)-b
(2)-b
(2)-a
(1)
Unit
Drum unit
(2)
Others
(1)
1)
a
b
c
d
e
a
b
Parts
Drum
Charging unit
Side seal F, R
Toner reception seal
Cleaner blade
Waste toner drive motor
Waste toner full detection switch
Maintenance
2)
6)
Hold the lock lever, and pull out each color drum unit slowly,
and support the lower section of the unit with both hands to
remove.
3)
a. OPC drum
1)
2)
3)
Slide the OPC drum to the front side, and lift the drum rear
side, and remove the OPC drum from the hole in the front section.
Loosen the fixing screw of the developing unit on the left side
of each color drum unit.
1
2
b. MC charger unit
5)
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
e. Cleaner blade
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
5)
6)
Release the pawl, and remove the process cover. Remove the
MC charger unit.
2
c. Side seal F, R
2)
3)
4)
Remove the side seal F/R and the toner reception seal.
(2)
Others
1)
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
toner drive unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the waste toner drive motor
from the waste toner drive unit.
Reference line
Reference line
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
0 - 0.5mm
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
3)
1)
2)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the waste
toner drive unit.
Remove the screw and the spring, and remove the waste toner
box empty lever.
Disengage the connector and the pawl, and remove the waste
toner full detection switch.
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Drum (BK)
Cleaner blade (BK)
Charging unit (BK)
Drum (C)
Cleaner blade (C)
Charging unit (C)
Side seal F/R (BK)
Toner reception
seal (BK)
Side seal F/R(C)
Toner reception
seal (C)
Waste toner box
When
calling
150
K
300
K
100
K
450
K
600
K
200
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
300
K
1200
K
400
K
Monochrome
supply
1350
K
1500
K
500
K
1650
K
1800
K
600
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [23]-14)
(P/G No.: [23]-2)
Color supply
(P/G No.: [23]-14)
(P/G No.: [23]-2)
Mechanical
parts
7,9
8,10
1,4
2,5
7,9
3,6
11
7 : Feb. 15 2007
MX3500N
[J]
TONER SUPPLY SECTION
Service Manual
TNM_Y
CRUM(Y)
TNM_M
TNM_C
CRUM(M)
CRUM(C)
CRUM(K)
1
TNM_K
1
1
1
PCSFM
1
2
3
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
R
1
2
SM2P
TNM_K_1
TNM_K_2
SM2P
TNM_C_1
TNM_C_2
SM2P
TNM_M_1
TNM_M_2
SM2P
TNM_Y_1
TNM_Y_2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
P
1
2
CN5
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
1
3
5
7
1
2
3
4
5V_CRUM
CRM_K_DT#
CRM_K_CK#
D-GND
1
2
3
4
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
2
4
5
6
CRM_C_DT#
CRM_C_CK#
5
6
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
9
10
7
8
CRM_M_DT#
CRM_M_CK#
7
8
6
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
8
B10B-PHDSS-B
9
10
P
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
SM10P
9
10
R
B26B-PHDSS-B
CN13
LOCK
23
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU PWB
CRUM(BLACK)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_K_DT#
3
CRM_K_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(CYAN)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_C_DT#
3
CRM_C_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(MAGENTA)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_M_DT#
3
CRM_M_CK#
1
D-GND
CRUM(YELLOW)
2
5V_CRUM
4
CRM_Y_DT#
CRM_Y_CK#
3
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
TNM_K_1
15
TNM_K_2
17
TNM_C_1
19
TNM_C_2
21
TNM_M_1
22
TNM_M_2
24
TNM_Y_1
18
TNM_Y_2
20
INT24V2
5
P-GND
3
/DVM_CL_CK
9
11 /DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
1
24V3
16
/1TURC
14
DHPD_K
32
5VLED
30
DHPD_CL
31
5VLED
29
D-GND
23
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN21
INT24V1
26
/PCSFM
24
1
2
3
6
2
1
3
4
5
1
2
CN12
6
4
10
12
2
INT24V1
LOCK
/PCSFM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
5V_CRUM
INT24V1
/PCSFM
3
2
1
1
2
3
6
2
1
3
4
5
1
2
INT24V1
LOCK
/PCSFM
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-6DP-SP1
Signal name
TNM
CRUM
No.
1
Name
Toner motor (Y, M, C, K)
CRUM (Y,M,C,K)
Name
Toner transport pipe
Function/Operation
Toner supply motor to the develping unit
Data memory for the toner cartridge
Function/Operation
Toner supply pipe from the toner cartridge to the developing unit
2. Operational descriptions
When the toner cartridge is inserted to the machine, the lock pawl
is disengaged and the supply shutter is opened.
The transport pipe shutter is opened and closed by the shaft which
is linked with the developing lever.
3. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Color supply
Toner cartridge
(BK/C/M/Y)
Monochrome/
Color supply
1(C/M/Y)
When
calling
150
K
300
K
100
K
450
K
600
K
200
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
300
K
1200
K
400
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
500
K
User replacement for every toner empty (or the specified traveling distance).
1(BK)
1800
K
600
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
DVTYP_M
2
1
DVTYP_C
2
1
Service Manual
MX3500N
[K]
DEVELOPING SECTION
DVM_CL
DVM_K
DVTYP_Y
BS_Y
BS_M
BS_C
TCS_Y
TCS_M
2
1
DVTYP_K
2
BS_K
1
TCS_C
TCS_K
BS-K
1
2
4
5
6
7
(SPRING)
BS-C
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
DVM_K_LD
5V
B7P-PH-K-S
BS-K
(SPRING)
BS-Y
BS-M
1
2
4
5
6
7
BS-C
(SPRING)
(SPRING)
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
5V
B7P-PH-K-S
BS-Y
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
CN1
6
5
4
3
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
44
C
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
QR/P8-8P
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
QR/P8-8P
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
QR/P8-8P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
P
B6P-PH-K-S
INT24V2
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
QR/P8-8P
MC PWB
2
3
4
1
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
C
CN9
1
INT24V2
B3P-PH-K-S
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
AC PWB
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
24V3
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
3
4
6
5
7
8
9
10
PHNR-10-H,BU10P-TR-P-H
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1
5
3
9
11
1
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
/HV_CLK#
/HV_LD1#
HV_REM#
INT24V2
P-GND
/DVM_CL_CK
/DVM_CL_D
DVM_CL_LD
CN12
INT24V2
6
P-GND
4
10 /DVM_K_CK
/DVM_K_D
12
DVM_K_LD
2
CN26
20
21
22
23
24
6
8
12
10
14
16
18
20
25
27
31
29
33
35
37
39
CN15
5
7
11
9
13
15
17
19
24V2
TCS_Y
D-GND
TSG_Y
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
24V3
TCS_M
D-GND
TSG_M
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
24V3
TCS_C
D-GND
TSG_C
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
24V3
TCS_K
D-GND
TSG_BK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
B32B-PHDSS-B
26
28
32
30
34
36
38
40
B40B-PADSS-B
BS-M
4
3
2
1
BLACK
D-GND
DVTYP_K
DVSET_K
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
CYAN
D-GND
DVTYP_C
DVSET_C
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
MAGENTA
D-GND
DVTYP_M
DVSET_M
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
4
3
2
1
YELLOW
D-GND
DVTYP_Y
DVSET_Y
5VN
S4P-PH-K-S
PCU PWB
Signal name
DVM_CL
DVM_K
BS
TCS
DVTYP
No.
1
2
3
Name
Developer motor (color)
Developer motor (black)
Developer bias (Y, M, C, K)
Toner density sensor (Y, M, C, K)
DV initial detection PWB (Y, M, C, K)
Function/Operation
Color developing unit drive
Black developing unit drive
Developer bias
Controls the toner density in the developing unit.
Detection of a new developing unit (machine exclusive for CRU)
Name
Developer roller
Stirring roller
Toner filter (Y, M, C, K)
Function/Operation
Latent electrostatic images on the OPC drum are changed to visible images.
Stirring developer
Prevents dispersing of toner.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Developing section
(1)-d
(1)
(1)-b
(1)-e
(1)-f
(1)-g
(1)-c
(1)-a
(1)
Toner and carrier in the developing unit are agitated and transported by the mixing roller.
Unit
Developing
unit
(1)
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
Developer
DV seal
DV side seal F
DV side seal R
DV initial PWB
Density sensor
Toner filter
Maintenance
Developing unit
1)
2)
3)
a. Developer
Loosen the blue screw, and open the drum positioning unit.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Open the DV lock lever, and release the fixing screw. (1 position for each color)
A
2
B
5)
4)
Take out the old developer, and insert the new developer.
b. DV seal
c. DV side seal F
d. DV side seal R
1)
B
A
2)
Attach the new DV seal, DV side seal F (B), DV side seal R (C)
to the reference position.
0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
* If metal part is brought into contact with the magnet roller surface when transporting developer or removing foreign material
from the magnet roller, developer may adhere to the magnet
roller surface. Be careful to avoid this when handling the magnet roller.
0 0.3mm
0 0.5mm
Magnet roller
rear side cored bar
0 0.3mm
0 0.3mm
e. DV initial PWB
f. Density sensor
1)
2)
B
A
g. Toner filter
1)
2)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical parts
Color supply
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Developer (BK)
DV seal (BK)
DV side seal F
(BK)
DV side seal R
(BK)
Toner filter
Developer (C)
Developer (M)
Developer (Y)
DV seal (C)
DV side seal F/R
(C)
Toner filter
Bias terminal/
connector
When
calling
150
K
300
K
100
K
450
K
: Replace
600
K
750
K
200
K
900
K
300
K
1200
K
400
K
Monochrome
supply
1350
K
1500
K
500
K
1650
K
1800
K
600
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [22]-42)
(P/G No.: [22]-26)
(P/G No.: [22]-15)
(P/G No.: [21]-37)
Color supply
12
4,10
12
1,6,7,8
2,9
5,11
3,10
12
MX3500N
Service Manual
1st TC PWB
1TC-CMY
1TC-K
CN1
INT24V2
7
P-GND
6
1TC_YMC
4
1TC_K
3
MC_YMC
2
HV_REM
1
1TC_CL
5
B7P-PH-K-S
CN2
1TC_CL
3
HV_REM
7
MC_YMC
6
1TC_K
5
1TC_YMC
4
P-GND
2
INT24V2
1
B7P-PH-K-S
CN1
6
INT24V2
5
P-GND
/HV_DATA#
4
/HV_CLK#
3
/HV_LD1#
2
1
HV_REM#
MC PWB
B6P-PH-K-S
5 6
1TUD_CL
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
1TUD_K
D-GND
5VLED
1
2
3
2
1TUD_CL
2
3
D-GND
1
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
2
1TUD_K
2
3
D-GND
1
1
5VLED
3
PHNR-3-H + BU03P-TR-P-H
1
2
1TURC
24V3
/1TURC
2
1
PHNR-02-H + BU02P-TR-P-H
14
PCU PWB
1TC_K
CN9
1TNFD
1
2
D-GND
17
WTNM_1
18
WTNM_2
B30B-PHDSS-B
10
BTM_B//
INT24V1
BTM_B/
BTM_A/
INT24V1
BTM_A//
2TC
1
2
3
4
5
6
2-TC
11
13
WTNM
Name
CN1
3
6
4
1
5
2
BTM_B//
INT24V1
BTM_B/
BTM_A/
INT24V1
BTM_A//
B6B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
SUB PWB
12
1TNFD
INT24V2
P-GND
/TC_CLK#
/TC_DATA#
/TC_LD#
/HV_REM#
B40B-PADSS-B
1TUD_K
2
WTNM
BTM
24V3
16
/1TURC
14
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN34
2
4
6
8
10
12
BTM
1TUD_CL
B32B-PHDSS-B
CN9
11
1TUD_CL
13
GND
9
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN9
1TUD_K
12
D-GND
14
10
5VLED
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN12
DVMK
1TC_CMY
Signal name
1TC_CMY
1TC_K
1TNFD
1TUD_CL
1TUD_K
1TURC
2TC
DVMK
CN26
P-GND
20
/HV_DATA#
21
/HV_CLK#
22
/HV_LD1#
23
HV_REM#
24
CLR
2nd TC PWB
1TNFD
D-GND
P
1
2
1
2
SL2PIN
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
R
1
2
R
3
4
5
6
CN1
INT24V2
1
P-GND
2
/TC_CLK#
4
/TC_DATA#
3
/TC_LD#
5
/HV_REM#
6
B6P-PH-K-S
SM18PIN
1TNFD
D-GND
WTNM_1
WTNM_2
P
3
4
5
6
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Name
Primary transfer blade
Primary transfer belt
Primary transfer roller
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Y auxiliary roller
Registration backup roller
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary belt transfer roller
Secondary belt tension roller
Primary transfer CL roller
2. Operational descriptions
A. Outline
In this section, a high voltage is applied to transfer images to the
primary transfer belt and toner images on the primary transfer belt
are transferred to paper by the secondary transfer belt.
The primary transfer roller performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only black contact depending on the operation mode.
When the roller separation clutch (1TURC) is turned ON, the transfer cam rotates and the primary transfer link and the primary transfer arm which is linked with the cam are shifted in the arrow
direction, performing separation of the roller.
All pressure contact
All separation
The arm performs all pressure contact, all separation, and only
black contact.
1TUD_CL
ON
OFF
OFF
1TUD_K
OFF
ON
OFF
The primary transfer and the secondary transfer are driven together
with the black developing motor.
2)
3)
4)
A. Primary transfer
(2)-a
(1)-a
(1)-c (2)-b
(1)-p
(1)-b
(1)-i
(1)-d
(1)
(1)-q
(1)-p
(1)-l
(1)-e
(1)-k
(1)-m
(1)-f
(1)-h
(1)-n
(1)-r
(1)-g
(1)-j
(1)-e
(1)
Unit
Primary
transfer unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
(2)
Others
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
a
b
Parts
Primary transfer belt
Primary transfer CL roller
Primary transfer blade
Packing Mylar
Primary transfer roller
Primary transfer conduction
collar
Primary transfer roller
bearing
Y auxiliary roller
Belt drive gear
Transfer drive roller
Transfer follower roller
Tension roller
Belt CL brush
Registration backup roller
Cleaner seal
Cleaner seal R
Transfer toner reception seal
Waste toner screw
Transfer belt separation CL
detection
Transfer belt separation BK
detection
Maintenance
* Failure to complete this step may damage the primary transfer belt.
B
A
{
{
{
{
5)
(NOTE)
When the transfer belt tension of the primary transfer unit is
released manually, turn on the power again after completion of
the work. (Power OFF-ON) This procedure initializes the transfer roller to return it to the home position.
MX3500N TRANSFER SECTION L 3
5)
2)
3)
4)
Turn the belt twice (in the direction described in step 3).
* There may be some traces of strontium titanate left on the
surface of the belt.
6)
[Bottom surface]
Cleaner unit
side
CL roller side
[Figure 1]
5)
Fold the CL section of the transfer frame and remove the primary transfer belt.
[Figure 3]
-6
5A
34
12
7
* When installing, set the lot number inside the belt to the front
side.
[Precautions for installation]
When replacing the belt, make sure not to scratch or fold it.
Do not touch the surface of the belt with bare hands.
(Applying the start powder)
1)
2)
Apply the side seal powder (stearic acid) uniformly on the surface of the belt (Figure 1).
* Apply the side seal powder uniformly on half of the surfaces
on both sides of the belt.
Cleaner
unit side
CL roller side
* Rub the belt with a cloth bag containing the side seal powder
so that the powder will be applied onto the belt.
3)
Turn the belt a 1/4 turn. (For the direction of the turn, see Figure 3.)
4)
2)
3)
A
3)
4)
R
* After assembling, check to confirm that it is not set at the
pressure release position.
0
0.2mm
0
0.5mm
2)
l. Tension roller
1)
h. Y auxiliary roller
2)
3)
4)
Clean the trasnfer follower roller (A) and the tension roller (B).
1)
2)
3)
4)
A
A
A
B
1
A
B
B
3
A
2
C
C
C
C
2)
3)
4)
2)
3)
2)
3)
4)
2)
3)
4)
A
1
A
A
3
C
2
B
B
B
B
o. Cleaner seal
p. Cleaner seal R
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
Remove the cleaner seal (A) and the cleaner seal R (B).
Remove the screw, the cleaner cover, and the waste toner
shutter.
4)
Remove the gear on the rear side. Remove the resin ring, the
bearing, and the transfer waste toner pipe. Remove the waste
toner screw.
B
A
* When attaching the seals, position the seals within the specified ranges, referring to the reference lines as indicated
below.
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
Reference line
2)
3)
(2)
0.5mm
Others
1)
2)
3)
4)
0 - 0.3mm
Reference line
0 - 0.3mm
B. Secondary transfer
(1)-f
(1)-c
1)
2)
(1)-a
(1)-e
(1)-g
(1)
(1)-d
(1)-b
(1)
Unit
Secondary
transfer unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
Parts
Secondary transfer drive idle
gear
Secondary belt follower roller
Secondary transfer belt
Secondary transfer roller
Secondary trasnfer belt drive
roller
Belt CL brush
Secondary belt tension roller
Maintenance
1
{
3)
4)
2
1
2)
5)
1
2
2)
3)
Remove the bearing on the front side, and remove the secondary transfer roller.
2)
3)
f. Belt CL brush
1)
2)
3)
4)
2)
5 : Jul. 15 2006
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
When
calling
Mechanical
parts
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
{
(P/G No.: [29]-21)
(P/G No.: [29]-6)
{
(P/G No.: [28]-6)
(P/G No.: [25]-56)
18
20
8
7
4
10
23
11
12
19
9
2
14
2
6
2
13
2
22
15
16
9 11
21
14
15
13,17
16
4,6
7 10
17
21
18
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [25]-3)
(P/G No.: [26]-9)
(P/G No.: [27]-27)
(P/G No.: [24]-19)
2,5
MX3500N
Service ManualSENSOR SECTION
[M]
PROCESS CONTROL SENSOR, REGISTRATION
1
5
6
2
3
4
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
DF11-6DP-SP1
CN17
24V3
/PCSS
16
17
15
14
24V3
/PCSS
15
14
2
1
PCU PWB
2
1
/PCSS
24V3
SM2P
REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
24
26
27
23
13
12
11
10
REGS_R_LED#
REGS_R
D-GND
5VNPD
13
12
11
10
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_R
REGS_R_LED#
RESI SENSOR R
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
18
19
21
28
9
8
7
6
5
PCS_LED#
PCS_CL
PCS_K
D-GND
5VNPD
9
8
7
6
5
5
4
3
2
1
REGS_F_LED#
REGS_F
D-GND
22
20
25
4
3
2
1
REGS_F_LED#
REGS_F
D-GND
5VNPD
4
3
2
1
SM18P
B32B-PHDSS-B
Signal name
PCS_CL/K
PCSS
REGS_F/R
Name
Process control sensor
Process control shutter solenoid
Registration sensor
4
3
2
1
REGS_R
PCSS
5VNPD
D-GND
PCS_K
PCS_CL
PCS_LED#
PROCON SENSOR
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
D-GND
REGS_F
REGS_F_LED#
RESI SENSOR F
PCS_CL/K
REGS_F
Function/Operation
Detects the toner patch density.
Opens/closes the shutter of the process control and the registration sensor.
Detects the registration shift.
2. Operational descriptions
A. Process control sensor control
The shutter is provided on the monochrome (PCS_K) and color
(PCS_CL) process control sensor. When the shutter is opened (the
image density is corrected), the toner patch formed on the transfer
belt is scanned by the process control sensor and the information is
passed to the PCU.
When the shutter is closed, the gray resin section on the back of
the shutter is scanned to perform calibration of the sensor itself.
The shutter operation is controlled by the process control shutter
solenoid (PCSS).
a. Registration sensor
2)
(1)-c
(1)-a
B
A
(1)-b
(1)
(1)-a
(1)
Unit
Process
control
sensor unit
a
b
c
Parts
Registration sensor
Process control sensor
Process control shutter
solenoid
Maintenance
{
{
2)
3)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
18
Sensors (Process
control resist
sensors)
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanism
parts
When
calling
: Replace
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
18
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
4
3
1
2
3
2
4
1
2
BU04P-TR-P-H
PHNR-4-H +
TH_UMCS_IN
D-GND
TH_UM_IN
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H +
D-GND
TH_E_IN
BU04P-TR-P-H
PHNR-4-H +
D-GND
WEB-END
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H +
D-GND
TH_US_IN
BU02P-TR-P-H
PHNR-2-H +
2
3
1
2
1
1
2
4
3
2
1
D-GND
WEB_INL
D-GND
TH_US_IN
D-GND
WEB-END
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
D-GND
TH_E_IN
TH_UMCS_IN
D-GND
TH_UM_IN
N-HL(LOW)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(SUB)
L-HL(COM)
L-HL(MAIN)
L-HL(COM)
C-9
C-10
C-1
C-2
B-8
B-7
B-6
B-5
B-4
B-3
B-9
B-2
B-1
A-3
A-6
A-2
A-5
A-1
A-4
A-1
A-4
A-2
A-5
A-3
A-6
B-1
B-8
B-9
B-6
B-7
B-2
B-3
B-4
B-5
C-10
C-9
C-2
C-1
WEB-END
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
22
26
29
17
15
14
WEB-END
D-GND
TH_LM_IN
17
15
14
L-HL(COM)
L-HL(COM)
N-HL(MAIN)
B03P-VL-K
CN2
3
2
1
HL PWB
CN4
/HL_PR
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_LM
D-GND
INT24V1
B6P-PH-K-S
27
TH_E_IN
30
TH_UMCS_IN
25
TH_UM_IN
B30B-PHDSS-B
CN3
2
N-HL(LOW)
3
N-HL(SUB)
1
L-HL(COM)
B03P-VL-R
13
16
12
P
TH_E_IN
TH_UMCS_IN
TH_UM_IN
SM18PIN
13
16
12
R
D-GND
TH_US_IN
24
28
11
10
11
10
D-GND
TH_US_IN
WEB_INL
WEB_INL
CN9
21
2
1
D-GND
WEB_INL
1
2
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
DF11-6DP-SP1
1
2
4
3
5
6
INT24V1
D-GND
HLOUT_LM
HLOUT_US
HLOUT_UM
/HL_PR
B40B-PADSS-B
CN34
1
3
11
9
7
5
PCU PWB
CN13
26
FUMLD
25
/FUMD
27
/FUMCK
28
P-GND
1
INT24V1
8
WEB_M2out
6
WEB_M1out
B28B-PHDSS-B
MX3500N
PHNR-5-H,BU05P-TR-P-H
1
INT24V1
5
2
P-GND
4
3
/FUMCK
3
4
/FUMD
2
5
FUMLD
1
4
3
2
1
5
6
21
22
23
24
25
26
ADMHA//
ADMHA/
ADMHB/
ADMHB//
INT24V1
INT24V1
21
22
23
24
25
26
18
19
WEB_M1out
WEB_M2out
18
19
HL_UM
1
2
WEB_M1out
WEB_M2out
HL_LM
TH _LM
R
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
4
5
6
TH_US
INT24V1
P-GND
/FUMCK
/FUMD
FUMLD
1
2
FUM
WEBM
WEB-INL
4
WEB-END
7
TH_E
HLOUT_US
TH_UM
HLOUT_UM
HL_US
HLOUT_LM
Signal name
TH_UM
TH_LM
HLOUT_UM
HLOUT_LM
HL_UM
HL_US
TH_E
HLOUT_US
HL_LM
FUM
WEB-END
WEB-INL
TH_US
WEBM
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Name
Upper thermistor C (Non-contact)
Lower thermistor
Upper thermostat main
Lower thermostat
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp upper sub
Upper thermistor sub
Upper thermostat sub
Heater lamp lower main
Fusing motor
Web roller end detection
Web roller initial detection
Upper thermistor sub
Fusing web cleaning motor
Name
Upper heat roller
Upper separation pawl
Lower heat roller
Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Web roller
Lower separation pawl
Sub roller
Function/Operation
Controls the surface temperature of the upper heat roller.
Controls the surface temperature of the lower heat roller.
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the upper heat roller]
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the lower heat roller]
Heats the upper heat roller.
Heats the sub roller.
Controls the surface temperature of the sub roller.
Shuts conduction to the heater lamp when the temperature rises abnormally. [For the sub roller]
Heats the lower heat roller.
Drives the fusing unit.
Detects presence of cleaning paper.
Detects installation of the web unit.
Controls the surface temperature of the upper heat roller. (For supplementary use)
Drives the fusing web cleaning paper.
Function/Operation
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
Paper which was not separated naturally from the upper heat roller is mechanically separated.
Heat and presses toner on paper to fuse it on paper.
Transports paper from the heat roller to the paper exit roller 1.
Cleans the upper heat roller.
Mechanically separates paper which was not naturally separated from the lower heat roller.
Helps temperature control of the upper heat roller.
2. Operational descriptions
C. Fusing operation
To drive the fusing unit, the drive power is transmitted from the
drive motor (FUM) through the connection gear to the upper heat
roller gear.
PCU
FUM
The heater lamp is provided in the upper and lower heat rollers and
the sub roller. It heats paper up and down.
This is because it is necessary to heat four layers of toner from
above and below and right and left to fuse it on paper.
The upper and lower heat rollers are of silicon rubber.
This is because of the following reasons:
1)
2)
The soft, flexible rollers press multi-layer toner without deformation to fuse on paper.
3)
2)
Remove and clean paper dust and toner from the upper heat
roller.
(1)
Unit
Fusing unit
(2)
Web unit
A. Fusing section
(2)-a
(2)-b
(2)
(1)
1)
Parts
Sub roller
Heater lamp lower main
Upper heat roller
Fusing gear
Upper heat roller bearing
Lower heat roller
Lower heat roller bearing
Upper separation pawl
Lower separation pawl
Transport roller 9 (Drive)
Discharge brush
Web roller bearing
Pressure bearing
Pressure roller
Upper web roller
Web break rubber
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
a
b
c
d
e
Maintenance
Fusing unit
Open the right door.
(1)-j
2
(1)-n
(2)-b
(1)-o
(1)-q
(1)-p
(1)-r
(1)-k
(1)-j
(1)
(1)-o
2)
(1)-m
(1)-s
(1)-q
Remove the screws. Release the lock lever, and remove the
fusing unit.
(2)-e
(2)-d
(2)
(2)-c
(1)-d
(1)-t
(1)-h
(1)-e
(1)-u
(1)-l
(1)-b
(1)-a
(1)
(1)-i
(1)-f
(1)-c
* When installing, be sure to insert the fusing unit into the rail
on the main unit side securely.
(1)-g
(1)
Unit
Fusing unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Parts
Upper thermostat main
Upper thermostat sub
Upper thermistor side
Upper thermistor sub
Upper thermistor C (Noncontact)
Lower thermostat
Lower thermistor
Heater lamp upper main
Heater lamp upper sub
Sub roller bearing
Maintenance
1)
1)
2)
2)
f.
Lower thermostat
2)
3)
1)
2)
Remove the screw. Pull the fusing lower cover to the front side
and the rear side to remove the lower cover as shown in the
figure below.
3
2)
3)
g. Lower thermistor
i.
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
5)
2)
1
3)
6)
Remove the screws, and remove the lamp holder. Remove the
heater lamp upper sub.
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.
2
R
4)
Remove the lamp holder, and remove the heater lamp upper
main.
* Since the connector shape on the front side differ from that
on the rear side, be careful when installing.
Install so that the red harness is on the rear side.
F
1
k. Sub roller
n. Fusing gear
1)
2)
1)
3)
2)
4)
3)
5)
4)
6)
Remove the screws, and remove the sub roller bearing, and
the sub roller.
5)
6)
2)
3)
4)
1
1
7)
8)
1
2
5)
* Hold the gear and the bearing section. Never touch the heat
roller surface.
6)
R
F
9)
Remove the roller stopper (A). Remove the fusing gear (C),
and the upper heat roller bearing (D) from the upper heat roller
(B).
2)
3)
Remove the screw. Remove the upper separation pawl mounting plate, and remove the upper separation pawl.
A
D
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
Open the fusing rear lower PG. Remove the lower heat roller
unit.
* Hold the bearing section, and never touch the heat roller
surface.
1)
2)
3)
4)
9)
Remove the roller stopper (A). Remove the upper heat roller
bearing (C) from the upper heat roller (B).
5)
A
C
C
A
(2)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing. Remove the
screw, and remove the fusing rear roller earth plate. Remove
the E-ring, and remove the bearing. Remove the transport
roller 9 (drive).
Web roller
Remove the fusing unit.
Remove the screw, and remove the web unit.
* When installing, engage the web unit with the pawl (A) of the
fusing paper entry cover.
2)
1)
2)
3)
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the web roller bearing (A).
Remove the winding side (B) of the web roller. Remove the
web brake collar (C).
4)
F
2
R
A
1
B
0 + 0.5mm
0 + 0.5mm
2mm + 1mm
4)
5)
Remove the web spring and the pressure roller bearing (A).
Remove the pressure roller (B). Remove the web tension shaft
(C).
Remove the upper web roller (A). Remove the web brake collar (B), and the web break rubber (C) from the upper web
roller.
C
A
B
* When installing, place the upper web roller (C) between the
pressure roller (A) and the web shaft (B) as shown below.
A
A
4. Maintenance
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Mechanical
parts
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement
parts are
described.)
(P/G No.: [31]-42)
(P/G No.: [32]-13)
(P/G No.: [31]-40)
(P/G No.: [31]-41)
(P/G No.: [32]-11)
Specified position
5
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Upper
Supplied
Web roller by Web
unit
Pressure
roller
Web roller
bearings
Pressure
roller
bearing
Web
break
rubber
Web unit
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Heat rollers
Grease (JFE552)
(UKOG0235FCZZ)
6 : Oct. 15 2006
19
22
21
17
20
22
18
11
20
23
7
1
3
4
24
5
13
6
7
10
12
5
Apply 0.2g of grease to the
both ends (bearing sections)
of the upper and the
lower heat rollers evenly.
25
25
17
23
18
15
8
11
15
1
13
10
15
12
MX3500N
Service Manual
DF11-4DP-SP1
3
2
1
4
5
7
3
1
6
8
2
4
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
POFM_V
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
P-GND
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
/POFM_CNT
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
1
POFM_V
4
2
/POFM_CNT
3
3
P-GND
2
4
POFM_LD1
1
PHNR-4-H,BU04P-TR-P-H
4
1
POFM_V
3
2
/POFM_CNT
3
2
P-GND
1
4
POFM_LD2
R
5
1
2
3
4
TFD2
HPOS
SM6P
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
P
5
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
1
2
3
4
5
24
7
9
11
13
24V2
/OSM_XB
/OSM_XA
/OSM_B
/OSM_A
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
13
10
TFD2
5VNPD
POD2
D-GND
1
2
3
14
POD2
14
12
POD2
5VNPD
HOPS
D-GND
1
2
3
15
HOPS
15
16
HOPS
5VNPD
POD1
D-GND
1
2
3
16
17
12
POD1
D-GND
5VNPD
16
17
12
6
5
4
3
2
1
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
D-GND
6
5
4
3
2
1
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
5VNPD
POMB/
INT24V1
POMA/
POMB//
INT24V1
POMA//
DF11-6DP-SP1
DF11-6DP-SP1
R
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
SM-12p
POMB/
INT24V1
POMA/
POMB//
INT24V1
POMA//
FUMA/
FUMB/
INT24V1
INT24V1
FUMA//
FUMB//
P
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
POD1
No.
1
CN13
15
17
19
21
22
TFD2
POFM_F
Signal name
HPOS
OSM
POD1
POD2
POFM_F
POFM_R
POM
TFD2
S
6
7
11
8
9
13
6
5
4
3
2
1
POD2
DF1B-26p
POFM_V
/POFM_CNT
P-GND
POFM_LD1
POFM_LD2
3
2
1
POFM_R
POM
P
6
7
11
8
9
5VNPD
TFD2
D-GND
OSM
DF11-8DP-SP2
POD1
14
2
D-GND
18
5VNPD
B32B-PHDSS-B
PCU PWB
CN6
4
POMB/
6
INT24V1
1
POMA/
3
POMB//
5
INT24V1
2
POMA//
7
FUMA/
FUMB/
10
12
INT24V1
11
INT24V1
8
FUMA//
9
FUMB//
B12B-PH-K-S
DRIVER
MAIN
PWB
Name
Shifter home position detection
Shifter motor
Fusing after detection
Paper exit detection
Paper exit cooling fan motor (F side)
Paper exit cooling fan motor (R side)
Paper exit drive motor
Paper exit full detection
Function/Operation
Detects the shifter home position.
Offsets the paper.
After fusing, paper exit from fusing section is detected.
Detects the exit paper.
Cools the fusing unit.
Cools the fusing unit.
Drives the paper exit roller.
Detects face-down paper exit tray full.
Name
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Function/Operation
Paper is discharged. / Paper is transported to the right paper exit tray. / Paper is transported to the
duplex (ADU) section.
2. Operational descriptions
Paper transported from the fusing section is passed to the transport roller 13 which is driven by the paper exit drive motor and to
the paper exit roller 1, then discharged to the inner tray.
1)
(1)-g
(1)-e
(1)-k
(1)
(1)-f
(1)-l
(1)-e
d. After-fusing sensor
1)
2)
(1)-j
(1)-i
(1)-m
(1)-c
(1)-m
(1)-h
A
(1)
Unit
Paper exit
unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
Parts
Exit paper full detection sensor
Shifter home position detection
sensor
Paper exit detection sensor
After-fusing sensor
Paper exit cooling fan motor
Discharge brush
Shifter motor
Fusing web cleaning motor
Paper exit roller 1 (Drive)
Fusing drive motor
Paper exit drive motor
ADU motor upper
Paper exit filter
Maintenance
2)
Remove the screw, the upper cabinet right, and the right connecting cabinet.
2)
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the paper exit unit, and disconnect the connector.
2
1
3)
g. Shifter motor
1)
2)
Remove the harness from the saddle (A) and the saddle (B).
Remove the screw, and remove the earth terminal. Disconnect
the connectors and remove the snap band.
f. Discharge brush
1)
2)
3)
Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire, the shifter
earth plate. Remove the screw, and remove the earth wire, the
discharge earth plate. Remove the discharge brush.
2
3)
* When installing, place the shifter earth plate is over the discharge earth plate.
* Discharge brush attachment reference
When attaching the discharge brush, attach it along the
shifter PG.
* When installing, place the paper exit roller SP pin in the gear
slit.
Engage the bar ring of the shifter motor unit with the gear.
4)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the parts. Remove the paper exit full detection sensor. Slide the bearing, and remove the shifter unit.
1)
2)
3
4
5
5)
Remove the parts, and remove the paper exit roller 1 (drive).
2)
Open the filter holding sheet, and remove the paper exit filter.
1
1
2
2
4. Maintenance
A. Paper exit section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
1
2
3
Transport rollers
Discharge brush
Paper exit filter
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
: Replace
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
1
2
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
MX3500N
4) Remove Manual
the connectors.
Service
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-a
(1)-h
(1)-a
(1)-c
(1)-b
(1)-e
(1)-i
(1)-g
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-g
(1)
Unit
Main drive unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
Parts
Toner motor
Developer drive motor (K)
Developing drive motor (CL)
Drum motor (K)
Drum motor (CL)
Resist motor
Phase detection PWB
Separation clutch
Belt motor
5)
2)
3)
a. Toner motor
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the toner
motor.
BK
KM
KM
f. Resist motor
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
Remove the screw, and disconnect the harness holder connector. Remove the screws, and remove the developer drive
motor (K).
4)
Remove the connctor and the screws, then remove the resist
motor.
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the developer drive motor (CL).
4)
h. Separation clutch
1)
d. Drum motor (K)
e. Drum motor (CL)
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the drum
motor (K) and the drum motor (CL).
2)
3)
4)
Remove the gear, and remove the separation clutch. Then disconnect the connector.
* When installing, check to insure that the clutch rotation-stop
projection is engaged with the sub frame projection.
i. Belt motor
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the belt
motor.
4)
Remove the connector and the screws. Release the pawl, then
remove the filter box unit.
5)
Remove the connector and remove the paper feed drive unit.
(1)-d
(1)-f
(1)-b
(1)-c
(1)-e
a. Transport motor
(1)-c
(1)
Unit
Paper feed drive unit
a
b
c
d
e
f
Parts
Transport motor
Paper feed motor
Paper tray lift-up motor
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 1)
Paper feed clutch (Paper feed tray 2)
Tray vertical transport clutch
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the transport motor.
2)
3)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
feed motor.
5)
6)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the paper
tray lift-up motor unit.
6)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
3)
4)
4)
5)
6)
7)
5)
6)
2. Maintenance
A. Drive Section
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Gears (Grease)
Shaft earth
sections
(Conduction
grease)
Belts
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
750
K
: Replace
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
Mechanical
parts
1800
K
Remark/Refer to the
Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the replacement
parts are described.)
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
When checking, apply
to the necessary
positions (specified
positions).
1
(FLOIL G313S)
1
(HANARL FL955R)
MX3500N
(1)
ControlManual
Box
Service
a. BOOT ROM PWB
A. PWB
1)
2)
Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
(3)-b
(3)-a
(3)-c
(3)-d
(3)-f
(3)-e
(3)-j
(3)-h
(3)-i
(2)-a
(2)-c
* When placing the unit with the HDD upside, remove the
DIMM memory or insert a spacer in order to protect the
DIMM memory from pressure.
(3)-g
(1)-g
(1)-e
(1)-f
(1)-d
(1)-h
DIMM3
(1)-c
DIMM2
(1)-a
(1)-b
DIMM4
DIMM1
(1)
Unit
Control Box
(2)
(3)
Others
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
a
b
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
Parts
BOOT ROM PWB
PROGRAM ROM PWB
MFP cht PWB
HDD
PCU Flash ROM PWB
PCU PWB
SCAN IN PWB
Mother PWB
AC Power PWB
DC Power PWB
SCN Flash ROM PWB
DSPF memory PWB
Scanner Control PWB
HL PWB
Driver Sub PWB
Secondary transfer PWB
Driver Main PWB
Primary transfer PWB
High Voltage MC PWB
HVR PWB
DIMM1
DIMM2
DIMM3
DIMM4
MX-3500N/4500N
512MB
512MB
256MB
a)
1)
2)
3)
Remove the screws and then remove the MFP cnt PWB.
b)
d. HDD
1)
2)
Remove the screws and pull out the MFP cnt PWB unit.
3)
Remove the connector and screws then remove the HDD unit.
4)
3)
Release the lock, and remove the BOOT ROM PWB (A) and
the PROGRAM ROM PWB (B).
B
2
g. SCAN IN PWB
1)
1)
2)
2)
2)
3)
2
2
f. PCU PWB
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the PCU
PWB.
(2)
a. AC Power PWB
1)
2)
3)
5)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the filter
box unit.
6)
b. DC Power PWB
1)
2)
3)
(3)
Others
4)
1)
2)
Release the lock, and remove the SCN Flash ROM PWB.
2
1
d. HL PWB
1)
1)
2)
2)
Remove the snap band. Remove the screws, and pull out the
scanner control PWB unit. Then remove the connector.
3)
2)
4)
Remove the parts. Remove the screws, and remove the scanner control PWB.
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the secondary transfer PWB.
2)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the driver
main PWB.
4)
5)
2)
3)
Remove the screws and the connector, and remove the primary transfer PWB.
j. HVR PWB
1)
2)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the HVR
PWB.
i. MC PWB
1)
2)
3)
KM
KM
MX3500N
[R]
FAN AND FILTER SECTION
Service Manual
B. Fans
A. Filters
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
(1)
(1)
Parts
Ozone filter PA
Maintenance
Remove the ozone filter cover, then remove the ozone filter
PA.
Parts
Controller cooling fan motor
HDD cooling fan motor
Ozone fan motor
Power supply cooling fan motor
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1)
1)
2)
3
1
4)
1)
2)
(4)
3)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the HDD
cooling fan motor.
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the ozone
fan motor from the filter box unit.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Remove the connector and the screws, and remove the power
supply cooling fan.
2)
3)
2. Maintenance
A. Filters
: Check (Clean, replace, or adjust according to necessity.) {: Clean
No.
Part name
Monochrome
supply/
Mechanical
parts
Ozone filter PA
Mechanical parts
When
calling
150
K
300
K
450
K
600
K
: Replace
750
K
900
K
1050
K
1200
K
1350
K
1500
K
1650
K
1800
K
Remark/Refer to
the Parts Guide.
Block/Item No.
(Only the
replacement parts
are described.)
(P/G No.: [47]-40)
MX3500N
3)
Remove Manual
the screws, then remove the main switch unit.
Service
4)
(4)
Remove the connector and the pawl, then remove the main
switch.
* Take care of connecting the connectors when installing.
(2)
(1)
(3)
3
2
2
R
1
Parts
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Main Switch
Dehumidifier Heater Switch
Front Door Open/Close Switch
Right Door Open/Close Switch
2)
(4)
1)
1)
2)
2)
3)
4)
5)
Remove the connector and the screws, then remove the right
door open/close switch cover unit.
6)
2
* When installing, connect the connector as shown in the figure.
2)
Remove the screws and then remove the front door open/
close switch unit.
Remove the connector and the screws and then remove the
front door open/close switch.
2
3
Memo
Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.
Example:
<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>
Lead-Free
5mm
Solder composition
code (Refer to the
table at the right.)
Solder composition
Sn-Ag-Cu
Sn-Ag-Bi
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi
Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
Bi-Sn-Ag-P
Bi-Sn-Ag
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German)
Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.
Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Server 2003 and
Internet Explorer are registered trademarks or trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
Macintosh, Mac OS, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LaserWriter, and Safari are registered
trademarks or trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Acrobat Reader Copyright 1987- 2002 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights
reserved. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, and the Acrobat logo are trademarks of
Adobe Systems Incorporated.
PCL is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.
Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2007 February Printed in Japan